HP 8753ET/ES

Service Guide
Agilent Technologies
8753ET/ES Network Analyzers
Agilent Part Number 08753-90484
Printed in USA
June 2002
Supersedes February 2001
© Copyright 1999 − 2002 Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Notice
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material,
including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or
for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or
use of this material.
Warranty Information
THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED "AS IS," AND IS
SUBJECT TO BEING CHANGED, WITHOUT NOTICE, IN FUTURE EDITIONS.
FURTHER, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
AGILENT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH
REGARD TO THIS MANUAL AND ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. AGILENT
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING, USE, OR PERFORMANCE
OF THIS DOCUMENT OR ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN. SHOULD
AGILENT AND THE USER HAVE A SEPARATE WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH
WARRANTY TERMS COVERING THE MATERIAL IN THIS DOCUMENT THAT
CONFLICT WITH THESE TERMS, THE WARRANTY TERMS IN THE SEPARATE
AGREEMENT WILL CONTROL.
Certification
Agilent Technologies Company certifies that this product met its published specifications
at the time of shipment from the factory. Agilent Technologies further certifies that its
calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of
Standards and Technology, to the extent allowed by the Institute’s calibration facility, and
to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members.
Regulatory Information
The regulatory information is located in Chapter 15 , “Safety and Regulatory Information.”
ii
Assistance
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available
for Agilent Technologies products. For any assistance, contact your nearest Agilent
Technologies sales or service office. See Table 15-1 on page 15 -3 for the nearest office.
Safety Notes
The following safety notes are used throughout this manual. Familiarize yourself with
each of the notes and its meaning before operating this instrument. All pertinent safety
notes for using this product are located in Chapter 15 , “Safety and Regulatory
Information.”
WARNING
Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if
not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss
of life. Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
CAUTION
Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not
correctly performed or adhered to, would result in damage to or destruction of
the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
How to Use This Guide
This guide uses the following conventions:
Front Panel Key
This represents a key physically located on the
instrument.
SOFTKEY
This represents a “softkey”, a key whose label is
determined by the instrument firmware.
Computer Font
This represents text displayed on the instrument’s screen,
text on a computer display, or a programming command.
iii
Documentation Map
The Installation and Quick Start Guide provides procedures for
installing, configuring, and verifying the operation of the analyzer. It
also will help you familiarize yourself with the basic operation of the
analyzer.
The User’s Guide shows how to make measurements, explains
commonly-used features, and tells you how to get the most
performance from your analyzer.
The Reference Guide provides reference information, such as
specifications, menu maps, and key definitions.
The Programmer’s Guide provides general GPIB programming
information, a command reference, and example programs. The
Programmer’s Guide contains a CD-ROM with example programs.
The CD-ROM provides the Installation and Quick Start Guide, the
User’s Guide, the Reference Guide, and the Programmer’s Guide in
PDF format for viewing or printing from a PC.
The Service Guide provides information on calibrating,
troubleshooting, and servicing your analyzer. The Service Guide is not
part of a standard shipment and is available only as Option 0BW. A
CD-ROM with the Service Guide in PDF format is included for
viewing or printing from a PC.
iv
Contents
1. Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Required Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Principles of Microwave Connector Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Analyzer Options Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Option 1D5, High Stability Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Option 002, Harmonic Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Option 004, Step Attenuator (8753ET only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Option 006, 6 GHz Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Option 010, Time Domain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Option 011, Receiver Configuration (8753ES only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Option 014, Configurable Test Set (8753ES only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Option 075, 75 Ohm System Impedance (8753ES only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Option 1CM, Rack Mount Flange Kit without Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Option 1CP, Rack Mount Flange Kit with Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Service and Support Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Option W01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Option W31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Option W50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Option W51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Option W32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Option W52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Option W34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Option W54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
2. System Verification and Performance Tests
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Instrument Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
System Verification Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Certificate of Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
System Verification Cycle and Kit Recertification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
8753ES System Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
8753ES Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
1. Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
2. External Source Mode Frequency Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
3. Test Port Output Power Level Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
4. Test Port Output Power Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
5. Minimum R Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
6. Test Port Input Noise Floor Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
7. Test Port Input Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
8. Test Port Crosstalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
9. Uncorrected Port Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
10. System Trace Noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
11. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
12. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
13. Test Port Receiver Phase Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75
14. Test Port Output/Input Harmonics (Analyzers with Option 002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-78
Contents-v
Contents
15. Harmonic Measurement Accuracy (Analyzers with Option 002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
System Verification Cycle and Kit Re-certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
8753ET System Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
8753ET Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
1. Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
2. External Source Mode Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
3. Reflection Test Port Output Power Level Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
4. Reflection Test Port Output Power Linearity (Analyzers without Option 004) . . . . . 2-102
5. Reflection Test Port Output Power Linearity (Analyzers with Option 004) . . . . . . . . 2-108
6. Minimum R Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
7. Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
8. Transmission Test Port Input Frequency Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
9. Test Port Crosstalk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
10. Uncorrected Port Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131
11. System Trace Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
3. Adjustments and Correction Constants
Post-Repair Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
A9 Switch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Source Pretune Default Correction Constants (Test 45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Required Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
IF Amplifier Correction Constants (Test 51) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Required Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Required Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Determine the Insertion Loss of the Cable at 1 GHz (8753ES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Determine the Insertion Loss of the Cable at 1 GHz (8753ET). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Sampler Correction Constants Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Required Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Spur Search Procedure with a Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Spurs Search Procedure without a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Serial Number Correction Constants (Test 55) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Option Numbers Correction Constants (Test 56) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Initialize EEPROMs (Test 58). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Required Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Required Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Loading Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Contents-vi
Contents
Loading Firmware into an Existing CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Loading Firmware into a New CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Required Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Frequency Accuracy Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Required Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
High/Low Band Transition Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
Required Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
Required Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
How to Load Sequences from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
How to Set Up the Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
How to Set Up the High/Low Band Transition Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56
How to Set Up the Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment . . . . . .3-56
Sequence Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56
4. Start Troubleshooting Here
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Having Your Analyzer Serviced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Step 1. Initial Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Initiate the Analyzer Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Step 2. Operator’s Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Required Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Step 3. GPIB Systems Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
If Using a Plotter or Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
If Using an External Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Check the Rear Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Check the A8 Post Regulator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Digital Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Observe the Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Verify Internal Tests Passed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Phase Lock Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Check Source Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
No Oscilloscope or Power Meter? Try the ABUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Receiver (8753ES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Observe the A and B Input Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Receiver Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Faulty Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Receiver (8753ET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Contents-vii
Contents
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Observe the A and B Input Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Receiver Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Faulty Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Accessories Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Troubleshooting 8753ES Option 014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Symptom Example Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
5. Power Supply Troubleshooting
Power Supply Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Start Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Check the Green LED and Red LED on A15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Check the Green LEDs on A8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Measure the Post Regulator Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
If the Green LED of the A15 Is Not ON Steadily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Check the Line Voltage, Selector Switch, and Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
If the Red LED of the A15 Is ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Check the A8 Post Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Verify the A15 Preregulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Check for a Faulty Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Check the Operating Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Inspect the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
If the Green LEDs of the A8 Are Not All ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Remove A8, Maintain A15W1 Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Remove the Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Inspect the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Check the Fuses and Isolate A8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Fan Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Fan Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Check the Fan Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Short A8TP3 to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Intermittent Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
6. Digital Control Troubleshooting
Digital Control Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Control Group Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Troubleshooting (A9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-viii
. . . . 6-2
. . . . 6-3
. . . . 6-4
. . . . 6-5
Contents
A9 CC Switch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Checking A9 CPU Red LED Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Display Troubleshooting (A2, A18, A19, A27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Evaluating Your Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Troubleshooting a White Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Troubleshooting a Black Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Troubleshooting a Display with Color Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Front Panel Troubleshooting (A1, A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Check Front Panel LEDs After Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Identify the Stuck Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Inspect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Test Using a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Run the Internal Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
If the Fault Is Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Repeat Test Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
GPIB Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
7. Source Troubleshooting
Source Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Before You Start Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
1. Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
2. RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
3. Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Phase Lock Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Phase Lock Loop Error Message Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
A4 Sampler/Mixer Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
A3 Source and A11 Phase Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
A12 Reference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
A13/A14 Fractional-N Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
A7 Pulse Generator Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
A11 Phase Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Troubleshooting Source Problems with the Analog Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Broadband Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31
8. Receiver Troubleshooting
Receiver Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Receiver Failure Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Troubleshooting When All Inputs Look Bad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Run Internal Tests 18 and 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Check 2nd LO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Check the 4 MHz REF Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Check A10 by Substitution or Signal Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Contents-ix
Contents
Check the 4 kHz Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Check the Trace with the Sampler Correction Constants Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Check 1st LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
9. Accessories Troubleshooting
Accessories Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Inspect the Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Inspect the Test Port Connectors and Calibration Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Inspect the Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cable Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Verify Shorts and Opens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
10. Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Internal Diagnostics Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Service Feature Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Firmware Revision Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
GPIB Service Mnemonic Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Invoking Tests Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Analog Bus Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
11. Error Terms
Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose . .
Error Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Term Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Term Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.......
.......
.......
.......
.......
......
......
......
......
......
.......
.......
.......
.......
.......
......
......
......
......
......
. . . 11-2
. . . 11-3
. . . 11-4
. . . 11-4
. . . 11-5
12. Theory of Operation
How the Analyzer Works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
The Built-In Synthesized Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
The Built-In Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
The Receiver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
The Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Required Peripheral Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
A Close Look at the Analyzer’s Functional Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Power Supply Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
A15 Preregulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
A8 Post Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Digital Control Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
A1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
A2 Front Panel Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
A9 CPU/A10 Digital IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
A18 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
A19 GSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Contents-x
Contents
A27 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-13
A16 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-13
Source Theory Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-14
A14/A13 Fractional-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-14
A12 Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-14
A7 Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-14
A11 Phase Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-14
A3 Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-15
Source Super Low Band Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-15
Source Low Band Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-15
Source High Band Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-17
Source Operation in other Modes and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-19
Signal Separation (8753ET). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-23
The A21 Dual Directional Coupler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-23
Signal Separation (8753ES). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-25
The Built-In Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-25
Receiver Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-27
A4/A5/A6 Sampler/Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29
A10 Digital IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-30
13. Replaceable Parts
Replacing an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Ordering Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Replaceable Part Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-7
8753ET: Major Assemblies, Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
8753ES: Major Assemblies, Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-12
8753ET: Major Assemblies, Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14
8753ES: Major Assemblies, Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-15
8753ES Option 014: Major Assemblies and Cables, Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-16
8753ET: Cables, Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-18
8753ES: Cables, Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-20
8753ES Option 014: Cables, Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-22
8753ET: Cables, Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-24
8753ES: Cables, Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-26
8753ET: Cables, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-28
8753ES: Cables, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-30
8753ET/ES: Cables, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-32
8753ET/ES: Cables, Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-34
8753ET/ES: Front Panel Assembly, Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-36
8753ET/ES: Front Panel Assembly, Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-38
8753ET: Rear Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-40
8753ES: Rear Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-42
8753ET/ES: Rear Panel Assembly, Option 1D5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-44
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-46
8753ET: Hardware, Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-48
8753ES: Hardware, Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-49
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-50
8753ET: Hardware, Test Set Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-51
Contents-xi
Contents
8753ES: Hardware, Test Set Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-52
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Disk Drive Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Memory Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-54
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Preregulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-55
8753ET/ES: Chassis Parts, Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-56
8753ET/ES: Chassis Parts, Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-58
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59
14. Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Replacing an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Procedures described in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Line Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Removing the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Removing the side covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Removing the bottom cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Front Panel Keyboard and Interface Assemblies (A1, A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Display, Display Lamp and Inverter Assemblies (A18, A27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Rear Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly (A16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
A3 Source Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
A8, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14 Card Cage Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
A9 CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
A9BT1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
A15 Preregulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
A17 Motherboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30
A19 Graphics Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
A20 Disk Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
A20 Disk Drive Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
Test the disk-eject function, and adjust if required.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-39
Reinstall the front panel and covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-39
A21, A22 Test Port Couplers (8753ES Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-40
A21 Dual Directional Coupler (8753ET Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42
A23 LED Board (8753ES Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-44
A24 Transfer Switch (8753ES Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46
A25 Test Set Interface (8753ES Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48
A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option 1D5) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-50
B1 Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-52
Post-Repair Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-53
15. Safety and Regulatory Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Shipment for Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Contents-xii
Contents
Safety Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-4
Instrument Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5
Lithium Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6
Safety Earth Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6
Before Applying Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-7
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Compliance with German FTZ Emissions Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Compliance with German Noise Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Contents-xiii
Contents
Contents-xiv
1 Service Equipment and Analyzer
Options
1-1
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Required Tools and Equipment
Required Tools and Equipment
The following is a list of the tools required to service your analyzer:
• T-8, T-10, T-15, T-20, and T-25 TORX screwdrivers
• Flat-blade screwdrivers — small, medium, and large
• 5/16-inch open-end wrench (for SMA nuts)
• 2-mm extended bit Allen wrench
• 3/16, 5/16, and 9/16-inch hex nut drivers
• 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
• 2.5-mm hex-key driver
• Non-conductive and non-ferrous adjustment tool
• Needle-nose pliers
• Tweezers
• Antistatic work mat with wrist-strap
• #0 Phillips Screwdriver
1-2
Chapter 1
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Required Tools and Equipment
Table 1-1
Agilent 8753ET Service Test Equipment
Required Equipment
Critical Specifications
HP/Agilent
Recommended Model
Usea
Frequency Counter
Frequency: 300 kHz–3 GHz
(30 kHz–6 GHz for Option 006)
5350B/51B/52B
P
Synthesized Sweeper
Maximum spurious input: <−30 dB
Residual FM: <20 kHz
83620A Option 001or
83712B Option 1E1
P
Spectrum Analyzer
Freq. Accuracy ±7 Hz
8563E
A
Oscilloscope
Bandwidth: 100 MHz
Accuracy: 10%
any
T
Digital Voltmeter
Resolution: 10 mV
any
T
Tool Kit
No substitute
08753-60023
T
436A/437B/438A or
E4418A/E4419A
A, P, T
Power Meter (GPIB)
Power Sensor
Frequency: 300 kHz–3 GHz
8482A
A, P, T
Power Sensor
(for Option 006)
Frequency: 3 GHz–6 GHz
8481A
A, P, T
Photometer
Tektronix J16
A
Photometer Probe
Tektronix J6503
A
Light Occluder
Tektronix 016-0305-00
A
Printer
HP ThinkJet, DeskJet,
LaserJet
P
Floppy Disk
one 3.5-inch formatted 1.44 MB
any
A
Calibration Kit Type-N,
50Ω
No substitute
85032B
A, P
Calibration Kit 7 mm, 50Ω
No substitute
85031B
P
Verification Kit 7 mm
No substitute
85029B
P
Low Pass Filter
>50 dB @ 2.96 Hz and passband
that includes 800 MHz
9135-0198
A
Fixed Attenuator (2)
Type-N 20 dB
8491A Opt. 020
P, T
Adapters (2)
APC-7 to Type-N (m)
11525A
P, A
Adapter
Type-N (m) to Type-N (m)
1250-1475
P
Adapter
BNC to Alligator Clip
8120-1292
A
Adapter
APC-3.5 (m) to Type-N (f)
1250-1750
A, P
Adapter
APC-3.5 (f) to Type-N (f)
1250-1745
A, P
Chapter 1
1-3
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Required Tools and Equipment
Table 1-1
Agilent 8753ET Service Test Equipment
Required Equipment
Critical Specifications
HP/Agilent
Recommended Model
Usea
Adapter
BNC (m) to Type-N (f)
1250-0077
P
Adapter
Type-N (f) to Type-N (f)
1250-0777
P
RF Cable Set
APC-7, 50 Ω
11857D
P, A
RF Cable
24-inch, Type-N, 50 Ω
8120-4781
A, P
RF Cable Set
Type-N, 50 Ω
11851B
A
10833A
A, P
GPIB Cable
Coax Cable
BNC (m) to BNC (m), 50Ω
10503A
A
Coax Cable
BNC
8120-1840
A
a. P = Performance Tests, A = Adjustments, T = Troubleshooting
1-4
Chapter 1
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Required Tools and Equipment
Table 1-2
Agilent 8753ES Service Test Equipment
Required Equipment
Critical Specifications
HP/Agilent
Recommended Model
Usea
Frequency Counter
Frequency: 300 kHz–3 GHz (6 GHz
for Option 006)
5350B/51B/52B
P
Spectrum Analyzer
Freq. Accuracy ±7 Hz
8563E
A
Synthesized Sweeper
Maximum spurious input: <−30 dB
Residual FM: <20 kHz
83620A Option 001 or
83712B Option 1E1
P
Oscilloscope
Bandwidth: 100 MHz
Accuracy: 10%
any
T
Digital Voltmeter
Resolution: 10 mV
any
T
Tool Kit
No substitute
08753-60023
T
436A/437B/438A or
E4418A/E4419A
A, P, T
Power Meter (GPIB)
Power Sensor
Frequency: 300 kHz–3 GHz, 50Ω
8482A
A, P, T
Power Sensor
(for Option 006)
Frequency: 3 GHz–6 GHz
8481A
A, P, T
Power Sensor
(for Option 075)
Frequency: 300 kHz–3 GHz, 75Ω
8483A Opt. H03
A, P
Photometer
Tektronix J16
A
Photometer Probe
Tektronix J6503
A
Light Occluder
Tektronix 016-0305-00
A
Printer
HP ThinkJet, DeskJet,
LaserJet
P
Floppy Disk
one 3.5-inch formatted 1.44 MB
any
A
Calibration Kit 7 mm, 50Ω
No substitute
85031B
P
Calibration Kit Type-N,
75Ω (for Option 075)
No substitute
85036B
P
Verification Kit 7 mm
No substitute
85029B
P
Low Pass Filter
>50 dB @ 2.96 Hz and passband
that includes 800 MHz
9135-0198
A
Step Attenuator
No substitute
8496A Opt. 003, H18
P
Fixed Attenuator (2)
Return loss: ≥32 dB APC-7 20 dB
8492A Opt. 020
P, T
Fixed Attenuator (2)
Type-N 20 dB
8491A Opt. 020
P, T
Power Splitter, 2-way
Type-N
11667A, Opt. 001
P
Minimum Loss Pad (2)
(for ES Option 075)
Type-N, 50Ω to 75Ω
11852B
A, P, T
Adapter
APC-7 to Type-N (f)
11524A
A, P
Chapter 1
1-5
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Required Tools and Equipment
Table 1-2
Agilent 8753ES Service Test Equipment
Required Equipment
Critical Specifications
HP/Agilent
Recommended Model
Usea
Adapters (2)
APC-7 to Type-N (m)
11525A
P
Adapter
APC-7 to 3.5 mm (m)
1250-1746
A, P
Adapter
APC-7 to 3.5 mm (f)
1250-1747
A, P
Adapter
BNC to Alligator Clip
8120-1292
A
Adapter
APC-3.5 (m) to Type-N (f)
1250-1750
A, P
Adapter
APC-3.5 (f) to Type-N (f)
1250-1745
A, P
Adapter
BNC (m) to Type-N (f)
1250-1477
P
Adapter
Type-N (f) to Type-N (f)
1250-0777
P
Adapter
Type-N (f) to Type-N (f), 75Ω
1250-1529
P
RF Cable Set
APC-7, 50 Ω
11857D
A, P
RF Cable (2)
24-inch, APC-7, 50 Ω (2)
8120-4779
A, P
RF Cable (for Option 075)
24-inch, Type-N, 75Ω
8120-2408
A, P
RF Cable
24-inch, Type-N, 50 Ω
8120-4781
A, P
10833A
A, P
GPIB Cable
Coax Cable
BNC (m) to BNC (m), 50Ω
10503A
A
Coax Cable
BNC
8120-1840
A, P
a. P = Performance Tests, A = Adjustments, T = Troubleshooting
1-6
Chapter 1
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Principles of Microwave Connector Care
Principles of Microwave Connector Care
Proper connector care and connection techniques are critical for accurate, repeatable
measurements.
Refer to the calibration kit documentation for connector care information. Prior to making
connections to the network analyzer, carefully review the information about inspecting,
cleaning, and gaging connectors.
Having good connector care and connection techniques extends the life of these devices. In
addition, you obtain the most accurate measurements.
For additional connector care instruction, contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or
service office about course numbers HP/Agilent 85050A+24A and 85050A+24D.
See the following table for quick reference tips about connector care.
Table 1-3
Connector Care Quick Reference
Handling and Storage
Do
Keep connectors clean
Do Not
Extend sleeve or connector nut
Touch mating-plane surfaces
Set connectors contact — end down
Use plastic end-caps during storage
Visual Inspection
Do
Inspect all connectors carefully
Do Not
Use a damaged connector — ever
Look for metal particles, scratches,
and dents
Connector Cleaning
Do
Try compressed air first
Do Not
Use isopropyl alcohol
Use any abrasives
Get liquid into plastic support beads
Clean connector threads
Gaging Connectors
Do
Clean and zero the gage before use
Do Not
Use an out-of-spec connector
Use the correct gage type
Use correct end of calibration block
Gage all connectors before first use
Making Connections
Do
Chapter 1
Align connectors carefully
Do Not
Apply bending force to connection
Make preliminary connection lightly
Over tighten preliminary connection
Turn only the connector nut
Twist or screw any connection
Use a torque wrench for final
connect
Tighten past torque wrench “break”
point
1-7
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Analyzer Options Available
Analyzer Options Available
Option 1D5, High Stability Frequency Reference
This option offers ±0.05 ppm temperature stability from 0 to 60 °C (referenced to 25 °C).
Option 002, Harmonic Mode
This option provides measurement of second or third harmonics of the test device’s
fundamental output signal. Frequency and power sweep are supported in this mode.
Harmonic frequencies can be measured up to the maximum frequency of the receiver.
However, the fundamental frequency may not be lower than 16 MHz.
Option 004, Step Attenuator (8753ET only)
This option adds a 55 dB step attenuator into the RF output path.
Option 006, 6 GHz Operation
This option extends the maximum source and receiver frequency of the analyzer to 6 GHz.
Option 010, Time Domain
This option displays the time domain response of a network by computing the inverse
Fourier transform of the frequency domain response. It shows the response of a test device
as a function of time or distance. Displaying the reflection coefficient of a network versus
time determines the magnitude and location of each discontinuity. Displaying the
transmission coefficient of a network versus time determines the characteristics of
individual transmission paths. Time domain operation retains all accuracy inherent with
the correction that is active in of such devices as SAW filters, SAW delay lines, RF cables,
and RF antennas.
Option 011, Receiver Configuration (8753ES only)
This option allows front panel access to the R, A, and B samplers and receivers. The
transfer switch, couplers, and bias tees have been removed. Therefore, external accessories
are required to make most measurements.
Option 014, Configurable Test Set (8753ES only)
This option provides direct access to the internal components of the analyzer. Front panel
access is provided to the A and B sampler ports, the COUPLER/SWITCH ports, the RF IN
and RF OUT ports, and the R CHANNEL ports. This option offers improved sensitivity
and the ability to add peripheral devices in multiple configurations.
1-8
Chapter 1
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Analyzer Options Available
Option 075, 75 Ohm System Impedance (8753ES only)
This option offers 75Ω impedance bridges with type-N port connectors.
Option 1CM, Rack Mount Flange Kit without Handles
This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to
mount the instrument, with handles detached, in an equipment rack with 482.6 mm
(19 inches) horizontal spacing.
Option 1CP, Rack Mount Flange Kit with Handles
This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to
mount the instrument with handles attached in an equipment rack with 482.6 mm
(19 inches) spacing.
Chapter 1
1-9
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Service and Support Options
Service and Support Options
The analyzer’s standard warranty is a three-year return-to-Agilent service warranty
The following service and support options are also available at the time of purchase.
Option W01
This option replaces the standard warranty with a one-year on-site service warranty. This
option may not be available in all areas.
Option W31
This option replaces the standard warranty with a three-year on-site service warranty.
This option may not be available in all areas.
Option W50
This option adds two years to the standard three-year return to Agilent warranty for a
total of a five-year return to Agilent service warranty.
Option W51
This option replaces the standard warranty with a five-year on-site service warranty. This
option may not be available in all areas.
Option W32
This option provides for the annual return of your analyzer to Agilent for a commercial
calibration for a period of three years. The calibration provided is traceable to national
standards.
Option W52
This option provides for the annual return of your analyzer to Agilent for a commercial
calibration for a period of five years. The calibration provided is traceable to national
standards.
Option W34
This option provides for the annual return of your analyzer to Agilent for a Standards
Compliant Calibration for a period of three years. This type of calibration meets the
ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994 standard.
1-10
Chapter 1
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Service and Support Options
Option W54
This option provides for the annual return of your analyzer to Agilent for a Standards
Compliant Calibration for a period of five years. This type of calibration meets the
ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994 standard.
NOTE
Chapter 1
If the previous service and support options were not purchased along with the
analyzer, there are many other repair and calibration options available from
Agilent Technologies’ support organization. These options cover a range of
on-site services and agreements with varying response times as well as
return to Agilent agreements and per-incident pricing. Contact your local
Agilent Technologies sales and service center for details. Refer to Table 15-1
on page 15-3 for a list of sales and service offices.
1-11
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Service and Support Options
1-12
Chapter 1
2 System Verification and Performance
Tests
2-1
System Verification and Performance Tests
Introduction
Introduction
The performance of the network analyzer is specified in two ways: system specifications,
and instrument specifications. Respectively, the analyzer’s conformance to these
specifications is verified in two ways: system verification, and performance tests.
System Specifications
System specifications specify warranted performance of the measurement system when
making error-corrected measurements. The measurement system includes the analyzer,
test cables, and calibration kit.
The analyzer's system specifications are described in the Agilent 8753ET/ES Reference
Guide in the chapters titled “8753ES Specifications and Characteristics” and “8753ET
Specifications and Characteristics.” System specifications are included in the sections
titled “Corrected System Performance.” There are specifications for several different
network analyzer measurement systems that are designated by the type of device
connector used.
System specifications are expressed in two ways:
• residual errors of the measurement system
• graphs of measurement uncertainty versus reflection and transmission coefficients
System specifications are applicable when the measurement system is used to make
error-corrected measurements.
System specifications are verified in one of the following ways:
• Complete the system verification procedure in this chapter using a certified verification
kit, or
• Complete all of the performance tests and certify (or recertify) the calibration kit that
will be used for future measurements. This alternative verifies both the system
specifications and the instrument specifications for the analyzer.
Instrument Specifications
Instrument specifications specify the network analyzer's uncorrected measurement port
characteristics and its output and input behavior.
The analyzer's instrument specifications are described in the Agilent 8753ET/ES
Reference Guide in the chapters titled “8753ES Specifications and Characteristics” and
“8753ET Specifications and Characteristics.” The sections that describe instrument
specifications are titled:
• “Uncorrected Port Performance”
• “Test Port Output”
• “Test Port Input”
2-2
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Introduction
These specifications apply when the analyzer is used to make measurements other than
error-corrected measurements. An example would be the measurement of amplifier gain
compression. In such cases, the analyzer’s output and input behavior such as source power,
receiver accuracy, and receiver linearity are important and are covered in sections
previously listed.
Performance tests are used to confirm that the analyzer meets the instrument
specifications.
System Verification Procedure
The system verification procedure tests the network analyzer measurement system, as
defined previously, against the system specifications. If confirmation is successful, the
measurement system is capable of making measurements to the accuracy specified by the
graphs of measurement uncertainty. An outline of the system verification procedure
follows:
• The measurement system is calibrated with the same calibration kit that will be used
for future measurements. The measurement system’s systematic errors are determined
by this procedure.
• The verification-kit test devices are measured with error correction applied.
• These measurements are compared to measurement data stored on a unique,
serial-numbered data disk included with the verification kit.
• The measurement system passes the system verification procedure if the
measurements of the test devices differ from the measurement data on the data disk by
less than specified test limits. The test limits account for the specified accuracy of the
measurement system and the measurement uncertainties attributed to the stored data
for the test devices.
NOTE
Calibration kits are different from verification kits. Calibration kits are used
to determine the systematic errors of a network analyzer measurement
system. Verification kits are used to confirm system specifications and are not
used to generate error correction. For example, the HP/Agilent 85031B is a
7-mm calibration kit, but the HP/Agilent 85029B is a 7-mm verification kit.
Performance Tests
Performance tests are used to confirm analyzer performance against the instrument
specifications. If confirmation is successful, the analyzer meets the instrument
specifications as defined above. If the calibration kit to be used for measurements is also
certified, successful completion of the performance tests also ensures that the network
analyzer measurement system meets the system specifications.
Chapter 2
2-3
System Verification and Performance Tests
Introduction
Certificate of Calibration
Agilent Technologies will issue a certificate of calibration for the product upon successful
completion of system verification or completion of the performance tests. The certificate of
calibration will include a “System Attachment” if the system verification procedure is used
to confirm the system specifications. If the performance tests are used to confirm
instrument specifications, the certificate of calibration will not include a system
attachment. The equipment and measurement standards used for the tests must be
certified and must be traceable to recognized standards.
NOTE
2-4
If you have a measurement application that does not use all of the
measurement capabilities of the analyzer, you may ask your local Agilent
Technologies service office to verify only a subset of the specifications.
However, this creates the possibility of making inaccurate measurements if
you then use the analyzer in an application requiring additional capabilities.
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Use this section of the manual if you are performing system verification or performance
tests on an 8753ES analyzer. If your instrument is an 8753ET, turn to “Agilent 8753ET
System Verification and Performance Tests” on page 2-87.
System Verification Cycle and Kit Recertification
Agilent Technologies recommends that you verify your network analyzer measurement
system every six months. Agilent Technologies also suggests that you get your verification
kit recertified annually. Refer to the HP/Agilent 85029B 7-mm Verification Kit Operating
and Service Manual for more information.
NOTE
The system verification procedures can also apply to analyzers with
Option 075 (75 ohm analyzers) if minimum loss pads and type-N (m) to
APC-7 adapters are used.
Check to see how the verification kit floppy disk is labeled:
• If your verification disk is labeled HP/Agilent 8753D, HP/Agilent 8753E,
HP/Agilent 8753ES, HP/Agilent 8753ET Verification Data Disk, you may
proceed with the system verification.
• If your verification disk is not labeled as indicated above, you may send your
HP/Agilent 85029B 7-mm verification kit to the nearest service center for
recertification, which includes a data disk that you can use with the 8753ES.
8753ES System Verification
This system verification consists of three separate procedures:
1. “Initialization” on page 2-6
2. “Measurement Calibration” on page 2-8
3. “Device Verification” on page 2-9
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Chapter 2
2-5
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Model Number
Calibration Kit: 7-mm
85031B
Verification Kit: 7-mm
85029B
Test Port Extension Cable Set: 7-mm
11857D
Printer
HP ThinkJet/LaserJet
Additional Equipment for Option 075 Analyzers
Minimum-Loss Pad (2): 50 Ω to 75 Ω
11852B
Adapter (2): APC-7 to Type-N (m)
11525A
Procedure
Initialization
1. Clear all internal memory.
CAUTION
This will erase all instrument states that may be stored in internal memory.
Perform the following steps to save any instrument states that are stored in
internal memory to a floppy disk.
a. Press Save/Recall
SELECT DISK
INTERNAL MEMORY
RETURN .
b. Select an instrument state and press RECALL STATE .
c. Press SELECT DISK
INTERNAL DISK
RETURN
SAVE STATE .
d. If the instrument state file was not saved to disk with the same name that it had
while in internal memory, you may wish to rename the file.
Press FILE UTILITIES
DONE .
RENAME FILE , enter the desired name, and press
e. Repeat steps a through d for each instrument state that you wish to save.
2. To clear all internal memory, press System
RESET MEMORY Preset .
SERVICE MENU
PEEK/POKE
3. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-1. Let the system warm up for 30 minutes.
2-6
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-1
System Verification Test Setup
4. While the equipment is warming up, review the connector care information in Table 1-3
on page 1-7. Good connections and clean, undamaged connectors are critical for
accurate measurement results.
5. Insert the verification kit disk into the analyzer disk drive.
6. Press Preset
Save/Recall
SELECT DISK
INTERNAL DISK .
7. If you want a printout of the verification data for all the devices, press System
SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS RECORD ON . If you want a printout of the
graph from the display, press DUMP GRAPH ON .
NOTE
If you switch on the record function, you cannot switch it off during the
verification procedure.
8. Position the paper in the printer so that printing starts at the top of the page.
9. If you have difficulty with the printer:
• If the interface on your printer is GPIB, verify that the printer address is set to 1 (or
change the setting in the analyzer to match the printer).
• If the interface on your printer is serial or parallel, be sure that you selected the
printer port and the printer type correctly. Refer to your User’s Guide for more
information on how to perform these tasks.
10.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
SYS VER TESTS
EXECUTE TEST .
11.When the analyzer displays Sys Ver Init DONE, the initialization procedure is
complete.
CAUTION
Chapter 2
Do not press Preset or recall another instrument state. You must use the
current instrument state.
2-7
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Measurement Calibration
12.Press Cal
CAL KIT
CAL KIT:7mm
RETURN
RETURN
FULL 2-PORT .
CALIBRATE MENU
13.Press ISOLATION
SELECT CAL KIT
OMIT ISOLATION .
14.Press REFLECTION .
15.Connect the “open” end of the open/short combination (supplied in the calibration kit) to
reference test port 1, as shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2
Connections for Measurement Calibration Standards
16.Press FORWARD:OPEN .
17.When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard, connect the SHORT end of the
open/short combination to reference test port 1.
18.Press FORWARD:SHORT .
19.When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard, connect the 50 ohm termination
(supplied in the calibration kit) to reference test port 1.
20.Press FORWARD:LOAD .
21.When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard, connect the OPEN end of the
open/short combination to reference test port 2.
22.Press REVERSE:OPEN .
23.When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard, connect the SHORT end of the
open/short combination to reference test port 2.
24.Press REVERSE:SHORT .
2-8
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
25.When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard, connect the 50 ohm termination to
reference test port 2.
26.Press REVERSE:LOAD .
27.When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard, press STANDARDS DONE .
The analyzer briefly displays COMPUTING CAL COEFFICIENTS.
28.Connect the test port cables as shown Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3
Transmission Calibration Setup
29.Press TRANSMISSION
DO BOTH FWD + REV .
30.Press DONE 2-PORT CAL .
31.To save the calibration into the analyzer internal memory, press the following:
Save/Recall
SELECT DISK
INTERNAL MEMORY
Rotate the knob to select Register 1 (REG1) on the display. Then press:
RETURN
IMPORTANT
SAVE STATE
Step 31 is crucial to the correct recall of the calibration during subsequent
measurements. The calibration MUST be stored in Register 1 (REG1) of
INTERNAL MEMORY to be properly recalled.
32.When the analyzer finishes saving the instrument state, press SELECT DISK
INTERNAL DISK .
Device Verification
1. Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
28
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
2. At the prompt, connect the 20 dB attenuator (supplied in the verification kit) as shown
in Figure 2-4.
Chapter 2
2-9
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
3. Press CONTINUE to run the test:
• If you switched the record function off, the test pauses after each S-parameter
measurement. Press CONTINUE after each measurement.
• If you switched the record function on, the analyzer measures all S-parameters
(magnitude and phase) without pausing. Also, the analyzer only displays and prints
the PASS/FAIL information for the S-parameter measurements that are valid for
system verification.
Figure 2-4
Connections for the 20 dB Verification Device
4. When the analyzer finishes all the measurements, connect the 50 dB attenuator
(supplied in the verification kit), as shown in Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5
5. Press 29
2-10
Connections for the 50 dB Verification Device
x1
EXECUTE TEST
CONTINUE .
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
6. When all measurements are complete, replace the verification device with the
verification mismatch, as shown in Figure 2-6. Be sure that you connect Port A of the
verification mismatch to reference test port 1.
Figure 2-6
Mismatch Device Verification Setup 1
7. Press RETURN
TESTS
30
x1
EXECUTE TEST
CONTINUE .
8. When the analyzer finishes all the measurements, connect the mismatch verification
device as shown in Figure 2-7. Notice that Port B is now connected to reference test
port 1.
Figure 2-7
Mismatch Device Verification Setup 2
9. Press RETURN
TESTS
31
x1
EXECUTE TEST
CONTINUE .
10.You have completed the system verification procedure when the analyzer displays
Ver Def 4 DONE.
Chapter 2
2-11
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
In Case of Difficulty
1. Inspect all connections.
CAUTION
Do not disconnect the cables from the analyzer test ports. Doing so will
invalidate the calibration that you have done earlier.
2. Press Preset Save/Recall . Using the front panel knob, highlight the title of the full
2-Port calibration that you performed earlier, then press RECALL STATE .
3. Repeat the “Device Verification” procedure.
4. If the analyzer still fails the test, check the measurement calibration as follows:
a. Press Preset .
b. Recall the calibration by pressing Save/Recall
INTERNAL MEMORY RETURN .
SELECT DISK
c. Use the front panel knob to highlight the calibration you want to recall and press
RECALL STATE .
d. Connect the short to reference test port 1.
e. Press Meas
Refl: FWD S11 (A/R)
CONTINUOUS .
f. Press Scale Ref
SCALE/DIV
0.05
Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
x1 .
g. Check that the trace response is 0.00 ±0.05 dB.
h. Disconnect the short and connect it to reference test port 2.
i. Press Meas
Refl: REV S22(B/R) .
j. Check that the trace response is 0.00 ±0.05 dB.
k. If any of the trace responses are out of the specified limits, repeat the “Measurement
Calibration” and “Device Verification” procedures.
5. Refer to Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here,” for more troubleshooting
information.
2-12
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
8753ES Performance Tests
The following tests comprise the performance tests for your analyzer. Make a copy of the
“Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records,” starting on page 2-141, to record the results
of these tests.
1. Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy, on page 2-14
2. External Source Mode Frequency Range, on page 2-17
3. Test Port Output Power Level Accuracy, on page 2-19
4. Test Port Output Power Linearity, on page 2-22
5. Minimum R Channel Level, on page 2-28
6. Test Port Input Noise Floor Level, on page 2-32
7. Test Port Input Frequency Response, on page 2-36
8. Test Port Crosstalk, on page 2-45
9. Uncorrected Port Performance, on page 2-50
10. System Trace Noise, on page 2-56
11. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy, on page 2-59
12. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Compression, on page 2-72
13. Test Port Receiver Phase Compression, on page 2-75
14. Test Port Output/Input Harmonics (Analyzers with Option 002), on page 2-78
15. Harmonic Measurement Accuracy (Analyzers with Option 002), on page 2-83
Chapter 2
2-13
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
1. Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy
Perform this test to verify the frequency accuracy of the 8753ES over its entire operating
frequency range. A frequency counter is used to determine the analyzer’s output frequency.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
Frequency Accuracya
30 kHz to 3 GHz
±10 ppm
3 GHz to 6 GHzb
±10 ppm
a. At 25 °C ±5 °C.
b. Only for analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Frequency Counter
5350B/51B/52B
Cable: 50Ω Type-N, 24-inch
8120-4781
Adapter: APC-3.5 (f) to Type-N (f)
1250-1745
Adapter: APC-7 to Type-N (f)
11524A
Adapter: Type-N (f) to BNC (m)
1250-1477
Additional Equipment needed for an 8753ES with Option 075
Minimum Loss Pad, 50Ω to 75Ω
11852B
Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-8.
2-14
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-8
Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy Test Setup
2. Press Preset
3. Press 30
record.
Sweep Setup
CW FREQ .
k/m and write the frequency counter reading on the performance test
4. Repeat step 3 for each instrument frequency listed in the performance test record.
Chapter 2
2-15
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
In Case of Difficulty
1. If any measured frequency is close to the specification limits, check the time base
accuracy of the counter used.
2. If the analyzer fails by a significant margin at all frequencies (especially if the deviation
increases with frequency), the master time-base probably needs adjustment. In this
case, refer to “Frequency Accuracy Adjustment” on page 3-43. The “Fractional-N
Frequency Range Adjustment” on page 3-40 also affects frequency accuracy.
3. Refer to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting,” for related troubleshooting information.
2-16
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
2. External Source Mode Frequency Range
Perform this test to verify that the analyzer’s reference channel, R Channel In, is capable
of phase locking to an external CW signal. CW signals from an external source are fed into
the R channel input when the instrument is in external source mode. Proper phase lock
conditions are confirmed at a power level of −25 dBm.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
300 kHz to 3 GHz
300 kHz to 6 GHza
a. Only for analyzers with
Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
External Source
83620A Option 001 or 83712B Option 1E1
Cable: APC-7, 24-inch
8120-4779
Adapter: APC-3.5 (f) to APC-7
1250-1747
Adapter: APC-3.5 (m) to APC-7
1250-1746
Procedure
1. Set the external source to a CW frequency of 10 MHz and power level of −25 dBm.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-9.
Figure 2-9
Chapter 2
External Source Mode Frequency Range Test Setup
2-17
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
3. On the network analyzer, press Preset
4. Press System
CW FREQ
10
INSTRUMENT MODE
Meas
INPUT PORTS
EXT SOURCE AUTO
R .
Sweep Setup
M/µ .
5. Check to see if the analyzer is phase locking to the external CW signal:
• If the analyzer displays any phase lock error messages, write “UNLOCK” in the
performance test record for the set CW signal.
• If the analyzer does not display any phase lock error messages, write “LOCK” in the
performance test record for the set CW signal.
6. Set the external source to a CW frequency of 20 MHz.
7. On the analyzer, press 20
M/µ or the next external source frequency.
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other external source CW frequencies listed in the
performance test record.
In Case of Difficulty
If the analyzer displayed any phase lock error messages:
1. Be sure the external source power is set to −25 dBm.
2. Make sure the analyzer's “EXT SOURCE AUTO” feature is selected. In addition, verify
that the analyzer is set to measure input channel R.
3. Verify that all connections are tight.
2-18
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
3. Test Port Output Power Level Accuracy
Perform this test to confirm the accuracy of the 8753ES test port output power. A power
meter is used to determine the output level from Port 1. This measurement is compared to
the level set by the network analyzer. The difference must be within the specified
tolerance.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
Test Port Output Power
Accuracya
300 kHz to 3 GHz
±1.0 dB
3 GHz to 6 GHzb
±1.0 dB
a. At 0 dBm and 25° C ±5° C
b. Only for analyzers with Option 006
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Model Number
Power Meter
436A/437B/438A or E4418B/4419B
Power Sensor
8482A
Adapter: APC-7 to Type-N (f)
11524A
Additional Equipment for Option 006 Analyzers
Power Sensor
8481A
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
Power Sensor
8483A Option H03
Procedure
1. Zero and calibrate the power meter. For more information of how to perform this task,
refer to the power meter operating manual.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-10.
Chapter 2
2-19
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-10
Test Port Output Power Level Accuracy Test Setup
3. Press Preset .
NOTE
The factory preset test port power is 0 dBm.
4. Press Sweep Setup CW FREQ
meter for this CW frequency.
300
k/m . Set the calibration factor on the power
5. Write the power meter reading on the performance test record.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each CW frequency listed in the performance test record. For
analyzers with Option 006, use the HP/Agilent 8481A power sensor for all frequencies
above 3 GHz.
2-20
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
In Case of Difficulty
1. Be sure the source power is switched on. Press Power . Check the SOURCE PWR
softkey; ON should be highlighted. Otherwise, press SOURCE PWR to switch on the
source power.
2. Refer to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting,” for more troubleshooting information.
Chapter 2
2-21
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
4. Test Port Output Power Linearity
This test verifies the analyzer’s test port output power linearity throughout the analyzer’s
frequency range. A power meter calibration is used to set the reference output power
across the frequency range of the analyzer. The analyzer’s B-channel receiver is used to
determine power linearity after each change in output power.
NOTE
This test does not verify the functionality of the step attenuator. To verify its
function, go to “Step 2. Operator's Check” on page 4-6.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Power Range
Power Level Linearitya
−15 to +5 dBm
±0.2 dB
+5 to +10 dBm
±0.5 dB
+5 to +8 dBmb
±0.5 dB
a. Relative to 0 dBm from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
(2 GHz for Option 075; 6 GHz for Option 006).
b. Options 014 and 075
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Power Meter
437A/438A or E4418B/4419B
Power Sensor
8482A
Adapter: APC-7 to type-N (f)
11524A
Attenuator: APC-7, 50Ω, 20 dB
8492A Option 020
RF Cable: APC-7, 50Ω
8120-4779
GPIB Cable
10833A/B/C/D
Additional Equipment for Option 006 Analyzers
Power Sensor
8481A
Additional Equipment for Option 075 Analyzers
Attenuator: 20dB, Type-N
8491A Option 020
Minimum Loss Pads (2): 50Ω to 75Ω
11852B
Cable: 50Ω, Type-N(m) to Type-N (m)
8120-4781
Power Sensor
8483A (Option H03)
2-22
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Procedure
Power Meter Calibration
1. Zero and calibrate the power meter for the HP/Agilent 8482A power sensor.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11
Setup for Power Meter Calibration on Test Port 1
3. Press Preset .
4. Press Avg
IF BW
5. Press Start
300
100
x1
Sweep Setup
NUMBER of POINTS
x1 .
k/m , then;
• If the analyzer has Option 075, press Stop
2
G/n .
• If the analyzer has Option 006, press Stop
3
G/n .
Chapter 2
51
2-23
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
6. Press Local
SYSTEM CONTROLLER .
7. Press SET ADDRESSES and POWER MTR until the analyzer shows the correct
power meter model. (Use 438A/437 if the power meter is an E4419B or E4418B.)
8. Press ADDRESS: P MTR/GPIB . The default power meter GPIB address is 13. Make
sure it is the same as your power meter GPIB address. Otherwise, use the analyzer
front panel keypad to enter the correct GPIB address for your power meter.
9. Press Power
NOTE
PWR RANGE AUTO man to MAN to turn auto power range off.
The analyzer displays the PRm annotation, indicating that the analyzer power
range is set to MANUAL.
10.Select PORT POWER UNCOUPLD to uncouple the test port output power.
11.Press Cal
PWRMTR CAL .
12.Press LOSS/SENSR LISTS CAL FACTOR SENSOR A . Refer to the back of the power
sensor to locate the different calibration factor values along with their corresponding
frequencies.
NOTE
The analyzer’s calibration factor sensor table can hold a maximum of 55
calibration factor data points.
The following softkeys are included in the sensor calibration factor entries menu:
SEGMENT
press to select a point where you can use the front panel knob or entry
keys to enter a value.
EDIT
press to edit or change a previously entered value.
DELETE
press to delete a point from the sensor calibration factor table.
ADD
select this key to add a point into the sensor calibration factor table.
CLEAR LIST
select this key to erase the entire sensor calibration factor table.
DONE
select this key when done entering points to the sensor calibration
factor table.
As an example, the following are the keystrokes for entering the first two calibration
factor data points for the 8482A power sensor (assuming CF% = 96.4 at 100 kHz and
CF% = 98.4 at 300 kHz):
a. From the sensor calibration factor entries menu, press ADD .
b. Press FREQUENCY 100
k/m . If you make an entry error, press
re-enter the correct value again.
2-24
and
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
c. Press CAL FACTOR
96.4
x1 .
d. Press DONE to terminate the first calibration factor data point entry.
e. To enter the second cal factor data point, press ADD .
f. Press FREQUENCY
300
k/m .
g. Press CAL FACTOR
98.4
x1 .
h. To terminate the second calibration factor data point entry, press DONE .
i. Press SEGMENT and use the front panel knob to scroll through the sensor
calibration factors table. Check to be sure all values are entered correctly. If you see
an error, use the front panel knob to point to the data point you want to modify and
press EDIT .
13.Press the appropriate softkeys to create a power sensor calibration factors table.
14.Press DONE to exit the sensor calibration factor entries menu.
15.Press RETURN
calibration.
NOTE
ONE SWEEP
TAKE CAL SWEEP to start the power meter
The analyzer displays the PC annotation, indicating the power meter
calibration is active.
Output Power Linearity Measurement: 300 kHz to 3 GHz
1. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 2-12.
Figure 2-12
2. Press Meas
Test Port Output Power level Linearity Test Setup
INPUT PORTS
3. Press Sweep Setup
Chapter 2
B.
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
2-25
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
4. Press Display
DATA → MEMORY
5. Press Marker
∆ MODE MENU
300
k/m
FIXED MKR POSITION
FIXED MKR VALUE
−15
6. Press Power
7. Press Sweep Setup
8. Press Marker
DATA/MEM .
−15
x1
RETURN
FIXED MKR STIMULUS
∆ REF = ∆ FIXED MKR .
x1 (or the next power setting from the performance test record).
TRIGGER MENU
MARKER 1
SINGLE .
Marker Search
SEARCH: MAX
Marker
MARKER 2
SEARCH:MIN .
Marker Search
9. Read the value for marker 1 from the display and enter it in the performance test
record in the “Marker 1 Maximum” value column. Enter the value of marker 2 in the
“Marker 2 Minimum” value column.
10.Press Marker ∆ MODE MENU FIXED MKR POSITION FIXED MKR VALUE
−13
x1 (or the next power setting from the performance test record) RETURN .
11.Repeat steps 6 through 10 for all power settings listed on the performance test record
for the 300 kHz to 3 GHz frequency range.
12.The marker 1 (maximum) and marker 2 (minimum) readings should be within the
specified range for each power level with reference to the fixed marker value.
13.If your analyzer does not have Option 006, this completes the test. If you have problems
with this test, go to “In Case of Difficulty” on page 2-27.
14.If your analyzer has Option 006, proceed to the next two sections.
Power Meter Calibration from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (Option 006 only)
1. Disconnect the 8482A power sensor from the power meter and connect the 8481A power
sensor in its place. Zero and calibrate the power meter for this sensor. Connect the
equipment as shown in Figure 2-11 on page 2-23, using the 8481A sensor.
2. Press Start
3. Press Cal
3
G/n
Stop
PWRMTR CAL
6
0
G/n .
x1 .
4. Press LOSS/SENSR LISTS CAL FACTOR SENSOR B . Press the appropriate keys to
build a sensor calibration factor table for the 8481A power sensor (sensor B).
5. Press DONE to exit the sensor calibration factor entries menu.
6. Press USE SENSOR B to select the 8481A sensor. Press Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU CONTINUOUS .
7. Press Cal PWRMTR CAL
meter calibration.
ONE SWEEP TAKE CAL SWEEP to start the power
8. Proceed to the next section for making the power linearity measurements.
2-26
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Output Power Linearity Measurement from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (Option 006 only)
1. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 2-12.
2. Press Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
3. Press Display
DATA → MEMORY
4. Press Marker
∆ MODE MENU
3
G/n
FIXED MKR VALUE
5. Press Power
−15
6. Press Sweep Setup
7. Press Marker
Marker Search
SINGLE .
DATA/MEM .
FIXED MKR POSITION
−15
x1
RETURN
FIXED MKR STIMULUS
∆ REF = ∆ FIXED MKR .
x1 (or the next power setting from the performance test record).
TRIGGER MENU
MARKER 1
SINGLE .
Marker Search
SEARCH: MAX
Marker
MARKER 2
SEARCH:MIN .
8. Read the value for marker 1 from the display and enter it in the performance test
record in the “Marker 1 Maximum” value column. Enter the value of marker 2 in the
Marker 2 Minimum” value column.
9. Press Marker ∆ MODE MENU FIXED MKR POSITION FIXED MKR VALUE
−13
x1 (or the next power setting from the performance test record) RETURN .
10.Repeat steps 5 through 9 for all power settings listed on the performance test record in
the 3 GHz to 6 GHz range.
11.The marker 1 (maximum) and marker 2 (minimum) readings should be within the
specified range for each power level with reference to the fixed marker value.
12.This completes the test. If you have problems with this test, go to “In Case of Difficulty,”
next.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Ensure that the power meter and power sensors are operating to specifications. Be sure
to set the power meter calibration factor for the range of frequencies that you are
testing.
2. Verify that there is power coming out of the analyzer's test port 1. Be sure you did not
accidentally switch off the analyzer's internal source. If you did, press Sweep Setup
POWER SOURCE PWR ON .
3. Repeat this performance test.
Chapter 2
2-27
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
5. Minimum R Channel Level
This test confirms that phase lock can be achieved at a specified minimum R channel input
power. Power from the analyzer’s output port is fed into the R channel receiver using the
input found on the front panel. Observations are made for proper phase lock conditions.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
Minimum R Channel
Level
300 kHz to 3 GHz
< −35 dBm
3 GHz to 6 GHza
< −30 dBm
a. Only for analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Adapter: APC-3.5 (m) to APC-7
1250-1746
Cable: APC-7, 24-inch
8120-4779
Required Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers (Option 075)
Minimum Loss Pad: 50Ω to 75Ω
11852B
Cable: 50Ω Type-N, 24-inch
8120-4781
Adapter: APC-3.5 (m) to Type-N (f)
1250-1750
Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13
2-28
Minimum R Channel Level Test Setup
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
2. Press Preset
Meas
3. Press Power
PWR RANGE MAN
4. Press Scale Ref
5. Press CW FREQ
6. Press POWER
INPUT PORTS
POWER RANGES
REFERENCE VALUE
300
−65
R.
−70
RANGE 5 −65 to −40 .
x1 .
k/m .
x1 .
The analyzer displays the message CAUTION: NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT
LEVEL.
7. Press
to increase the test port power by 1 dBm.
8. If the analyzer displays a phase lock error message, continue increasing the test port
power until phase lock is achieved.
9. Write the test port power that is displayed on the analyzer, on the performance test
record.
10.Repeat steps 5 through 9 for the other CW frequencies listed in the performance test
record.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Check the flexible RF cable (W8, as shown in Figure 2-14) between the R sampler
assembly (A4) and the phase lock assembly (A11). Make sure it is connected between
A11J1 (PL IF IN) and 1st IF Out.
CAUTION
Chapter 2
Do not push cable W8 down next to the A11 phase lock assembly.
2-29
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-14
Flexible RF Cable Location
2. Using an ohmmeter, verify that cable W8 is not open. In addition, examine both the
cable connectors: measure the resistance between the cable center pin and the cable
connector and make sure it is not close to zero.
3. Check the R sampler by substituting it with the B sampler (A6). Do this by moving
cable W8 to the B sampler (A6), as shown in Figure 2-15.
2-30
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-15
Connections for Substituting the R Sampler (A4)
4. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-16.
Figure 2-16
Setup for Checking the R Sampler (A4)
5. Repeat the test, but select the B sampler (A6) by pressing Meas
in step 2. Use the following specifications:
INPUT PORTS
B
• 300 kHz to 3 GHz: < −27 dBm
• 3 GHz to 6 GHz: < −22 dBm
6. If the analyzer fails the test, replace the A11 assembly.
7. Verify that the high/low band adjustments are still within specifications. For more
information on how to perform this task, refer to “High/Low Band Transition
Adjustment” on page 3-47.
8. Refer to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting,” for more troubleshooting information.
Chapter 2
2-31
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
6. Test Port Input Noise Floor Level
The analyzer’s noise floor level is measured at minimum power with loads connected to the
test ports.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
Test Port
IF Bandwidth
Average
Noise Level
(for 50Ω
analyzers)
Average
Noise Level
(for 75Ω
analyzers)
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz
Test Port 1
3 kHz
−82 dBm
−80 dBm
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz
Test Port 1
10 Hz
−102 dBm
−100 dBm
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz
Test Port 2
3 kHz
−82 dBm
−80 dBm
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz
Test Port 2
10 Hz
−102 dBm
−100 dBm
3.0 GHz to 6.0 GHz a
Test Port 1
3 kHz
−77 dBm
N/A
3.0 GHz to 6.0 GHz a
Test Port 1
10 Hz
−97 dBm
N/A
3.0 GHz to 6.0 GHz a
Test Port 2
3 kHz
−77 dBm
N/A
3.0 GHz to 6.0 GHz a
Test Port 2
10 Hz
−97 dBm
N/A
a. Only for analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Calibration Kit: 7-mm
85031B
Equipment Required for 75Ω Analyzers
Calibration Kit: Type-N
85036B
Procedure
Test Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz)
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-17.
2-32
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-17
Source Input Noise Floor Test Setup
2. Press Preset
Start
300
3. Press Meas
Avg
k/m
IF BW
Stop
3000
3
INPUT PORTS
x1
Power
−85
x1
G/n .
A
TESTPORT 2
Format
LIN MAG
AUTO SCALE .
Scale Ref
4. Press Marker Fctn
TRIGGER MENU
MARKER MODE MENU
SINGLE .
STATS ON
Sweep Setup
5. When the analyzer finishes the sweep, notice the mean value (which appears on the
analyzer display).
6. Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using this
equation.
Power (dBm) = 20 × [log10 (linear magnitude mean value)]
NOTE
Notice that the mean value that is displayed on the analyzer is in µU units.
So, for example, if the displayed value is 62 µU, the value that you would put
in the equation is (62 × 10−6).
7. Write this calculated value on the performance test record.
Test Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz)
8. Press Avg
IF BW
9. Press Sweep Setup
10
x1 to change the IF bandwidth to 10 Hz.
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
10.When the analyzer finishes the sweep, notice the mean value.
11.Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using this
equation.
Power (dBm) = 20 × [log10 (linear magnitude mean value)]
12.Write this calculated value on the performance test record.
Chapter 2
2-33
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Test Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz)
13.Press Meas
INPUT PORTS
14.Press Sweep Setup
B
TESTPORT 1
TRIGGER MENU
Format
LIN MAG .
SINGLE .
15.When the analyzer finishes the sweep, notice the mean value.
16.Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using this
equation.
Power (dBm) = 20 × [log10 (linear magnitude mean value)]
17.Write this calculated value on the performance test record.
Test Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz)
18.Press Avg
IF BW
19.Press Sweep Setup
3
k/m to change the IF bandwidth to 3 kHz.
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
20.When the analyzer finishes the sweep, notice the mean value.
21.Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using this
equation.
Power (dBm) = 20 × [log10 (linear magnitude mean value)]
22.Write this calculated value on the performance test record.
23.This completes the test port input noise floor level procedure if your analyzer does not
have Option 006. If your analyzer has Option 006, continue with the next section.
Test Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz)
(Option 006 only)
24.Press Start
3
25.Press Sweep Setup
G/n
Stop
6
G/n .
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
26.When the analyzer finishes the sweep, notice the mean value.
27.Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using this
equation.
Power(dBm)= 20 × [log10 (linear magnitude mean value)]
28.Write this calculated value on the performance test record.
2-34
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Test Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz)
(Option 006 only)
29.Press Avg
IF BW
30.Press Sweep Setup
10
x1 to change the IF bandwidth to 10 Hz.
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
31.When the analyzer finishes the sweep, notice the mean value.
32.Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using this
equation.
Power (dBm)= 20 × [log10 (linear magnitude mean value)]
33.Write this calculated value on the performance test record.
Test Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz)
(Option 006 only)
34.Press Meas
INPUT PORTS
35.Press Sweep Setup
A
TESTPORT 2 .
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
36.When the analyzer finishes the sweep, notice the mean value.
37.Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using this
equation.
Power (dBm) = 20 × [log10 (linear magnitude mean value)]
38.Write this calculated value on the performance test record.
Test Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz)
(Option 006 only)
39.Press Avg
IF BW
40.Press Sweep Setup
3
k/m .
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
41.When the analyzer finishes the sweep, notice the mean value.
42.Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using this
equation.
Power (dBm)= 20 × [log10 (linear magnitude mean value)]
43.Write this calculated value on the performance test record.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Perform the adjustment titled “ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52)” on
page 3-15.
2. Repeat the entire “6. Test Port Input Noise Floor Level” procedure.
3. Suspect the A10 Digital IF assembly if the analyzer fails both test port input noise floor
tests.
4. Refer to Chapter 8 , “Receiver Troubleshooting,” for more troubleshooting information.
Chapter 2
2-35
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
7. Test Port Input Frequency Response
Power meter calibration is used to control the input to the analyzer’s receiver across its
frequency range. The network analyzer’s input receiver frequency response is measured
against this calibrated input.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
Input Frequency Responsea
300 kHz to 3 GHz
± 1 dB
3 GHz to 6 GHzb
± 2 dB
a. At 0 dBm.
b. Only for analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Power Meter
436A/437B/438A or E4418B/4419B
Power Sensor
8482A
Cable: APC-7, 24-inch
8120-4779
Adapter: APC-7 to Type-N (f)
11524A
Additional Equipment for Option 006 Analyzers
Power Sensor
8481A
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
Power Sensor
8483A Option H03
Cable: 75Ω, Type-N
8120-2408
Adapter: 75Ω, type-N (f) to type-N (f)
1250-1529
Procedure
Power Meter Calibration for Test Port 1 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
1. Zero and calibrate the power meter for the 8482A sensor.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-18.
2-36
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-18
Setup for Power Meter Calibration on Test Port 1
3. Press Preset
Avg
IF BW
3
k/m
Start
300
k/m .
4. Only for Analyzers with Option 006:
Press Stop 3
G/n .
5. Press Local
SYSTEM CONTROLLER .
6. Press SET ADDRESSES and POWER MTR until the analyzer shows the correct
power meter model. (Use the 438A/437 selection if the power meter is an HP/Agilent
E4419B or an E4418B.)
7. Press ADDRESS: P MTR/GPIB . The default power meter GPIB address is 13. Make
sure it is the same as your power meter GPIB address. Otherwise, use the analyzer
front panel keypad to enter the correct GPIB address for your power meter.
8. Press Sweep Setup
Chapter 2
NUMBER of POINTS
51
x1 .
2-37
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
9. Press POWER
NOTE
PWR RANGE MAN to turn the auto power range off.
The analyzer displays the PRm annotation, indicating that the analyzer power
range is set to MANUAL.
10.Select PORT POWER UNCOUPLD to uncouple the test port output power.
11.Press Cal
PWRMTR CAL .
12.Press LOSS/SENSR LISTS CAL FACTOR SENSOR A . Refer to the back of the power
sensor to locate the different calibration factor values along with their corresponding
frequencies.
NOTE
The analyzer’s calibration factor sensor table can hold a maximum of 55
calibration factor data points.
The following softkeys are included in the sensor calibration factor entries menu:
SEGMENT
press to select a point where you can use the front panel knob or entry
keys to enter a value.
EDIT
press to edit or change a previously entered value.
DELETE
press to delete a point from the sensor calibration factor table.
ADD
select this key to add a point into the sensor calibration factor table.
CLEAR LIST
select this key to erase the entire sensor calibration factor table.
DONE
select this key when done entering points to the sensor calibration
factor table.
As an example, the following are the keystrokes for entering the first two calibration
factor data points for the 8482A power sensor (assuming CF% = 96.4 at 100 kHz and
CF% = 98.4 at 300 kHz):
a. From the sensor calibration factor entries menu, press ADD .
b. Press FREQUENCY 100
k/m . If you make an entry error, press
re-enter the correct value again.
c. Press CAL FACTOR
96.4
and
x1 .
d. Press DONE to terminate the first calibration factor data point entry.
e. To enter the second cal factor data point, press ADD .
f. Press FREQUENCY
300
k/m .
g. Press CAL FACTOR
98.4
x1 .
h. To terminate the second calibration factor data point entry, press DONE .
2-38
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
i. Press SEGMENT and use the front panel knob to scroll through the sensor
calibration factors table. Check to be sure all values are entered correctly. If you spot
an error, use the front panel knob to point to the data point you want to modify and
press EDIT .
13.Press the appropriate softkeys to create a power sensor calibration factors table.
14.Press DONE to exit the sensor calibration factor entries menu.
15.Press RETURN
calibration.
TAKE CAL SWEEP to start the power meter
ONE SWEEP
Wait until the analyzer finishes the sweep, then continue with this procedure.
NOTE
The analyzer displays the PC annotation, indicating the power meter
calibration is active.
Test Port 2 Input Frequency Response from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
16.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-19.
Figure 2-19
Test Port 2 Input Frequency Response Test Setup
17.Press Meas
INPUT PORTS
18.Press Scale Ref
SCALE/DIV
B
1
Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
x1 .
19.Press Marker MARKER 1 Marker Search
minimum magnitude location of the trace.
SEARCH:MIN to put marker 1 at the
20.Press Marker MARKER 2 Marker Search SEARCH:MAX to position marker 2 at
the maximum magnitude location of the trace.
21.Write the marker 1 or marker 2 value, whichever has the larger absolute magnitude, in
the performance test record.
Chapter 2
2-39
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Power Meter Calibration for Test Port 2 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
22.Connect the equipment as shown Figure 2-20.
Figure 2-20
Setup for Power Meter Calibration on Test Port 2
23.Press Sweep Setup
TESTPORT 2 .
TRIGGER MENU
CONTINUOUS
Meas
INPUT PORTS
24.Press Cal PWRMTR CAL ONE SWEEP TAKE CAL SWEEP to start the power
meter calibration for test port 2.
25.When the analyzer displays the message POWER METER CALIBRATION SWEEP
DONE, connect the equipment as shown as in Figure 2-21.
2-40
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-21
Test Port 1 Input Frequency Response Test Setup
Test Port 1 Input Frequency Response from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
26.Press Meas
INPUT PORTS
A
Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
27.Press Marker
MARKER 1
Marker Search
SEARCH:MIN .
28.Press Marker
MARKER 2
Marker Search
SEARCH:MAX .
SINGLE .
29.Write the marker 1 or marker 2 reading, whichever has the larger absolute magnitude,
in the performance test record.
30.If your analyzer does not have Option 006, this completes the performance test. If your
analyzer has Option 006, continue with the next sections.
Power Meter Calibration for Test Port 2 from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (Option 006 only)
31.Replace the power sensor with the 8481A, and then set up the power meter:
a. Cycle the line power for the power meter.
b. Zero and calibrate the power meter with the new sensor.
32.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-22.
Chapter 2
2-41
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-22
33.Press Start
34.Press Cal
Setup for Power Meter Calibration on Test Port 2
3
G/n
Stop
6
G/n .
PWRMTR CAL .
35.Press LOSS/SENSR LISTS CAL FACTOR SENSOR B . Press the appropriate keys to
build a calibration factor sensor table for the 8481A power sensor.
36.Press DONE to exit the sensor calibration factor entries menu.
37.To select the 8481A power sensor, press USE SENSOR B . Press Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU CONTINUOUS .
38.Press Cal PWRMTR CAL
meter calibration.
ONE SWEEP
TAKE CAL SWEEP to start the power
Test Port 1 Input Frequency Response from 3 GHz to 6 GHz
39.When the analyzer finishes the calibration sweep, connect the equipment as shown in
Figure 2-23.
Figure 2-23
2-42
Setup for Test Port 1 Input Frequency Response
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
40.Press Meas
INPUT PORTS
A
Sweep Setup
41.Press Marker MARKER 1 Marker Search
minimum magnitude location of the trace.
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
SEARCH:MIN to put marker 1 at the
42.Press Marker MARKER 2 Marker Search SEARCH:MAX to position marker 2 at
the maximum magnitude location of the trace.
43.Write the marker 1 or marker 2 reading, whichever has the largest absolute magnitude,
in the performance test record.
Power Meter Calibration for Test Port 1 from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (Option 006 only)
44.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-24.
Figure 2-24
Setup for Power Meter Calibration on Test Port 1
45.Press Sweep Setup
TESTPORT 1 .
TRIGGER MENU
CONTINUOUS
Meas
INPUT PORTS
46.Press Cal PWRMTR ONE SWEEP TAKE CAL SWEEP to start the power meter
calibration for test port 1.
Test Port 2 Input Frequency Response from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (Option 006 only)
47.When the analyzer displays the message POWER METER CALIBRATION SWEEP DONE,
connect the equipment as shown as in Figure 2-25.
Chapter 2
2-43
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-25
Test Port 2 Input Frequency Response Test Setup
48.Press Meas
INPUT PORTS
B
Sweep Setup
49.Press Marker MARKER 1 Marker Search
minimum magnitude location of the trace.
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
SEARCH:MIN to put marker 1 at the
50.Press Marker MARKER 2 Marker Search SEARCH:MAX to position marker 2 at
the maximum magnitude location of the trace.
51.Write the marker 1 or marker 2 reading, whichever has the largest absolute magnitude,
in the performance test record.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Be sure you have used the correct power sensor for the frequency range.
2. Verify that the calibration factors that you have entered for the power sensors are
correct.
3. Repeat this test with a cable that is known to be good.
2-44
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
8. Test Port Crosstalk
Perform this test to measure the maximum level of signal leakage between the analyzer’s
test ports. Crosstalk is measured with shorts attached to the test ports after a
normalization measurement with a thru.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
Crosstalka
300 kHz to 3 GHz
< −100 dB
3 GHz to 6 GHzb
< −90 dB
a. Measurement conditions:
25 °C ±5 °C; normalized to a through; measured with two shorts
(or shielded open); 10 Hz IF BW; averaging factor 8;
alternate mode; source power at +10 dBm (or +8 dBm for
Option 014 or Option 075).
b. Only for analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Calibration Kit: 7-mm
85031B
Cable: APC-7, 24-inch
8120-4779
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
Calibration Kit: 75Ω, Type-N
85036B
Cable: 75Ω, Type-N, 24 inch
8120-2408
Adapter: 75Ω, Type-N (m) to Type-N (m)
part of 85036B
Procedure
Normalization from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
1. Connect the 24-inch cable between the analyzer’s test ports 1 and 2 as shown in
Figure 2-26. Use the appropriate cable for your analyzer (50Ω or 75Ω).
Chapter 2
2-45
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-26
8753ES Crosstalk Baseline Measurement
2. Press Preset
MORE ALTERNATE A and B .
Cal
3. Press Start
300
k/m
Stop
G/n .
3
4. Press Sweep Setup NUMBER of POINTS 101 x1 Power
analyzers with Option 014 or Option 075, press 8 x1 ).
5. Press Avg
IF BW
6. Press Meas
10
10
x1 (or, for
x1 .
Trans: FWD S21 (B/R) .
7. Press Sweep Setup TRIGGER MENU SINGLE . Wait for the sweep to finish, as
indicated by the Hld notation on the left side of the display.
8. Press Display
DATA → MEMORY
9. Press Chan 2
Meas
DATA/MEM .
Trans: REV S12 (A/R) .
10.Press Sweep Setup TRIGGER MENU SINGLE . Wait for the sweep to finish, as
indicated by the Hld notation on the left side of the display.
11.Press Display
12.Press Scale Ref
13.Press Chan 1
x1 .
2-46
DATA → MEMORY
SCALE/DIV
Scale Ref
10
DATA/MEM .
x1
SCALE/DIV
REFERENCE VALUE
10
x1
−100
REFERENCE VALUE
x1 .
−100
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Crosstalk to Test Port 2 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-27. Use the shorts from the calibration kit.
Figure 2-27
8753ES Crosstalk Measurement
2. Press Chan 1
Avg
AVERAGING ON
AVERAGING FACTOR
8
x1
Sweep Setup
8
x1 . Wait for the
sweeps to finish as indicated by the Hld indication on the left side of the display.
TRIGGER MENU
3. Press Marker Search
NUMBER of GROUPS
SEARCH: MAX .
4. Write the marker value (which appears on the display) in the performance test record.
Crosstalk to Test Port 1 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
5. Press Chan 2
Avg
AVERAGING ON
AVERAGING FACTOR
8
x1 .
6. Press Sweep Setup TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS 8 x1 . Wait for the
sweeps to finish as indicated by the Hld indication on the left side of the display.
7. Press Marker Search
SEARCH: MAX .
8. Write the marker value (which appears on the analyzer display) in the performance test
record. This completes the test. If your analyzer has Option 006, proceed to the next
section.
Normalization from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (Option 006 only)
1. Set up the equipment again as shown in Figure 2-26 on page 2-46.
2. Press Start
3
G/n
Stop
6
G/n
Avg
AVERAGING OFF .
3. Press Sweep Setup TRIGGER MENU SINGLE . Wait for the sweep to finish as
indicated by the Hld indication on the left side of the display.
4. Press Display
Chapter 2
DATA → MEMORY
Scale Ref
REFERENCE VALUE
−90
x1 .
2-47
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
5. Press Chan 1
Avg
AVERAGING OFF .
6. Press Sweep Setup TRIGGER MENU SINGLE . Wait for the sweep to finish as
indicated by the Hld indication on the left side of the display.
7. Press Display
DATA → MEMORY
Scale Ref
REFERENCE VALUE
−90
x1 .
Crosstalk to Test Port 2 from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (Option 006 only)
8. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-27 on page 2-47. Press Avg
AVERAGING ON .
9. Press Sweep Setup TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS 8
x1 . Wait for the
sweeps to finish as indicated by the Hld notation on the left side of the display.
10.Press Marker Search
SEARCH: MAX .
11.Write the marker value (which appears on the analyzer display) in the performance test
record.
Crosstalk to Test Port 1 from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (Option 006 only)
12.Press Chan 2
Avg
AVERAGING ON .
13.Press Sweep Setup TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS 8 x1 . Wait for the
sweeps to finish as indicated by the Hld notation on the left side of the display.
14.Press Marker Search
SEARCH: MAX .
15.Write the marker value (which appears on the analyzer display) in the performance test
record.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Remove the instrument top cover. Using an 8 lb-inch torque wrench, verify that all
semirigid cables connected to the sampler/mixer assemblies are tight. In addition,
tighten any loose screws on the sampler/mixer assemblies (A4/5/6) and the pulse
generator assembly (A7).
2. Remove the instrument bottom cover. Refer to Figure 2-28. Verify that cables W1, W31
and W32 are tight.
3. Repeat this test.
2-48
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-28
Chapter 2
8753ES Bottom View
2-49
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
9. Uncorrected Port Performance
The analyzer can perform error-correction and store the error coefficients. These error
coefficients are, in fact, measurements of the analyzer’s uncorrected port performance.
NOTE
The crosstalk calibration coefficients are omitted in this procedure. They are
covered in the “Test Port Crosstalk” performance test.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Uncorrecteda Error
Terms
Frequency Range
300 kHz to 1.3 GHz
1.3 GHz to 3 GHz
3 GHz to 6 GHzb
Directivity
35 dB
30 dB
25 dB
Source Match
16 dB
16 dB
14 dB
Load Match
18 dB
16 dB
14 dB
Reflection Tracking
±1.0 dB
±1.0 dB
±1.5 dB
Transmission Tracking
±1.0 dB
±1.0 dB
±1.5 dB
a. At 25 °C ±5 °C, with less than 1 °C deviation from the measurement calibration
temperature.
b. Only for analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Calibration Kit: 7-mm
85031B
Cable, APC-7: 24-inch
8120-4779
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
Calibration Kit: Type-N
85036B
Cable: 75Ω, Type-N, 24-inch
8120-2408
Procedure
First Full 2-Port Calibration
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-29.
2-50
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-29
First Full 2-Port Calibration Test Setup
2. Press Preset
Start
300
Avg
IF BW
3
k/m
k/m .
3. Press Cal CAL KIT SELECT CAL KIT CAL KIT:7mm (or CAL KIT: N 75Ω if the
analyzer has Option 075) RETURN RETURN CALIBRATE MENU FULL 2-PORT .
4. Press ISOLATION
OMIT ISOLATION .
5. Connect the OPEN end of the open/short combination (supplied in the calibration kit) to
analyzer test port 1.
6. Press REFLECTION FORWARD:OPEN .
7. Connect the SHORT end of the open/short combination to analyzer test port 1.
8. Press FORWARD:SHORT .
9. Replace the open/short combination with the termination (supplied in the calibration
kit).
10.Press FORWARD:LOAD .
11.Connect the OPEN end of the open/short combination to reference test port 2.
12.Press REVERSE:OPEN .
13.Connect the SHORT end of the open/short combination to reference test port 2.
14.Press REVERSE: SHORT .
15.Connect the termination to the reference test port 2.
16.Press REVERSE: LOAD .
17.When the analyzer displays PRESS ’DONE’ IF FINISHED WITH STD(s), press
STANDARDS DONE .
Wait for the message COMPUTING CAL COEFFICIENTS to disappear from the analyzer
display before proceeding to the next step.
Chapter 2
2-51
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
18.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-30.
Figure 2-30
Transmission Calibration Test Setup
19.Press TRANSMISSION DO BOTH FWD + REV .
20.Press DONE 2-PORT CAL .
Directivity (Forward) Calibration Coefficient
21.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
32
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
22.When the analyzer finishes the test, press Marker .
23.Using the front panel knob, locate the maximum value of the data trace for the 300 kHz
to 1.3 GHz frequency range.
24.Write the maximum value in the performance test record.
25.Repeat the previous two steps for the other frequency range(s) listed on the
performance test record.
Source Match (Forward) Calibration Coefficient
26.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
33
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
27.When the analyzer finishes the test, repeat steps 22 through 25.
Transmission Tracking (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient
28.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
43
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
29.When the analyzer finishes the test, press Marker .
30.Using the front panel knob to move the marker along the data trace, locate the
maximum and minimum values for the 300 kHz to 1.3 GHz frequency range.
31.Enter the data trace value that is of greater deviation from zero into the performance
test record. (This is the greater absolute value of either the maximum data trace value
or the minimum data trace value.)
32.Repeat the previous two steps for the other frequency range(s) listed on the
performance test record.
2-52
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Reflection Tracking (Forward) Calibration Coefficient
33.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
34
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
34.When the analyzer finishes the test, repeat steps 29 through 32.
Load Match (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient
35.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
42
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
36.When the analyzer finishes the test, repeat steps 22 through 25.
Second Full 2-Port Calibration
37.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-31.
Figure 2-31
Second Full 2-Port Calibration Test Setup
38.Press Preset
IF BW
Avg
3
k/m
Start
300
k/m .
39.Press Cal CAL KIT SELECT CAL KIT CAL KIT:7mm (or CAL KIT: N 75Ω if the
analyzer has Option 075) RETURN RETURN CALIBRATE MENU FULL 2-PORT .
40.Press ISOLATION
OMIT ISOLATION .
41.Connect the OPEN end of the open/short combination (supplied in the calibration kit) to
reference test port 1.
42.Press REFLECTION
FORWARD:OPEN .
43.Connect the SHORT end of the open/short combination to reference test port 1.
44.Press FORWARD:SHORT .
45.Replace the open/short combination with the termination (supplied in the calibration
kit).
46.Press FORWARD:LOAD .
47.Connect the OPEN end of the open/short combination to the analyzer test port 2.
48.Press REVERSE:OPEN .
Chapter 2
2-53
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
49.Connect the SHORT end of the open/short combination to the analyzer test port 2.
50.Press REVERSE: SHORT .
51.Connect the termination to the analyzer test port 2.
52.Press REVERSE: LOAD .
53.When the analyzer displays PRESS ’DONE’ IF FINISHED WITH STD(s), press
STANDARDS DONE .
Wait for the message COMPUTING CAL COEFFICIENTS to disappear from the analyzer
display before proceeding to the next step.
54.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-32.
Figure 2-32
Transmission Calibration Test Setup
55.Press TRANSMISSION DO BOTH FWD + REV .
56.Press DONE 2-PORT CAL .
Load Match (Forward) Calibration Coefficient
57.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
36
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
58.When the test is done, press Marker .
59.Using the front panel knob, locate the maximum value of the data trace for the 300 kHz
to 1.3 GHz frequency range.
60.Write the maximum value on the performance test record.
61.Repeat the previous three steps for the other frequency ranges listed on the
performance test record.
Directivity (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient
62.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
38
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
63.When the analyzer finishes the test, repeat steps 58 through 61.
2-54
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Source Match (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient
64.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
39
x1 . At the prompt, press
EXECUTE TEST .
65.When the analyzer finishes the test, repeat steps 58 through 61.
Reflection Tracking (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient
66.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
40
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
67.When the test is done, press Marker .
68.Using the front panel knob to move the marker along the data trace, locate the
maximum and minimum values for the 300 kHz to 1.3 GHz frequency range.
69.Enter the data trace value that is of greater deviation from zero into the performance
test record. (This is the greater absolute value of either the maximum data trace value
or the minimum data trace value.)
70.Repeat the previous three steps for the other frequency ranges listed on the
performance test record.
Transmission Tracking (Forward) Calibration Coefficient
71.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
37
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
72.When the analyzer finishes the test, repeat steps 67 through 70.
Chapter 2
2-55
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
10. System Trace Noise
Ratio measurements A/R and B/R are made at 3 GHz and 6 GHz to determine the
variability of the analyzer’s measurement data. IF bandwidths of 3 kHz and 10 Hz are
used for the test.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
Ratio
System Trace Noise
(Magnitudea)
System Trace
Noise (Phasea)
300 kHz to 3 GHz
A/R
<0.001 dB rms
<0.006 °rms
300 kHz to 3 GHz
B/R
<0.001 dB rms
<0.006 °rms
3 GHz to 6 GHz
(Option 006)
A/R
<0.002 dB rms
<0.012 °rms
3 GHz to 6 GHz
(Option 006)
B/R
<0.002 dB rms
<0.012 °rms
300 kHz to 3 GHz
A/R
<0.006 dB rms
<0.038 °rms
300 kHz to 3 GHz
B/R
<0.006 dB rms
<0.038 °rms
3 GHz to 6 GHz
(Option 006)
A/R
<0.010 dB rms
<0.070 °rms
3 GHz to 6 GHz
(Option 006)
B/R
<0.010 dB rms
<0.070 °rms
IF Bandwidth = 10 Hz
IF Bandwidth = 3 kHz
a. Trace noise is defined for a transmission measurement in CW mode using a
“through” cable having 0 dB loss, with the source set to +5 dBm, and no averaging.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part Number
Cable: APC-7, 24-inch
8120-4779
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
Cable: 75Ω, Type-N, 24-inch
8120-2408
Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-33.
2-56
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-33
System Trace Noise Test Setup
2. Press Preset
CW FREQ
Power
3
5
x1
Sweep Setup
NUMBER of POINTS
101
x1
G/n .
3. Press Marker Fctn MARKER MODE MENU MKR STATS ON to activate the
instrument’s statistics feature.
A/R Trace Noise Magnitude IF BW = 10 Hz
4. Press Avg
IF BW
5. Press Meas
10
x1 .
Trans: REV S12 (A/R) .
6. Press Sweep Setup TRIGGER MENU NUMBER OF GROUPS 3 x1 . Wait for the
sweeps to finish as indicated by the Hld notation on the left side of the display.
7. Write the s.dev (standard deviation) value shown, which appears on the analyzer
display, on the performance test record.
A/R Trace Noise Phase IF BW = 10 Hz
8. Press Format
PHASE .
9. Write the s.dev value, which appears on the analyzer display, on the performance test
record.
A/R Trace Noise Phase IF BW = 3 kHz
10.Press Avg
IF BW
3
k/m .
11.Press Sweep Setup TRIGGER MENU NUMBER OF GROUPS 3 x1 . Wait for the
sweeps to finish as indicated by the Hld notation on the left side of the display.
12.Write the s.dev value on the performance test record.
Chapter 2
2-57
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
A/R Trace Noise Magnitude IF BW = 3 kHz
13.Press Format
LOG MAG .
14.Write the s.dev value on the performance test record.
B/R Trace Noise Magnitude IF BW = 3 kHz
15.Press Meas
Trans: FWD S21 (B/R)
Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
3
x1 . Wait for the sweep to finish as indicated by the Hld
notation on the left side of the display.
NUMBER OF GROUPS
16.Write the s.dev value on the performance test record.
B/R Trace Noise Phase IF BW = 3 kHz
17.Press Format
PHASE .
18.Write the s.dev value on the performance test record.
B/R Trace Noise Phase IF BW = 10 Hz
19.Press Avg
IF BW
10
x1
Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
NUMBER OF GROUPS 3
x1 . Wait for the sweep to finish as indicated by the Hld
notation on the left side of the display.
20.Write the s.dev value on the performance test record.
B/R Trace Noise Magnitude IF BW = 10 Hz
21.Press Format
LOG MAG .
22.Write the s.dev value on the performance test record.
Option 006 only:
1. Press Sweep Setup
CW FREQ
6
G/n .
2. Go back to “A/R Trace Noise Magnitude IF BW = 10 Hz” on page 2-57, and perform this
entire procedure again. Record all values in the performance test record under “Test
Frequency 6 GHz.”
In Case of Difficulty
1. Perform the ADC Offset Correction Constants procedure, located in Chapter 3 ,
“Adjustments and Correction Constants.”
2. Repeat this performance test.
3. Suspect the A10 Digital IF board assembly if the analyzer still fails the test.
2-58
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
11. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
The analyzer’s receiver linearity versus input power is measured with a calibrated step
attenuator. Measurement uncertainty is minimized by using the analyzer’s capability to
perform error correction.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Chapter 2
2-59
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Power Meter
436A/437B/438A or E4418B/4419B
Power Sensor
8482A
Step Attenuator: 110 dB
8496A Option H19 (See note below.)
Adapter: APC-7 to Type-N (f)
11524A
Cable: GPIB
10833A
Calibration Kit: 7-mm, 50Ω
85031B
Cables (2): APC-7, 50Ω
8120-4779
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
Minimum Loss Pads (2): 50Ω to 75Ω
11852B
Adapters (2): APC-7 to Type-N (m)
11525A
NOTE
The HP/Agilent 8496A step attenuator (Option H19) comes with a special
calibration that supports the measurement uncertainties expressed in the
test record for this performance test.
The special calibration consists of two measurements. The first is a
measurement of the attenuation at each step. The data reported for this
measurement have the following uncertainties:
• ±0.006 dB from 0 to 40 dB
• ±0.015 dB from >40 to 80 dB
• ±0.025 dB from >80 to 90 dB
• ±0.05 dB >90 dB
The second calibration measurement characterizes match stability between
attenuator settings for each attenuator port. The vector difference of S11 or
(S22) between the reference attenuation step and all the other steps is
measured. The magnitude of this difference is certified to be <0.0316
(>30 dB).
2-60
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Procedure
Initial Calculations
1. Fill in the attenuator error values (referenced to 0 dB attenuation) by referring to the
calibration data for the 8496A step-attenuator. Refer to the note below if the calibration
data are not expressed as attenuation errors.
a. Find the column in the 8496A attenuation error table that pertains to the
attenuation errors for 30 MHz.
b. Starting with the 10 dB step in this column, write down the value in the
corresponding space in Table 2-1 for column B. This value should be placed in the
row for the 10 dB 8496A setting.
c. Continue transferring the remaining values of the 8496A attenuation errors to
column B in Table 2-1.
2. In Table 2-1, transfer the 10 dB error value located within the parenthesis in column B
to each space in column C.
NOTE
The 8496A used for this test will have known attenuator errors for
attenuations up to 100 dB using a test frequency of 30 MHz. The attenuation
used as a reference is 0 dB. If the available calibration data are not expressed
as attenuation errors, they can be converted to such a form by the following
equation:
(actual attenuation) − (expected attenuation) = attenuator error
Actual attenuation values that are greater than the expected attenuation
values will result in positive errors. Actual attenuation values that are less
than the expected attenuation values will result in negative errors.
Chapter 2
2-61
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Table 2-1
Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Calculations
A
B
C
D
(B − C)
E
F
(E − D)
8496A Attn.
(dB)
Attn. Error
(ref 0 dB)
10 dB Error
Value
Attn. Error
(ref 10 dB)
Expected
Measurement
(dB)
Expected
Measurement
(corrected)
(dB)
0
0 dB
10
(
10
)
0 dB
0
20
− 10
30
− 20
40
− 30
50
− 40
60
− 50
70
− 60
80
− 70
90
− 80
3. The values in column D result from changing the reference attenuation of the
calibration data of the 8496A to 10 dB.
Calculate the attenuation error values for this column by subtracting the values in
column C from the values in column B. The result is B − C = D.
4. The values in column F result from correcting the expected measurement value by the
amount of attenuator error.
Calculate the values in this column by subtracting the values in column D from the
values in column E. The result is E − D = F.
5. Transfer the values from column F in Table 2-1 to column F in the performance test
record for both test ports.
Power Meter Calibration
6. Zero and calibrate the power meter. (Refer to the power meter manual for details on
this procedure.)
7. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-34.
2-62
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-34
Chapter 2
Power Meter Calibration for Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
2-63
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
8. Set the step attenuator to 10 dB.
9. Set the following analyzer parameters:
•
Preset
•
NUMBER of POINTS
•
Power
•
Avg
Sweep Setup
−10
x1
IF BW
10
CW FREQ
51
30
M/µ
x1
x1
10.Set up the 8753ES for power meter calibration:
a. Select the 8753ES as the system controller:
•
Local
•
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
b. Set the power meter's address:
•
SET ADDRESSES
•
ADDRESS: P MTR/GPIB
13
x1
c. Select the appropriate power meter by pressing POWER MTR until the correct
model number is displayed. (Use the 438A/437 selection if the power meter is an
E4419B or E4418B.)
d. Select the calibration kit and enter the power sensor calibration data.
•
•
Cal
CAL KIT
SELECT CAL KIT
7mm 85031
CAL FACTOR SENSOR A (enter
the power sensor calibration data for 30 MHz) DONE
Cal
PWRMTR CAL
LOSS/SENSOR LISTS
11.Take a power meter calibration sweep.
•
Cal
•
ONE SWEEP
PWRMTR CAL
−20
x1
TAKE CAL SWEEP
12.Verify that the power meter reads approximately −20 dBm.
Full 2-Port Calibration
13.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-35.
2-64
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-35
Full 2-Port Calibration
14.Perform a full 2-port error correction with isolation using the HP/Agilent 85031B cal
kit.
Chapter 2
2-65
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Measure Test Port 2 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
15.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-36. Confirm that the step attenuator is set
to 10 dB.
Figure 2-36
Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Measurement
16.To set up the dynamic accuracy measurement, press the following:
•
Meas
•
Marker Fctn
•
Sweep Setup
Trans: FWD S21 (B/R)
MKR MODE MENU
TRIGGER MENU
STATS ON
SINGLE
17.Wait for the sweep to finish, then press Display
2-66
DATA → MEMORY
DATA/MEM .
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
18.Set the step attenuator to 0 dB.
19.Press Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
20.Press Format MORE REAL . Write the mean value (which appears on the
analyzer’s display) in the column marked “Real Part” in the performance test record.
Note that the analyzer will display units as mU, µU, or nU, which are abbreviations for
10−3 units, 10−6 units, and 10−9 units, respectively.
21.Press IMAGINARY . Write the mean value (which appears on the analyzer’s display) in
the column marked “Imaginary Part” in the performance test record. Note that the
analyzer will display units as mU, µU, or nU, which are abbreviations for 10−3 units,
10−6 units, and 10−9 units, respectively.
22.Repeat steps 19 through 21 for each setting of the step attenuator as written in the
performance test record.
23.For each pair of real and imaginary parts calculate the value given by the formula:
10 log10 [(Real Part)2 + (Imaginary Part)2]. Write the result in the performance test
record in the “Test Port Measurement” column (column “G”).
24.Calculate the dynamic accuracy for each attenuator setting by using the formula:
|G − F| (the absolute value of the difference between the values in column “G” and
column “F”).
Power Meter Calibration for Test Port 1
25.Zero and calibrate the power meter. (Refer to the power meter manual for details on
this procedure.)
26.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-34.
Chapter 2
2-67
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-37
Power Meter Calibration for Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
27.Set the step attenuator to 10 dB.
28.Set the following analyzer parameters:
•
Sweep Setup
•
Meas
2-68
TRIGGER MENU
CONTINUOUS
Trans: REV S12 (A/R)
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
29.Take a power meter calibration sweep.
•
Cal
•
ONE SWEEP
PWRMTR CAL
−20
x1
TAKE CAL SWEEP
30.Verify that the power meter reads approximately −20 dBm.
Full 2-Port Calibration
31.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-38.
Figure 2-38
Full 2-Port Calibration
32.Perform a full 2-port error correction with isolation using the 85031B cal kit. If,
necessary, refer to your analyzer’s user’s guide for detailed information on performing
calibrations.
Chapter 2
2-69
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Measure Test Port 1 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
33.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-39.
Figure 2-39
Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Measurement
34.Set the step attenuator to 10 dB.
35.To set up the dynamic accuracy measurement, press the following:
•
Display
•
Sweep Setup
DATA
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE
36.Wait for the sweep to finish, then press Display
DATA → MEMORY DATA/MEM .
37.Set the step attenuator to 0 dB.
2-70
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
38.Press Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
39.Press Format MORE REAL . Write the mean value (which appears on the
analyzer’s display) in the column marked “Real Part” in the performance test record.
Note that the analyzer will display units as mU µU or nU, which are abbreviations for
10−3 units, 10−6 units, and 10−9 units, respectively.
40.Press IMAGINARY . Write the mean value (which appears on the analyzer’s display) in
the column marked “Imaginary Part” in the performance test record. Note that the
analyzer will display units as mU µU or nU, which are abbreviations for 10−3 units, 10−6
units, and 10−9 units, respectively.
41.Repeat steps 38 through 40 for each setting of the step attenuator as written in the
performance test record.
42.For each pair of real and imaginary parts calculate the value given by the formula:
10 log10 [(Real Part)2 + (Imaginary Part)2]. Write the result in the performance test
record in the “Test Port Measurement” column (column “G”).
43.Calculate the dynamic accuracy for each attenuator setting by using the formula:
|G − F| (the absolute value of the difference between the values in column “G” and
column “F”).
In Case of Difficulty
1. If the analyzer fails the test at all power levels, be sure you followed the recommended
attenuator settings as listed in the performance test record. Repeat this performance
test.
2. If both test port measured values are out of specifications:
a. Recalibrate the power meter.
b. Repeat this performance test.
3. If the analyzer fails either test port 2 or test port 1 dynamic accuracy at lower power
levels:
a. Perform the following adjustments: “IF Amplifier Correction Constants (Test 51)” on
page 3-14 and “ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52)” on page 3-15.
b. Repeat this performance test.
c. If it still fails, replace the A10 Digital IF assembly.
d. Repeat the two adjustment procedures mentioned in this step and then repeat this
performance test.
Chapter 2
2-71
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
12. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Compression
Perform this test to verify the magnitude compression/expansion of the analyzer’s test port
receivers. Power sweeps from low to high power are made at designated CW frequencies. A
reference measurement is made while the signal to the receiver is attenuated to avoid
compression. The attenuation is removed and compression is observed and measured.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
Magnitudea
300 kHz to 3 GHz
≤0.42 dB
3 GHz to 6 GHz
≤0.76 dB
a. With a 10 Hz IF bandwidth.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Cable (2): 50Ω, APC-7
8120-4779
Step Attenuator
8496A Option 003 and Option H18
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
Minimum Loss Pad (2)
11852B
Adapters (2): APC-7 to Type-N (f)
11524A
Cables (2): 50Ω, Type-N 24 inch
8120-4781
Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-40 (Figure 2-41 for 75Ω analyzers).
2-72
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-40
Test Port Receiver Magnitude Compression Test Setup
Figure 2-41
Test Port Receiver Magnitude Compression for 75Ω Analyzers
2. On the analyzer, press Preset
3. Press Meas
INPUT PORTS
4. Press Sweep Setup
Marker
−10
x1
5. Press Sweep Setup
Avg
IF BW
x1 .
B.
SWEEP TYPE MENU
∆ MODE MENU
CW FREQ
10
300
POWER SWEEP
Start
−10
x1
∆ REF = 1 .
k/m
(or next CW frequency).
6. Set the step attenuator to 20 dB attenuation.
Chapter 2
2-73
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
7. Press TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
DATA → MEMORY
8. Press Display
DATA/MEM .
9. Set the step attenuator to 0 dB attenuation.
10.Press Sweep Setup
11.Press Scale Ref
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
AUTO SCALE .
12.Press Marker
MARKER 2
Marker Search
SEARCH: MAX .
13.Press Marker
MARKER 3
Marker Search
SEARCH: MIN .
14.Read the value of both markers and enter the largest absolute value in the performance
test record under “Measured Value Test Port 2.”
15.Repeat steps 5 through 14 for each CW frequency listed in the performance test record.
16.Press Meas
INPUT PORTS
A
TESTPORT 2 .
17.Repeat steps 5 through 14 for each CW frequency listed in the performance test record.
For step 14, record the values in the performance test record under “Measured Value,
Test Port 1.”
In Case of Difficulty
1. If the analyzer fails test port 2 magnitude compression:
a. Repeat this test.
b. Replace the A6 B sampler assembly if the analyzer still fails the test.
2. If the analyzer fails test port 1 magnitude compression:
a. Repeat this test.
b. Replace the A5 A sampler assembly if the analyzer still fails the test.
2-74
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
13. Test Port Receiver Phase Compression
Perform this test to verify the phase compression/expansion of the analyzer’s test port
receivers. Power sweeps from low to high power are made at designated CW frequencies. A
reference measurement is made while the signal to the receiver is attenuated to avoid
compression. The attenuation is removed and compression is observed and measured.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
CW Frequency
Test Port
Phasea
300 kHz to 3 GHz
Test Port 1
≤ 6°
3 GHz to 6 GHzb
Test Port 1
≤ 7.2°
a. With 10 Hz IF bandwidth.
b. Only for analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment for 50Ω Analyzers
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Cables (2): 50Ω, APC-7
8120-4779
Step Attenuator
8496A Option 003, H18
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
Minimum Loss Pad (2)
11852B
Adapters (2): APC-7 to Type-N (f)
11524A
Cables (2): 50Ω, Type-N, 24-inch
8120-4781
Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-42 (Figure 2-43 for 75Ω analyzers).
Chapter 2
2-75
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-42
Test Port Phase Compression Test Setup
Figure 2-43
Test Port Phase Compression Test Setup for 75Ω Analyzers
2. Press Preset
3. Press Meas
IF BW
Marker
−10
5. Press Sweep Setup
2-76
x1 .
INPUT PORTS
4. Press Sweep Setup
x1
10
B/R
Format
SWEEP TYPE MENU
x1
∆ MODE MENU
CW FREQ
300
k/m
PHASE .
POWER SWEEP
Start
−10
∆ REF = 1 .
(or next CW frequency).
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
6. Set the step attenuator to 20 dB attenuation.
7. Press TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
DATA → MEMORY
8. Press Display
DATA/MEM .
9. Set the step attenuator to 0 dB attenuation.
10.Press Sweep Setup
11.Press Scale Ref
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
AUTO SCALE .
12.Press Marker
MARKER 2
Marker Search
SEARCH: MAX .
13.Press Marker
MARKER 3
Marker Search
SEARCH: MIN. .
14.Read the value of both markers and enter the largest absolute value in the performance
test record under “Measured Value Test Port 2.”
15.Repeat steps 5 through 14 for each CW frequency listed in the performance test record.
16.Press Meas
INPUT PORTS
A/R
TESTPORT 2
Format
PHASE .
17.Repeat steps 5 through 14 for each CW frequency listed in the performance test record.
Record the entries under “Measured Value, Test Port 1.”
In Case of Difficulty
1. If the analyzer fails the test port 2 phase compression test:
a. Repeat this test.
b. Replace the A6 B sampler assembly if analyzer still fails the test.
2. If the analyzer fails the test port 1 phase compression test:
a. Repeat this test.
b. Replace the A5 A sampler assembly if analyzer still fails the test.
Chapter 2
2-77
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
14. Test Port Output/Input Harmonics (Analyzers with Option 002)
Perform this test to determine the spectral purity of the analyzer’s input and output test
ports. Output and input harmonic levels are measured using the analyzer’s harmonic
mode which sets the receiver’s frequency at the second or third harmonic of the source
frequency.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
NOTE
The test port input 3rd harmonic specifications are better than the test port
output 3rd harmonic specifications.
Specifications
Test Port
Harmonic
Limit
Output
2nd
< −25 dBc @ +10 dBma
Output
3rd
< −25 dBc @ +10 dBma
Input Port 1
2nd
< −15 dBc @ +8 dBm
Input Port 1
3rd
< −30 dBc @ +8 dBm
Input Port 2
2nd
< −15 dBc @ +8 dBm
Input Port 2
3rd
< −30 dBc @ +8 dBm
a. +8 dBm for analyzers with Option 014 or 075.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Cable: APC-7, 24-inch
8120-4779
Attenuators (2): 20 dB, APC-7
8492A Option 020
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
Minimum Loss Pad (2)
11852B
Cable: Type-N, 50Ω
8120-4781
Attenuators (2): 20 dB, Type-N
8491A Option 020
2-78
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Procedure
Test Port Output Worst-Case 2nd Harmonic
1. Press Preset Power 10
x1 to set the test port power to +10 dBm. (Set the power
to +8 dBm for analyzers with Option 014 or 075.)
2. Press Start 16
M/µ . To set the frequency range:
If you do not have Option 006, press Stop 1.5
G/n .
If you have Option 006, press Stop 3
G/n .
3. Press Avg
IF BW
10
x1 to set the IF bandwidth to 10 Hz.
4. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-44.
Figure 2-44
Test Port Output Harmonics Test Setup
5. Press Meas
Trans:REV S12 (A/R)
6. After one sweep, press Display
trace.
7. Press System
DATA → MEMORY
HARMONIC MEAS
8. After one sweep, press Scale Ref
9. Press Marker Search
INPUT PORTS
A .
DATA/MEM to normalize the
HARMONIC SECOND .
AUTO SCALE to get a better viewing of the trace.
SEARCH:MAX .
10.Write the marker 1 value (which appears on the analyzer display) on the performance
test record. This is the worst-case test port output 2nd harmonic.
Chapter 2
2-79
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Test Port Output Worst-Case 3rd Harmonic
11.To change the stop frequency:
If you do not have Option 006, press Stop 1 G/n .
If you have Option 006, press Stop 2 G/n .
12.Press System
HARMONIC MEAS
13.After one sweep, press Display
trace.
14.Press Scale Ref
15.Press System
HARMONIC OFF .
DATA → MEMORY
DATA/MEM to normalize the
AUTO SCALE to get a better viewing of the trace.
HARMONIC MEAS
16.After one sweep, press Scale Ref
17.Press Marker Search
HARMONIC THIRD .
AUTO SCALE .
SEARCH:MAX .
18.Write the marker 1 value on the performance test record.
Test Port 1 Input Worst-Case 2nd Harmonic
19.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-45.
Figure 2-45
Receiver Harmonics Test Setup
20.Press Preset
21.Press Avg
Power
IF BW
8
10
x1 .
x1 .
22.To set the frequency range, press Start 16
M/µ .
If you do not have Option 006, press Stop 1.5
G/n .
If you have Option 006, press Stop 3
G/n .
2-80
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
23.Press Meas
Trans:REV S12 (A/R)
24.After one sweep, press Display
trace.
25.Press System
DATA → MEMORY
HARMONIC MEAS
26.After one sweep, press Scale Ref
27.Press Marker Search
INPUT PORTS
A.
DATA/MEM to normalize the
HARMONIC SECOND .
AUTO SCALE to get a better viewing of the trace.
SEARCH:MAX .
28.Write the marker 1 value (which appears on the analyzer display) on the performance
test record. This is the worst-case Test Port 1 input (receiver channel A) 2nd harmonic.
Test Port 1 Input Worst-Case 3rd Harmonic
29.To change the stop frequency for measuring the receiver 3rd harmonic:
If you do not have Option 006, press Stop 1 G/n .
If you have Option 006, press Stop 2 G/n .
30.Press System
HARMONIC MEAS
31.After one sweep, press Display
trace.
32.Press Scale Ref
33.Press System
HARMONIC OFF .
DATA → MEMORY
DATA/MEM to normalize the
AUTO SCALE to get a better viewing of the trace.
HARMONIC MEAS
34.After one sweep, press Scale Ref
35.Press Marker Search
HARMONIC THIRD .
AUTO SCALE .
SEARCH:MAX .
36.Write the marker 1 value on the performance test record.
37.Press System
HARMONIC MEAS
HARMONIC OFF .
Test Port 2 Input Worst-Case 2nd Harmonic
38.To set the stop frequency for measuring the 2nd harmonic:
If you do not have Option 006, press Stop 1.5
G/n .
G/n .
If you have Option 006, press Stop 3
39.Press Meas
Trans:FWD S21 (B/R)
40.After one sweep, press Display
trace.
41.Press System
DATA → MEMORY
HARMONIC MEAS
42.After one sweep, press Scale Ref
43.Press Marker Search
INPUT PORTS
B.
DATA/MEM to normalize the
HARMONIC SECOND .
AUTO SCALE to get a better viewing of the trace.
SEARCH:MAX .
44.Write the marker 1 value (which appears on the analyzer display) on the performance
test record. This is the worst-case port 2 input (receiver channel B) 2nd harmonic.
Chapter 2
2-81
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Test Port 2 Input Worst-Case 3rd Harmonic
45.To change the stop frequency for measuring the receiver 3rd harmonic:
If you do not have Option 006, press Stop 1
G/n .
If you have Option 006, press Stop 2
G/n .
46.Press System
HARMONIC MEAS
47.After one sweep, press Display
trace.
48.Press Scale Ref
49.Press System
HARMONIC OFF .
DATA → MEMORY
DATA/MEM to normalize the
AUTO SCALE to get a better viewing of the trace.
HARMONIC MEAS
50.After one sweep, press Scale Ref
51.Press Marker Search
HARMONIC THIRD .
AUTO SCALE .
SEARCH:MAX .
52.Write the marker 1 value on the performance test record.
2-82
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
15. Harmonic Measurement Accuracy (Analyzers with Option 002)
This test verifies the network analyzer’s accuracy when operating in the harmonic
measurement mode (Option 002). Using a power splitter, an external source injects the
harmonic signal into both the analyzer’s receiver and the power meter. The analyzer’s
reading is compared to that of the power meter. The allowable difference is shown in the
“Specifications” table, below.
Equipment warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
Accuracy
16 MHz to 3 GHz
±1.5 dB
3 GHz to 6 GHza
±3.0 dB
a. Only for analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
External Source
83712B
Power Meter
436A/437B/438A or 4418B/4419B
Power Splitter
11667A Option 001
Power Sensor
8482A
Adapter: Type-N (f) to Type-N (f)
1250-0777
Adapters (2): APC-7 to Type-N (f)
11524A
Cables (2): 50Ω, Type-N, 24 inch
8120-4781
Cable: BNC, 48 inch
8120-1840
Additional Equipment for Option 006 Analyzers
Power Sensor
8481A
Additional Equipment for Option 075 Analyzers
Minimum Loss Pad (2)
11852B
Procedure
Determine the Cable Loss at Specified Frequencies
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-46. Observe the differences between the
standard 8753ES and the Option 075 (75Ω) 8753ES.
Chapter 2
2-83
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-46
Harmonic Measurement Accuracy, Cable Loss Setup 1
2. Press Preset
3. Press Meas
Start
40
M/µ .
Trans: S21 (B/R)
CALIBRATE MENU
Cal
RESPONSE
THRU .
4. Disconnect the cable from Test Port 2. Connect the type-N (f) to type-N (f) adapter to the
end of the cable and attach the second type-N cable as shown in Figure 2-47.
Figure 2-47
Harmonic Measurement Accuracy, Cable Loss Setup 2
5. Press Scale Ref
SCALE/DIV
6. Press Sweep Setup
2-84
1
x1 .
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
7. Press Marker . Enter the first external source frequency (40 MHz) by pressing 40
M/µ . Read the value of the marker (in dB, in the upper right of the display), and enter
this value in the performance test record under “Cable Loss.” Repeat this step for all
external source frequencies listed in the performance test record.
Instrument Setup
8. Zero and calibrate the power meter for the 8482A power sensor.
9. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 2-48. For the type-N cable, use the one that
was added in step 4.
10.On the analyzer, press:
Preset
Avg
IF BW
SCALE/DIV
Scale Ref
Marker Fctn
1
k/m
1
Meas
INPUT PORTS
B
x1
MARKER MODE MENU
STATS ON
11.On the external source, set the power level for 6 dBm.
Figure 2-48
Harmonic Measurement Accuracy Test Setup
Harmonic Measurement Accuracy
12.On the analyzer, press:
System
HARMONIC MEAS
SECOND . Then press Sweep Setup
CW FREQ
20
M/µ (or the next fundamental frequency for the network analyzer).
13.Set the external source for CW operation at 40 MHz (or the next second harmonic
frequency).
Chapter 2
2-85
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests
14.On the analyzer, press TRIGGER MENU SINGLE . Record the “mean” reading of the
marker in the performance test record under “Network Analyzer Reading” (column B)
for the second harmonic (40 MHz, or the next second harmonic frequency).
15.On the power meter, set the cal factor appropriate for the frequency of the external
source. Record the power meter reading in the performance test record under “Power
Meter Meas” for 40 MHz, or the next second harmonic frequency.
16.Set the external source for CW operation at 60 MHz, or the next third harmonic
frequency.
17.On the analyzer, press System
HARMONIC MEAS
THIRD .
Then press Sweep Setup TRIGGER MENU SINGLE .
Record the “mean” reading of the marker in the performance test record under
“Network Analyzer Reading” for the third harmonic (60 MHz or the next third harmonic
frequency).
18.On the power meter, set the cal factor appropriate for the frequency of the external
source. Record the power meter reading in the performance test record under “Power
Meter Meas” for 60 MHz, or the next third harmonic frequency.
19.Repeat steps 12 through 18 for the fundamental, second and third harmonic
frequencies. Before measuring harmonics above 3 GHz, zero and calibrate the power
meter using the 8481A power sensor. Be sure to use the correct cal factor.
20.Use the entries in the performance test record and the following calculation to
determine the measurement accuracy for each harmonic frequency.
a. Add the cable loss to the power meter reading and record the result in column A.
b. Subtract the network analyzer readings (column B) from the entries in column A.
Record the results in the column for Harmonic Measurement Accuracy.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Check all connections.
2. Ensure that correct power meter cal factors were used.
3. Refer to Chapter 8 , “Receiver Troubleshooting.”
2-86
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Use this section of the manual if you are performing system verification and/or
performance tests on an 8753ET analyzer. If your instrument is an 8753ES, turn to
“Agilent 8753ES System Verification and Performance Tests” on page 2-5.
System Verification Cycle and Kit Re-certification
Agilent Technologies recommends that you verify your network analyzer measurement
system every six months. Agilent Technologies also suggests that you get your verification
kit re-certified annually. Refer to the HP/Agilent 85029B 7-mm Verification Kit Operating
and Service Manual for more information.
Check to see how the verification kit floppy disk is labeled:
• If your verification disk is labeled HP/Agilent 8753D, HP/Agilent 8753E,
HP/Agilent 8753ES, or HP/Agilent 8753ET Verification Data Disk, you may
proceed with the system verification.
• If your verification disk is not labeled as indicated above, you may send your
HP/Agilent 85029B 7-mm verification kit to the nearest service center for
recertification, which includes a data disk that you can use with the 8753ET.
8753ET System Verification
This system verification consists of three separate procedures:
1. “Initialization” on page 2-88
2. “Enhanced Response Calibration” on page 2-89
3. “Device Verification” on page 2-91
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Model Number
Calibration Kit: 7-mm
85031B
Verification Kit: 7-mm
85029B
Test Port Extension Cable Set: 7-mm
11857D
Adapters (2): Type-N (m) to APC-7 (from cal kit)
85032B or 11525A
Printer:
HP ThinkJet/DeskJet/LaserJet
Chapter 2
2-87
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Initialization
1. Clear all internal memory.
CAUTION
This will erase all instrument states that may be stored in internal memory.
Perform the following steps to save any instrument states that are stored in
internal memory to a floppy disk.
a. Press Save/Recall
SELECT DISK
INTERNAL MEMORY
RETURN .
b. Select an instrument state and press RECALL STATE .
c. Press SELECT DISK
INTERNAL DISK
RETURN
SAVE STATE .
d. If the instrument state file was not saved to disk with the same name that it had
while in internal memory, you may wish to rename the file.
Press FILE UTILITIES
DONE .
RENAME FILE , enter the desired name, and press
e. Repeat steps a through d for each instrument state that you wish to save.
To clear all internal memory, press System
RESET MEMORY Preset .
SERVICE MENU
PEEK/POKE
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-49. Let the system warm up for 30
minutes.
Figure 2-49
2-88
System Verification Test Setup
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
3. While the equipment is warming up, review the connector care information in Table 1-3
on page 1-7. Good connections and clean, undamaged connectors are critical for
accurate measurement results.
4. Insert the verification kit disk into the analyzer disk drive.
5. Press Preset
Save/Recall
SELECT DISK
INTERNAL DISK .
6. If you want a printout of the verification data for all the devices, press System
SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS RECORD ON . If you want a printout of the
graph from the display, press DUMP GRAPH ON .
NOTE
If you switch on the record function, you cannot switch it off during the
verification procedure.
7. Position the paper in the printer so that printing starts at the top of the page.
8. If you have difficulty with the printer:
• If the interface on your printer is GPIB, verify that the printer address is set to 1 (or
change the setting in the analyzer to match the printer).
• If the interface on your printer is serial or parallel, be sure that you selected the
printer port and the printer type correctly. Refer to the analyzer’s user’s guide for
more information on how to perform these tasks.
9. Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
SYS VER TESTS
EXECUTE TEST .
10.When the analyzer displays Sys Ver Init DONE, the initialization procedure is
complete.
CAUTION
Do not press Preset or recall another instrument state. You must use the
instrument state that you loaded during the initialization procedure.
Enhanced Response Calibration
11.Press Cal
CAL KIT
SELECT CAL KIT
CAL KIT:7mm 85031
RETURN
RETURN .
12.Press CALIBRATE MENU
13.Press ISOLATION
ENHANCED RESPONSE
TRANS/REFL ENH. .
OMIT ISOLATION .
14.Press REFLECTION .
15.Connect the “open” end of the open/short combination (supplied in the HP/Agilent
85031B calibration kit) to reference test port 1, as shown in Figure 2-50.
Chapter 2
2-89
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-50
Connections for Measurement Calibration Standards
16.Press FORWARD:OPEN .
17.When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard, connect the “short” end of the
open/short combination to reference test port 1.
18.Press FORWARD:SHORT .
19.When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard, connect the 50 ohm termination
(supplied in the calibration kit) to reference test port 1.
20.Press FORWARD:LOAD .
21.When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard, press STANDARDS DONE .
22.Remove the 50 ohm termination from reference test port 1 and connect both reference
test ports together as shown in Figure 2-51.
Figure 2-51
2-90
Transmission Calibration Setup
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
23.Press TRANSMISSION
DO BOTH FWD THRUS .
24.Press DONE FWD ENH RESP .
25.Press Save/Recall SELECT DISK INTERNAL MEMORY
to save the calibration into the analyzer internal memory.
RETURN
SAVE STATE
26.When the analyzer finishes saving the instrument state, press SELECT DISK
INTERNAL DISK .
Device Verification
27.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
28
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
28.At the prompt, connect the 20 dB attenuator (supplied in the verification kit) as shown
in Figure 2-52.
29.Press CONTINUE to run the test:
• If you switched the record function off, the test pauses after each measurement.Press
CONTINUE after each measurement.
• If you switched the record function on, the analyzer takes all the required
measurements for the test without pausing. Also, the analyzer only displays and
prints the PASS/FAIL information for the measurements that are valid for system
verification.
Figure 2-52
Connections for the 20 dB Verification Device
30.When the analyzer finishes all the measurements, connect the 50 dB attenuator
(supplied in the verification kit), as shown in Figure 2-53.
Chapter 2
2-91
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-53
Connections for the 50 dB Verification Device
31.Press 29
x1
EXECUTE TEST
CONTINUE .
32.When all measurements are complete, replace the verification device with the
verification mismatch, as shown in Figure 2-54. Be sure that you connect Port A of the
verification mismatch to reference test port 1.
Figure 2-54
Mismatch Device Verification Setup 1
33.Press RETURN TESTS
30
x1
EXECUTE TEST
CONTINUE .
34.When the analyzer finishes all the measurements, connect the mismatch verification
device as shown in Figure 2-55. Notice that Port B is now connected to reference test
port 1.
2-92
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-55
Mismatch Device Verification Setup 2
35.Press RETURN
TESTS
31
x1
EXECUTE TEST
CONTINUE .
36.You have completed the system verification procedure when the analyzer displays
Ver Def 4 DONE.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Inspect all connections.
CAUTION
Do not disconnect the cables from the analyzer test ports. Doing so will
invalidate the calibration that you have done earlier.
2. Press Preset Save/Recall . Using the front panel knob, highlight the title of the
enhanced response calibration that you did earlier, then press RECALL STATE .
3. Repeat the “Device Verification” procedure.
4. If the analyzer still fails the test, check the measurement calibration as follows:
a. Press Preset .
b. Recall the calibration by pressing Save/Recall
INTERNAL MEMORY RETURN .
SELECT DISK
c. Use the front panel knob to highlight the calibration you want to recall and press
RECALL STATE .
d. Connect the short to reference test port 1.
e. Press Meas
REFLECTION
f. Press Scale Ref
Chapter 2
SCALE/DIV
Sweep Setup
0.05
TRIGGER MENU
CONTINUOUS .
x1 .
2-93
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
g. Check that the trace response is 0.00 ± 0.05 dB.
h. If the trace response is out of the specified limits, repeat the “Enhanced Response
Calibration” and “Device Verification” procedures.
5. Refer to Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here,” for more troubleshooting
information.
2-94
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
8753ET Performance Tests
The following tests comprise the performance tests for your analyzer. Make a copy of the
“Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records,” starting on page 2-161, to record the results
of these tests.
1. Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy, on page 2-96
2. External Source Mode Frequency Range, on page 2-98
3. Reflection Test Port Output Power Level Accuracy, on page 2-100
4. Reflection Test Port Output Power Linearity (Analyzers without Option 004), on
page 2-102
5. Reflection Test Port Output Power Linearity (Analyzers with Option 004), on
page 2-108
6. Minimum R Channel Level, on page 2-114
7. Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level, on page 2-119
8. Transmission Test Port Input Frequency Response, on page 2-122
9. Test Port Crosstalk, on page 2-127
10. Uncorrected Port Performance, on page 2-131
11. System Trace Noise, on page 2-136
Chapter 2
2-95
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
1. Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy
This test determines the analyzer’s reflection test port output frequency range and
accuracy over its entire operating frequency range. A frequency counter is used to
determine the analyzer’s output frequency.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
Frequency Accuracya
300 kHz to 3 GHz
±10 ppm
3 GHz to 6 GHzb
±10 ppm
a. At 25 °C ±5 °C.
b. Only for analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Frequency Counter
5350B/51B/52B
Cable: 50Ω, Type-N, 24 inch
8120-4781
Adapter: APC-3.5 (f) to Type-N (f)
1250-1745
Adapter: Type-N (f) to BNC (m)
1250-0077
Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-56.
Figure 2-56
2-96
Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
2. Press Preset
3. Press 300
record.
Sweep Setup
CW FREQ .
k/m and write the frequency counter reading on the performance test
4. Repeat step 3 for each instrument frequency listed in the performance test record.
In Case of Difficulty
1. If any measured frequency is close to the specification limits, check the time base
accuracy of the frequency counter used.
2. If the analyzer fails by a significant margin at all frequencies (especially if the deviation
increases with frequency), the master time base probably needs adjustment. In this
case, refer to the “Frequency Accuracy Adjustment” on page 3-43. The “Fractional-N
Frequency Range Adjustment” on page 3-40 also affects frequency accuracy.
3. Refer to the Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting,” if the problem persists.
Chapter 2
2-97
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
2. External Source Mode Frequency Range
CW signals from an external source are fed into the R channel input when the instrument
is in external source mode. Proper phase lock conditions are confirmed at a power level of
−25 dBm.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
300 kHz to 3 GHz
300 kHz to 6 GHza
a. Only for analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
External Source
83620A Option 001 or 83712B Option 1E1
Cable: Type-N (m)
8120-4781
Adapter: APC-3.5 (f) to Type-N (f)
1250-1745
Adapter: APC-3.5 (m) to Type-N (f)
1250-1750
Procedure
1. Set the external source for a CW frequency of 10 MHz and power level of −25 dBm.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-57.
Figure 2-57
External Source Mode Frequency Range Test Setup
3. On the network analyzer, press Preset
2-98
Meas
INPUT PORTS
R.
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
4. Press System
CW FREQ
10
INSTRUMENT MODE
EXT SOURCE AUTO
Sweep Setup
M/µ .
5. Check to see if the analyzer is phase locking to the external CW signal:
• If the analyzer displays any phase lock error messages, write “UNLOCK” in the
performance test record for the set CW signal.
• If the analyzer does not display any phase lock error messages, write “LOCK” in the
performance test record for the set CW signal.
6. Set the external source to a CW frequency of 20 MHz.
7. On the analyzer, press 20
M/µ .
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other external source CW frequencies listed in the
performance test record.
In Case of Difficulty
If the analyzer displayed any phase lock error messages:
1. Be sure the external source power is set to −25 dBm.
2. Make sure the analyzer's “Ext Source Auto” feature is selected. In addition, verify that
the analyzer is set to measure its input channel R.
3. Verify that all connections are tight.
Chapter 2
2-99
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
3. Reflection Test Port Output Power Level Accuracy
Perform this test to confirm the accuracy of the 8753ET test port output power. A power
meter is used to determine the output power level from the reflection port for selected CW
frequencies. This measurement is compared to the level set by the network analyzer. The
difference must be within the specified tolerance.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
Reflection Test Port
Output Power Level Accuracya
300 kHz to 3 GHz
±1.0 dB
3 GHz to 6 GHzb
±1.0 dB
a. At −5 dBm (analyzers without Option 004); −10 dBm (Option 004).
Holds at 25 °C ±5 °C
b. Only for analyzers with Option 006
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Power Meter
436A/437B/438A or E4418B/4419B
Power Sensor
8482A
Additional Equipment for Option 006 Analyzers
Power Sensor
8481A
Procedure
1. Zero and calibrate the power meter. For more information on how to perform this task,
refer to the power meter operating manual.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-58.
2-100
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-58
Reflection Test Port Output Power Level Accuracy Test Setup
3. Press Preset Power . For analyzers with Option 004, press −10
without Option 004, press −5
x1 .
4. Press Sweep Setup CW FREQ
meter for this CW frequency.
300
x1 . For analyzers
k/m . Set the calibration factor on the power
5. Write the power meter reading on the performance test record.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each CW frequency listed in the performance test record. For
analyzers with Option 006, use the 8481A power sensor for all frequencies above 3 GHz.
Be sure to recalibrate the power meter after changing sensors.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Be sure the source power is switched on. Press Power . Check the SOURCE PWR
softkey; “ON” should be highlighted. Otherwise, press SOURCE PWR to switch on the
source power.
2. Refer to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting,” for more troubleshooting information.
Chapter 2
2-101
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
4. Reflection Test Port Output Power Linearity
(Analyzers without Option 004)
This test verifies the analyzer’s test port output power linearity throughout the analyzer’s
frequency range. A power meter calibration sets the reference output power across the
analyzer’s frequency range. The network analyzer’s B-channel receiver is used to
determine power linearity after each change in output power.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Power Range
Power Level Linearitya
−20 to −15 dBm
± 0.5 dB
−15 to 0 dBm
± 0.2 dB
0 to + 5 dBm
± 0.5 dB
a. Relative to −5 dBm from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
(6 GHz for Option 006).
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Power Meter
437A/438A or E4418B/4419B
Power Sensor
8482A
Attenuator: 20 dB, Type-N
8491A Option 020
RF Cable: 50Ω, Type-N, 24 inch
8120-4781
Additional Equipment for Option 006 Analyzers
Power Sensor
8481A
Procedure
Power Meter Calibration
1. Zero and calibrate the power meter for one or both sensors.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-59.
2-102
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-59
Setup for Power Meter Calibration
3. Press Preset .
4. Press Avg
IF BW
−5
POWER
5. Press Start
100
x1
Sweep Setup
51
x1
x1 .
300
k/m .
a. If your analyzer has Option 006, press Stop
6. Press Local
NUMBER of POINTS
3
G/n .
SYSTEM CONTROLLER .
7. Press SET ADDRESSES and POWER MTR until the analyzer shows the correct
power meter model. (Use the 438A/437 selection if the power meter is an HP/Agilent
E4419B or E4418B.)
8. Press ADDRESS: P MTR/GPIB . The default power meter GPIB address is 13. Make
sure it is the same as your power meter GPIB address. Otherwise, use the analyzer
front panel keypad to enter the correct GPIB address for your power meter.
9. Press Cal
PWRMTR CAL .
10.Press LOSS/SENSR LISTS CAL FACTOR SENSOR A . Refer to the back of the power
sensor to locate the different calibration factor values along with their corresponding
frequencies.
NOTE
Chapter 2
The analyzer’s calibration factor sensor table can hold a maximum of 55
calibration factor data points.
2-103
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
The following softkeys are included in the sensor calibration factor entries menu:
SEGMENT
press to select a point where you can use the front panel knob or entry
keys to enter a value.
EDIT
press to edit or change a previously entered value.
DELETE
press to delete a point from the sensor calibration factor table.
ADD
select this key to add a point into the sensor calibration factor table.
CLEAR LIST
select this key to erase the entire sensor calibration factor table.
DONE
select this key when done entering points to the sensor calibration
factor table.
As an example, the following are the keystrokes for entering the first two calibration
factor data points for the 8482A power sensor (assuming CF% = 96.4 at 100 kHz and
CF% = 98.4 at 300 kHz):
a. From the sensor calibration factor entries menu, press ADD .
b. Press FREQUENCY 100
k/m . If you make an entry error, press
re-enter the correct value again.
c. Press CAL FACTOR
96.4
and
x1 .
d. Press DONE to terminate the first calibration factor data point entry.
e. To enter the second cal factor data point, press ADD .
f. Press FREQUENCY
300
k/m .
g. Press CAL FACTOR
98.4
x1 .
h. To terminate the second calibration factor data point entry, press DONE .
i. Press SEGMENT and use the front panel knob to scroll through the sensor
calibration factors table. Check to be sure all values are entered correctly. If you see
an error, use the front panel knob to point to the data point you want to modify and
press EDIT .
11.Press the appropriate softkeys to create a power sensor calibration factors table.
12.Press DONE to exit the sensor calibration factor entries menu.
13.Press RETURN
−5
x1 to set the calibration power to −5 dBm.
14.Press ONE SWEEP TAKE CAL SWEEP to start the power meter calibration.
NOTE
2-104
The analyzer displays the PC annotation, indicating the power meter
calibration is done and the error correction is active.
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Output Power Linearity Measurement from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
1. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 2-60.
Figure 2-60
Output Power Linearity Test Setup
2. Press Meas
B.
INPUT PORTS
3. Press Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
4. Press Display
DATA → MEMORY
5. Press Marker
∆ MODE MENU
300
k/m
FIXED MKR VALUE
6. Press Power
−20
7. Press Sweep Setup
8. Press Marker
Marker Search
SINGLE .
DATA/MEM .
FIXED MKR POSITION
−15
x1
RETURN
FIXED MKR STIMULUS
∆ REF = ∆ FIXED MKR .
x1 (or the next power setting from the performance test record).
TRIGGER MENU
MARKER 1
SINGLE .
Marker Search
SEARCH: MAX
Marker
MARKER 2
SEARCH:MIN .
9. Read the value for marker 1 from the display and enter it in the performance test
record in the “Marker 1 (Maximum)” column. Enter the value of marker 2 in the
“Marker 2 (Minimum) column.
10.Press Marker ∆ MODE MENU FIXED MKR POSITION FIXED MKR VALUE
−13
x1 (or the next power offset value from the performance test record)
RETURN .
11.Repeat steps 6 through 10 for all power settings and associated power offsets listed on
the performance test record in the 300 kHz to 3 GHz range.
12.The marker 1 (maximum) and marker 2 (minimum) readings should be within the
specified range for each power level with reference to the fixed marker value.
Chapter 2
2-105
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
13.If your analyzer does not have Option 006, this completes the test.
If your analyzer has Option 006: go on to “Power Meter Calibration from 3 GHz to 6
GHz,” next.
Power Meter Calibration from 3 GHz to 6 GHz
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-59, using the 8481A power sensor. Zero
and calibrate the power meter for this new sensor.
2. Press Start
3
3. Press Cal
G/n
Stop
PWRMTR CAL
G/n .
6
−5
x1 .
4. Press LOSS/SENSR LISTS CAL FACTOR SENSOR B . Press the appropriate softkeys
to build a sensor calibration factor table for the 8481A power sensor (sensor B).
5. Press DONE to exit the sensor calibration factor entries menu.
6. Press USE SENSOR B to select the 8481A sensor. Press Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU CONTINUOUS .
7. Press Cal PWRMTR CAL ONE SWEEP TAKE CAL SWEEP to start the power
meter calibration. The calibrated port power should remain at −5 dBm.
Output Power Linearity Measurement from 3 GHz to 6 GHz
1. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 2-60.
2. Press Meas
B.
INPUT PORTS
3. Press Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
4. Press Display
DATA → MEMORY
5. Press Marker
∆ MODE MENU
3
G/n
FIXED MKR VALUE
6. Press Power
−20
7. Press Sweep Setup
8. Press Marker
Marker Search
SINGLE .
DATA/MEM .
FIXED MKR POSITION
−15
x1
RETURN
FIXED MKR STIMULUS
∆ REF = ∆ FIXED MKR .
x1 (or the next power setting from the performance test record).
TRIGGER MENU
MARKER 1
SINGLE .
Marker Search
SEARCH: MAX
Marker
MARKER 2
SEARCH:MIN .
9. Read the value for marker 1 from the display and enter it in the performance test
record in the “Marker 1 (Maximum)” column. Enter the value of marker 2 in the
“Marker 2 (Minimum)” column.
10.Press Marker ∆ MODE MENU FIXED MKR POSITION FIXED MKR VALUE
−13
x1 (or the next power offset value from the performance test record)
RETURN .
11.Repeat steps 6 through 10 for all power settings and associated power offsets listed on
the performance test record in the 3 GHz to 6 GHz range.
2-106
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
12.The marker 1 (maximum) and marker 2 (minimum) readings should be within the
specified range for each power level with reference to the fixed marker value.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Ensure that the power meter and power sensor(s) are operating to specifications. Be
sure you set the power meter calibration factor for the range of frequencies that you are
testing.
2. Verify that there is power coming out of the analyzer’s reflection test port. Be sure you
did not accidentally switch off the analyzer’s internal source. If you did so, press
Sweep Setup POWER SOURCE PWR ON .
3. Repeat this performance test.
Chapter 2
2-107
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
5. Reflection Test Port Output Power Linearity
(Analyzers with Option 004)
This test verifies the analyzer’s test port output power linearity throughout the analyzer’s
frequency range. A power meter calibration sets the reference output power across the
analyzer’s frequency range. The network analyzer’s B-channel receiver is used to
determine power linearity after each change in output power.
NOTE
This test does not verify the functionality of the step attenuator. To verify its
function, perform “Step 2. Operator's Check” on page 4-6.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Power Range
Power Level Linearitya
−15 dBm to +5 dBm
± 0.2 dB
+5 to +10 dBm
± 0.5 dB
a. Relative to 0 dBm from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
(6 GHz for Option 006).
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Power Meter
437A/438A or E4418B/4419B
Power Sensor
8482A
Attenuator: 20 dB, Type-N
8491A Option 020
RF Cable: 50Ω, Type-N, 24 inch
8120-4781
Additional Equipment for Option 006 Analyzers
Power Sensor
8481A
Procedure
Power Meter Calibration
1. Zero and calibrate the power meter for one or both sensors.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-61, using the 8482A power sensor.
2-108
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-61
Setup for Power Meter Calibration
3. Press Preset .
4. Press Avg
IF BW
100
x1
Sweep Setup
NUMBER of POINTS
51
x1 .
5. Press Start 300
k/m .
If your analyzer has Option 006:
Press Stop 3
G/n .
6. Press Power
7. Press Local
POWER RANGE MAN
POWER RANGES
RANGE 0
0
x1 .
SYSTEM CONTROLLER .
8. Press SET ADDRESSES and POWER MTR until the analyzer shows the correct
power meter model. (Use the 438A/437 selection if the power meter is an E4419B or
E4418B.)
9. Press ADDRESS: P MTR/GPIB . The default power meter GPIB address is 13. Make
sure it is the same as your power meter GPIB address. Otherwise, use the analyzer
front panel keypad to enter the correct GPIB address for your power meter.
NOTE
The analyzer displays the PRm annotation, indicating that the analyzer power
range is set to MANUAL.
10.Press Cal
PWRMTR CAL .
11.Press LOSS/SENSR LISTS CAL FACTOR SENSOR A . Refer to the back of the power
sensor to locate the different calibration factor values along with their corresponding
frequencies.
Chapter 2
2-109
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
NOTE
The analyzer’s calibration factor sensor table can hold a maximum of 55
calibration factor data points.
The following softkeys are included in the sensor calibration factor entries menu:
SEGMENT
press to select a point where you can use the front panel knob or entry
keys to enter a value.
EDIT
press to edit or change a previously entered value.
DELETE
press to delete a point from the sensor calibration factor table.
ADD
select this key to add a point into the sensor calibration factor table.
CLEAR LIST
select this key to erase the entire sensor calibration factor table.
DONE
select this key when done entering points to the sensor calibration
factor table.
As an example, the following are the keystrokes for entering the first two calibration
factor data points for the 8482A power sensor (assuming CF% = 96.4 at 100 kHz and
CF% = 98.4 at 300 kHz):
a. From the sensor calibration factor entries menu, press ADD .
b. Press FREQUENCY 100
k/m . If you make an entry error, press
re-enter the correct value again.
c. Press CAL FACTOR
96.4
and
x1 .
d. Press DONE to terminate the first calibration factor data point entry.
e. To enter the second cal factor data point, press ADD .
f. Press FREQUENCY
300
k/m .
g. Press CAL FACTOR
98.4
x1 .
h. To terminate the second calibration factor data point entry, press DONE .
i. Press SEGMENT and use the front panel knob to scroll through the sensor
calibration factors table. Check to be sure all values are entered correctly. If you see
an error, use the front panel knob to point to the data point you want to modify and
press EDIT .
12.Press the appropriate softkeys to create a power sensor calibration factors table.
13.Press DONE to exit the sensor calibration factor entries menu.
14.Press RETURN ONE SWEEP TAKE CAL SWEEP to start the power meter
calibration. (The Port 1 Cal Power is 0 dBm, the reference power level for power
linearity measurements.)
2-110
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
The analyzer displays the PC annotation, indicating the power meter
calibration is done and the error correction is active.
NOTE
Output Power Linearity Measurement
1. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 2-62.
Figure 2-62
Output Power Linearity Test
2. Press Meas
B.
INPUT PORTS
3. Press Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
4. Press Display
DATA → MEMORY
5. Press Marker
∆ MODE MENU
300
k/m
FIXED MKR VALUE
6. Press Power
−15
7. Press Sweep Setup
8. Press Marker
Marker Search
SINGLE .
DATA/MEM .
FIXED MKR POSITION
−15
x1
RETURN
FIXED MKR STIMULUS
∆ REF = ∆ FIXED MKR .
x1 (or the next power setting from the performance test record).
TRIGGER MENU
MARKER 1
SINGLE .
Marker Search
SEARCH: MAX
Marker
MARKER 2
SEARCH:MIN .
9. Read the value for marker 1 from the display and enter it in the performance test
record in the “Marker 1 (Maximum)” column. Enter the value of marker 2 in the
“Marker 2 (Minimum)” column.
10.Press Marker ∆ MODE MENU FIXED MKR POSITION FIXED MKR VALUE
−13
x1 (or the next power setting from the performance test record) RETURN .
11.Repeat steps 6 through 10 for all power settings listed on the performance test record in
the 300 kHz to 3 GHz range.
Chapter 2
2-111
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
12.The marker 1 (maximum) and marker 2 (minimum) readings should be within the
specified range for each power level with reference to the fixed marker value.
13.If your analyzer does not have Option 006: this completes the test.
If your analyzer has Option 006: go to “Power Meter Calibration from 3 GHz to 6 GHz,”
next.
Power Meter Calibration from 3 GHz to 6 GHz
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-61 using the 8481A power sensor.
2. Press Start
3
3. Press Cal
G/n
Stop
G/n .
6
PWRMTR CAL .
4. Press LOSS/SENSR LISTS CAL FACTOR SENSOR B . Press the appropriate softkeys
to build a sensor calibration factor table for the 8481A power sensor (sensor B).
5. Press DONE to exit the sensor calibration factor entries menu.
6. Press USE SENSOR B to select the 8481A sensor. Press Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU CONTINUOUS .
7. Press Cal PWRMTR CAL
meter calibration.
ONE SWEEP
TAKE CAL SWEEP to start the power
Output Power Linearity Measurement from 3 GHz to 6 GHz
1. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 2-62.
2. Press Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
3. Press Display
DATA → MEMORY
4. Press Marker
∆ MODE MENU
3
G/n
FIXED MKR VALUE
5. Press Power
−15
6. Press Sweep Setup
7. Press Marker
Marker Search
SINGLE .
DATA/MEM .
FIXED MKR POSITION
−15
x1
RETURN
FIXED MKR STIMULUS
∆ REF = ∆ FIXED MKR .
x1 (or the next power setting from the performance test record).
TRIGGER MENU
MARKER 1
SINGLE .
Marker Search
SEARCH: MAX
Marker
MARKER 2
SEARCH:MIN .
8. Read the value for marker 1 from the display and enter it in the performance test
record in the “Marker 1 (Maximum)” column. Enter the value of marker 2 in the
“Marker 2 (Minimum)” column.
9. Press Marker ∆ MODE MENU FIXED MKR POSITION FIXED MKR VALUE −13
x1 (or the next power setting from the performance test record) RETURN .
2-112
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
10.Repeat steps 5 through 9 for all power settings listed on the performance test record in
the 3 GHz to 6 GHz range.
11.The marker 1 (maximum) and marker 2 (minimum) readings should be within the
specified range for each power level with reference to the fixed marker value.
12.This completes the test.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Ensure that the power meter and power sensor(s) are operating to specifications. Be
sure you set the power meter calibration factor for the range of frequencies that you are
testing.
2. Verify that there is power coming out of the analyzer’s reflection test port. Be sure you
did not accidentally switch off the analyzer’s internal source. If you did so, press
Sweep Setup POWER SOURCE PWR ON .
3. Repeat this performance test.
Chapter 2
2-113
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
6. Minimum R Channel Level
This test confirms that phase lock can be achieved at a specified minimum R channel input
power. Power from the analyzer’s output port is fed into the R channel receiver using the
input found on the front panel. Observations are made for proper phase lock conditions.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
Specifications
Frequency Range
Minimum R Channel Level
300 kHz–3.0 GHz
< −35 dBm
3 GHz–6.0 GHza
< −30 dBm
a. Only for analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Adapter: 3.5-mm (m) to Type-N (f)
1250-1750
Cable: 50 W, Type-N, 24 inch
8120-4781
Attenuators (2): 20 dB, Type-N
8491A Option 020
Procedure
1. If you do not have Option 004, connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-63.
If you have Option 004, connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-64.
Figure 2-63
2-114
8753ET (Standard) Minimum R-Channel Level Test Setup
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-64
8753ET (Option 004) Minimum R Channel Level Test Setup
2. Press Preset
Meas
INPUT PORTS R .
3. If you do not have Option 004, go to step 4.
If you have Option 004, press Power PWR RANGE MAN
RANGE 5 −65 to −40 .
4. Press Scale Ref
REFERENCE VALUE
5. Press Sweep Setup
CW FREQ
300
−70
POWER RANGES
x1 .
k/m .
6. If you do not have Option 004, press Power
If you have Option 004, press Power −65
−20
x1 .
x1 .
The analyzer displays the message CAUTION: NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL.
7. Press
to increase the port power by 1 dBm.
8. If the analyzer displays a phase lock error message, continue increasing the test port
power until phase lock is achieved.
9. If you do not have Option 004, subtract 40 dBm from the displayed test port power and
record the result on the performance test record in the column for R-channel power.
If you have Option 004, write the displayed test port power on the performance test
record in the column for R-channel power.
10.Repeat steps 5 through 9 for the other CW frequencies listed in the performance test
record.
Chapter 2
2-115
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
In Case of Difficulty
1. Check the flexible RF cable (W8, as shown in Figure 2-65) between the R sampler
assembly (A4) and the phase lock assembly. Make sure it is connected between A11J1
(PL IF IN) and 1st IF Out.
CAUTION
Figure 2-65
Do not push cable W8 down next to the A11 phase lock assembly.
Flexible RF Cable Location
2. Using an ohmmeter, verify that the RF cable is not open. In addition, examine both the
cable connectors: measure the resistance between the center pin and the cable
connector and make sure it is not close to zero.
3. Check the R sampler by substituting it with the B sampler (A6).
a. Move cable W8 to the B sampler (A6), as shown in Figure 2-66.
2-116
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-66
Connection for Substituting the R sampler (A4)
4. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-67.
Figure 2-67
Setup for Checking the R sampler (A4).
5. Repeat the test, but select the B sampler (A6) by pressing Meas
in step 2. Use the following specifications:
INPUT PORTS
B
300 kHz to 3 GHz: < −27 dBm
3 GHz to 6 GHz: < −22 dBm
6. If the analyzer fails the test, replace the A11 assembly.
Chapter 2
2-117
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
7. Verify that the high/low band adjustments are still within specifications. For more
information on how to perform this task, refer to “High/Low Band Transition
Adjustment” on page 3-47.
8. Refer to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting,” for more troubleshooting information.
2-118
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
7. Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level
The analyzer’s noise floor is measured at minimum power with loads connected to the test
ports.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
IF Bandwidth
Average Noise Floor Level
300 kHz–3 GHz
3 kHz
−90 dBm
300 kHz–3 GHz
10 Hz
−110 dBm
3 GHz–6 GHza
3 kHz
−85 dBm
3 GHz–6 GHza
10 Hz
−105 dBm
a. Only for analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Calibration kit: Type-N
85032B
Adapter: Type-N (m) to Type-N (m)
1250-1475
Procedure
Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
(IF BW = 3 kHz)
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-68.
Figure 2-68
Chapter 2
Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level Test Setup
2-119
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
2. Press Preset
Avg
IF BW
x1 .
3000
3. If your analyzer does not have Option 004:
press Power −20
x1 Start
300
k/m
If your analyzer has Option 004:
press Power −85
x1 Start
300
4. Press Meas
INPUT PORTS
5. Press Marker Fctn
B
k/m
Format
MARKER MODE MENU
SINGLE .
TRIGGER MENU
Stop
3
G/n .
Stop
3
G/n .
LIN MAG
Scale Ref
MKR STATS ON
AUTO SCALE .
Sweep Setup
6. When the analyzer finishes the sweep, read the mean value (which appears on the right
side of the analyzer display).
7. Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using this
equation.
Power(dBm) = 20 × [log10 (linear magnitude mean value)]
NOTE
Notice that the mean value that is displayed on the analyzer is in µUnits. So,
for example, if the displayed value is 62 µU, the value that you would put in
the equation is (62 × 10−6).
8. Write this calculated value on the performance test record.
Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
(IF BW = 10 Hz)
9. Press Avg
IF BW
10.Press Sweep Setup
10
x1 to change the IF bandwidth to 10 Hz.
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
11.When the analyzer finishes the sweep, read the mean value.
12.Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using this
equation.
Power(dBm)= 20 × [log10(linear magnitude mean value)]
13.Write this calculated value on the performance test record.
Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz
(IF BW = 10 Hz) Option 006 Only
14.Press Start
3
15.Press Sweep Setup
G/n
Stop
6
G/n .
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
16.When the analyzer finishes the sweep, read the mean value.
2-120
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
17.Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using this
equation.
Power(dBm)= 20 × [log10(linear magnitude mean value)]
18.Write this calculated value on the performance test record.
Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz
(IF BW = 3 kHz) Option 006 Only
19.Press Avg
IF BW
20.Press Sweep Setup
3
k/m .
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
21.When the analyzer finishes the sweep, read the mean value.
22.Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using this
equation.
Power(dBm)= 20 × [log10(linear magnitude mean value)]
23.Write this calculated value on the performance test record.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Perform “ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52)” on page 3-15.
2. Repeat this performance test.
3. Refer to Chapter 8 , “Receiver Troubleshooting,” for more troubleshooting information.
Chapter 2
2-121
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
8. Transmission Test Port Input Frequency Response
Perform this test to examine the frequency response of the transmission test port. Power
meter calibration is used to control the input to the analyzer’s receiver across its frequency
range. The network analyzer’s input receiver frequency response is measured against this
calibrated input.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
Input Frequency Responsea
300 kHz to 3 GHz
± 1 dB
3 GHz to 6 GHz b
± 2 dB
a. At −10 dBm.
b. Only for analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Power Meter
436A/437B/438A or E4418B/4419B
Power Sensor
8482A
Cable: Type-N (m) to Type-N (m), 24-inch
8120-4781
Adapter: Type-N (f) to Type-N (f)
1250-0777
Cable: GPIB
10833A
Additional Equipment for Option 006 Analyzers
Power Sensor
8481A
Procedure
Power Meter Calibration on the Reflection Test Port from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
1. Zero and calibrate the power meter using the 8482A power sensor.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-69.
2-122
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-69
Power Meter Calibration Setup
3. Press Preset
Avg
IF BW
3
k/m
Start
4. If your analyzer has Option 006, press Stop
5. Press Local
k/m .
300
3
G/n .
SYSTEM CONTROLLER .
6. Press SET ADDRESSES and POWER MTR until the analyzer shows the correct
power meter model. (Use the 438A/437 selection if the power meter is an E4419B or
E4418B.)
7. Press ADDRESS: P MTR/GPIB . The default power meter GPIB address is 13. Make
sure it is the same as your power meter GPIB address. Otherwise, use the analyzer
front panel keypad to enter the correct GPIB address for your power meter.
8. Press Sweep Setup
NUMBER of POINTS
51
x1 .
9. For analyzers with Option 004, press POWER PWR RANGE MAN to turn the auto
power range off.
NOTE
The analyzer displays the PRm annotation, indicating that the analyzer power
range is set to MANUAL.
10.Press Cal
PWRMTR CAL
−10
x1 .
11.Press LOSS/SENSR LISTS CAL FACTOR SENSOR A . Refer to the back of the power
sensor to locate the different calibration factor values along with their corresponding
frequencies.
NOTE
Chapter 2
The analyzer’s calibration factor sensor table can hold a maximum of 55
calibration factor data points.
2-123
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
The following softkeys are included in the sensor calibration factor entries menu:
SEGMENT
press to select a point where you can use the front panel knob or entry
keys to enter a value.
EDIT
press to edit or change a previously entered value.
DELETE
press to delete a point from the sensor calibration factor table.
ADD
select this key to add a point into the sensor calibration factor table.
CLEAR LIST
select this key to erase the entire sensor calibration factor table.
DONE
select this key when done entering points to the sensor calibration
factor table.
As an example, the following are the keystrokes for entering the first two calibration
factor data points for the 8482A power sensor (assuming CF% = 96.4 at 100 kHz and
CF% = 98.4 at 300 kHz):
a. From the sensor calibration factor entries menu, press ADD .
b. Press FREQUENCY 100
k/m . If you make an entry error, press
re-enter the correct value again.
c. Press CAL FACTOR
96.4
and
x1 .
d. Press DONE to terminate the first calibration factor data point entry.
e. To enter the second cal factor data point, press ADD .
f. Press FREQUENCY
300
k/m .
g. Press CAL FACTOR
98.4
x1 .
h. To terminate the second calibration factor data point entry, press DONE .
i. Press SEGMENT and use the front panel knob to scroll through the sensor
calibration factors table. Check to be sure all values are entered correctly. If you spot
an error, use the front panel knob to point to the data point you want to modify and
press EDIT .
12.Press the appropriate softkeys to create a power sensor calibration factors table.
13.Press DONE to exit the sensor calibration factor entries menu.
14.Press RETURN ONE SWEEP TAKE CAL SWEEP to start the power meter
calibration.
Wait until the analyzer finishes the sweep, then continue with this procedure.
NOTE
2-124
The analyzer displays the PC annotation, indicating the power meter
calibration is active.
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Transmission Test Port Input Frequency Response from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
15.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-70.
Figure 2-70
Transmission Test Port Input Frequency Response
16.Press Meas
INPUT PORTS
17.Press Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
∆ MODE MENU
18.Press Marker
300
B.
FIXED MKR POSITION
FIXED MKR VALUE
k/m
19.Press Marker
MARKER 1
SINGLE .
−10
Marker Search
x1
RETURN
FIXED MKR STIMULUS
∆ REF = ∆ FIXED MKR .
SEARCH: MAX
Marker
MARKER 2
SEARCH:MIN .
Marker Search
20.Write the marker 1 or marker 2 value—whichever has the larger absolute
magnitude—in the performance test record.
21.If your analyzer does not have Option 006, this completes the test.
If your analyzer does have Option 006, continue with the following steps.
Power Meter Calibration for the Reflection Test Port
for 3 GHz to 6 GHz (Analyzers with Option 006)
22.Set up the analyzer as shown in Figure 2-69, using the 8481A power sensor. Cycle the
line power on the power meter. Zero and calibrate the power meter for this sensor.
23.Press Start
24.Press Cal
3
G/n
Stop
PWRMTR CAL
6
−10
G/n .
x1 .
25.Press LOSS/SENSR LISTS CAL FACTOR SENSOR B . Press the appropriate softkeys
to build a calibration factor sensor table for the 8481A power sensor.
26.Press DONE to exit the sensor calibration factor entries menu.
27.To select the 8481A power sensor, press USE SENSOR B . Press Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU CONTINUOUS .
Chapter 2
2-125
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
28.Press Cal PWRMTR CAL
meter calibration.
ONE SWEEP
TAKE CAL SWEEP to start the power
Transmission Test Port Input Frequency Response from 3 GHz to 6 GHz
(Analyzers with Option 006)
29.When the analyzer displays the message POWER METER CALIBRATION SWEEP DONE,
connect the equipment as shown as in Figure 2-70.
30.Press Sweep Setup
31.Press Marker
3
G/n
TRIGGER MENU
∆ MODE MENU
SINGLE .
FIXED MKR POSITION
FIXED MKR STIMULUS
RETURN .
32.Press Marker
Marker Search
MARKER 1
Marker Search
SEARCH: MAX
Marker
MARKER 2
SEARCH:MIN .
33.Write the marker 1 or marker 2 reading—whichever has the largest magnitude—in the
performance test record.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Be sure you have used the correct power sensor for the frequency range.
2. Verify that the calibration factors that you have entered for the power sensors are
correct.
3. Repeat this test with a known good through cable.
2-126
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
9. Test Port Crosstalk
Perform this test to determine the maximum level of signal leakage between the analyzer’s
test ports. Crosstalk is measured with shorts attached to the test ports after a
normalization measurement with a through cable.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Frequency Range
Test Port Crosstalka
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz
−100 dBm
3 GHz to 6.0 GHzb
−90 dBm
a. Measurement conditions:
normalized to a through; measured with two
shorts; 10 Hz IF BW, averaging factor of 8 in
alternate mode; source power set to the lesser
of the maximum power out or the maximum
receiver power.
b. Applies to analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Adapter: 50Ω, Type-N(m) to Type-N(m)
1250-1475
Cable: Type-N, 24-inch
8120-4781
Calibration Kit
85032B
Procedure
Normalization from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-71.
Figure 2-71
Chapter 2
8753ET Crosstalk Normalization Measurement
2-127
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
1. Press Preset
Power
0
x1
Start
k/m .
300
2. If your analyzer has Option 006, press Stop
3
3. Press Avg
IF BW
10
4. Press Cal
MORE
ALTERNATE RFL/TRN .
5. Press Meas
G/n .
x1 .
TRANSMISSN
Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
DATA → MEMORY
6. When the sweep is completed, press Display
SINGLE .
DATA/MEM .
Crosstalk from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
7. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-72. Connect the shorts to both test ports.
Figure 2-72
8753ET Crosstalk Measurement
8. Press Scale Ref
9. Press Avg
REFERENCE VALUE
AVERAGING FACTOR
TRIGGER MENU
8
NUMBER of GROUPS
−100
x1 .
AVERAGING: ON
x1
8
Sweep Setup
x1 .
10.Wait for the sweeps to finish as indicated by the Hld notation on the left side of the
display.
11.Press Marker Search
SEARCH: MAX .
12.Write the marker value (which appears on the analyzer display) in the performance test
record.
13.If your analyzer does not have Option 006, this completes the test. If you have any
problems, go to “In Case of Difficulty” on page 2-129.
If your analyzer has Option 006, continue with “Normalization from 3 GHz to 6 GHz,”
next.
2-128
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Normalization from 3 GHz to 6 GHz
14. Set up the equipment again as shown in Figure 2-71.
15. Press Start
3
G/n
Stop
6
G/n
AVERAGING: OFF .
Avg
16.Press Sweep Setup TRIGGER MENU SINGLE . When the sweep has completed,
press Display DATA → MEMORY DATA/MEM .
Crosstalk from 3 GHz to 6 GHz
17.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-72.
18.Press Avg
AVERAGING: ON
NUMBER of GROUPS
19.Press Marker Search
8
Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
x1 . Wait for the sweeps to finish.
SEARCH: MAX .
20.Write the marker value (which appears on the analyzer display) in the performance test
record.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Remove the instrument top cover. Using an 8 lb-inch torque wrench, verify that all
semirigid cables connected to the sampler/mixer assemblies are tight. In addition,
tighten any loose screws on the sampler/mixer assemblies (A4/A5/A6) and the pulse
generator assembly (A7).
2. Remove the instrument bottom cover. Refer to Figure 2-73. Verify that cables W1, W31,
and W32 are tight.
3. Repeat this test.
Chapter 2
2-129
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-73
2-130
8753ET Bottom View
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
10. Uncorrected Port Performance
The analyzer can perform error-correction and store the error coefficients. These error
coefficients are, in fact, measurements of the analyzer’s uncorrected port performance.
NOTE
The crosstalk error terms are omitted in this procedure. They are covered in
the “Test Port Crosstalk” performance test.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
Specifications
Uncorrected a
Error Terms
Frequency Range
300 kHz to 1.3 GHz
1.3 GHz to 3 GHz
3 GHz to 6 GHzb
Directivity
30 dB
24 dB
19 dB
Source Match
(Standard)
25 dB
20 dB
14 dB
Source Match
(Option 004)
23 dB
18 dB
14 dB
Load Match (raw)
24 dB
19 dB
16 dB
Reflection Tracking
±1.0 dB
±1.0 dB
±2.0 dB
Transmission
Tracking
±1.5 dB
±1.5 dB
±2.5 dB
a. At 25 °C ±5 °C, with less than 1°C deviation from the measurement calibration
temperature.
b. Only for analyzers with Option 006.
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Calibration Kit: 50Ω, Type-N
85032B
Cable: Type-N, 24-inch
8120-4781
Chapter 2
2-131
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Procedure
First Enhanced Response Calibration
1. Refer to Figure 2-74 when performing steps 2 through 10.
Figure 2-74
First Enhanced Response Calibration
2. Press Preset
Avg
IF BW
3
k/m
Start
300
k/m .
3. Press Cal
CAL KIT SELECT CAL KIT N 50Ω 85032 RETURN RETURN
CALIBRATE MENU ENHANCED RESPONSE TRAN/REFL ENH. RESP. .
4. Press ISOLATION OMIT ISOLATION .
5. Connect the OPEN (supplied in the calibration kit) to the analyzer’s reflection test port.
6. Press REFLECTION FORWARD:OPENS
OPEN(F)
DONE: OPENS .
7. Connect the SHORT to the reflection test port.
8. Press FORWARD:SHORTS
SHORT(F)
DONE: SHORTS .
9. Connect the 50 ohm termination (supplied in the calibration kit) to the reflection test
port.
10.Press FORWARD:LOAD STANDARDS DONE .
2-132
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
11.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-75.
Figure 2-75
Transmission Calibration Test Setup
12.Press TRANSMISSION DO BOTH FWD THRUS .
13.Press STANDARDS DONE
DONE FWD ENH RESP .
Directivity (Forward) Calibration Coefficient
14.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
32
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
15.When the analyzer finishes the test, press Marker .
16.Using the front panel knob, locate the maximum value of the data trace for the 300 kHz
to 1.3 GHz frequency range.
17.Write the maximum value in the performance test record.
18.Repeat the previous two steps for the other frequency ranges listed on the performance
test record.
Source Match (Forward) Calibration Coefficient
19.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
33
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
20.When the analyzer finishes the test, repeat steps 15 through 18. Enter the results only
in that part of the performance test record that applies to your analyzer (Standard or
Option 004).
Reflection Tracking (Forward) Calibration Coefficient
21.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
34
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
22.When the analyzer finishes the test, repeat steps 15 through 18.
Chapter 2
2-133
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Second Enhanced Response Calibration
23.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-76.
Figure 2-76
Second Enhanced Response Calibration
24.Press Preset
Start
300
k/m .
25.Press Cal
CAL KIT SELECT CAL KIT N 50Ω 85032 RETURN RETURN
CALIBRATE MENU ENHANCED RESPONSE TRAN/REFL ENH. RESP. .
26.Press ISOLATION OMIT ISOLATION .
27.Connect the OPEN (supplied in the calibration kit) to reference test port 1. Use the pin
extension provided in the calibration kit.
28.Press REFLECTION FORWARD:OPENS
OPEN(M)
DONE: OPENS .
29.Connect the SHORT to reference test port 1.
30.Press FORWARD:SHORTS SHORT(M) DONE: SHORTS .
31.Connect the 50 ohm termination (supplied in the calibration kit) to reference
test port 1.
32.Press FORWARD:LOAD STANDARDS DONE .
2-134
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
33.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-77.
Figure 2-77
Transmission Calibration Test Setup
34.Press TRANSMISSION
DO BOTH FWD THRUS
STANDARDS DONE
DONE FWD ENH RESP .
Load Match (Forward) Calibration Coefficient
35.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
36.When the test is done, press Marker
36
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
MARKER 1 .
37.Using the front panel knob, locate the maximum value of the data trace for the 300 kHz
to 1.3 GHz frequency range.
38.Write the maximum value on the performance test record.
39.Repeat the previous two steps for the other frequency ranges listed on the performance
test record.
Transmission Tracking (Forward) Calibration Coefficient
40.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
37
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
41.When the analyzer finishes the test, repeat steps 37 through 39.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Check the condition of the connectors and cables.
Chapter 2
2-135
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
11. System Trace Noise
Perform this test to determine the system trace noise at designated CW frequencies in
both transmission and reflection modes. Ratio measurements are made at 3 GHz and
6 GHz to determine the variability of the analyzer’s measurement data. IF bandwidths of
3 kHz and 10 Hz are used for the test.
NOTE
Trace noise is defined for a ratio measurement. For the transmission
measurement (B/R), the connection is a 0 dB-loss thru with 0 dBm into the
receiver. For a reflection measurement (A/R), an open is used on the reflection
port with +5 dBm reflected power.
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
Specifications
Frequency Range
System Trace Noise
(Magnitude)
System Trace Noise
(Phase)
IF Bandwidth = 3 kHz
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz
< 0.006 dB rms
< 0.038 °rms
3 GHz to 6.0 GHz
< 0.010 dB rms
< 0.070 °rms
IF Bandwidth = 10 Hz
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz
< 0.001 dB rms
< 0.006 °rms
3 GHz to 6.0 GHz
< 0.002 dB rms
< 0.012 °rms
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Calibration Kit: 50 Ω, Type-N
85032B
Cable: 50 Ω, Type-N, 24-inch
8120-4781
Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-78.
2-136
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Figure 2-78
Reflection Trace Noise Test Setup
Reflection Trace Noise Magnitude, IF BW = 3 kHz
2. Press Preset
Power
5
x1
Avg
NUMBER of POINTS
Sweep Setup
3. Press Marker Fctn
4. Press Sweep Setup
IF BW
201
x1
MARKER MODE MENU
TRIGGER MENU
3
k/m
CW FREQ
3
G/n .
MKR STATS ON .
SINGLE .
5. When the measurement is done (indicated by the Hld notation on the left side of the
display), record the standard deviation (shown on the right side of the display) in the
performance test record.
Reflection Trace Noise Phase, IF BW = 3 kHz
6. Press Format
PHASE .
7. Record the standard deviation in the performance test record.
Reflection Trace Noise Phase, IF BW = 10 Hz
8. Press Avg
IF BW
9. Press Sweep Setup
10
x1 .
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
10.When the measurement is done, record the standard deviation in the performance test
record.
Reflection Trace Noise Magnitude, IF BW = 10 Hz
11.Press Format
LOG MAG .
12.Record the standard deviation in the performance test record.
Chapter 2
2-137
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Transmission Trace Noise Magnitude, IF BW = 10 Hz
13.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-79.
Figure 2-79
Transmission Test Port Trace Noise
14.Press Power
0
15.Press Meas
x1 .
TRANSMISSN .
16.Press Sweep Setup
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
17.When the measurement is done, record the standard deviation in the performance test
record.
Transmission Trace Noise Phase, IF BW = 10 Hz
18.Press Format
PHASE .
19.Record the standard deviation in the performance test record.
Transmission Trace Noise Phase, IF BW = 3 kHz
20.Press Avg
IF BW
21.Press Sweep Setup
3
k/m .
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
22.When the measurement is done, record the standard deviation in the performance test
record.
Transmission Trace Noise Magnitude, IF BW = 3 kHz
23.Press Format
LOG MAG .
24.Record the standard deviation in the performance test record.
25.If you do not have Option 006, this completes the test.
If you have Option 006, go to “Reflection and Transmission Trace Noise (Option 006
Only),” next.
2-138
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
Reflection and Transmission Trace Noise (Option 006 Only)
26.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-78.
27.Press Meas
Sweep Setup
REFLECTION
CW FREQ
6
Power
5
x1
Avg
IF BW
3
k/m
G/n .
28.Go back to step 4 on page 2-137 and repeat the rest of the procedure from this step.
In Case of Difficulty
1. Perform “ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52)” on page 3-15.
2. Suspect the A10 digital IF assembly if both receiver channels fail.
3. Refer to Chapter 8 , “Receiver Troubleshooting,” for troubleshooting information.
Chapter 2
2-139
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET System Verification and Performance Tests
This page intentionally left blank.
2-140
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
The performance test records in this chapter include entries up to 6 GHz for analyzers that
have Option 006 (6 GHz operation). If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A”
for entries above 3 GHz.
Calibration Lab Address:
Report Number
Date
Last Calibration Date
Customer’s Name
Performed by
Model 8753ES
Serial No.
Options
Firmware Revision
Ambient Temperature
°C
Relative Humidity
%
Model
Number
Trace Number
Cal Due Date
Test Equipment Used
Description
Frequency Counter
Power Meter
Power Sensor
Calibration Kit
Verification Kit
Step Attenuator
Notes/Comments
Chapter 2
2-141
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
1. Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
CW Frequency
(MHz)
Min.
(MHz)
Results Measured
(MHz)
Max.
(MHz)
Measurement
Uncertainty
(MHz)
0.03
0.029 999 7
0.030 000 3
± 0.000 000 050
0.3
0.299 997
0.300 003
± 0.000 000 520
5.0
4.999 950
5.000 050
± 0.000 007
16.0
15.999 840
16.000 160
± 0.000 028
31.0
30.999 690
31.000 310
± 0.000 054
60.999 999
60.999 389
61.000 609
± 0.000 105
121.0
120.998 790
121.001 210
± 0.000 207
180.0
179.998 200
180.001 800
± 0.000 307
310.0
309.996 900
310.003 100
± 0.000 528
700.0
699.993 000
700.007 000
± 0.001 192
1 300.0
1 299.987
1 300.013
± 0.002 212
2 000.0
1 999.980
2 000.020
± 0.003 403 000
3 000.0
2 999.970
3 000.030
± 0.005 104
4 000.0
3 999.960
4 000.040
± 0.006 805
5 000.0
4 999.950
5 000.050
± 0.008 506
6 000.0
5 999.940
6 000.060
± 0.010 207
2-142
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
2. External Source Mode Frequency Range
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Test Frequencies
(GHz)
Results
0.010
0.020
0.100
1.000
2.000
3.000
4.000
5.000
6.000
Chapter 2
2-143
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
3. Test Port Output Power Level Accuracy
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Test
Frequency
Test
Port
Output
Power
(dBm)
Specification
(dB)
300 kHz
0
±1
±0.47
20 MHz
0
±1
±0.14
50 MHz
0
±1
±0.14
100 MHz
0
±1
±0.14
200 MHz
0
±1
±0.14
500 MHz
0
±1
±0.14
1 GHz
0
±1
±0.13
2 GHz
0
±1
±0.13
3 GHz
0
±1
±0.27
4 GHz
0
±1
±0.17
5 GHz
0
±1
±0.17
6 GHz
0
±1
±0.17
2-144
Measured Value
(dBm)
Measurement
uncertainty
(dB)
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
4. Test Port Output Power Linearity
Frequency Range: 300 kHz to 3 GHz
Power Setting
dBm
Chapter 2
Marker 1
Maximum (dB)
Marker 2
Minimum (dB)
Specification
(dB)
Meas.
Uncert.
(dB)
−15
± 0.2
± 0.04
−13
± 0.2
± 0.03
−11
± 0.2
± 0.03
−9
± 0.2
± 0.03
−7
± 0.2
± 0.03
−5
± 0.2
± 0.03
−3
± 0.2
± 0.02
−1
± 0.2
± 0.02
+1
± 0.2
± 0.02
+3
± 0.2
± 0.02
+5
± 0.2
± 0.03
+7
± 0.5
± 0.03
+8
± 0.5
± 0.03
+9
± 0.5
± 0.03
+10
± 0.5
± 0.03
2-145
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
4. Test Port Output Power Linearity (continued)
Frequency Range: 3 GHz to 6 GHz
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Power Setting
dBm
2-146
Marker 1
Maximum (dB)
Marker 2
Minimum (dB)
Specification
(dB)
Meas.
Uncert.
(dB)
−15
± 0.2
± 0.04
−13
± 0.2
± 0.03
−11
± 0.2
± 0.03
−9
± 0.2
± 0.03
−7
± 0.2
± 0.03
−5
± 0.2
± 0.03
−3
± 0.2
± 0.02
−1
± 0.2
± 0.02
+1
± 0.2
± 0.02
+3
± 0.2
± 0.02
+5
± 0.2
± 0.03
+7
± 0.5
± 0.03
+8
± 0.5
± 0.03
+9
± 0.5
± 0.03
+10
± 0.5
± 0.03
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
5. Minimum R Channel Level
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
CW Frequency
Specification
(dBm)
Test Port Power
(R Channel Power)
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dB)
300 kHz
< −35
± 1.0
3.29 MHz
< −35
± 1.0
3.31 MHz
< −35
± 1.0
15.90 MHz
< −35
± 1.0
16.10 MHz
< −35
± 1.0
30.90 MHz
< −35
± 1.0
31.10 MHz
< −35
± 1.0
1.6069 GHz
< −35
± 1.0
1.6071 GHz
< −35
± 1.0
3.000 GHz
< −35
± 1.0
4.000 GHz
< −30
± 2.0
5.000 GHz
< −30
± 2.0
6.000 GHz
< −30
± 2.0
Chapter 2
2-147
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
6. Test Port Input Noise Floor Level
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Specification
(dBm)a
Calculated
Value
Meas.
Uncert.
(dB)
Frequency
Range
Test Port
IF
Bandwidth
300 kHz–3 GHz
Port 1
3 kHz
≤ −82 (−80)
±2.0
300 kHz–3 GHz
Port 1
10 Hz
≤ −102 (−100)
±2.0
300 kHz–3 GHz
Port 2
10 Hz
≤ −102 (−100)
±2.0
300 kHz–3 GHz
Port 2
3 kHz
≤ −82 (−80)
±2.0
3 GHz–6 GHz
Port 2
3 kHz
≤ −77
±2.0
3 GHz–6 GHz
Port 2
10 Hz
≤ −97
±2.0
3 GHz–6 GHz
Port 1
10 Hz
≤ −97
±2.0
3 GHz–6 GHz
Port 1
3 kHz
≤ −77
±2.0
a. Specifications in parentheses are valid for analyzers with Option 075.
2-148
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
7. Test Port Input Frequency Response
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Frequency Range
Test Port
Specification
(dB)
300 kHz–3 GHz
Port 2
±1
0.47
300 kHz–3 GHz
Port 1
±1
0.47
3 GHz–6 GHz
Port 1
±2
0.17
3 GHz–6 GHz
Port 2
±2
0.17
Chapter 2
Measured Value
(dB)
Meas.
Uncert.
(dB)
2-149
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
8. Test Port Crosstalk
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Test Settings
Specification
(dB)
Measured Value
(dB)
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dB)
Crosstalk to Test Port 2
300 kHz–3 GHz
< −100
±1.0
< −100
±1.0
< −90
±2.0
< −90
±2.0
Crosstalk to Test Port 1
300 kHz–3 GHz
Crosstalk to Test Port 1
3 GHz–6 GHz
Crosstalk to Test Port 2
3 GHz–6 GHz
2-150
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Date
Serial Number
9. Uncorrected Port Performance
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Test Description
Frequency Range
Spec.
(dB)
Measured Value
(dB)
Meas.
Uncert. (dB)
Forward Direction
Directivity
300 kHz–1.3 GHz
≤ −35
±0.9
Directivity
1.3 GHz–3 GHz
≤ −30
±0.8
Directivity
3 GHz–6 GHz
≤ −25
±0.8
Source Match
300 kHz–1.3 GHz
≤ −16
±0.2
Source Match
1.3 GHz–3 GHz
≤ −16
±0.2
Source Match
3 GHz–6 GHz
≤ −14
±0.3
Trans. Tracking
300 kHz–1.3 GHz
±1.0
±0.006
Trans. Tracking
1.3 GHz–3 GHz
±1.0
±0.009
Trans. Tracking
3 GHz–6 GHz
±1.5
±0.021
Refl. Tracking
300 kHz–1.3 GHz
±1.0
±0.001
Refl. Tracking
1.3 GHz–3 GHz
±1.0
±0.005
Refl. Tracking
3 GHz–6 GHz
±1.5
±0.020
Load Match
300 kHz–1.3 GHz
≤ −18
±0.1
Load Match
1.3 GHz–3 GHz
≤ −16
±0.2
Load Match
3 GHz–6 GHz
≤ −14
±0.2
Load Match
300 kHz–1.3 GHz
≤ −18
±0.1
Load Match
1.3 GHz–3 GHz
≤ −16
±0.2
Load Match
3 GHz–6 GHz
≤ −14
±0.2
Forward Direction
Reverse Direction
Forward Direction
Reverse Direction
Forward Direction
Chapter 2
2-151
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Date
Serial Number
9. Uncorrected Port Performance (continued)
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Test Description
Frequency Range
Spec.
(dB)
Measured Value
(dB)
Meas.
Uncert. (dB)
Reverse Direction
Directivity
300 kHz–1.3 GHz
≤ −35
±0.9
Directivity
1.3 GHz–3 GHz
≤ −30
±0.8
Directivity
3 GHz–6 GHz
≤ −25
±0.8
Source Match
300 kHz–1.3 GHz
≤ −16
±0.2
Source Match
1.3 GHz–3 GHz
≤ −16
±0.2
Source Match
3 GHz–6 GHz
≤ −14
±0.3
Refl. Tracking
300 kHz–1.3 GHz
±1.0
±0.001
Refl. Tracking
1.3 GHz–3 GHz
±1.0
±0.005
Refl. Tracking
3 GHz–6 GHz
±1.5
±0.020
Trans. Tracking
300 kHz–1.3 GHz
±1.0
±0.006
Trans. Tracking
1.3 GHz–3 GHz
±1.0
±0.009
Trans. Tracking
3 GHz–6 GHz
±1.5
±0.021
Reverse Direction
Reverse Direction
Forward Direction
2-152
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Serial Number
10. System Trace Noise
Ratio
IF BW
Phase/Magnitude
Measured Value
Specification
Test Frequency: 3 GHz
A/R
10 Hz
Magnitude
< 0.001 dB rms
A/R
10 Hz
Phase
< 0.006 °rms
A/R
3 kHz
Phase
< 0.038 °rms
A/R
3 kHz
Magnitude
< 0.006 dB rms
B/R
3 kHz
Magnitude
< 0.006 dB rms
B/R
3 kHz
Phase
< 0.038 °rms
B/R
10 Hz
Phase
< 0.006 °rms
B/R
10 Hz
Magnitude
< 0.001 dB rms
Test Frequency: 6 GHz
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
A/R
10 Hz
Magnitude
< 0.002 dB rms
A/R
10 kHz
Phase
< 0.012 °rms
A/R
3 kHz
Phase
<0.070 °rms
A/R
3 Hz
Magnitude
< 0.010 dB rms
B/R
3 kHz
Magnitude
< 0.010 dB rms
B/R
3 kHz
Phase
< 0.070 °rms
B/R
10 Hz
Phase
< 0.012 °rms
B/R
10 Hz
Magnitude
< 0.002 dB rms
Chapter 2
2-153
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
11. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy (Test Port 2)
G
F
|G − F|
Test Port
Measurement
(dB)
Expected
Measurement
(Corrected)
(dB)
Dynamic
Accuracy
(Calculated)
Spec.
(dB)
Meas.
Uncer.
(dB)
≤ 0.033
± 0.008
≤ 0.021
± 0.008
20
≤ 0.031
± 0.008
−40
30
≤ 0.041
± 0.008
−50
40
≤ 0.054
± 0.008
−60
50
≤ 0.069
± 0.017
−70
60
≤ 0.111
± 0.017
−80
70
≤ 0.257
± 0.017
−90
80
≤ 0.741
± 0.017
−100
90
≤ 2.121
± 0.027
Test
Port
Input
Power
(dBm)
8496A
Attn.
(dB)
−10
0
−20
(ref)
10
−30
Real Part
Imag. Part
0.000
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
2-154
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
11. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy (Test Port 1)
G
F
|G − F|
Test Port
Measurement
(dB)
Expected
Measurement
(Corrected)
(dB)
Dynamic
Accuracy
(Calculated)
Meas.
Uncer.
(dB)
≤ 0.033
± 0.008
≤ 0.021
± 0.008
20
≤ 0.031
± 0.008
−40
30
≤ 0.041
± 0.008
−50
40
≤ 0.054
± 0.008
−60
50
≤ 0.069
± 0.017
−70
60
≤ 0.111
± 0.017
−80
70
≤ 0.257
± 0.017
−90
80
≤ 0.741
± 0.017
−100
90
≤ 2.121
± 0.027
8496A
Attn.
(dB)
−10
0
−20
(ref)
10
−30
Real Part
Imaginary Part
0.000
2-155
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Spec.
(dB)
Test
Port
Input
Power
(dBm)
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Serial Number
Option(s)
12. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Compression
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Measured Value
CW Frequency
Specification
(dB)
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dB)
300 kHz
≤ 0.42
±0.04
50 MHz
≤ 0.42
±0.04
1 GHz
≤ 0.42
±0.04
1.65 GHz
≤ 0.42
±0.04
2 GHz
≤ 0.42
±0.04
3 GHz
≤ 0.42
±0.04
4 GHz
≤ 0.76
±0.05
5 GHz
≤ 0.76
±0.05
6 GHz
≤ 0.76
±0.05
2-156
Test Port 2
Test Port 1
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
13. Test Port Receiver Phase Compression
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Measured Value
CW Frequency
Specification
Measurement
Uncertainty
300 kHz
≤ 6°
±0.3°
50 MHz
≤ 6°
±0.3°
1 GHz
≤ 6°
±0.3°
1.65 GHz
≤ 6°
±0.3°
2 GHz
≤ 6°
±0.3°
3 GHz
≤ 6°
±0.3°
4 GHz
≤ 7.2°
±0.4°
5 GHz
≤ 7.2°
±0.4°
6 GHz
≤ 7.2°
±0.4°
Chapter 2
Test Port 2
Test Port 1
2-157
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
14. Test Port Output/Input Harmonics (Analyzers with Option 002)
Test Description
Specification
(dBc)
Measurement Value
(dBc)
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dB)
Test Port Output
Harmonics
2nd
≤ −25
± 1.5
3rd
≤ −25
± 1.5
2nd
≤ −15
± 1.5
3rd
≤ −30
± 1.5
2nd
≤ −15
± 1.5
3rd
≤ −30
± 1.5
Port 1 Input Harmonics
Port 2 Input Harmonics
2-158
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ES
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
15. Harmonic Measurement Accuracy (Option 002 only)
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Analyzer
Freq.
(Fund.)
Ext.
Source
Freq.
(Harm.)
Power
Meter
Meas.
Cable
Loss
(A)
Power
Meter +
Cable
Loss
(B)
Network
Analyzer
Reading
(A − B)
Harm.
Meas.
Accy.
Spec.
(dB)
Meas.
Uncert.
(dB)
20 MHz
40 MHz
± 1.5
± 0.17
20 MHz
60 MHz
± 1.5
± 0.17
100 MHz
200 MHz
± 1.5
± 0.17
100 MHz
300 MHz
± 1.5
± 0.17
300 MHz
600 MHz
± 1.5
± 0.17
300 MHz
900 MHz
± 1.5
± 0.17
500 MHz
1 GHz
± 1.5
± 0.17
500 MHz
1.5 GHz
± 1.5
± 0.17
1 GHz
2 GHz
± 1.5
± 0.17
1 GHz
3 GHz
± 1.5
± 0.17
2 GHz
4 GHz
±3
± 0.17
2 GHz
6 GHz
±3
± 0.17
3 GHz
6 GHz
±3
± 0.17
Chapter 2
2-159
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ES Performance Test Records
This page intentionally left blank.
2-160
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
The performance test records in this chapter include entries up to 6 GHz for analyzers that
have Option 006 (6 GHz operation). If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A”
for entries above 3 GHz.
Calibration Lab Address:
Report Number
Date
Last Calibration Date
Customer’s Name
Performed by
Model 8753ET
Serial No.
Options
Firmware Revision
Ambient Temperature
°C
Relative Humidity
%
Model
Number
Trace Number
Cal Due Date
Test Equipment Used
Description
Frequency Counter
Power Meter
Power Sensor
Calibration Kit
Verification Kit
Notes/Comments
Chapter 2
2-161
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ET
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
1. Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” for entries above 3 GHz.
CW Frequency
(MHz)
Min. (MHz)
Measured Value
(MHz)
Max.
(MHz)
Measurement
Uncertainty
(MHz)
0.3
0.299 997
0.300 003
± 0.000 000 520
5.0
4.999 950
5.000 050
± 0.000 008 610
16.0
15.999 840
16.000 160
± 0.000 028 220
31.0
30.999 690
31.000 310
± 0.000 053 730
60.999 999
60.999 389
61.000 609
± 0.000 104 800
121.0
120.998 790
121.001 210
± 0.000 206 800
180.0
179.998 200
180.001 800
± 0.000 307 200
310.0
309.996 900
310.003 100
± 0.000 528 300
700.0
699.993 000
700.007 000
± 0.001 191 700
1 300.0
1 299.987
1 300.013
± 0.002 212 300
2 000.0
1 999.980
2 000.020
± 0.003 403 000
3 000.0
2 999.970
3 000.030
± 0.005 104 000
4 000.0
3 999.960
4 000.040
± 0.006 805 000
5 000.0
4 999.950
5 000.050
± 0.008 506 000
6 000.0
5 999.940
6 000.060
± 0.010 207 000
2-162
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ET
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
2. External Source Mode Frequency Range
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Test Frequencies
(GHz)
Results
0.010
0.020
0.100
1.000
2.000
3.000
4.000
5.000
6.000
Chapter 2
2-163
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ET
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
3. Reflection Test Port Output Power Level Accuracy
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” for entries above 3 GHz.
Maximum
Valuea
(dBm)
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dB)
−6.0 (−11.0)
−4.0 (−9.0)
±0.47
20 MHz
−6.0 (−11.0)
−4.0 (−9.0)
±0.25
50 MHz
−6.0 (−11.0)
−4.0 (−9.0)
±0.12
100 MHz
−6.0 (−11.0)
−4.0 (−9.0)
±0.12
200 MHz
−6.0 (−11.0)
−4.0 (−9.0)
±0.12
500 MHz
−6.0 (−11.0)
−4.0 (−9.0)
±0.12
1 GHz
−6.0 (−11.0)
−4.0 (−9.0)
±0.12
2 GHz
−6.0 (−11.0)
−4.0 (−9.0)
±0.15
3 GHz
−6.0 (−11.0)
−4.0 (−9.0)
±0.15
4 GHz
−6.0 (−11.0)
−4.0 (−9.0)
±0.17
5 GHz
−6.0 (−11.0)
−4.0 (−9.0)
±0.17
6 GHz
−6.0 (−11.0)
−4.0 (−9.0)
±0.17
Test Frequency
Minimum
Valuea
(dBm)
300 kHz
Measured
Value
a. Values in parentheses pertain to analyzers with Option 004.
2-164
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies
Company
Model 8753ET
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
4. Reflection Test Port Output Power Linearity (for analyzers without Option 004)
Frequency Range: 300 kHz to 3 GHz
Power Setting
(dBm)
Power Offset
(dBm)
−20
Spec.
(dB)
Meas.
Uncert.
(dB)
−15
±0.5
±0.04
−18
−13
±0.5
±0.03
−16
−11
±0.5
±0.03
−14
−9
±0.2
±0.03
−12
−7
±0.2
±0.03
−10
−5
±0.2
±0.03
−8
−3
±0.2
±0.02
−6
−1
±0.2
±0.02
−4
+1
±0.2
±0.02
−2
+3
±0.2
±0.02
0
+5
±0.5
±0.03
+3
+8
±0.5
±0.03
+5
+10
±0.5
±0.03
Chapter 2
Marker 1
(Maximum)
Marker 2
(Minimum)
2-165
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
4. Reflection Test Port Output Power Linearity (for analyzers without Option 004)
(continued)
Frequency Range: 3 GHz to 6 GHz
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Power Setting
(dBm)
Power Offset
(dBm)
−20
2-166
Marker 1
(Maximum)
Marker 2
(Minimum)
Spec.
(dB)
Meas.
Uncert.
(dB)
−15
±0.5
±0.04
−18
−13
±0.5
±0.03
−16
−11
±0.5
±0.03
−14
−9
±0.2
±0.03
−12
−7
±0.2
±0.03
−10
−5
±0.2
±0.03
−8
−3
±0.2
±0.02
−6
−1
±0.2
±0.02
−4
+1
±0.2
±0.02
−2
+3
±0.2
±0.02
0
+5
±0.5
±0.03
+3
+8
±0.5
±0.03
+5
+10
±0.5
±0.03
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies
Company
Model 8753ET
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
5. Reflection Test Port Output Power Linearity (for analyzers with Option 004)
Frequency Range: 300 kHz to 3 GHz
Power Setting
(dBm)
Chapter 2
Marker 1
(Maximum)
Marker 2
(Minimum)
Spec.
(dB)
Meas.
Uncert.
(dB)
−15
±0.2
±0.04
−13
±0.2
±0.03
−11
±0.2
±0.03
−9
±0.2
±0.03
−7
±0.2
±0.03
−5
±0.2
±0.03
−3
±0.2
±0.02
−1
±0.2
±0.02
+1
±0.2
±0.02
+3
±0.2
±0.02
+5
±0.5
±0.03
+7
±0.5
±0.03
+9
±0.5
±0.03
+10
±0.5
±0.03
2-167
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
5. Reflection Test Port Output Power Linearity (for analyzers with Option 004)
(continued)
Frequency Range: 3 GHz to 6 GHz
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” for entries above 3 GHz.
Power Setting
(dBm)
2-168
Marker 1
(Maximum)
Marker 2
(Minimum)
Spec.
(dB)
Meas.
Uncert.
(dB)
−15
±0.2
±0.04
−13
±0.2
±0.03
−11
±0.2
±0.03
−9
±0.2
±0.03
−7
±0.2
±0.03
−5
±0.2
±0.03
−3
±0.2
±0.02
−1
±0.2
±0.02
+1
±0.2
±0.02
+3
±0.2
±0.02
+5
±0.5
±0.03
+7
±0.5
±0.03
+9
±0.5
±0.03
+10
±0.5
±0.03
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ET
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
6. Minimum R Channel Level
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
CW Frequency
Specification
(dBm)
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dB)
300 kHz
< −35
±1.5
3.29 MHz
< −35
±1.5
3.31 MHz
< −35
±1.5
15.90 MHz
< −35
±1.5
16.10 MHz
< −35
±1.5
30.90 MHz
< −35
±1.5
31.10 MHz
< −35
±1.5
1.6069 GHz
< −35
±1.5
1.6071 GHz
< −35
±1.5
3.000 GHz
< −30
±1.5
4.000 GHz
< −30
±1.5
5.000 GHz
< −30
±1.5
6.000 GHz
< −30
±1.5
Chapter 2
R Channel Power
2-169
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies
Company
Model 8753ET
Report Number
Serial Number
7. Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” for entries above 3 GHz.
Frequency Range
IF
Bandwidth
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz
Specification
(dBm)
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dBm)
3 kHz
≤ −90
± 1.0
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz
10 Hz
≤ −110
± 1.0
3 GHz to 6.0 GHz
10 Hz
≤ −105
± 2.0
3 GHz to 6.0 GHz
3 kHz
≤ −85
± 2.0
2-170
Calculated
Value
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ET
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
8. Transmission Test Port Input Frequency Response
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Frequency Range
Specification
(dB)
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dB)
300 kHz to 3 GHz
±1
±0.47
3 GHz to 6 GHz
±2
±0.17
Chapter 2
Measured Value
(dB)
2-171
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ET
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
9. Test Port Crosstalk
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Frequency Range
2-172
Measured Value
(dB)
Specification
(dB)
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dB)
300 kHz to 3 GHz
< −100
±1.0
3 GHz to 6 GHz
< −90
±2.0
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ET
Report Number
Serial Number
10. Uncorrected Port Performance
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Test Description
Frequency Range
Spec.
(dB)
Measured Value
(dB)
Meas. Uncert.
(dB)
Directivity
300 kHz to 1.3 GHz
≤ −30
± 0.9
Directivity
1.3 GHz to 3 GHz
≤ −24
± 0.6
Directivity
3 GHz to 6 GHz
≤ −19
± 0.8
Source Match
300 kHz to 1.3 GHz
≤ −25
± 1.3
Source Match
1.3 GHz to 3 GHz
≤ −20
± 1.5
Source Match
3 GHz to 6 GHz
≤ −14
± 1.3
Source Match
300 kHz to 1.3 GHz
≤ −23
± 1.0
Source Match
1.3 GHz to 3 GHz
≤ −18
± 1.2
Source Match
3 GHz to 6 GHz
≤ −14
± 1.3
Forward Direction
Forward Direction
(Standard)
Forward Direction
(Option 004)
Chapter 2
2-173
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ET
Report Number
Serial Number
Option(s)
Date
10. Uncorrected Port Performance (continued)
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Test Description
Frequency Range
Spec.
(dB)
Measured Value
(dB)
Meas. Uncert.
(dB)
Forward Direction
Refl. Tracking
300 kHz to 1.3 GHz
± 1.0
± 0.009
Refl. Tracking
1.3 GHz to 3 GHz
± 1.0
± 0.019
Refl. Tracking
3 GHz to 6 GHz
± 2.0
± 0.030
Load Match
300 kHz to 1.3 GHz
≤ −24
± 0.2
Load Match
1.3 GHz to 3 GHz
≤ −19
± 0.2
Load Match
3 GHz to 6 GHz
≤ −16
± 0.2
Trans. Tracking
300 kHz to 1.3 GHz
± 1.5
± 0.006
Trans. Tracking
1.3 GHz to 3 GHz
± 1.5
± 0.055
Trans. Tracking
3 GHz to 6 GHz
± 2.5
± 0.054
Forward Direction
Forward Direction
2-174
Chapter 2
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
Agilent Technologies Company
Model 8753ET
Report Number
Serial Number
11. System Trace Noise
Test Port
IF BW
Phase/Magnitude
Measured Value
Specification
Test Frequency: 3 GHz
Reflection
3 kHz
Magnitude
<0.006 dB rms
Reflection
3 kHz
Phase
<0.038 °rms
Reflection
10 Hz
Phase
<0.006 °rms
Reflection
10 Hz
Magnitude
<0.001 dB rms
Transmission
10 Hz
Magnitude
<0.001 dB rms
Transmission
10 Hz
Phase
<0.006 °rms
Transmission
3 kHz
Phase
<0.038 °rms
Transmission
3 kHz
Magnitude
<0.006 dB rms
Test Frequency: 6 GHz
Note: If your analyzer does not have Option 006, write “N/A” in all entries above 3 GHz.
Reflection
3 kHz
Magnitude
<0.010 dB rms
Reflection
3 kHz
Phase
<0.070 °rms
Reflection
10 Hz
Phase
<0.012 °rms
Reflection
10 Hz
Magnitude
<0.002 dB rms
Transmission
10 Hz
Magnitude
<0.002 dB rms
Transmission
10 Hz
Phase
<0.012 °rms
Transmission
3 kHz
Phase
<0.070 °rms
Transmission
3 kHz
Magnitude
<0.010 dB rms
Chapter 2
2-175
System Verification and Performance Tests
Agilent 8753ET Performance Test Records
2-176
Chapter 2
3 Adjustments and Correction Constants
3-1
Adjustments and Correction Constants
This chapter contains the following adjustment procedures:
• A9 Switch Positions on page 3-6
• Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44) on page 3-7
• Source Pretune Default Correction Constants (Test 45) on page 3-8
• Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46) on page 3-9
• Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48) on page 3-10
• RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47) on page 3-11
• IF Amplifier Correction Constants (Test 51) on page 3-14
• ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52) on page 3-15
• Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53) on page 3-16
• Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54) on page 3-26
• Serial Number Correction Constants (Test 55) on page 3-31
• Option Numbers Correction Constants (Test 56) on page 3-32
• Initialize EEPROMs (Test 58) on page 3-33
• EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure on page 3-34
• Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure on page 3-35
• Loading Firmware on page 3-36
• Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment on page 3-40
• Frequency Accuracy Adjustment on page 3-43
• High/Low Band Transition Adjustment on page 3-47
• Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment on page 3-49
• Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment on page 3-52
• Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants on page 3-54
3-2
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures
Table 3-1 lists the additional service procedures which you must perform to ensure that
the instrument is working correctly, following the replacement of an assembly. Unless
otherwise noted, these procedures can be located in either Chapter 2 , “System Verification
and Performance Tests,” or in this chapter, “Adjustments and Correction Constants.”
Perform the procedures in the order that they are listed in the table.
Table 3-1
Related Service Procedures
Replaced
Assembly
Adjustments/ Correction Constants
(Chapter 3)
Verification (Chapter 2)
A1 Front Panel
Keyboard
None
— Service Test 0 (Chapter 10)
— Service Test 23 (Chapter 10)
A2 Front Panel
Interface
None
—
—
—
—
A3 Source
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
A9 Switch Positions
Source Def CC (Test 44)
Pretune Default CC (Test 45)
Analog Bus CC (Test 46)
Source Pretune CC (Test 48)
RF Output Power CC (Test 47)
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC
(Test 53)
— Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC
(Test 54)
— Source Spur Avoidance Tracking
— EEPROM Backup Disk
— Test Port Output Frequency Range
and Accuracy
— Test Port Output Power Level
Accuracy
— Test Port Output Power Linearity
— Test Port Output/Input Harmonics
(Option 002 only)
A4/A5/A6
Samplers
— A9 Switch Positions
— Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC
(Test 53)
— IF Amplifier CC (Test 51)
— EEPROM Backup Disk
— Minimum R Channel Level
(if R sampler replaced)
— Test Port Crosstalk
— Test Port Input Frequency Response
A7 Pulse
Generator
— A9 Switch Positions
— Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC
(Test 53)
— EEPROM Backup Disk
— Test Port Input Frequency Response
— Test Port Frequency Range and
Accuracy
A8 Post
Regulator
— A9 Switch Positions
— Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC
(Test 54)
— Source Spur Avoidance Tracking
— EEPROM Backup Disk
— Service Test 0 (Chapter 10)
— Check A8 test point voltages
A9 CPU
(EEPROM
Backup Disk
Available)
—
—
—
—
—
— Operator's Check
Chapter 3
A9 Switch Positions
Load Firmware
Serial Number CC (Test 55)
Option Number CC (Test 56)
Correction Constants Retrieval
Service Test 0 (Chapter 10)
Service Test 23 (Chapter 10)
Service Test 12 (Chapter 10)
Tests 66–80
— Service Test 21 (Chapter 4)
— Service Test 22 (Chapter 4)
3-3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Post-Repair Procedures
Table 3-1
Related Service Procedures
Replaced
Assembly
Adjustments/ Correction Constants
(Chapter 3)
Verification (Chapter 2)
A9 CPU
(EEPROM
Backup Disk Not
Available)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— Test Port Output Frequency Range
and Accuracy
— Test Port Output Power Level
Accuracy
— Test Port Output Power Linearity
— Test Port Receiver Magnitude
Dynamic Accuracy
— Test Port Input Frequency Response
—
—
—
—
A9 Switch Positions
Load Firmware
Serial Number CC (Test 55)
Option Number CC (Test 56)
Source Def CC (Test 44)
Pretune Default CC (Test 45)
Analog Bus CC (Test 46)
ADC Linearity CC (Test 52)
Source Pretune CC (Test 48)
RF Output Power CC (Test 47)
Sampler Magnitude and Phase
CC (Test 53)
IF Amplifier CC (Test 51)
Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC
(Test 54)
Unprotected Hardware Option
Numbers CC
EEPROM Backup Disk
A10 Digital IF
—
—
—
—
A9 Switch Positions
Analog Bus CC (Test 46)
ADC Linearity CC (Test 52)
Sampler Magnitude and Phase
CC (Test 53)
— IF Amplifier CC (Test 51)
— EEPROM Backup Disk
— Test Port Input Noise Floor Level
— Test Port Crosstalk
— System Trace Noise
A11 Phase Lock
—
—
—
—
—
A9 Switch Positions
Analog Bus CC (Test 46)
Pretune Default CC (Test 45)
Source Pretune CC (Test 48)
EEPROM Backup Disk
— Minimum R Channel Level
— Test Port Output Frequency Range
and Accuracy
A12 Reference
—
—
—
—
A9 Switch Positions
High/Low Band Transition
Frequency Accuracy
EEPROM Backup Disk
— Source Frequency Range and
Accuracy
A13 Fractional-N
(Analog)
— A9 Switch Positions
— Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and
FM Sideband
— EEPROM Backup Disk
— Test Port Output Frequency Range
and Accuracy
A14 Fractional-N
(Digital)
— A9 Switch Positions
— Fractional-N Frequency Range
— Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and
FM Sideband
— EEPROM Backup Disk
— Test Port Output Frequency Range
and Accuracy
A15 Preregulator
None
— Self-Test (Chapter 4)
A16 Rear Panel
Interface
None
— Internal Test 13, Rear Panel
3-4
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Post-Repair Procedures
Table 3-1
Related Service Procedures
Replaced
Assembly
Adjustments/ Correction Constants
(Chapter 3)
Verification (Chapter 2)
A17 Motherboard
None
— Observation of Display
— Tests 66–80 (Chapter 10)
A18 Display
None
— Observation of Display
— Tests 66–80 (Chapter 10)
A19 Graphics
System Processor
None
— Observation of Display
— Tests 66–80 (Chapter 10)
A20 Disk Drive
None
None
8753ET: A21
Dual Directional
Coupler
— A9 Switch Positions
— RF Output Power CC (Test 47)
— Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC
(Test 53)
— IF Amplifier CC (Test 51)
— EEPROM Backup Disk
— Reflection Test Port Output Power
Level Accuracy
— Reflection Test Port Output Power
Linearity
— Transmission Test Port Input
Frequency Response
— Uncorrected Port Performance
8753ES: A21 Test
Port Coupler
— A9 Switch Positions
— RF Output Power CC (Test 47)
— Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC
(Test 53)
— IF Amplifier CC (Test 51)
— EEPROM Backup Disk
— Test Port Output Power Level
Accuracy
— Test Port Output Power Linearity
— Test Port Input Frequency Response
— Test Port Crosstalk
— A9 Switch Positions
— Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC
(Test 53)
— IF Amplifier CC (Test 51)
— EEPROM Backup Disk*
— Test Port Input Frequency Response
— Test Port Crosstalk
A23 Bd Assy LED
None
— Self-Test (Chapter 4)
8753ES: A24
Transfer Switch
None
— Operator's Check
— Service Test 21 (Chapter 4)
— Service Test 22 (Chapter 4)
— Test Port Crosstalk
A25 Test Set
Interface
None
— Self-Test (Chapter 4)
A26 High
Stability Freq Ref
— Frequency Accuracy Adjustment
(Option 1D5)
— Test Port Frequency Range and
Accuracy
8753ES: A22 Test
Port
Couplera
— Test Port Receiver Magnitude
Compression
— Test Port Receiver Phase
Compression
— Harmonic Measurement Accuracy
(Option 002)
— Test Port Receiver Magnitude
Compression
— Test Port Receiver Phase
Compression
— Harmonic Measurement Accuracy
(Option 002)
a. Agilent Technologies verifies source output performance on Port 1 only. Port 2 source output
performance is typical.
Chapter 3
3-5
Adjustments and Correction Constants
A9 Switch Positions
A9 Switch Positions
1. Remove the power line cord from the analyzer.
2. Set the analyzer on its side.
3. Remove the two lower-rear corner bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with the
T-10 TORX screwdriver.
4. Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover’s back edge, using a T-15 TORX
screwdriver.
5. Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument.
6. Move the switch as shown in Figure 3-1:
• Move the A9 switch to the Alter position before you run any of the correction
constant adjustment routines. This is the position for altering the analyzer's
correction constants.
• Move the A9 switch to the Normal position, after you have run correction constant
adjustment routines. This is the position for normal operating conditions.
7. Reinstall the bottom cover, but not the rear bumpers.
Figure 3-1
A9 Correction Constants Switch
8. Reconnect the power line cord and switch on the instrument.
3-6
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44)
Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44)
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This internal adjustment routine writes default correction constants for the source power
accuracy.
1. Press Preset
YES .
System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
44
x1
EXECUTE TEST
2. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:
• If the analyzer displays *Source Def DONE, you have completed this procedure.
• If the analyzer displays *Source Def FAIL, refer to Chapter 7 , “Source
Troubleshooting.”
Chapter 3
3-7
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Source Pretune Default Correction Constants (Test 45)
Source Pretune Default Correction Constants (Test 45)
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment writes default correction constants for rudimentary phase lock pretuning
accuracy.
1. Press Preset
YES .
System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
45
x1
EXECUTE TEST
2. Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment routine:
• If the analyzer displays Pretune Def DONE, you have completed this procedure.
• If the analyzer displays FAIL, refer to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting.”
3-8
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46)
Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46)
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This procedure calibrates the analog bus by using three reference voltages (ground, +0.37
and +2.5 volts), then stores the calibration data as correction constants in EEPROMs.
1. Press Preset
YES .
System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
46
x1
EXECUTE TEST
2. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:
• If the analyzer displays ABUS Cor DONE, you have completed this procedure.
• If the analyzer displays ABUS Cor FAIL, refer to Chapter 6 , “Digital Control
Troubleshooting.”
Chapter 3
3-9
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48)
Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48)
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This procedure generates pretune values for correct phase-locked loop operation.
1. Press Preset
YES .
System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
48
x1
EXECUTE TEST
2. Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment routine:
• If the analyzer displays Pretune Cor DONE, you have completed this procedure.
• If the analyzer displays FAIL, refer to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting.”
3-10
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)
RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)
Required Equipment and Tools
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Power Meter
436A/437B/438A or E4418B/4419B
GPIB Cable
10833A
Antistatic Wrist Strap
9300-1367
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord
9300-0980
Static-control Table Mat and Ground Wire
9300-0797
Additional Equipment for 50Ω Analyzers
Power Sensor
8482A
Power Sensor (for Option 006 analyzers)
8481A
Adapter APC-7 to Type-N (f)
(for 8753ES only)
11524A
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
Power Sensor
8483A Option H03
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This procedure adjusts several correction constants that can improve the output power
level accuracy of the internal source. They are related to the power level, power slope,
power slope offset, and the ALC roll-off factors among others.
1. If you just completed “Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53),”
start at step 8 in this procedure.
2. Press Preset
Local
SYSTEM CONTROLLER .
3. Press Local SET ADDRESSES ADDRESS: P MTR/GPIB . The default power meter
address is 13. Refer to the power meter manual as required to observe or change its
GPIB address.
4. Press POWER MTR:438A/437 to toggle between the 438A/437 and 436A power meters.
Choose the appropriate model number. (Use the 438A/437 selection if the power meter
is an E4419B or E4418B.)
NOTE
Chapter 3
If you are using the 438A power meter, connect the 8482A power sensor to
channel A, and the 8481A power sensor to channel B.
3-11
Adjustments and Correction Constants
RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)
Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry
5. Press System
SERVICE MENU
TEST OPTIONS
LOSS/SENSR LISTS
CAL FACTOR SENSOR A to access the calibration factor menu for power sensor A
(8482A for a 50Ω analyzer, or 8483A Option H03 for a 75Ω analyzer).
6. Zero and calibrate the power meter and power sensor.
7. Build a table of up to 55 points (55 frequencies with their calibration factors). To enter
each point, follow these steps:
a. Press ADD
FREQUENCY .
b. Input a frequency value and then press the appropriate key ( G/n , M/µ , or k/m ).
c. Press CAL FACTOR and enter the calibration factor percentage that corresponds
to the frequency you entered.
The cal factor and frequency values are found on the back of the sensor. If you make
a mistake, press
and re-enter the correct value.
d. Press DONE to complete the data entry for each point.
NOTE
The following terms are part of the sensor calibration menu.
SEGMENT
allows you to select a frequency point.
EDIT
allows you to edit or change a previously entered value.
DELETE
allows you to delete a point from the sensor cal factor table.
ADD
allows you to add a point into the sensor cal factor table.
CLEAR LIST allows you to erase the entire sensor cal factor table.
DONE
allows you to complete the points entry of the sensor cal
factor table.
8. For Option 006 Instruments Only: Press CAL FACTOR SENSOR B to create a
power sensor calibration table for power sensor B (8481A), using the softkeys
mentioned above.
9. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-2.
3-12
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)
Figure 3-2
RF Output Correction Constants Test Setup
10.Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
47
x1 .
11.Press EXECUTE TEST and YES at the prompt to alter the correction constants.
12.Follow the instructions at the prompts and press CONTINUE .
13.When the analyzer completes the test, observe the display for the results:
• If you see DONE, press Preset and you have completed this procedure.
• If you see FAIL, re-run this routine in the following order:
a. Press Preset .
b. Repeat “Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44)” on page 3-7.
c. Repeat “RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)” on page 3-11.
Chapter 3
3-13
Adjustments and Correction Constants
IF Amplifier Correction Constants (Test 51)
IF Amplifier Correction Constants (Test 51)
Required Equipment and Tools
Description
HP/Agilent Part Number
Antistatic Wrist Strap
9300-1367
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord
9300-0980
Static-control Table Mat and Ground Wire
9300-0797
Additional Equipment for 50Ω Analyzers
RF Cable: (50Ω) 24-inch, APC-7
(8753ES only)
8120-4779
RF Cable: (50Ω) 24-inch, Type-N
8120-4781
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
RF Cable: (75Ω) 24-inch, Type-N
8120-2408
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
These correction constants compensate for possible discontinuities of signals greater than
−30 dBm.
1. Connect the appropriate RF cable between Port 1 and Port 2 of the analyzer (or between
the Transmission and Reflection Ports on an 8753ET analyzer).
2. Press Preset
System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
51
x1
EXECUTE TEST
YES
CONTINUE .
3. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:
• If DONE is displayed, you have completed this procedure.
• If FAIL is displayed, check that the RF cable is connected between Port 1 and Port 2.
Then, repeat this adjustment routine.
• If the analyzer continues to fail the adjustment routine, refer to Chapter 6 , “Digital
Control Troubleshooting.”
3-14
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52)
ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52)
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
These correction constants improve the dynamic accuracy by shifting small signals to the
most linear part of the ADC quantizing curve.
1. Press Preset
YES .
NOTE
System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
52
x1
EXECUTE TEST
This routine takes about three minutes.
2. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:
• If the analyzer displays ADC Ofs Cor DONE, you have completed this procedure.
• If the analyzer displays ADC Ofs Cor FAIL, refer to Chapter 6 , “Digital Control
Troubleshooting.”
Chapter 3
3-15
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants
(Test 53)
Required Equipment and Tools
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Power Meter
436A437B/438A or E4418B/4419B
GPIB Cable
10833A
Antistatic Wrist Strap
9300-1367
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord
9300-0980
Static-control Mat and Ground Wire
9300-0797
Additional Equipment for 50Ω Analyzers
Power Sensor
8482A
Power Sensor (for Option 006 analyzers)
8481A
Cable: (50Ω) 24-inch, APC-7 (2)
8120-4779
Adapter: APC-7 to Type-N(f)
(for 8753ES only)
11524A
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
Power Sensor
8483A Option H03
Cable: (75Ω) 24-inch, Type-N (2)
8120-2408
Additional Equipment for 8753ET Analyzers
Calibration Kit (Type-N)
85032B
Cable: (50Ω), 24 inch, Type-N
8120-4781
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment procedure corrects the overall flatness of the microwave components that
make up the analyzer receiver and signal separation sections. This is necessary for the
analyzer to meet the published test port flatness specification.
1. If you just completed “RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47),” continue this
procedure with step 8.
2. Press Preset
Local
SYSTEM CONTROLLER .
3. Press Local SET ADDRESSES ADDRESS: P MTR/GPIB . The default power meter
address is 13. Refer to the power meter manual as required to observe or change its
GPIB address.
4. Press POWER MTR:438A/437 to toggle between the 438A/437 and 436A power meters.
Choose the appropriate model number.
3-16
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
If you are using the 438A or E4419B power meter, connect the 8482A power
sensor to channel A, and the 8481A power sensor to channel B.
NOTE
Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry
5. Press System
SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS LOSS/SENSR LISTS
CAL FACTOR SENSOR A to access the calibration factor menu for power sensor A
(8482A for 50Ω analyzers, or 8483A Option H03 for 75Ω analyzers).
6. Build a table of up to 55 points (55 frequencies with their calibration factors). To enter
each point, follow these steps:
a. Press ADD
FREQUENCY .
b. Input a frequency value and then press the appropriate key ( G/n , M/µ , or k/m ).
c. Press DONE and enter the calibration factor percentage that corresponds to the
frequency you entered.
The cal factor and frequency values are found on the back of the sensor. If you make
a mistake, press
and re-enter the correct value.
d. Press DONE to complete the data entry for each point.
NOTE
The following terms are part of the sensor calibration menu.
SEGMENT
allows you to select a frequency point.
EDIT
allows you to edit or change a previously entered value.
DELETE
allows you to delete a point from the sensor cal factor table.
ADD
allows you to add a point into the sensor cal factor table.
CLEAR LIST allows you to erase the entire sensor cal factor table.
DONE
allows you to complete the points entry of the sensor cal
factor table.
7. For Option 006 Instruments Only: Zero and calibrate the power meter and
HP 8481A power sensor. Then press CAL FACTOR SENSOR B to create a power
sensor calibration table for power sensor B (8481A), using the softkeys mentioned
above.
8. If you have an 8753ES, go to “Determine the Insertion Loss of the Cable at 1 GHz
(8753ES),” next.
If you have an 8753ET, go to “Determine the Insertion Loss of the Cable at 1 GHz
(8753ET)” on page 3-19.
Chapter 3
3-17
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
Determine the Insertion Loss of the Cable at 1 GHz
(8753ES)
1. Press Preset
Meas
2. Press Center
1
3. Press Cal
Trans: FWD S21(B/R) .
G/n
CAL KIT
RESPONSE .
Span
50
CAL KIT: 7mm
M/µ .
RETURN
CALIBRATE MENU
4. Connect the 24 inch cable from Port 1 to Port 2, as shown in Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3
First Connections for Insertion Loss Measurement (8753ES)
5. Press THRU and then DONE: RESPONSE when the analyzer is done measuring the
through.
6. Press Save/Recall
SAVE STATE to save the calibration that you just made.
7. Make the connections as shown in Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4
3-18
Second Connection for Insertion Loss Measurement
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
8. Press Scale Ref SCALE/DIV .1 x1
Marker MARKER 1 1
G/n . Make a
note of the insertion loss (found in the upper-right corner of the analyzer display).
Proceed to “Sampler Correction Constants Routine” on page 3-20.
Determine the Insertion Loss of the Cable at 1 GHz
(8753ET)
1. Press Preset
Meas
2. Press Center
1
REFLECTION .
G/n
Span
M/µ .
50
3. Refer to Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5
First Connection for Insertion Loss Measurement (8753ET)
4. Perform a 1-port calibration by performing the following steps.
a. Press Cal
CALIBRATE MENU
REFLECTION 1-PORT .
b. Press FORWARD: OPENS .
c. Connect the open (from the calibration kit) to the Reflection port as shown in Figure
3-5.
d. Press OPEN (F) DONE: OPENS .
e. Press FORWARD: SHORTS .
f. Connect the short to the Reflection port as shown in Figure 3-5.
g. Press SHORT (F) DONE: SHORTS .
h. Remove the short from the Reflection port, then connect the load to the Reflection
port as shown in Figure 3-5. Press LOAD , then DONE 1-PORT CAL .
Chapter 3
3-19
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
5. Attach a type-N cable and a short to the Reflection port as shown in Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-6
Second Connection for Insertion Loss Measurement (8753ET)
6. Press Marker
MARKER 1
7. Press Sweep Setup
1
G/n .
TRIGGER MENU
SINGLE .
8. Note the marker reading and divide it by 2. Record this calculated value as the
insertion loss of the cable. It will be used later in this procedure. Proceed to “Sampler
Correction Constants Routine,” next.
Sampler Correction Constants Routine
1. Press Preset System SERVICE MENU
answer YES at the prompt.
TESTS
53
x1
EXECUTE TEST and
2. The analyzer displays:
CONNECT <3 GHz SENSOR A TO PORT 1 (8753ES)
or
CONNECT <3 GHz SENSOR A TO REFL PORT (8753ET)
Make the connections as shown in Figure 3-7, using the 8482A power sensor.
3-20
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
Figure 3-7
Connections for Sampler Correction Routine
3. Press CONTINUE to start the test. This part of the test will take about three minutes.
If the analyzer displays Sampler Cor - FAIL, check the following:
a. The GPIB address of your power meter is set at 13. Then repeat the “Sampler
Correction Constants Routine” on page 3-20.
b. The 8482A power sensor is connected to Port 1. Then repeat the “Sampler Correction
Constants Routine” on page 3-20.
4. For Option 006 Instruments Only:
When the analyzer displays:
CONNECT 6 GHz SENSOR B TO PORT 1, (8753ES)
or
CONNECT 6 GHz SENSOR B TO REFL PORT, (8753ET)
make the connections as shown in Figure 3-7, using the 8481A power sensor. Then press
CONTINUE . This part of the test will take about 20 seconds.
If you have an 8753ES, continue with the next step.
If you have an 8753ET, proceed to step 8.
Chapter 3
3-21
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
5. 8753ES only:
When the analyzer displays CONNECT <3 GHz SENSOR A TO PORT 2, make the
connections as shown in Figure 3-8, using the 8482A power sensor.
Figure 3-8
Connections for Sampler Correction at Port 2
6. For 8753ES only:
a. Press CONTINUE . This part of the test will take about 10 minutes.
b. For Option 006 Instruments Only: When the analyzer displays CONNECT 6 GHz
SENSOR TO PORT 2, make the connections as shown in Figure 3-8, using the
HP/Agilent 8481A power sensor. Then press CONTINUE . This part of the test will
take about 20 seconds.
7. When the analyzer displays CONNECT PORT 1 TO PORT 2, connect the second through
cable (for which you have previously determined the insertion loss) as shown in Figure
3-9. Proceed to step 9.
3-22
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
Figure 3-9
Connections for the Second Through Cable
8. For 8753ET only:
The analyzer will prompt you for the following connections in this order:
• CONNECT OPEN TO REFL PORT.
• CONNECT CABLE FROM REFL TO TRANS PORT.
Make the appropriate connections and press CONTINUE .
9. Press CONTINUE .
10.Enter the insertion loss of the through cable (determined previously) and press
CONTINUE . For example, if the insertion loss of the through cable at 1 GHz was found
to be 0.25 dB, then press .25
x1 .
11.When the analyzer completes the test, observe the display for the results:
• If you see Sampler Cor - DONE, you have completed this procedure.
• If you see Sampler Cor - FAIL, it is necessary to adjust the sampler gain offset
values, which are stored in EEPROM. Each sampler will require its own offset which
is determined by performing “8753ES: Sampler Offset,” or “8753ET: Sampler Offset,”
next.
Chapter 3
3-23
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
8753ES: Sampler Offset
1. Press Preset
Start
100
k/m
.
2. Connect an APC-7 RF cable between Port 1 and Port 2.
3. Press Power
4. Press Meas
0
x1 .
INPUT PORTS and then select the sampler to be tested: A , B , or R .
• If Sampler A will be tested: select TESTPORT 2 .
• If Sampler B will be tested: select TESTPORT 1 .
• If Sampler R will be tested: press TESTPORT 1 .
5. Go to step 1 in “Sampler Offset (continued).”
8753ET: Sampler Offset
1. Press Preset
Start
100
k/m .
• If Sampler A will be tested: Connect an open to the Reflection port.
• If Sampler B or Sampler R will be tested: Connect a type-N RF cable between the
Reflection and Transmission ports.
2. Press Power
3. Press Meas
0
x1 .
INPUT PORTS and then select the sampler to be tested: A , B , or R .
4. Go to step 1 in “Sampler Offset (continued),” next.
Sampler Offset (continued)
1. Press System
CONFIGURE MENU
2. Press Sweep Setup
3. Press Marker
TRIGGER MENU
MARKER 1
RAW OFFSET OFF .
SINGLE .
Marker Search
SEARCH: MAX .
4. Read the marker’s power value from the top of the display. Be sure to retain the sign
(+ or −) of the value.
5. Perform the following calculation using the following instructions:
Sampler Offset = ROUND [4.0 (4.0 − (marker value))]
• Subtract the marker value from 4.0.
• Multiply the result by 4.0.
• Round the result to the nearest integer.
6. Record this number for each sampler.
7. Continue with one of the following three procedures, depending on which sampler needs
adjustment.
3-24
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
A Channel Sampler
1. Access the first address by pressing System
PEEK/POKE ADDRESS
1619001372
SERVICE MENU
PEEK/POKE
x1 .
2. Enter the new value for the A sampler offset at the accessed address by pressing
POKE [new value for A] x1 .
3. Access the second address by pressing PEEK/POKE ADDRESS
x1 .
1619001373
4. Enter the new value at the accessed address by pressing POKE
248
x1 .
5. Press Preset for the analyzer to use the new values.
6. Go to “Finish,” or to the next sampler to be adjusted.
B Channel Sampler
1. Access the first address by pressing System
PEEK/POKE ADDRESS
1619001374
SERVICE MENU
PEEK/POKE
x1 .
2. Enter the new value for the B sampler offset at the accessed address by pressing
POKE [new value for B] x1 .
3. Access the second address by pressing PEEK/POKE ADDRESS
1619001375
4. Enter the new value at the accessed address by pressing POKE
248
x1 .
x1 .
5. Press Preset for the analyzer to use the new values.
6. Go to “Finish,” or to the next sampler to be adjusted.
R Channel Sampler
1. Access the first address by pressing System
PEEK/POKE ADDRESS
1619001376
SERVICE MENU
PEEK/POKE
x1 .
2. Enter the new value for the R sampler offset at the accessed address by pressing
POKE [new value for R] x1 .
3. Access the second address by pressing PEEK/POKE ADDRESS
4. Enter the new value at the accessed address by pressing POKE
1619001377
128
x1 .
x1 .
5. Press Preset for the analyzer to use the new values.
6. Go to “Finish,” or to the next sampler to be adjusted.
Finish
1. Repeat the “Sampler Correction Constants Routine” on page 3-20.
2. If the analyzer continues to fail this adjustment routine, refer to Chapter 7 , “Source
Troubleshooting.”
Chapter 3
3-25
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54)
Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54)
Required Equipment and Tools
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Low-pass filter
9135-0198
Antistatic wrist strap
9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord
9300-0980
Static-control table mat and ground wire
9300-0797
Additional Equipment for 50Ω Analyzers
Adapter: (2) Type-N (m) to APC-7 (8753ET)
11525A
Adapter: APC-7 to 3.5 mm (m)
1250-1746
Adapter: APC-7 to 3.5 mm (f)
1250-1747
RF cable set: APC-7
11857D
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
Adapter: APC-3.5 (f) to Type-N (f)
1250-1745
Adapter: APC-3.5 (m) to Type-N (f)
1250-1750
RF Cable Set: 50Ω, Type-N
11851B
Minimum Loss Pad: 50Ω to 75Ω (2) (75Ω
analyzer)
11852B
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
The nominal frequency of the cavity oscillator is 2.982 GHz, but it varies with
temperature. This procedure determines the precise frequency of the cavity oscillator at a
particular temperature by identifying a known spur.
NOTE
You should perform this procedure with the recommended filter, or a filter
with at least 50 dB of rejection at 2.9 GHz, and a passband which includes
800 MHz. The filter makes spur identification substantially faster and more
reliable.
With the filter, you need to distinguish between only two spurs, each of which should be
10 dB to 20 dB (3 to 4 divisions) above the trace noise.
Without the filter, you need to distinguish the target spur between four or five spurs, each
of which may be 0.002 to 0.010 dB (invisible to 2 divisions) above or below the trace noise.
Perform the first five steps of the procedure at least once for familiarization before trying
to select the target spur (especially if you are not using a filter).
3-26
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54)
1. Connect the equipment shown in Figure 3-10.
Figure 3-10
Setup for Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constant
Routine
2. Press Preset
x1
Avg
IF BW
EXECUTE TEST
3000
x1
System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
54
YES .
During this adjustment routine, you will see several softkeys:
CONTINUE
sweeps the current frequency span; you may
press it repeatedly for additional sweeps of the
current frequency span.
NEXT
sweeps the next frequency span (2 MHz higher).
SELECT
enters the value of the marker (which you have
placed on the spur) and exits the routine.
ABORT
exits the routine.
3. Press CONTINUE to sweep the first frequency span three times. Each new span
overlaps the previous span by 3 MHz (the center frequency increases by 2 MHz; the
span is 5 MHz). Therefore, anything visible on the right half of the screen of one set of
sweeps will appear on the left half or center of the screen when you press NEXT .
4. Press NEXT repeatedly. Watch the trace on each sweep and try to spot the target spur.
With the filter, the target spur will be one of two obvious spurs (see Figure 3-11).
Without the filter (not recommended), the target spur will be one of four or five less
distinct spurs as shown in Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13. When the center frequency
increases to 2994.999 MHz, and you have not “selected” the target spur, the message
Cav Osc Cor FAIL will appear on the display.
Chapter 3
3-27
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54)
Figure 3-11
Typical Display of Spurs with a Filter
Spur Search Procedure with a Filter
5. Press EXECUTE TEST YES CONTINUE and the other softkeys as required to
observe and mark the target spur. The target spur will appear to the right of a second
spur, similar to Figure 3-11.
6. Rotate the front panel knob to position the marker on the spur and then press
SELECT .
7. Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment routine:
• If the analyzer displays Cav Osc Cor DONE, you have completed this procedure.
• If the analyzer does not display DONE, repeat this procedure.
• If the analyzer continues not to display DONE, refer to Chapter 7 , “Source
Troubleshooting.”
3-28
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54)
Spurs Search Procedure without a Filter
8. Press EXECUTE TEST YES CONTINUE and the other softkeys as required to
observe and mark the target spur.
9. The target spur will appear in many variations. Often it will be difficult to identify
positively; occasionally it will be nearly impossible to identify. Do not hesitate to press
CONTINUE as many times as necessary to thoroughly inspect the current span.
The target spur usually appears as one of a group of four evenly spaced spurs as in
Figure 3-12. The target spur is the right most spur (fourth from the left). On any
particular sweep, one, any, or all of the spurs may be large, small, visible, invisible,
above or below the reference line.
Figure 3-12
Typical Display of Four Spurs without a Filter
On occasion the largest spur appears as one of a group of five evenly spaced spurs as
shown in Figure 3-13. The target spur is again the fourth from the left (not the fifth,
right-most spur).
Chapter 3
3-29
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54)
Figure 3-13
Target Spur Is Fourth in Display of Five Spurs
Figure 3-14 shows another variation of the basic four-spur pattern: some up, some down,
and the target spur itself almost indistinguishable.
Figure 3-14
Target Spur Is Almost Invisible
10.Rotate the front panel knob to position the marker on the target spur. Then press
SELECT and observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:
• If the analyzer displays Cav Osc Cor DONE, you have completed this procedure.
• If the analyzer displays FAIL, refer to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting.”
3-30
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Serial Number Correction Constants (Test 55)
Serial Number Correction Constants (Test 55)
Analyzer warm-up time: 5 minutes.
This procedure stores the analyzer serial number in the A9 CPU assembly EEPROMs.
CAUTION
Perform this procedure only if the A9 CPU assembly has been replaced.
1. Record the ten character serial number that is on the analyzer’s rear panel
identification label.
2. Press Preset
logo.
DISPLAY
MORE
TITLE
ERASE TITLE to erase the HP/Agilent
3. Enter the serial number with an external keyboard or by rotating the front panel knob
to position the arrow below each character of the instrument serial number, and then
pressing SELECT LETTER to enter each letter.
Press
if you made a mistake.
4. Press DONE when you have finished entering the title.
CAUTION
You cannot correct mistakes after you perform step 5, unless you contact the
factory for a clear-serial-number keyword. Then you must perform the
“Option Numbers Correction Constants (Test 56)” on page 3-32 and repeat
this procedure.
5. Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
55
x1
EXECUTE TEST
YES .
6. Observe the analyzer for the results of the routine:
• If the analyzer displays the message Serial Cor DONE, you have completed this
procedure.
• If the analyzer does not display DONE, then either the serial number that you entered
in steps 3 and 4 did not match the required format or a serial number was already
stored. Check the serial number recognized by the analyzer:
a. Press Preset
System
SERVICE MENU
FIRMWARE REVISION .
b. Look for the serial number displayed on the analyzer screen.
c. Repeat this adjustment test.
• If the analyzer continues to fail this adjustment routine, contact the nearest Agilent
Technologies sales or service office.
Chapter 3
3-31
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Option Numbers Correction Constants (Test 56)
Option Numbers Correction Constants (Test 56)
This procedure stores instrument option(s) information in A9 CPU assembly EEPROMs.
You can also use this procedure to remove a serial number, with the unique keyword, as
referred to in “Option Numbers Correction Constants (Test 56),” previously.
1. Remove the instrument top cover and record the keyword label(s) that are on the
display assembly. Note that each keyword is for each option installed in the instrument.
• If the instrument does not have a label, then contact your nearest Agilent
Technologies sales or service office. Be sure to include the full serial number of the
instrument.
2. Press Preset
Display
MORE
TITLE
ERASE TITLE .
3. Enter the keyword with an external keyboard or by rotating the front panel knob to
position the arrow below each character of the keyword, and then pressing
SELECT LETTER to enter each letter.
Press
if you made a mistake.
4. Press DONE when you have finished entering the title.
CAUTION
Do not confuse “I” with “1” (one) or “O” with “0” (zero).
5. Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
56
x1
EXECUTE TEST
YES .
6. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:
• If the analyzer displays Option Cor DONE, you have completed this procedure.
• If the analyzer has more than one option, repeat steps 2 through 5 to install the
remaining options.
• If the analyzer displays Option Cor FAIL, check the keyword used in step 3 and
make sure it is correct. Pay special attention to the letters "I" or "0", the numbers "1"
or "0" (zero). Repeat this entire adjustment test.
• If the analyzer continues to fail the adjustment routine, contact the nearest Agilent
Technologies sales or service office.
3-32
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Initialize EEPROMs (Test 58)
Initialize EEPROMs (Test 58)
This service internal test performs the following functions:
• Destroys all correction constants and all unprotected options.
• Initializes certain EEPROM address locations to zeroes.
This routine will not alter the serial number or Options 002, 006 and 010
correction constants.
NOTE
1. Make sure the A9 switch is in the alter position.
2. Press Preset
YES .
System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
58
x1
EXECUTE TEST
3. Restore the analyzer correction constants in the EEPROMs:
• If you have the correction constants backed up on a disk, perform these steps:
a. Place the disk in the analyzer disk drive and press Save/Recall
INTERNAL DISK .
SELECT DISK
b. Use the front panel knob to highlight the filename that represents your serial
number.
c. Press RETURN
RECALL STATE
Preset .
• If you don't have the correction constants backed up on a disk, run all the internal
service routines in the following order:
— Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44)
— Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 45)
— Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46)
— ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52)
— Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48)
— RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)
— Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
— IF Amplifier Correction Constants (Test 51)
— Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54)
— EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure
Chapter 3
3-33
Adjustments and Correction Constants
EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure
EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure
Required Equipment and Tools
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
3.5-inch Floppy Disk
92192A (box of 10)
Antistatic Wrist Strap
9300-1367
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord
9300-0980
Static-control Table Mat and Ground Wire
9300-0797
The correction constants, which are unique to your instrument, are stored in EEPROM on
the A9 controller assembly. By creating an EEPROM backup disk, you will have a copy of
all the correction constant data should you need to replace or repair the A9 assembly.
1. Insert a 3.5-inch disk into the analyzer disk drive.
2. If the disk is not formatted, follow these steps:
a. Press Save/Recall
FILE UTILITIES
FORMAT DISK .
b. Select the format type:
• To format a LIF disk, select FORMAT:LIF .
• To format a DOS disk, select FORMAT:DOS .
c. Press FORMAT INT DISK and answer YES at the query.
3. Press System
SERVICE MENU
STORE EEPR ON
SAVE STATE .
NOTE
Save/Recall
SERVICE MODES
SELECT DISK
MORE
INTERNAL DISK
RETURN
The analyzer creates a default file “FILE0”. The filename appears in the
upper-left corner of the display. The file type “ISTATE(E)” indicates that the
file is an instrument-state with EEPROM backup.
4. Press FILE UTILITIES RENAME FILE ERASE TITLE . Use the front panel knob
and the SELECT LETTER softkey (or an external keyboard) to rename the file
“FILE0” TO “N12345” where 12345 represents the last 5 digits of the instrument's
serial number. (The first character in the filename must be a letter.) When you are
finished renaming the file, press DONE .
5. Write the following information on the disk label:
• analyzer serial number
• today's date
• “EEPROM Backup Disk”
3-34
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure
Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure
Required Equipment and Tools
Description
HP/Agilent Part Number
EEPROM backup disk
Antistatic wrist strap
9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord
9300-0980
Static-control table mat and earth ground wire
9300-0797
By using the current EEPROM backup disk, you can download the correction constants
data into the instrument EEPROMs.
1. Insert the “EEPROM Backup Disk” into the analyzer’s disk drive.
2. Make sure the A9 switch is in the Alter position.
3. Press Save/Recall SELECT DISK INTERNAL DISK . Use the front panel knob to
highlight the file “N12345” where N12345 represents the file name of the EEPROM
data for the analyzer. On the factory shipped EEPROM backup disk, the filename is
“FILE1”.
4. Press RETURN RECALL STATE to download the correction constants data into the
instrument EEPROMs.
5. Press Preset and verify that good data was transferred to EEPROM by performing a
simple measurement.
6. Move the A9 switch back to the Normal position when you are done working with the
instrument.
Chapter 3
3-35
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Loading Firmware
Loading Firmware
Required Equipment and Tools
Firmware disk for the 8753ES or 8753ET
Analyzer warm-up time: None required.
The following procedures will load firmware for new or existing CPU boards in your
network analyzer.
Loading Firmware into an Existing CPU
Use this procedure for upgrading firmware in an operational instrument whose CPU board
has not been changed.
CAUTION
Loading firmware will clear all internal memory. Perform steps 1 through 5,
next, to save any instrument states that are stored in internal memory to a
floppy disk. If saving states is not necessary, proceed to step 6.
1. Press Save/Recall
SELECT DISK
INTERNAL MEMORY
RETURN .
2. Select an instrument state and press RECALL STATE .
3. Press SELECT DISK
INTERNAL DISK
RETURN
SAVE STATE .
4. If the instrument state file was not saved to disk with the same name that it had while
in internal memory, you may wish to rename the file:
Press FILE UTILITIES RENAME FILE , enter the desired name, and press DONE .
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each instrument state that you wish to save.
6. Turn off the network analyzer.
7. Insert the firmware disk into the instrument’s disk drive.
8. Turn the instrument on. The firmware will be loaded automatically during power-on.
The front panel LEDs should step through a sequence as firmware is loaded. The
display will be blank during this time.
At the end of a successful loading, the LEDs for Channel 1 (and Port 1 on an 8753ES)
will remain on and the display will turn on indicating the version of firmware that was
loaded.
3-36
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Loading Firmware
In Case of Difficulty
If the firmware did not load successfully, LED patterns on the front panel can help you
isolate the problem.
• If the following LED pattern is present, an acceptable firmware filename was not found
on the disk. (The desired format for firmware filenames is 8753Ex_7._yz, where x =
either S or T, and where yz = the latest firmware revision number.) Check that the
firmware disk used was for the 8753ET/ES.
LED Pattern
CH1
CH2
✲
✲
R
L
T
S
• If any of the following LED patterns are present, the firmware disk may be defective.
LED Pattern
CH1
CH2
R
L
T
S
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
• If any other LED pattern is present, the CPU board is defective.
Chapter 3
3-37
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Loading Firmware
Loading Firmware into a New CPU
Use this procedure to load firmware for an instrument whose CPU board has been
replaced.
1. Turn off the network analyzer.
2. Insert the firmware disk into the instrument’s disk drive.
3. Turn the instrument on. The firmware will be loaded automatically during power-on.
The front panel LEDs should step through a sequence as firmware is loaded. The
display will be blank during this time.
At the end of a successful loading, the LEDs for Channel 1 (and Port 1 on an 8753ES)
will remain on and the display will turn on indicating the version of firmware that was
loaded.
In Case of Difficulty
• If the firmware did not load successfully, LED patterns on the front panel can help you
isolate the problem.
— If the following LED pattern is present, an acceptable firmware filename was not
found on the disk. (The desired format for firmware filenames is 8753Ex_7._yz,
where x = either S or T, and where yz = the latest firmware revision number.) Check
that the firmware disk used was for the 8753ES or 8753ET.
LED Pattern
CH1
CH2
R
L
T
S
✲
3-38
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Loading Firmware
— If any of the following LED patterns are present, the firmware disk may be defective.
LED Pattern
CH1
CH2
R
L
T
S
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
✲
— If any other LED pattern is present, the CPU board is defective.
NOTE
If firmware did not load, a red LED on the CPU board will be flashing.
• If the following LED pattern is present on the CPU board, suspect the disk drive or
associated cabling:
✲
✲
✲
O
✲
✲
O
O
(front of instrument ⇓)
Chapter 3
3-39
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment
Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment
Required Equipment and Tools
Description
HP/Agilent Part Number
Non-metallic adjustment tool
8830-0024
Antistatic wrist strap
9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord
9300-0980
Static-control table mat and ground wire
9300-0797
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
This procedure centers the fractional-N VCO (voltage controlled oscillator) in its tuning
range to insure reliable operation of the instrument.
1. Remove the right-rear bumpers and right side cover.
2. Press Preset
Display
SERVICE MENU
NUMBER OF POINTS
3. Press Start
k/m
Meas
36
DUAL|QUAD SETUP
ANALOG BUS ON
M/µ
11
Stop
x1
DUAL CHAN ON
System
Sweep Setup
COUPLED CH OFF .
60.75
ANALOG IN Aux Input
M/µ
29
Sweep Setup
SWEEP TIME
12.5
x1 to observe the “FN VCO Tun”
voltage.
4. Press Format MORE REAL Scale Ref
.6
x1 REFERENCE VALUE −7
x1 to set and scale channel 1. Press Marker to set the marker to the far right of the
graticule.
5. Press Chan 2
k/m
Meas
6. Press Format
x1
Marker
Sweep Setup
CW FREQ
ANALOG IN Aux Input
MORE
6
REAL
29
Scale Ref
31.0001
M/µ
SWEEP TIME
12.375
x1 to observe the “FN VCO Tun” voltage.
.2
x1
REFERENCE VALUE
6.77
k/m to set channel 2 and its marker.
7. Adjust the “FN VCO TUNE” (see Figure 3-15) with a non-metallic tool so that the
channel 1 marker is as many divisions above the reference line as the channel 2 marker
is below it. (See Figure 3-16.)
8. To fine-tune this adjustment, press Preset
SERVICE MENU
ANALOG BUS ON
Sweep Setup CW FREQ System
SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON to set
“FRAC N TUNE” to 29.2 MHz.
3-40
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment
Figure 3-15
Location of the FN VCO TUNE Adjustment
Figure 3-16
Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment Display
9. Press Meas
Scale Ref
Chapter 3
ANALOG IN Aux Input
REFERENCE VALUE
7
29
x1
Marker
Format
MORE
REAL
x1 .
3-41
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment
10.Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment:
• If the marker value is less than 7, you have completed this procedure.
• If the marker value is greater than 7, readjust “FN VCO ADJ” to 7. Then perform
steps 2 to 10 to confirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 markers are still above and
below the reference line respectively.
• If you cannot adjust the analyzer correctly, replace the A14 board assembly.
3-42
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Frequency Accuracy Adjustment
Frequency Accuracy Adjustment
Required Equipment and Tools
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Spectrum analyzer
8563E
RF Cable: 50Ω Type-N, 24-inch
8120-4781
Non-metallic adjustment tool
8830-0024
Antistatic wrist strap
9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord
9300-0980
Static-control table mat and ground wire
9300-0797
Additional Equipment for 50Ω Analyzers
Adapter APC-7 to Type-N (f) (8753ES only)
11524A
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
Minimum loss pad
11852B
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment sets the VCXO (voltage controlled crystal oscillator) frequency to
maintain the instrument’s frequency accuracy.
1. Remove the upper-rear bumpers and analyzer top cover.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-17.
Chapter 3
3-43
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Frequency Accuracy Adjustment
Figure 3-17
NOTE
Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Setup
Make sure that the spectrum analyzer and network analyzer references are
not connected.
3. For Option 1D5 Instruments Only: Remove the BNC-to-BNC jumper that is
connected between the “EXT REF” and the “10 MHz Precision Reference,” as shown in
Figure 3-19.
4. Set the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters as follows:
for Option 006) Span 60
kHz for Option 006) AMPLITUDE REF LEVEL 10
+dBm
LL
5. On the network analyzer, press Preset Sweep Setup CW FREQ 3
G/n for Option 006).
FREQUENCY
3-44
3
G/n
(or 6
G/n
kHz
G/n
(or 120
(or 6
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Frequency Accuracy Adjustment
6. No adjustment is required if the spectrum analyzer measurement is within the
following specifications:
• ± 30 kHz for analyzers without Option 006
• ± 60 kHz for analyzers with Option 006
Otherwise, locate the A12 assembly (red extractors) and adjust the VCXO ADJ (see
Figure 3-18) for a spectrum analyzer center frequency measurement within
specifications.
7. Replace the A12 assembly if you are unable to adjust the frequency as specified. Repeat
this adjustment test.
Figure 3-18
NOTE
Location of the VCXO ADJ Adjustment
To increase the accuracy of this adjustment, the following steps are
recommended.
8. Replace the instrument covers and wait 15 minutes in order to allow the analyzer to
reach its precise operating temperature.
9. Recheck the CW frequency and adjust if necessary.
Instruments with Option 1D5 Only
10.Reconnect the BNC-to-BNC jumper between the “EXT REF” and the “10 MHz Precision
Reference” as shown in Figure 3-19.
Chapter 3
3-45
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Frequency Accuracy Adjustment
Figure 3-19
High Stability Frequency Adjustment Location
11.Insert a narrow screwdriver and adjust the high-stability frequency reference
potentiometer for a CW frequency measurement within specification.
In Case of Difficulty
Replace the A26 assembly if you cannot adjust the CW frequency within specification.
3-46
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
High/Low Band Transition Adjustment
High/Low Band Transition Adjustment
Required Equipment and Tools
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Non-metallic adjustment tool
8830-0024
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment centers the VCO (voltage controlled oscillator) of the A12 reference
assembly for high and low band operations.
1. Press Preset
Stop
21
System
SERVICE MENU
ANALOG BUS ON
Start
11
M/µ
M/µ to observe part of both the low and high bands on the analog bus.
2. Press Meas
DATA→MEM
ANALOG IN Aux Input 22
x1 Format MORE REAL Display
DATA−MEMORY to subtract the ground voltage from the next
measurement.
3. Press Meas
ANALOG IN Aux Input
4. Press Scale Ref
.1
23
x1
Marker
11
M/µ .
x1 and observe the VCO tuning trace:
• If the left half of trace = 0 ± 1000 mV and right half of trace = 100 to 200 mV higher
(one to two divisions, see Figure 3-20): no adjustment is necessary.
• If adjustment is necessary, follow these steps:
a. Adjust the VCO tune (see Figure 3-21) to position the left half of the trace to
0 ±125 mV. The variable capacitor, C85, has a half-turn tuning range if the A12
Reference Board is part number 08753-60209, and seven turns if the part number
is 08753-60357. Be careful not to overtighten and damage the seven-turn
capacitor.
b. Adjust the HBLB (see Figure 3-21) to position the right half of the trace 125 to
175 mV (about 1 to 1.5 divisions) higher than the left half.
• Refer to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting,” if you cannot perform the adjustment.
Chapter 3
3-47
Adjustments and Correction Constants
High/Low Band Transition Adjustment
Figure 3-20
High/Low Band Transition Adjustment Trace
Figure 3-21
High/Low Band Adjustment Locations
3-48
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband
Adjustment
Required Equipment and Tools
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Spectrum analyzer
8563E
GPIB Cable
10833A/B/C/D
RF Cable: 50Ω, Type-N, 24-inch
8120-4781
Cable: 50Ω Coax, BNC (m) to BNC (m)
10503A
Non-metallic adjustment tool
8830-0024
Antistatic wrist strap
9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord
9300-0980
Static-control table mat and ground wire
9300-0797
Additional Equipment for 50Ω Analyzers
Adapter APC-7 to Type-N (f)
(8753ES only)
11524A
Additional Equipment for 75Ω Analyzers
Minimum loss pad
11852B
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment minimizes the spurs caused by the API (analog phase interpolator, on the
fractional-N assembly) circuits. It also improves the sideband characteristics.
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-22.
2. Make sure the instruments are set to their default GPIB addresses:
8753ES/ET= 16, spectrum analyzer = 18.
Chapter 3
3-49
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment
Figure 3-22
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Setup
3. Set the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters as follows:
Reference Level
0 dBm
Resolution Bandwidth
100 Hz
Center Frequency
676.145105 MHz
Span
2.5 kHz
4. On the analyzer, press Preset
676.045105
M/µ .
3-50
Avg
IF BW
3000
x1
Sweep Setup
CW FREQ
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment
5. Adjust the 100 kHz (R77) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum analyzer.
The minimum signal may, or may not, drop down into the noise floor.
Figure 3-23
Location of API and 100 kHz Adjustments
6. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency for 676.051105 MHz.
7. On the analyzer, press Sweep Setup
CW FREQ
676.048105
M/µ .
8. Adjust the API1 (R35) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum analyzer.
9. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency for 676.007515 MHz.
10.On the analyzer, press Sweep Setup
CW FREQ
676.004515
M/µ .
11.Adjust the API2 (R43) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum analyzer.
12.On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency for 676.003450 MHz.
13.On the analyzer, press Sweep Setup
CW FREQ
676.00045
M/µ .
14.Adjust the API3 (R45) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum analyzer.
15.On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency for 676.003045 MHz.
16.On the analyzer, press Sweep Setup
CW FREQ
676.000045
M/µ .
17.Adjust the API4 (R47) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum analyzer.
In Case of Difficulty
18.If this adjustment cannot be performed satisfactorily, repeat the entire procedure, or
replace the A13 board assembly.
Chapter 3
3-51
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment
Required Equipment and Tools
Description
HP/Agilent Part Number
BNC alligator clip adapter
8120-1292
BNC-to-BNC cable
8120-1840
Antistatic wrist strap
9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord
9300-0980
Static-control table mat and ground wire
9300-0797
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment optimizes tracking between the YO (YIG oscillator) and the cavity
oscillator when they are frequency offset to avoid spurs. Optimizing YO-cavity oscillator
tracking reduces potential phase-locked loop problems.
1. Mate the adapter to the BNC cable and connect the BNC connector end to AUX INPUT
on the analyzer’s rear panel. Connect the BNC center conductor alligator-clip to A11
TP10 (labeled φ ERR); the shield clip to A11 TP1 (GND) as shown in Figure 3-24.
Figure 3-24
Location of A11 Test Points and A3 CAV ADJ Adjustments
2. Press Preset
Center
3. Press System
SERVICE MENU
ANALOG IN Aux Input
4. Press Format
MORE
400
11
REAL
M/µ
Span
50
M/µ .
ANALOG BUS ON
Meas
x1 .
Scale Ref
10
k/m
MARKER→REFERENCE .
5. To make sure that you have connected the test points properly, adjust the CAV ADJ
potentiometer while observing the analyzer display. You should notice a change in
voltage.
3-52
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment
6. Observe the phase locked loop error voltage:
• If “spikes” are not visible on the analyzer display (see Figure 3-25): no adjustment is
necessary.
• If “spikes” are excessive (see Figure 3-25): adjust the CAV ADJ potentiometer (see
Figure 3-24) on the A3 source bias assembly to eliminate the spikes.
• If the “spikes” persist, refer to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting.”
Figure 3-25
Chapter 3
Display of Acceptable versus Excessive Spikes
3-53
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants
Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction
Constants
Analyzer warm-up time: None.
This procedure stores the instrument’s unprotected option(s) information in A9 CPU
assembly EEPROMs.
1. Make sure the A9 switch is in the Alter position.
2. Record the installed options that are printed on the rear panel of the analyzer.
3. Press System
SERVICE MENU
PEEK/POKE
PEEK/POKE ADDRESS .
4. Refer to Table 3-2 for the address of each unprotected hardware option. Enter the
address for the specific installed hardware option that needs to be enabled or disabled.
Follow the address entry by POKE −1 x1 .
• Pressing POKE
−1
• Pressing POKE
0
Table 3-2
x1 after an entry enables the option.
x1 after an entry disables the option.
PEEK/POKE Addresses
Hardware
Options
PEEK/POKE
Address
1D5
1619001529
011
1619001532
004
1619001531
014
1619001543
075
1619001528
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all of the unprotected options that you want to enable.
6. After you have entered all of the instrument's hardware options, press the following
keys:
System
SERVICE MENU
FIRMWARE REVISION
7. View the analyzer display for the listed options.
8. When you have entered all of the hardware options, return the A9 switch to the Normal
position.
9. Perform the “EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure” on page 3-34.
In Case of Difficulty
If any of the installed options are missing from the list, return to step 2 and re-enter the
missing option(s).
3-54
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments
Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments
The network analyzer has the capability of automating tasks through a sequencing
function. The following adjustment sequences are available from the Agilent Technologies
web site on the World Wide Web.
• Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment (FNADJ and FNCHK)
• High/Low Band Transition Adjustment (HBLBADJ)
• Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment (APIADJ)
To download these adjustment sequences from the Internet:
Go the Agilent Technologies Website at the following URL:
http://www.agilent.com/
Using the search function, search on the following phrase:
8753 adjustment sequence
How to Load Sequences from Disk
1. Place the sequence disk in the analyzer disk drive.
2. Press Local
SYSTEM CONTROLLER Seq MORE
LOAD SEQ FROM DISK READ SEQ FILE TITLES .
3. Select any or all of the following sequence files by pressing:
• Select LOAD SEQ APIADJ if you want to load the file for the “Fractional-N Spur
Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment.”
• Select LOAD SEQ HBLBADJ if you want to load the file for the “High/Low Band
Transition Adjustment.”
• Select LOAD SEQ FNADJ and LOAD SEQ FNCHK if you want to load the files for
the “Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment.”
How to Set Up the Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment
1. Remove the right-rear bumpers and right side cover. This exposes the adjustment
location in the sheet metal.
2. Press Preset
SEQUENCE X FNADJ (where X is the sequence number).
3. Adjust the “FN VCO TUNE” with a non-metallic tool so that the channel 1 marker is as
many divisions above the reference line as the channel 2 marker is below it.
4. Press Preset
SEQUENCE X FNCHK (where X is the sequence number).
• If the marker value is <7, you have completed this procedure.
• If the marker value is >7, readjust “FN VCO TUNE” to 7. Then repeat steps 2, 3, and
4 to confirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 markers are still above and below the
reference line respectively.
Chapter 3
3-55
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments
How to Set Up the High/Low Band Transition Adjustments
1. Press Preset
SEQ X HBLBADJ (where X is the sequence number).
2. Observe the VCO tuning trace:
• If the left half of trace = 0 ± 1000 mV and right half of trace = 100 to 200 mV higher
(one to two divisions): no adjustment is necessary.
• If the adjustment is necessary, follow these steps:
a. Remove the upper-rear bumpers and top cover, using a TORX screwdriver.
b. Adjust the VCO tune (A12 C85) to position the left half of the trace to 0 ± 125 mV.
This is a very sensitive adjustment where the trace could easily go off of the
screen.
c. Adjust the HBLB (A12 R68) to position the right half of the trace 125 to 175 mV
(about 1 to 1.5 divisions) higher than the left half.
• Refer to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting,” if you cannot perform the adjustment.
How to Set Up the Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband
Adjustment
1. Press Preset
SEQUENCE X APIADJ (where X is the sequence number).
2. Remove the upper-rear corner bumpers and the top cover, using a TORX screwdriver.
3. Follow the directions on the analyzer display and make all of the API adjustments.
Sequence Contents
Sequence for the High/Low Band Transition Adjustment
— Sequence HBLBADJ sets the hi-band to low-band switch point. —
PRESET
SYSTEM
SERVICE MENU
ANALOG BUS ON
START 11 M/u
STOP 21 M/u
MEAS
ANALOG IN 22 x1 (A12 GND)
DISPLAY
DATA > MEM
DATA − MEM
MEAS
ANALOG IN 23 x1 (VCO TUNE)
MKR 11 M/u
SCALE/REF .1 x1
3-56
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments
Sequences for the Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment
— Sequence FNADJ sets up A14 (FRAC N Digital) VCO. —
DISPLAY
DUAL CHAN ON
SYSTEM
SERVICE MENU
ANALOG BUS ON
SWEEP SETUP
NUMBER OF POINTS 11 x1
COUPLED CHAN OFF
START 36 M/u
STOP 60.75 M/u
SWEEP SETUP
SWEEP TIME 12.5 k/m
MEAS
ANALOG IN 29 x1 (FN VCO TUN)
SCALE/REF 0.6 x1
REF VALUE −7 x1
MKR
CH 2
SWEEP SETUP
CW FREQ 31.0001 M/u
SWEEP TIME 12.375 k/m
MEAS
ANALOG IN 29 x1 (FN VCO TUN)
SCALE/REF .2 x1
REF VALUE 6.77 x1
MKR 6 k/m
— Sequence FNCHK checks the VCO adjustment. —
SWEEP SETUP
CW FREQ 1 G/n
SYSTEM
SERVICE MENU
ANALOG BUS ON
SERVICE MODES
FRAC N TUNE ON
MEAS
ANALOG IN 29 x1
MKR
SCALE/REF
REF VALUE 7 x1
Chapter 3
3-57
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments
Sequences for the Fractional-N Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment
— Sequence APIADJ sets up the fractional-N API spur adjustments. —
TITLE
SP 2.5K
PERIPHERAL HPIB ADDR
18 x1
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
TITLE
AT 0DB
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
TITLE
RB 100HZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
TITLE
CF 676.145105MZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
CW FREQ
676.045105M/u
TITLE
ADJ A13 100KHZ
SEQUENCE
PAUSE
TITLE
CF 676.051105MZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
CW FREQ
676.048105M/u
TITLE
ADJ A13 API1
SEQUENCE
PAUSE
3-58
Chapter 3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments
TITLE
CF 676.007515MZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
CW FREQ
676.004515M/u
TITLE
ADJ A13 API2
SEQUENCE
PAUSE
TITLE
CF 676.003450MZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
CW FREQ
676.000450M/u
TITLE
ADJ A13 API3
SEQUENCE
PAUSE
TITLE
CF 676.003045MZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
CW FREQ
676.000045M/u
TITLE
ADJ A13 API4
Chapter 3
3-59
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments
3-60
Chapter 3
4 Start Troubleshooting Here
4-1
Start Troubleshooting Here
The information in this chapter helps you:
• Identify the portion of the analyzer that is at fault.
• Locate the specific troubleshooting procedures to identify the assembly or peripheral at
fault.
To identify the portion of the analyzer at fault, follow these procedures:
Step 1. Initial Observations on page 4-5
Step 2. Operator's Check on page 4-6
Step 3. GPIB Systems Check on page 4-8
Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation on page 4-10
4-2
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Assembly Replacement Sequence
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an Agilent 8753ET/ES
network analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to the information in this chapter. Follow up with the
appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13 , “Replaceable Parts.”
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
Chapter 14 , “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures.”
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3 , “Adjustments and Correction
Constants.”
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2 , “System Verification and
Performance Tests.”
Chapter 4
4-3
Start Troubleshooting Here
Having Your Analyzer Serviced
Having Your Analyzer Serviced
If the analyzer should fail any of the following checks, call the nearest Agilent
Technologies sales or service office to determine the warranty on your instrument, and
whether repair will be on-site, or return to Agilent Technologies.
1. Choose the nearest Agilent Technologies service center. (Refer to Table 15-1 on
page 15-3.)
2. Include a detailed description of any failed test and any error message.
3. Ship the analyzer, using the original or comparable antistatic packaging materials.
4-4
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Step 1. Initial Observations
Step 1. Initial Observations
Initiate the Analyzer Self-Test
1. Disconnect all devices and peripherals from the analyzer.
2. Switch on the analyzer and press Preset .
3. Watch for the indications shown in Figure 4-1 to determine if the analyzer is operating
correctly.
Figure 4-1
Preset Sequence
• If the self-test failed, refer to “Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation” on page 4-10.
Chapter 4
4-5
Start Troubleshooting Here
Step 2. Operator’s Check
Step 2. Operator’s Check
Description
The operator’s check consists of two tests to check Port 1 and Port 2 on the 8753ES, or the
Reflection and Transmission port on the 8753ET. These tests are initiated via the front
panel of the analyzer and are called “Port 1 Op Chk” and “Port 2 Op Chk.”
The operator's check determines that:
• The source is phase-locked across the entire frequency range.
• All three samplers are functioning properly.
• The transfer switch is operational (8753ES only).
• The attenuator steps 10 dB at a time. (8753ES and 8753ET Option 004 only)
Port 1 (8753ES) or Reflection Port (8753ET)
A short is connected to Port 1 to reflect all the source energy back into the analyzer for an
A/R measurement.
For the 8753ES, the first part of “Port 1 Op Chk” checks the repeatability of the transfer
switch. An S11 measurement is stored in memory and the switch is toggled to Port 2 and
then back to Port 1 where another S11 measurement is made. The difference between the
memory trace and the second trace is switch repeatability. This procedure is absent from
the routine for the 8753ET, since it lacks a transfer switch.
The remaining part of the test exercises the internal attenuator in 10 dB steps over a
70 dB range.
The resulting measurements must fall within a limit testing window to pass the test. The
window size is based on both source and receiver specifications.
Port 2 (8753ES) or Transmission Port (8753ET)
“Port 2 Op Chk” is essentially the same as “Port 1 Op Chk” for the 8753ES. The short is
placed on Port 2 for the procedure.
For the 8753ET, the procedure calls for connecting a through cable between the Reflection
and Transmission ports. RF power is obtained from the Reflection port. Again, the test
exercises the internal attenuator (if the analyzer has Option 004) and checks that the B/R
measurement falls within acceptable limits.
4-6
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Step 2. Operator’s Check
Required Equipment and Tools
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Short (for 8753ES)
Part of 85031B Calibration Kit
Short (for 8753ET)
Part of 85032B Calibration Kit
Cable: 50Ω, Type-N
8120-4781
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
Procedure
1. Disconnect all devices, peripherals, and accessories (including adapters and limiters)
from the analyzer.
2. To run the test for port 1, press Preset
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
PRESET: FACTORY
EXTERNAL TESTS .
Preset
System
3. The display should show “TEST 21 Port 1 Op Chk” in the active entry area.
4. Press EXECUTE TEST to begin the test.
5. At the prompt, connect the short to the port indicated. Make sure the connection is
tight.
6. Press CONTINUE .
7. The test is a sequence of subtests. At the end of the subtests, the test title and result
will be displayed. If all tests pass successfully, the overall test status will be PASS. If any
test fails, the overall test status will be FAIL.
8. To run the test for port 2, press the step
Port 2 Op Chk” in the active entry area.
key. The display should show “TEST 22
9. Repeat steps 4 through 7.
For an 8753ET:
You will be prompted to connect a cable between the Reflection and Transmission ports.
10.If both tests pass, the analyzer is about 80% verified. If either test fails, refer to “Step 4.
Faulty Group Isolation” on page 4-10, or:
a. Make sure that the connection is tight. Repeat the test.
b. Visually inspect the connector interfaces and clean if necessary (refer to “Principles
of Microwave Connector Care” on page 1-7).
c. Verify that the short meets published specifications.
d. Substitute another short, and repeat the test.
e. Finally, refer to the detailed tests located in this section, or fault-isolation procedures
located in the troubleshooting sections.
Chapter 4
4-7
Start Troubleshooting Here
Step 3. GPIB Systems Check
Step 3. GPIB Systems Check
Check the analyzer’s GPIB functions with a known working passive peripheral (such as a
plotter, printer, or disk drive).
1. Connect the peripheral to the analyzer using a good GPIB cable.
2. Press Local
peripheral.
SYSTEM CONTROLLER to enable the analyzer to control the
3. Then press SET ADDRESSES and the appropriate softkeys to verify that the device
addresses will be recognized by the analyzer. The factory default addresses are:
Device
NOTE
GPIB
Address
8753ET/ES
16
Plotter port – GPIB
5
Printer port – GPIB
1
Disk (external)
0
Controller
21
Power meter – GPIB
13
You may use other addresses with two provisions:
• Each device must have its own address.
• The address set on each device must match the one recognized by the
analyzer (and displayed).
Peripheral addresses are often set with a rear panel switch. Refer to the
manual of the peripheral to read or change its address.
If Using a Plotter or Printer
1. Ensure that the plotter or printer is set up correctly:
• Power is on.
• Pens and paper loaded.
• Pinch wheels are down.
• Some plotters need to have P1 and P2 positions set.
2. Press Copy and then PLOT or PRINT MONOCHROME .
• If the result is a copy of the analyzer display, the printing/plotting features are
functional in the analyzer. Proceed to “Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple
4-8
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Step 3. GPIB Systems Check
Peripherals” on page 4-9, “Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers” on page 4-9, or
“Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation” on page 4-10.
• If the result is not a copy of the analyzer display, suspect the GPIB function of the
analyzer. Refer to Chapter 6 , “Digital Control Troubleshooting.”
If Using an External Disk Drive
1. Select the external disk drive. Press Save/Recall
SELECT DISK
2. Verify that the address is set correctly. Press Local
ADDRESS:DISK .
EXTERNAL DISK .
SET ADDRESSES
3. Ensure that the disk drive is set up correctly:
• Power is on.
• An initialized disk in the correct drive.
• Correct disk unit number and volume number (press Local to access the softkeys
that display the numbers; default is 0 for both).
• With hard disk (Winchester) drives, make sure the configuration switch is properly
set (see drive manual).
4. Press Start
1
M/µ
RECALL STATE .
Save/Recall
SAVE STATE . Then press Preset
Save/Recall
• If the resultant trace starts at 1 MHz, GPIB is functional in the analyzer. Proceed to
“Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals” on page 4-9, “Troubleshooting
Systems with Controllers” on page 4-9, or “Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation” on
page 4-10.
• If the resultant trace does not start at 1 MHz, suspect the GPIB function of the
analyzer: refer to Chapter 6 , “Digital Control Troubleshooting.”
Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals
Connect any other system peripherals (but not a controller) to the analyzer one at a time
and check their functionality. Any problems observed are in the peripherals, cables, or are
address problems (see above).
Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers
Passing the preceding checks indicates that the analyzer's peripheral functions are
normal. Therefore, if the analyzer has not been operating properly with an external
controller, check the following:
• The GPIB interface hardware is incorrectly installed or not operational.
• The programming syntax is incorrect. (Refer to your analyzer’s programmer's guide.)
If the analyzer appears to be operating unexpectedly but has not completely failed, go to
“Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation” on page 4-10.
Chapter 4
4-9
Start Troubleshooting Here
Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation
Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation
Use the following procedures only if you have read the previous sections in this chapter
and you think the problem is in the analyzer. These are simple procedures to verify the
four functional groups in sequence, and determine which group is faulty.
The four functional groups are:
• power supplies
• digital control
• source
• receiver
Descriptions of these groups are provided in Chapter 12 , “Theory of Operation.”
The checks in the following pages must be performed in the order presented. If one of the
procedures fails, it is an indication that the problem is in the functional group checked. Go
to the troubleshooting information for the indicated group, to isolate the problem to the
defective assembly.
Figure 4-2 illustrates the troubleshooting organization.
Figure 4-2
4-10
Troubleshooting Organization
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Power Supply
Power Supply
Check the Rear Panel LEDs
Switch on the analyzer. Notice the condition of the two LEDs on the A15 preregulator at
rear of the analyzer. (See Figure 4-3.)
• The upper (red) LED should be off.
• The lower (green) LED should be on.
Figure 4-3
A15 Preregulator LEDs
Check the A8 Post Regulator LEDs
Remove the analyzer's top cover. Switch on the power. Inspect the green LEDs along the
top edge of the A8 post-regulator assembly.
• All green LEDs should be on.
• The fan should be audible.
In case of difficulty, refer to Chapter 5 , “Power Supply Troubleshooting.”
Chapter 4
4-11
Start Troubleshooting Here
Digital Control
Digital Control
Observe the Power Up Sequence
Switch the analyzer power off, then on. The following should take place within a few
seconds:
• On the front panel, observe the following:
1. All eight amber LEDs illuminate.
2. 8753ES Only: the Port 2 LED illuminates.
3. The amber LEDs go off after a few seconds, except the Chan 1 LED.
8753ES Only: the Port 2 LED goes off and the Port 1 LED illuminates. (See Figure
4-4.)
• The display should come up bright with no irregularity in colors.
• After an initial pattern, five red LEDs on the A9 CPU board should remain off. They can
be observed through a small opening in the rear panel.
If the power up sequence does not occur as described, or if there are problems using the
front panel keys, refer to Chapter 6 , “Digital Control Troubleshooting.”
Figure 4-4
4-12
Front Panel Power Up Sequence
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Digital Control
Verify Internal Tests Passed
1. Press Preset System SERVICE MENU TESTS
EXECUTE TEST . The display should indicate:
TST
INTERNAL TESTS
TEST
0 ALL INT
PASS
• If your display shows the above message, go to step 2. Otherwise, continue with this
step.
• If phase lock error messages are present, this test may stop without passing or
failing. In this case, continue with the next procedure to check the source.
• If you have unexpected results, or if the analyzer indicates a specific test failure, that
internal test (and possibly others) have failed; the analyzer reports the first failure
detected. Refer to Chapter 6 , “Digital Control Troubleshooting.”
• If the analyzer indicates failure but does not identify the test, press
to search
for the failed test. Then refer to Chapter 6 , “Digital Control Troubleshooting.”
Likewise, if the response to front panel or GPIB commands is unexpected,
troubleshoot the digital control group.
2. Perform the analog bus test by pressing RETURN
19
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
• If this test fails, refer to Chapter 6 , “Digital Control Troubleshooting.”
• If this test passes, continue with the next procedure to check the source.
Chapter 4
4-13
Start Troubleshooting Here
Source
Source
Phase Lock Error Messages
The error messages listed below are usually indicative of a source failure or improper
instrument configuration. (Ensure that the R channel input is receiving at least −35 dBm
power). Continue with this procedure.
• NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
The first IF was not detected during the pretune stage of phase lock.
• NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
The first IF was detected at the pretune stage but phase lock could not be acquired
thereafter.
• PHASE LOCK LOST
Phase lock was acquired but then lost.
• PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED
An internal phase lock calibration routine is automatically executed at power-on, when
pretune values drift, or when phase lock problems are detected. A problem spoiled a
calibration attempt.
• POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK
The analyzer is achieving phase lock but possibly on the wrong harmonic comb tooth.
• SWEEP TIME TOO FAST
The fractional-N and the digital IF circuits have lost synchronization.
Check Source Output Power
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4-5. Be sure that any special accessories,
such as limiters, have been disconnected.
4-14
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Source
Figure 4-5
Equipment Setup for Source Power Check
2. Zero and calibrate the power meter. Press Preset on the analyzer to initialize the
instrument.
3. On the analyzer, press Sweep Setup CW FREQ 300
k/m to output a CW 300 kHz
signal. The power meter should read approximately 0 dBm.
4. Press 16
M/µ to change the CW frequency to 16 MHz. The output power should
remain approximately 0 dBm throughout the analyzer frequency range. Repeat this
step at 1 and 3 GHz. (For Option 006 include an additional check at 6 GHz.)
If any incorrect power levels are measured, refer to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting.”
No Oscilloscope or Power Meter? Try the ABUS
1. Monitor ABUS node 16 by pressing Preset
System
SERVICE MENU
2. Press Meas
3.
Format
REAL
300
k/m
Stop
3
G/n
ANALOG BUS ON .
ANALOG IN Aux Input
MORE
Start
Scale Ref
16
x1 .
AUTOSCALE .
The display should resemble Figure 4-6.
Chapter 4
4-15
Start Troubleshooting Here
Source
Figure 4-6
ABUS Node 16: 1 V/GHz
If any of the above procedures provide unexpected results, or if error messages are present,
refer to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting.”
4-16
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Receiver (8753ES)
Receiver (8753ES)
Observe the A and B Input Traces
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4-7. Be sure that any special accessories,
such as limiters, have been disconnected. (The through cable is part number 8120-4779
for 50Ω analyzers and 8120-2408 for 75Ω analyzers.)
Figure 4-7
Equipment Setup
2. Press Preset
Meas
INPUT PORTS
A
TEST PORT 2
Scale Ref
AUTO SCALE .
3. Observe the measurement trace displayed by the A input. The trace should have about
the same flatness as the trace in Figure 4-8.
4. Press Meas
INPUT PORTS
B
TEST PORT 1 .
5. Observe the measurement trace displayed by the B input. The trace should have about
the same flatness as the trace in Figure 4-8.
Chapter 4
4-17
Start Troubleshooting Here
Receiver (8753ES)
Figure 4-8
Typical Measurement Trace
If the source is working, but the A or B input traces appear to be in error, refer to
Chapter 8 , “Receiver Troubleshooting.”
The following symptoms may also indicate receiver failure.
Receiver Error Messages
• CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT A; POWER REDUCED
• CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT B; POWER REDUCED
• CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT R; POWER REDUCED
The error messages above indicate that you have exceeded approximately +14 dBm at one
of the test ports. The RF output power is automatically reduced to −85 dBm. The
annotation P↓ appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip
function has been activated. When this occurs, press Power and enter a lower power
level. Press SOURCE PWR ON to switch on the power again.
Faulty Data
Any trace data that appears to be below the noise floor of the analyzer (−100 dBm) is
indicative of a receiver failure.
4-18
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Receiver (8753ET)
Receiver (8753ET)
Required Equipment
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Short
Part of 85032B Calibration Kit
Cable: 50Ω, Type-N
8120-4781
Observe the A and B Input Traces
A Input
1. Connect the short to the Reflection port.
2. Press Preset
1
x1 .
Meas
INPUT PORTS
A
Scale Ref
AUTO SCALE
SCALE/DIV
3. Observe the measurement trace displayed by the A input. The trace should have about
the same flatness as the trace in Figure 4-9.
B Input
1. Disconnect the short from the Reflection port and connect the through cable between
the Reflection and Transmission ports.
2. Press Meas
INPUT PORTS
B .
3. Observe the measurement trace displayed by the B input. The trace should have about
the same flatness as the trace in Figure 4-10.
Chapter 4
4-19
Start Troubleshooting Here
Receiver (8753ET)
Figure 4-9 A Input: Typical Measurement Trace
Figure 4-10
4-20
B Input: Typical Measurement Trace
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Receiver (8753ET)
If the source is working, but the A or B input traces appear to be in error, refer to
Chapter 8 , “Receiver Troubleshooting.”
The following symptoms may also indicate receiver failure.
Receiver Error Messages
• CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT A; POWER REDUCED
• CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT B; POWER REDUCED
• CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT R; POWER REDUCED
The error messages above indicate that you have exceeded approximately +14 dBm at one
of the test ports. The RF output power is automatically reduced to −20 dBm (or −85 dBm
for Option 004). The annotation P↓ appears in the left margin of the display to indicate
that the power trip function has been activated. When this occurs, press Power and enter
a lower power level. Press SOURCE PWR ON to switch on the power again.
Faulty Data
Any trace data that appears to be below the noise floor of the analyzer (−100 dBm) is
indicative of a receiver failure.
Chapter 4
4-21
Start Troubleshooting Here
Accessories
Accessories
If the analyzer has passed all of the previous checks but is still making incorrect
measurements, suspect the system accessories. Accessories such as RF or interconnect
cables, calibration or verification kit devices, limiters, and adapters can all induce system
problems.
Reconfigure the system as it is normally used and reconfirm the problem. Continue with
Chapter 9 , “Accessories Troubleshooting.”
Accessories Error Messages
• POWER PROBE SHUT DOWN!
The biasing supplies to a front panel powered device (like a probe or millimeter module)
are shut down due to excessive current draw. Troubleshoot the device.
4-22
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Troubleshooting 8753ES Option 014
Troubleshooting 8753ES Option 014
Figure 4-11
8753ES Option 014
Description
This section provides the service procedure for troubleshooting the 8753ES Option 014,
and is intended to be used as a guide in finding and fixing problems with the 8753ES
Option 014 only. For information on troubleshooting the standard instrument, refer to the
appropriate sections of this service guide.
The Option 014 troubleshooting guide is divided into sections called “Symptoms.” Each
symptom corresponds to a possible problem experienced during the operation of the
analyzer in the standard mode of operation.
Chapter 4
4-23
Start Troubleshooting Here
Troubleshooting 8753ES Option 014
NOTE
When servicing the 8573ES Option 014, configure the instrument in the
standard mode. Refer to Figure 4-12, “Standard Mode Jumper
Configuration.” In this configuration all of the standard self-tests and
performance tests are the same as the standard 8753ES.
Required Equipment and Tools
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
TORX T-10 Screwdriver
Torque Wrench 5/16 incha
8710-1765
Calibration Kit: 7mm
85031B
RF Cable: APC-7, 24-inch (610mm)
8120-4779
a. The torque is 8 inch pounds.
Figure 4-12
4-24
Standard Mode Jumper Configuration
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Troubleshooting 8753ES Option 014
Setup
1. Press Preset .
2. Connect the RF cable between PORT 1 and PORT 2.
Measurements
Perform the following measurements. Observe the response and make note of any
irregularities or degraded response in the frequency response. Refer to Figure 4-13, Figure
4-14, and Figure 4-15 for examples of different responses. Complete all of the steps listed.
If a problem occurs, match the measurement (S11, S21, S12, S22) where the problem was
displayed, to the symptom that closest describes the problem. For information on how to
make measurements, refer to your analyzer’s user’s guide.
1. Measure the S21 response by pressing Meas
Trans: FWD S21 (B/R) .
2. Measure the S12 response by pressing Trans: REV S12 (A/R) .
3. Disconnect the cable from PORT 2.
4. Connect a short to the end of the test port cable.
5. Measure the S11 response by pressing Refl: FWD S11 (A/R) .
6. Disconnect the cable from PORT 1.
7. Connect the cable to PORT 2.
8. Measure the S22 response by pressing Refl: REV S22 (B/R) .
Chapter 4
4-25
Start Troubleshooting Here
Troubleshooting 8753ES Option 014
Symptom Example Plots
The following are examples of S21, S12, S11 and S22 measurements. Figure 4-13,
“Example of a Good Measurement,” shows what good S21 and S11 measurements would
look like. (These are only examples. The signal that you see may vary with your
instrument.) Figure 4-14, “Example of a Power Hole,” and Figure 4-15, “Example of
Frequency Roll Off,” are examples of what an irregular or a degraded signal might look
like. These plots are intended to be used only as examples for troubleshooting. Symptoms
one through four include sample plots of what irregular or degraded signals may look like
for the different S-parameter measurements described in the symptom.
CAUTION
Figure 4-13
4-26
If problems are experienced and replacement parts are required, refer to
Chapter 13 , “Replaceable Parts.” It is recommended that all service be done
by qualified Agilent Technologies service personnel.
Example of a Good Measurement
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Troubleshooting 8753ES Option 014
Figure 4-14
Example of a Power Hole
Figure 4-15
Example of Frequency Roll Off
Chapter 4
4-27
Start Troubleshooting Here
Troubleshooting 8753ES Option 014
Symptoms
The following symptoms use the S22, S21, S12 and S11 test response as a guide for
troubleshooting the 8753ES Option 014.
Symptom 1
Degraded or irregular response in the S11 and S21 measurement. No problems in the S22
or S12 response mode. Refer to Figure 4-16.
1. Check the jumper cable between PORT 1 SWITCH and PORT 1 COUPLER ports. If the
jumper is damaged, replace it. If no damage can be found on the jumper, take a look at
the SWITCH and COUPLER ports on the front panel. Inspect for damage to the ports.
Look for damage to the center conductor (bent pin) or damaged threads on either port.
Replace any damaged ports.
2. If no problems are found during inspection of the ports, reconnect the jumper from
PORT 1 SWITCH port to the PORT 1 COUPLER port. Make sure that the jumper is
connected correctly. Improper connections will cause power holes in the frequency
response.
3. If the problem still persists, check the internal cables located in the RF test deck area.
Refer to Figure 13-6 on page 13-16 for cable locations.
Figure 4-16
4-28
Example Symptom One
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Troubleshooting 8753ES Option 014
Symptom 2
Degraded or irregular response in the S11 and S12 measurement. No problems in the S22
or S21 response mode. Refer to Figure 4-17.
1. Check the jumper cable between the PORT 1 A IN and the PORT 1 A OUT ports. If the
jumper is damaged, replace it. If no damage can be found on the jumper, take a look at
the SWITCH and COUPLER ports on the front panel. Inspect for damage to the ports.
Look for damage to the center conductor (bent pin) or damaged threads on either port.
Replace any damaged ports.
2. If no problems are found during inspection of the ports, reconnect the jumper between
the PORT 1 A IN and the PORT 1 A OUT port. Make sure that the jumper is connected
correctly. Improper connections will cause power holes in the frequency response.
3. If the problem still persists, check the internal cables located in the RF test deck area.
Refer to Figure 13-6 on page 13-16 for cable locations.
Figure 4-17
Chapter 4
Example Symptom Two
4-29
Start Troubleshooting Here
Troubleshooting 8753ES Option 014
Symptom 3
Degraded or irregular response in the S22 and S12 measurement. No problems in the S11
or S21 response mode. Refer to Figure 4-18.
1. Check the jumper cable between the PORT 2 SWITCH and the PORT 2 COUPLER
ports. If the jumper is damaged, replace it. If no damage can be found on the jumper,
take a look at the SWITCH and COUPLER ports on the front panel. Inspect for damage
to the ports. Look for damage to the center conductor (bent pin) or damaged threads on
either port. Replace any damaged ports.
2. If no problems are found during inspection of the ports, reconnect the jumper between
the PORT 2 SWITCH and the PORT 2 COUPLER port. Make sure that the jumper is
connected correctly. Improper connections will cause power holes in the frequency
response.
3. If the problem still persists, check the internal cables located in the RF test deck area.
Refer to Figure 13-6 on page 13-16 for cable locations.
Figure 4-18
4-30
Example Symptom Three
Chapter 4
Start Troubleshooting Here
Troubleshooting 8753ES Option 014
Symptom 4
Degraded or irregular response in the S22 and S21 measurement. No problems in the S11
or S12 response mode. Refer to Figure 4-19.
1. Check the jumper cable between the PORT 2 B IN and the PORT 2 B OUT ports. If the
jumper is damaged, replace it. If no damage can be found on the jumper, take a look at
the SWITCH and COUPLER ports on the front panel. Inspect for damage to the ports.
Look for damage to the center conductor (bent pin) or damaged threads on either port.
Replace any damaged ports.
2. If no problems are found during inspection of the ports, reconnect the jumper between
the PORT 2 B IN and the PORT 2 B OUT port. Make sure that the jumper is connected
correctly. Improper connections will cause power holes in the frequency response.
3. If the problem still persists, check the internal cables located in the RF test deck area.
Refer to Figure 13-1 on page 13-6 for cable locations.
Figure 4-19
Chapter 4
Example Symptom Four
4-31
Start Troubleshooting Here
Troubleshooting 8753ES Option 014
Symptom 5
Degraded or irregular response in all parameters.
1. Check the jumper cable between the RF IN and the RF OUT ports. If the jumper is
damaged, replace it. If no damage can be found on the jumper, take a look at the
SWITCH and COUPLER ports on the front panel. Inspect for damage to the ports. Look
for damage to the center conductor (bent pin) or damaged threads on either port.
Replace any damaged ports.
2. If no problems are found during inspection of the ports, reconnect the jumper between
the RF IN and the RF OUT port. Make sure that the jumper is connected correctly.
Improper connections will cause power holes in the frequency response.
3. If the problem still persists, check the internal cables located in the RF test deck area.
Refer to Figure 13-6 on page 13-16 for cable locations.
4-32
Chapter 4
8753ET OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM
(INCLUDES OPTIONS 006 & 1D5)
A18 DISPLAY
A19 GSP
W23
A14 FRACTIONAL N (DIGITAL)
A26 HIGH STABILITY
FREQUENCY REFERENCE (OPTION 1D5)
(J1-32)
FN VCO
TUN
(29)
A13 FRACTIONAL N (ANALOG)
FN VCO
DET
(30)
FRAC N
VCO
DIV
FRAC N
V
L SWP
(J1-35)
LO
OUT(J2)
JUMPER (ONLY USED WITH OPTION 1D5)
FN LO
IN
(J1)
VCO
10MHz
PRECISION
REFERENCE
EXT
REF IN
W13
2ND
LO
(24)
0.014 TO 16.00MHz
H=39.84MHz
L=39.996MHz
:
L
f
H
996kHz
COUNT
V GATE
(31)
100kHz
1 OR 2
W8
3MHz
(J1)
100kHz
f
100kHZ
(21)
(P1-54, 58)
H=1MHz
H
1, 2, OR 3
L
40.01 TO 56MHz
W9
V
PL REF
(25)
V
3MHz
LPF
LPF
v
H=15 TO
60MHz
FN
VCO
TUN
VCO
TUN 2
(13)
1st IF
(17)
STEP
RECOVERY
L
A4 (R) SAMPLER/
MIXER
W7
DIODE
SWITCHING
POWER
SUPPLY
AND
REGULATOR
16MHz
30MHz
v
IN
W25
10 TO 300kHZ
OUT
PRETUNE
A3 SOURCE
IF DET 2W
(19)
PRETUNE
DAC
v
PRETUNE
(15)
PROBE POWER
OPT.006
REGULATORS
Amp I d
v (3)
300kHz
TO 3GHz
3.0 TO 6.8 GHz
SRC
v IV/GHz
(2)
Integ
(6)
MICROCIRCUIT POWER
v
TP 16
3.8GHz
A3 Gnd
v (8)
CAVITY
OSC
L= ON
H= 15MHz TO 2.99GHz (STD)
H= 15MHz TO 5.99 (OPT 006)
1MHz
W26
(J2 - 52)
R OUT
SAMPLE
RATE IS
16kHz
W1
A1 FRONT PANEL
RPG
FRONT
PANEL
PROCESSOR
LEDS
MINI-DIN KYBD
INTERCONNECT
PARALLEL
INTERCONNECT
GPIB
INTERCONNECT
RS-232 PORT
INTERFACE
PARALLEL
INTERCONNECT
GPIB PORT
INTERFACE
ADC
IF A 4kHz
(J1 - 4)
RS-232
INTERCONNECT
A9 CPU
TP 18
L= 0.014 TO
16.004MHz
H= 996kHz
MINI-DIN KYBD PORT
INTERFACE
BPF
50 ohm
4kHz
500 ohm
S
10kHz TO 3GHz (STD)
10kHz TO 6GHz (OPT 006)
TP 16
A5P 1-6
EEPROM
IF B 4kHz
L= 10kHz TO 16.00MHz
H= 1.000MHz
FLASH
2nd LO
L= ON
H= 15MHz TO 2.99GHz (STD)
H= 15MHz TO 5.99 (OPT 006)
A6 (B) SAMPLER/
MIXER
Temp 10mv/°C
v (5)
+0.37
v (9)
W4
S
10kHz TO 3GHz (STD)
10kHz TO 6GHz (OPT 006)
L= 10kHz TO 16.00MHz
H= 1.000MHz
+2.50
v (10)
A10GND
v (12)
RAM
DIGITAL SIGNAL
PROCESSOR
ROM
RAM
L= 0.014 TO
16.004MHz
H= 996kHz
MAIN RAM
THIS INDICATES ANALOG BUS NODE LOCATION
f= FREQUENCY NODE
V= VOLTAGE NODE
BPF
TRANSMISSION
A20 DISK DRIVE
MAIN CPU
(J1 - 7)
1MHz
EXT
AM
9 GREEN LEDS
NORMAL=ON, STEADY
1/2
IF R 4kHz
A5 (A) SAMPLER/
MIXER
} FROM A9
TIMING
CONTROL
ANALOG
BUS
ANALOG
BUS
1st LO
NOT USED
sa51e
AUX
INPUT
(11)
L= 10kHz TO 16.00MHz
H= 1.000MHz
2nd LO
Mn Pwr DAC
v (1)
+70V
RED LED
NORMAL=OFF
4kHz
2nd IF
A4P 1-6
MP1
4dB
ATTENUATOR
TO A13
KEYBOARD
1st IF
S
TO A10
(J2 - 31)
A10 DIGITAL IF
ALC
-18V
GREEN LED
NORMAL=ON
R CHANNEL
JUMPER
Det
v (4)
Log
(7)
v
INSTRUMENT POWER
-8V
4MHz
(J1 - 1)
3 TO 6GHz
Vbb REF
v (14)
FAN POWER
+18V
10kHz TO 3GHz (STD)
10kHz TO 6GHz (OPT 006)
YIG OSC
RED LED
NORMAL=FLASHING
+25V
L= 0.014 TO
16.004MHz
H= 996kHz
BPF
1V/GHZ
(16)
v
PHASE
LOCK
LPF
LPF
EXT
TRIGGER
1MHz
W2
A8 POST-REGULATOR
+8V
W22
}
A2 FRONT PANEL PROCESSOR
AUX
INPUT
1st LO
+5VD
LINE
POWER
L= ON
H= 15MHz TO 2.99GHz (STD)
H= 15MHz TO 5.99 (OPT 006)
W8 FROM A11J1
500 ohm
A15W1
A27
INVERTER ASSY
TEST SEQ
LIMIT TEST
TO A12
VGA
INTERCONNECT
1st LO
W5
W6
f
v
A12GND2
(28)
H
(P1-8)
IF DET 1
(20)
A15 PREREGULATOR
*
MOTHER BOARD
EXT AM
L SWP FROM A12
2nd LO
v
PL IF
IN
f
0.010 TO 16.000MHz
A12GND1
(22)
*
*
CAUTION
HIGH VOLTAGE
W3
A7 PULSE GENERATOR
IF DET 2N
(18)
4MHz
40MHz
A 17
W31
EXTERNAL SOURCE ONLY
TEST SET - I/0
INTERFACE
EXT REF
AUX INPUT
EXT TRIG
A11 PHASE LOCK
40MHz
INT
REF
LIGHT
MEMORY
W12
(P1 - 2, 4, 32, 34)
VCXO
V
(J1-2)
API'S
4MHz FROM A12
H=160KHz
L= 4kHz
VCXO
TUNE
(27)
TEST SET - I/0
INTERFACE
REFLECTION
(J1)
(J2-31)
40
V
VCO TUNE
(23)
EXT
REF
(26)
V
COUNTER
INPUTS
VCO/N
IN
A16 REAR PANEL
HI
OUT(J1)
30 TO 60 MHz
W10
L=40.01 TO 56MHz
W11
N
10MHz
A12 REFERENCE
A21 DUAL COUPLER
VCO/N
OUT
(J3)
VIDEO
VIDEO
PALETTE
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
TFT
LIQUID
CRYSTAL
DISPLAY
(LCD)
4kHz
ADC
REG
RED LED
NORMAL=OFF
CONTROL / REFRESH
A17 MOTHER BOARD
TO A19
*
A6P 1-6
THIS SYMBOL INDICATES A NODE FOR THE COUNTER
*
THIS SYMBOL INDICATES A DIRECT CONNECTION TO A19 THROUGH THE MOTHER BOARD
8753ET OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM
(INCLUDES OPTIONS 006 & 1D5)
8753ES OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM
(INCLUDES OPTIONS 006 & 1D5)
A18 DISPLAY
A19 GSP
W23
A14 FRACTIONAL N (DIGITAL)
A26 HIGH STABILITY
FREQUENCY REFERENCE (OPTION 1D5)
(J1-32)
FN VCO
TUN
(29)
FN VCO
DET
(30)
FRAC N
VCO
DIV
FRAC N
V
L SWP
(J1-35)
LO
OUT(J2)
JUMPER (ONLY USED WITH OPTION 1D5)
FN LO
IN
(J1)
VCO
10MHz
PRECISION
REFERENCE
EXT
REF IN
W13
2ND
LO
(24)
0.014 TO 16.00MHz
H=39.84MHz
L=39.996MHz
:
L
f
H
996kHz
W8
3MHz
(J1)
100kHz
f
100kHZ
(21)
(P1-54, 58)
W9
V
PL REF
(25)
V
3MHz
LPF
LPF
v
H=15 TO
60MHz
EXTERNAL SOURCE ONLY
FN
VCO
TUN
VCO
TUN 2
(13)
1st IF
(17)
STEP
RECOVERY
L
A4 (R) SAMPLER/
MIXER
W7
DIODE
SWITCHING
POWER
SUPPLY
AND
REGULATOR
16MHz
30MHz
v
10 TO 300kHZ
REGULATORS
A3 SOURCE
OPT.006
v
PRETUNE
(15)
Amp I d
v (3)
300kHz
TO 3GHz
Vbb REF
v (14)
3.0 TO 6.8 GHz
SRC
v IV/GHz
(2)
Integ
(6)
MICROCIRCUIT POWER
v
4dB
ATTENUATOR
W22
}
FROM A9
3.8GHz
4kHz
AUX
INPUT
(11)
L= 10kHz TO 16.00MHz
H= 1.000MHz
TP 16
A3 Gnd
v (8)
EXT
AM
9 GREEN LEDS
NORMAL=ON, STEADY
W26
1/2
R OUT
IF R 4kHz
1st LO
A5 (A) SAMPLER/
MIXER
50 ohm
RPG
FRONT
PANEL
PROCESSOR
LEDS
TIMING
CONTROL
ANALOG
BUS
ANALOG
BUS
L= ON
H= 15MHz TO 2.99GHz (STD)
H= 15MHz TO 5.99 (OPT 006)
1MHz
TP 18
L= 0.014 TO
16.004MHz
H= 996kHz
SAMPLE
RATE IS
16kHz
MINI-DIN KYBD
INTERCONNECT
RS-232
INTERCONNECT
PARALLEL
INTERCONNECT
GPIB
INTERCONNECT
RS-232 PORT
INTERFACE
PARALLEL
INTERCONNECT
GPIB PORT
INTERFACE
A9 CPU
A OUT
ADC
IF A 4kHz
(J1 - 4)
MINI-DIN KYBD PORT
INTERFACE
BPF
50 ohm
4kHz
W3 FROM A21
500 ohm
S
10kHz TO 3GHz (STD)
10kHz TO 6GHz (OPT 006)
TP 20
A5P 1-6
B OUT
EEPROM
IF B 4kHz
L= 10kHz TO 16.00MHz
H= 1.000MHz
(J1 - 7)
A20 DISK DRIVE
MAIN CPU
FLASH
2nd LO
+0.37
v (9)
ALC
CAVITY
OSC
(J2 - 52)
A1 FRONT PANEL
KEYBOARD
2nd IF
A4P 1-6
1st LO
NOT USED
+2.50
v (10)
A10GND
v (12)
RAM
DIGITAL SIGNAL
PROCESSOR
50 ohm
L= ON
H= 15MHz TO 2.99GHz (STD)
H= 15MHz TO 5.99 (OPT 006)
A6 (B) SAMPLER/
MIXER
Temp 10mv/°C
v (5)
S
10kHz TO 3GHz (STD)
10kHz TO 6GHz (OPT 006)
L= 10kHz TO 16.00MHz
H= 1.000MHz
RAM
MAIN RAM
THIS INDICATES ANALOG BUS NODE LOCATION
f= FREQUENCY NODE
V= VOLTAGE NODE
BPF
W4 FROM A22
S11/ S21
ROM
L= 0.014 TO
16.004MHz
H= 996kHz
1MHz
A23 LED
FRONT PANEL
S12 / S22
sa5125e
TO A13
(J2 - 31)
A10 DIGITAL IF
1st IF
S
W1
Mn Pwr DAC
v (1)
+70V
RED LED
NORMAL=OFF
4MHz
2nd LO
Det
v (4)
Log
(7)
v
-18V
GREEN LED
NORMAL=ON
A24
TRANSFER
SWITCH
YIG OSC
PRETUNE
DAC
L= 0.014 TO
16.004MHz
H= 996kHz
(J1 - 1)
3 TO 6GHz
INSTRUMENT POWER
-8V
R CHANNEL
JUMPER
OUT
FAN POWER
+18V
10kHz TO 3GHz (STD)
10kHz TO 6GHz (OPT 006)
W25
EXT
TRIGGER
1MHz
IN
PRETUNE
IF DET 2W
(19)
PROBE POWER
+8V
TEST SEQ
LIMIT TEST
TO A10
A2 FRONT PANEL PROCESSOR
AUX
INPUT
BPF
1V/GHZ
(16)
v
PHASE
LOCK
LPF
LPF
RED LED
NORMAL=FLASHING
+25V
L= ON
H= 15MHz TO 2.99GHz (STD)
H= 15MHz TO 5.99 (OPT 006)
W8 FROM A11J1
W2
A8 POST-REGULATOR
+5VD
LINE
POWER
A27
INVERTER ASSY
}
VGA
INTERCONNECT
1st LO
W5
500 ohm
A15W1
*
MOTHER BOARD
TO A12
EXT AM
L SWP FROM A12
W6
f
v
A12GND2
(28)
H
(P1-8)
IF DET 1
(20)
A15 PREREGULATOR
W32
2nd LO
v
PL IF
IN
f
0.010 TO 16.000MHz
A12GND1
(22)
*
*
BIAS CONNECT
PORT 1
A7 PULSE GENERATOR
IF DET 2N
(18)
H=1MHz
H
1, 2, OR 3
L
40.01 TO 56MHz
A 17
4MHz FROM A12
4MHz
40MHz
FUSE 1A
CAUTION
HIGH VOLTAGE
W4 TO A6
W3 TO A5
W31
A11 PHASE LOCK
40MHz
INT
REF
COUNT
V GATE
(31)
100kHz
1 OR 2
AUX INPUT
EXT TRIG
BIAS CONNECT
PORT 2
16dB
50ohm
TEST SET - I/0
INTERFACE
EXT REF
PORT2
PORT1
16dB
50ohm
TEST SET - I/0
INTERFACE
LIGHT
MEMORY
3dB
3dB
A16 REAR PANEL
W12
(P1 - 2, 4, 32, 34)
VCXO
V
(J1-2)
API'S
40
H=160KHz
L= 4kHz
VCXO
TUNE
(27)
(J1)
(J2-31)
VIDEO
VIDEO
PALETTE
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
FUSE 1A
V
VCO TUNE
(23)
EXT
REF
(26)
V
COUNTER
INPUTS
VCO/N
IN
A25
TEST SET
INTERFACE
A22 TEST PORT
COUPLER
A21 TEST PORT
COUPLER
HI
OUT(J1)
30 TO 60 MHz
W10
L=40.01 TO 56MHz
W11
N
10MHz
A12 REFERENCE
VCO/N
OUT
(J3)
TFT
LIQUID
CRYSTAL
DISPLAY
(LCD)
A22W1
A21W1
A13 FRACTIONAL N (ANALOG)
4kHz
ADC
REG
RED LED
NORMAL=OFF
CONTROL / REFRESH
A17 MOTHER BOARD
TO A19
*
A6P 1-6
THIS SYMBOL INDICATES A NODE FOR THE COUNTER
*
THIS SYMBOL INDICATES A DIRECT CONNECTION TO A19 THROUGH THE MOTHER BOARD
8753ES OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM
(INCLUDES OPTIONS 006 & 1D5)
5 Power Supply Troubleshooting
5-1
Power Supply Troubleshooting
Power Supply Troubleshooting
Power Supply Troubleshooting
Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.” Follow
the procedures in the order given, unless:
• an error message appears on the display; refer to “Error Messages” on page 5-17.
• the fan is not working; refer to “Fan Troubleshooting” on page 5-19.
The power supply group assemblies consist of the following:
• A8 post regulator
• A15 preregulator
All assemblies, however, are related to the power supply group because power is supplied
to each assembly.
5-2
Chapter 5
Power Supply Troubleshooting
Assembly Replacement Sequence
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an Agilent 8753ET/ES
network analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.” Follow up
with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13 , “Replaceable Parts.”
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
Chapter 14 , “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures.”
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3 , “Adjustments and Correction
Constants.”
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2 , “System Verification and
Performance Tests.”
Chapter 5
5-3
Power Supply Troubleshooting
Simplified Block Diagram
Simplified Block Diagram
Figure 5-1 shows the power supply group in simplified block diagram form. Refer to the
detailed block diagram of the power supply located at the end of this chapter to see voltage
lines and specific connector pin numbers.
Figure 5-1
5-4
Power Supply Group Simplified Block Diagram
Chapter 5
Power Supply Troubleshooting
Start Here
Start Here
Check the Green LED and Red LED on A15
Switch on the analyzer and look at the rear panel of the analyzer. Check the two power
supply diagnostic LEDs on the A15 preregulator casting by looking through the holes
located to the left of the line voltage selector switch. (See Figure 5-2.)
During normal operation, the bottom (green) LED is on and the top (red) LED is off. If
these LEDs are normal, then A15 is 95% verified. Continue to “Check the Green LEDs on
A8”.
• If the green LED is not on steadily, refer to “If the Green LED of the A15 Is Not ON
Steadily” on page 5-7.
• If the red LED is on or flashing, refer to “If the Red LED of the A15 Is ON” on page 5-8.
Figure 5-2
Location of A15 Diagnostic LEDs
Check the Green LEDs on A8
Remove the top cover of the analyzer and locate the A8 post regulator; use the location
diagram under the top cover if necessary. Check to see if the green LEDs on the top edge of
A8 are all on. There are nine green LEDs (one is not visible without removing the PC
board stabilizer).
• If all of the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 are on, there is a 95% confidence level that
the power supply is verified. To confirm the last 5% uncertainty of the power supply,
refer to “Measure the Post Regulator Voltages,” next.
• If any LED on the A8 post regulator is off or flashing, refer to “If the Green LEDs of the
A8 Are Not All ON” on page 5-13.
Chapter 5
5-5
Power Supply Troubleshooting
Start Here
Measure the Post Regulator Voltages
Measure the DC voltages on the test points of A8 with a voltmeter. Refer to Figure 5-3 for
test point locations and Table 5-3 for supply voltages and limits.
Figure 5-3
Table 5-1
A8 Post Regulator Test Point Locations
A8 Post Regulator Test Point Voltages
TP
Supply
Range
1
+65 V (not used)
+64.6 to +65.4
2
AGND
n/a
3
+5 VD
+4.9 to +5.3
4
SDIS
n/a
5
−15 V
−14.4 to −15.6
6
−12.6 VPP (probe power)
−12.1 to −12.91
7
+15 V
+14.5 to +15.5
8
+5 VU
+5.05 to +5.35
9
−5.2 V
−5.0 to −5.4
10
+22 V
+21.3 to +22.7
11
+6 V
+5.8 to +6.2
5-6
Chapter 5
Power Supply Troubleshooting
If the Green LED of the A15 Is Not ON Steadily
If the Green LED of the A15 Is Not ON Steadily
If the green LED is not on steadily, the line voltage is not enough to power the analyzer.
Check the Line Voltage, Selector Switch, and Fuse
Check the main power line cord, line fuse, line selector switch setting, and actual line
voltage to see that they are all correct. Figure 5-4 shows how to remove the line fuse, using
a small flat-blade screwdriver to pry out the fuse holder. Figure 5-2 shows the location of
the line voltage selector switch. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to select the correct
switch position.
NOTE
Refer to “8753ET/ES: Hardware, Preregulator” on page 13-55 for the correct
line fuse description and part number.
If the A15 green LED is still not on steadily, replace A15.
Figure 5-4
Chapter 5
Removing the Line Fuse
5-7
Power Supply Troubleshooting
If the Red LED of the A15 Is ON
If the Red LED of the A15 Is ON
If the red LED is on or flashing, the power supply is shutting down. Use the following
procedures to determine which assembly is causing the problem.
Check the A8 Post Regulator
1. Switch off the analyzer.
2. Disconnect the cable A15W1 from the A8 post regulator. (See Figure 5-5.)
3. Switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on A15.
• If the red LED goes out, the problem is probably the A8 post regulator. Continue to
“Verify the A15 Preregulator” on page 5-10 to first verify that the inputs to A8 are
correct.
• If the red LED is still on, fuse F4 in the preregulator A15 may need to be replaced if
the line voltage selector switch was set to 120 V, and the instrument was connected
to a 220 V supply.
• If the red LED is still on, the problem is probably the A15 preregulator, or one of the
assemblies obtaining power from it. Continue with “Check for a Faulty Assembly” on
page 5-11.
5-8
Chapter 5
Power Supply Troubleshooting
If the Red LED of the A15 Is ON
Figure 5-5
Chapter 5
Power Supply Cable Locations
5-9
Power Supply Troubleshooting
If the Red LED of the A15 Is ON
Verify the A15 Preregulator
Verify that the A15 preregulator is supplying the correct voltages to the A8 post regulator.
Use a voltmeter with a small probe to measure the output voltages of A15W1’s plug. Refer
to Table 5-2 and Figure 5-6.
• If the voltages are not within tolerance, replace A15.
• If the voltages are within tolerance, A15 is verified. Continue to “Check for a Faulty
Assembly” on page 5-11.
Table 5-2
Output Voltages
Pin
A15W1P1
(Disconnected)
Voltages
A8J2
(Connected)
Voltages
A15
Preregulator
Label
1
N/C
+68 to +76.2
N/C
2
+125 to +100
+68 to +76.2
+70 V
3,4
+22.4 to +33.6
+17.0 to +18.4
+18 V
5,6
−22.4 to −33.6
−17.0 to −18.4
−18 V
7
N/C
+7.4 to +8.0
N/C
8
+9.4 to +14
+7.4 to +8.0
+8 V
9,10
−9.4 to −14
−6.7 to −7.4
−8 V
11
N/C
+24.6 to +28.6
N/C
12
+32 to +48
+24.6 to +28.6
+25 V
NOTE: The +5 VD supply must be loaded by one or more assemblies at all
times, or the other voltages will not be correct. It connects to the
motherboard connector A17J3 Pin 4.
5-10
Chapter 5
Power Supply Troubleshooting
If the Red LED of the A15 Is ON
Figure 5-6
A15W1 Plug Detail
Check for a Faulty Assembly
This procedure checks for a faulty assembly that might be shutting down the A15
preregulator via one of the following lines (also refer to Figure 5-1):
• A15W1 connecting to the A8 post regulator
• the +5VCPU line through the motherboard
• the +5VDIG line through the motherboard
Do the following:
1. Switch off the analyzer.
2. Ensure that A15W1 is reconnected to A8. (Refer to Figure 5-5.)
3. Remove or disconnect the assemblies listed in Table 5-3 one at a time and in the order
shown. The assemblies are sorted from most to least accessible. Table 5-3 also lists any
associated assemblies that are supplied by the assembly that is being removed. After
each assembly is removed or disconnected switch on the analyzer and observe the red
LED on A15.
CAUTION
• Always switch off the analyzer before removing or disconnecting
assemblies.
• When extensive disassembly is required, refer to Chapter 14 , “Assembly
Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures.”
• Refer to Chapter 13 , “Replaceable Parts,” to identify specific cables and
assemblies that are not shown in this chapter.
Chapter 5
5-11
Power Supply Troubleshooting
If the Red LED of the A15 Is ON
• If the red LED goes out, the particular assembly (or one receiving power from it) that
allows it to go out is faulty.
• If the red LED is still on after you have checked all of the assemblies listed in Table 5-3,
continue to “Check the Operating Temperature” on page 5-12.
Table 5-3
Recommended Order for Removal/Disconnection
Assembly To
Remove
Removal or Disconnection
Method
Other Assemblies that Receive Power
from the Removed Assembly
1. A19 Graphics
Processor
Remove from Card Cage
None
Disconnect from W14
A18 Display
2. A14 Frac N
Digital
Remove from Card Cage
None
3. A9 CPU
Disconnect W36
A20 Disk Drive
Remove from cardcage
None
Disconnect W27
A25 Test Set Interface
A24 Transfer Switch
A23 LED Front Panel
4. A16 Rear Panel
Interface
Disconnect A16W1
None
5. A2 Front Panel
Interface
Disconnect W17
A1 Front Panel Keyboard A18 Display
Check the Operating Temperature
The temperature sensing circuitry inside the A15 preregulator may be shutting down the
supply. Make sure the temperature of the open air operating environment does not exceed
55 °C (131 °F), and that the analyzer fan is operating.
• If the fan does not seem to be operating correctly, refer to “Fan Troubleshooting” on
page 5-19.
• If there does not appear to be a temperature problem, it is likely that A15 is faulty.
Inspect the Motherboard
If the red LED is still on after replacement or repair of A15, switch off the analyzer and
inspect the motherboard for solder bridges and other noticeable defects. Use an ohmmeter
to check for shorts. The +5 VD, +5 VCPU, or +5 VDSENSE lines may be bad. Refer to the
block diagram at the end of this chapter and troubleshoot these suspected power supply
lines on the A17 motherboard.
5-12
Chapter 5
Power Supply Troubleshooting
If the Green LEDs of the A8 Are Not All ON
If the Green LEDs of the A8 Are Not All ON
The green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 post regulator are normally on.
Flashing LEDs on A8 indicate that the shutdown circuitry on the A8 post regulator is
protecting power supplies from overcurrent conditions by repeatedly shutting them down.
This may be caused by supply loading on A8 or on any other assembly in the analyzer.
Remove A8, Maintain A15W1 Cable Connection
1. Switch off the analyzer.
2. Remove A8 from its motherboard connector, but keep the A15W1 cable connected to A8.
3. Remove the display power cable.
4. Short A8TP2 (AGND) (see Figure 5-3 on page 5-6) to chassis ground with a clip lead.
5. Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs on A8.
• If any green LEDs other than +5 VD are still off or flashing, continue to “Check the
A8 Fuses and Voltages” on page 5-13.
• If all LEDs are now on steadily except for the +5 VD LED, the A15 preregulator and
A8 post regulator are working properly and the trouble is excessive loading
somewhere after the motherboard connections at A8. Continue to “Remove the
Assemblies” on page 5-13.
Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages
Check the fuses along the top edge of A8. If any A8 fuse has burned out, replace it. If it
burns out again when power is applied to the analyzer, A8 or A15 is faulty. Determine
which assembly has failed as follows.
1. Remove the A15W1 cable at A8. (See Figure 5-5 on page 5-9.)
2. Measure the voltages at A15W1P1 (see Figure 5-6 on page 5-11) with a voltmeter
having a small probe.
3. Compare the measured voltages with those in Table 5-2 on page 5-10.
• If the voltages are within tolerance, replace A8.
• If the voltages are not within tolerance, replace A15.
If the green LEDs are now on, the A15 preregulator and A8 post regulator are working
properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard
connections at A8. Continue to “Remove the Assemblies,” next.
Remove the Assemblies
1. Switch off the analyzer.
2. Install A8. Remove the jumper from A8TP2 (AGND) to chassis ground.
Chapter 5
5-13
Power Supply Troubleshooting
If the Green LEDs of the A8 Are Not All ON
3. Remove or disconnect all the assemblies listed below. (See Figure 5-5 on page 5-9.)
Always switch off the analyzer before removing or disconnecting an assembly.
A9 CPU
A10 digital IF
A11 phase lock
A12 reference
A13 fractional-N analog
A14 fractional-N digital
A19 graphics processor
4. Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs on A8.
• If any of the green LEDs are off or flashing, it is not likely that any of the assemblies
listed above is causing the problem. Continue to “Briefly Disable the Shutdown
Circuitry” on page 5-14.
• If all green LEDs are now on, one or more of the above assemblies may be faulty.
Continue to the next step.
5. Switch off the analyzer.
6. Reconnect W14 and W20 to A19.
7. Reinstall each assembly one at a time. Switch on the analyzer after each assembly is
installed. The assembly that causes the green LEDs to go off or flash could be faulty.
NOTE
It is possible, however, that this condition is caused by the A8 post regulator
not supplying enough current. To check this, reinstall the assemblies in a
different order to change the loading. If the same assembly appears to be
faulty, replace that assembly. If a different assembly appears faulty, A8 is
most likely faulty (unless both of the other assemblies are faulty).
Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry
In this step, you shutdown the protective circuitry for a short time, and the supplies are
forced on (including shorted supplies) with a 100% duty cycle.
CAUTION
Damage to components or to circuit traces may occur if A8TP4 (SDIS) is
shorted to chassis ground for more than a few seconds while supplies are
shorted.
1. Switch off the analyzer.
2. Connect A8TP4 (SDIS) to chassis ground with a jumper wire.
3. Switch on the analyzer and note the signal mnemonics and test points of any LEDs that
are off. Immediately remove the jumper wire.
5-14
Chapter 5
Power Supply Troubleshooting
If the Green LEDs of the A8 Are Not All ON
4. Refer to the block diagram at the end of this chapter and do the following:
• Note the mnemonics of any additional signals that may connect to any A8 test point
that showed a fault in the previous step.
• Cross-reference all assemblies that use the power supplies whose A8 LEDs went out
when A8TP4 (SDIS) was connected to chassis ground.
• Make a list of these assemblies.
• Delete the following assemblies from your list as they have already been verified
earlier in this section.
A10 digital IF
A11 phase lock
A12 reference
A13 fractional-N analog
A14 fractional-N digital
A19 graphics processor
5. Switch off the analyzer.
6. Of those assemblies that are left on the list, remove or disconnect them from the
analyzer one at a time. Table 5-4 shows the best order in which to remove them, sorting
them from most to least accessible. Table 5-4 also lists any associated assemblies that
are supplied by the assembly that is being removed. After each assembly is removed or
disconnected, switch on the analyzer and observe the LEDs.
CAUTION
• Always switch off the analyzer before removing or disconnecting
assemblies.
• When extensive disassembly is required, refer to Chapter 14 , “Assembly
Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures.”
• Refer to Chapter 13 , “Replaceable Parts,” to identify specific cables and
assemblies that are not shown in this chapter.
• If all the LEDs light, the assembly (or one receiving power from it) that allows them to
light is faulty.
• If the LEDs are still not on steadily, continue to “Inspect the Motherboard” on
page 5-16.
Chapter 5
5-15
Power Supply Troubleshooting
If the Green LEDs of the A8 Are Not All ON
Table 5-4
Recommended Order for Removal/Disconnection
Assembly to Remove
Removal or Disconnection
Method
Other Assemblies that Receive Power
from the Removed Assembly
1. A3 Source
Remove from Card Cage
None
2. A7 Pulse Generator
Remove from Card Cage
None
3. A4 R Sampler
Remove from Card Cage
None
4. A5 A Sampler
Remove from Card Cage
None
5. A6 B Sampler
Remove from Card Cage
None
6. A9 CPU
Disconnect W35 and W36
A20 Disk Drive
7. A2 Front Panel Interface
Disconnect W17
A1 Front Panel Keyboard
8. A16 Rear Panel Interface
Disconnect W27
A25 Test Set Interface
A24 Transfer Switch (8753ES only)
A23 LED Front Panel
Inspect the Motherboard
Inspect the A17 motherboard for solder bridges and shorted traces. In particular, inspect
the traces that carry the supplies whose LEDs faulted when A8TP4 (SDIS) was grounded
earlier.
5-16
Chapter 5
Power Supply Troubleshooting
Error Messages
Error Messages
Three error messages are associated with the power supplies functional group. They are
shown here.
• POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!
One or more supplies on the A8 post regulator assembly is shut down due to one of the
following conditions: overcurrent, overvoltage, or undervoltage. Refer to “If the Red
LED of the A15 Is ON” on page 5-8.
• POWER SUPPLY HOT
The temperature sensors on the A8 post regulator assembly detect an overtemperature
condition. The regulated power supplies on A8 have been shut down.
Check the temperature of the operating environment; it should not be greater than
+55 °C (131 °F). The fan should be operating and there should be at least 15 cm (6 in)
spacing behind and all around the analyzer to allow for proper ventilation.
• PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN!
The front panel RF probe biasing supplies are shut down due to excessive current draw.
These supplies are +15 VPP and −12.6 VPP, both supplied by the A8 post regulator.
+15 VPP is derived from the +15 V supply. −12.6 VPP is derived from the −12.6 V
supply.
Refer to Figure 5-7 and carefully measure the power supply voltages at the front panel
RF probe connectors.
Figure 5-7
Chapter 5
Front Panel Probe Power Connector Voltages
5-17
Power Supply Troubleshooting
Error Messages
• If the correct voltages are present, troubleshoot the probe.
• If the voltages are not present, check the +15 V and −12.6 V green LEDs on A8.
— If the LEDs are on, there is an open between the A8 assembly and the front panel
probe power connectors. Put A8 onto an extender board and measure the voltages at
the following pins:
A8P2 pins 6 and 36
−12.6 volts
A8P2 pins 4 and 34
+15 volts
— If the LEDs are off, continue with “Check the Fuses and Isolate A8.”
Check the Fuses and Isolate A8
Check the fuses associated with each of these supplies near the A8 test points. If these
fuses keep burning out, a short exists. Try isolating A8 by removing it from the
motherboard connector, but keeping the cable A15W1 connected to A8J2. Connect a
jumper wire from A8TP2 to chassis ground. If either the +15 V or −12.6 V fuse blows, or
the associated green LEDs do not light, replace A8.
If the +15 V and −12.6 V green LEDs light, troubleshoot for a short between the
motherboard connector pins XA8P2 pins 6 and 36 (−12.6 V) and the front panel probe
power connectors. Also check between motherboard connector pins XA8P2 pins 4 and 34
(+15 V) and the front panel probe power connectors.
5-18
Chapter 5
Power Supply Troubleshooting
Fan Troubleshooting
Fan Troubleshooting
Fan Speeds
The fan speed varies depending upon temperature. It is normal for the fan to be at high
speed when the analyzer is just switched on, and then change to low speed when the
analyzer is cooled.
Check the Fan Voltages
If the fan is dead, refer to the A8 post regulator block diagram at the end of this chapter.
The fan is driven by the +18 V and −18 V supplies coming from the A15 preregulator.
Neither of these supplies is fused.
The −18 V supply is regulated on A8 in the fan drive block, and remains constant at
approximately −14 volts. It connects to the A17 motherboard via pin 32 of the A8P1
connector.
The +18 V supply is regulated on A8 but changes the voltage to the fan, depending on
airflow and temperature information. Its voltage ranges from approximately −1.0 volts to
+14.7 volts, and connects to the A17 motherboard via pin 31 of the A8P1 connector.
Measure the voltages of these supplies while using an extender board to allow access to the
PC board connector, A8P1.
Short A8TP3 to Ground
If there is no voltage at A8P1 pins 31 and 32, switch off the analyzer. Remove A8 from its
motherboard connector (or extender board) but keep the cable A15W1 connected to A8.
(See Figure 5-5 on page 5-9.) Connect a jumper wire between A8TP3 and chassis ground.
Switch on the analyzer.
• If all the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 light (except +5 VD), replace the fan.
• If other green LEDs on A8 do not light, refer to “If the Green LEDs of the A8 Are Not All
ON” on page 5-13.
Chapter 5
5-19
Power Supply Troubleshooting
Intermittent Problems
Intermittent Problems
Preset states that appear spontaneously (without pressing Preset ) typically signal a
power supply or A9 CPU problem. Since the A9 CPU assembly is the easiest to substitute,
do so. If the problem ceases, replace the A9. If the problem continues, replace the A15
preregulator assembly.
5-20
Chapter 5
6 Digital Control Troubleshooting
6-1
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.”
The digital control group assemblies consist of the following:
• CPU
— A9
• Display
— A2, A18, A19, A27
• Front Panel
— A1, A2
• Digital IF
— A10
• Rear Panel Interface
— A16
Begin with “CPU Troubleshooting (A9)” on page 6-5, then proceed to the assembly that you
suspect has a problem. If you suspect an GPIB interface problem, refer to “GPIB Failures”
on page 6-19.
6-2
Chapter 6
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Digital Control Group Block Diagram
Digital Control Group Block Diagram
Figure 6-1
Chapter 6
Digital Control Group Block Diagram
6-3
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Assembly Replacement Sequence
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an Agilent 8753ET/ES
network analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.” Follow up
with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13 , “Replaceable Parts.”
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
Chapter 14 , “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures.”
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3 , “Adjustments and Correction
Constants.”
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2 , “System Verification and
Performance Tests.”
6-4
Chapter 6
Digital Control Troubleshooting
CPU Troubleshooting (A9)
CPU Troubleshooting (A9)
A9 CC Switch Positions
The A9 CC switch must be in the NORMAL position for these procedures. This is the
position for normal operating conditions. To move the switch to the NORMAL position, do
the following:
1. Remove the power line cord from the analyzer.
2. Set the analyzer on its side.
3. Remove the two corner bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with a T-15 TORX
screwdriver.
4. Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover’s back edge.
5. Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument.
6. Move the switch to the NORMAL position as shown in Figure 6-2.
7. Replace the bottom cover and power cord.
Figure 6-2
Chapter 6
Switch Positions on the A9 CPU
6-5
Digital Control Troubleshooting
CPU Troubleshooting (A9)
Checking A9 CPU Red LED Patterns
The A9 CPU has five red LEDs that can be viewed through a small opening in the rear
panel of the analyzer. (See Figure 6-3.) Four LEDs are easily viewable. The fifth LED must
be viewed by looking to the left at an angle.
1. Cycle the power while observing five red LEDs
Cycle the power on the analyzer and observe the five red LEDs. After an initial pattern,
the five red LEDs on the A9 CPU board should remain off.
• If the LEDs remained off, then proceed to the assembly that you suspect has a
problem.
• If the LEDs did not remain off, switch off the power and remove the bottom cover for
further troubleshooting.
Figure 6-3
CPU LED Window on Rear Panel
2. Cycle the power while observing all eight red LEDs
With the analyzer positioned bottom up, cycle the power and observe the eight red
LEDs while looking from the front of the instrument.
NOTE
If firmware did not load, a red LED on the CPU board will be flashing. Refer
to “Loading Firmware” on page 3-36.
3. Evaluate results
• If either of the following LED patterns remain, go to “Display Troubleshooting (A2,
A18, A19, A27)” on page 6-7. (✸ = LED is on.)
✸
✸
✸
0
✸
✸
✸
0
✸
✸
✸
0
✸
✸
0
✸
(front of instrument ⇓)
• If any other LED patterns remain, replace the A9 CPU after verifying the power
supply.
6-6
Chapter 6
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Display Troubleshooting (A2, A18, A19, A27)
Display Troubleshooting (A2, A18, A19, A27)
This section contains the following information:
• Evaluating your Display
• Troubleshooting a White Display
• Troubleshooting a Black Display
• Troubleshooting a Display with Color Problems
Evaluating Your Display
Switch the analyzer off, and then on. The display should be bright with the annotation
legible and intelligible. There are four criteria against which your display is measured:
• Background Lamp Intensity
• Green, Red or Blue Stuck Pixels
• Dark Stuck Pixels
• Newtons Rings
Evaluate the display as follows:
• If either the A18 LCD, A19 GSP, A9 CPU or A27 backlight inverter assemblies are
replaced, perform a visual inspection of the display.
• If it appears that there is a problem with the display, refer to the troubleshooting
information that follows.
• If the new display appears dim or doesn't light, see “Backlight Intensity Check,” next.
Backlight Intensity Check
Required Equipment and Tools
Description
HP/Agilent Part or Model Number
Photometer
Tektronix J16
Probe
Tektronix J6503
Light Occluder
Tektronix 016-0305-00
Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord
9300-0980
Antistatic Wrist Strap
9300-1367
Static-control Table Mat and Ground Wire
9300-0797
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes. Photometer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
Chapter 6
6-7
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Display Troubleshooting (A2, A18, A19, A27)
NOTE
This procedure should be performed with a photometer and only by qualified
personnel.
1. Press Display MORE ADJUST DISPLAY
display intensity at 100%.
INTENSITY
2. Press System SERVICE MENU TESTS 62
to set a white screen test pattern on the display.
x1
100
x1 to set the
EXECUTE TEST
CONTINUE
3. Set the photometer probe to NORMAL. Turn on power to the photometer and allow
30 minutes of warmup time. Zero the photometer according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
4. Center the photometer on the analyzer display as shown in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4
NOTE
Backlight Intensity Check Setup
The intensity levels are read with a display bezel installed.
5. If the photometer registers less than 50 Nits, the display backlight lamp is bad. Refer to
the Chapter 14 , “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures,” for information
on display lamp replacement.
6-8
Chapter 6
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Display Troubleshooting (A2, A18, A19, A27)
Red, Green, or Blue Pixels Specifications
Red, green, or blue “stuck on” pixels may appear against a black background. To test for
these dots, press System SERVICE MENU TESTS 70 x1 EXECUTE TEST
CONTINUE .
In a properly working display, the following will not occur:
— complete rows or columns of stuck pixels
— more than 5 stuck pixels (not to exceed a maximum of 2 red or blue, and 3 green)
— 2 or more consecutive stuck pixels
— stuck pixels less than 6.5 mm apart
Dark Pixels Specifications
Dark “stuck on” pixels may appear against a white background. To test for these dots,
press System SERVICE MENU TESTS 66 x1 EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE .
In a properly working display, the following will not occur:
— more than 12 stuck pixels (not to exceed a maximum of 7 red, green, or blue)
— more than one occurrence of 2 consecutive stuck pixels
— stuck pixels less than 6.5 mm apart
Newton’s Rings
To check for the patterns known as Newton's Rings, change the display to white by
pressing the following keys:
Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
66
x1
EXECUTE TEST
CONTINUE .
Figure 6-5 illustrates acceptable and non-acceptable examples of Newtons Rings.
Chapter 6
6-9
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Display Troubleshooting (A2, A18, A19, A27)
Figure 6-5
Newtons Rings
Troubleshooting a White Display
If the display is white, the A27 back light inverter is functioning properly. Connect a VGA
monitor to the analyzer.
• If the image on the external monitor is normal, then suspect A2, A18, or the front panel
cabling.
• If the image on the external monitor is bad, suspect the A19 GSP or cable W20 (CPU to
motherboard).
Troubleshooting a Black Display
1. Remove the front panel with the exception of leaving cable W17 (A2 to motherboard)
connected.
2. Press Preset
while checking to see if there is a flash of light.
• If the light does not flash, suspect the front panel cabling, the display lamp, or the
A27 inverter.
6-10
Chapter 6
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Display Troubleshooting (A2, A18, A19, A27)
Troubleshooting a Display with Color Problems
1. Press Display ADJUST DISPLAY DEFAULT COLORS . If this does not correct the
color problems, continue with the next step.
2. Run display service test 74 as described in “Test Patterns” on page 10-14. Confirm that
there are four intensities for each color.
• If the test passes, then continue.
• If the test fails, then suspect the front panel cabling, A2, A19, or A18.
3. Connect a VGA monitor to the analyzer.
• If the image on the external monitor has the same color problems, then replace the
A19 GSP.
• If the image on the external monitor is acceptable, then there must be a missing
color bit. Suspect the front panel cabling, A2, A19, or A18.
Chapter 6
6-11
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Front Panel Troubleshooting (A1, A2)
Front Panel Troubleshooting (A1, A2)
Check Front Panel LEDs After Preset
1. Press Preset
on the analyzer.
2. Observe that all front panel LEDs turn on and, within five seconds after releasing
Preset , all but the Chan1 and Port 1 LED turns off. Refer to Figure 6-6.
• If all the front panel LEDs either stay on or off, there is a control problem between
A9 and A1/A2. See “Inspect Cables” on page 6-15.
• If, at the end of the turn on sequence, the Chan 1 LED is not on and all GPIB status
LEDs are not off, continue with “Identify the Stuck Key” on page 6-13.
• If you suspect that one or more LEDs have burned out, replace the A1 keypad
assembly.
NOTE
Figure 6-6
6-12
Port 1 and Port 2 LED problems may be caused by the malfunction of the A23
LED board or the A24 transfer switch.
Preset Sequence
Chapter 6
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Front Panel Troubleshooting (A1, A2)
Identify the Stuck Key
Match the front panel LED pattern with the patterns in Table 6-1. The LED pattern
identifies the stuck key. Free the stuck key or replace the front panel part causing the
problem. (The Chan 3 and Chan 4 LEDs are not used. ✸ = LED is on. The footswitch is an
accessory that can be set up through a rear panel port.)
Table 6-1
Front Panel Key Codes
Decimal
Number
LED Pattern
Chan 1
Chan 2
R
L
Key
T
S
0
G/n
✸
1
2
✸
3
✸
4
✸
5
✸
6
✸
✸
7
✸
✸
M/µ
✸
6
k/m
✸
8
✸
9
✸
10
✸
✸
11
✸
✸
12
✸
✸
13
✸
✸
14
✸
✸
✸
15
✸
✸
✸
3
x1
✸
−
8
✸
7
5
✸
4
2
✸
16
✸
17
✸
18
✸
✸
19
✸
✸
20
✸
✸
21
✸
✸
Chapter 6
9
1
.
✸
0
Footswitch
✸
←
✸
Local
System
✸
Seq
6-13
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Front Panel Troubleshooting (A1, A2)
Table 6-1
Front Panel Key Codes
Decimal
Number
LED Pattern
Chan 1
R
L
T
22
✸
✸
✸
23
✸
✸
✸
24
✸
✸
25
✸
✸
26
✸
✸
✸
27
✸
✸
✸
28
✸
✸
✸
29
✸
✸
✸
30
✸
✸
✸
31
S
Save/Recall
✸
Copy
✸
Entry Off
Scale Ref
✸
Cal
Marker Fctn
✸
✸
Power
Sweep Setup
Not Used
32
✸
33
✸
34
✸
✸
35
✸
✸
36
✸
✸
37
✸
✸
38
✸
✸
39
6-14
Chan 2
Key
Chan 2
✸
Chan 4
Format
✸
Avg
Marker Search
✸
✸
Stop
Span
Not Used
40
✸
✸
41
✸
✸
42
✸
✸
✸
43
✸
✸
✸
44
✸
✸
✸
45
✸
✸
✸
46
✸
✸
✸
✸
47
✸
✸
✸
✸
Chan 1
✸
Chan 3
Meas
✸
Display
Marker
✸
Start
Center
✸
Return
Chapter 6
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Front Panel Troubleshooting (A1, A2)
Table 6-1
Front Panel Key Codes
Decimal
Number
LED Pattern
R
L
Key
Chan 1
Chan 2
T
48
✸
✸
49
✸
✸
50
✸
✸
✸
51
✸
✸
✸
52
✸
✸
✸
53
✸
✸
✸
54
✸
✸
✸
✸
55
✸
✸
✸
✸
S
softkey 1
✸
softkey 2
softkey 3
✸
softkey 4
softkey 5
✸
softkey 6
softkey 7
✸
softkey 8
Inspect Cables
Remove the front panel assembly and visually inspect the ribbon cable that connects the
front panel to the motherboard. Also, inspect the interconnecting ribbon cable between A1
and A2. Make sure the cables are properly connected. Replace any bad cables.
Test Using a Controller
If a controller is available, write a simple command to the analyzer. If the analyzer
successfully executes the command, the problem is either the A2 front panel interface or
W17 (A2 to motherboard ribbon cable) is faulty.
Chapter 6
6-15
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Run the Internal Diagnostic Tests
Run the Internal Diagnostic Tests
The analyzer incorporates 20 internal diagnostic tests. Most tests can be run as part of one
or both major test sequences: all internal (test 0) and preset (test 1).
1. Press System
INT tests.
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
0
x1
EXECUTE TEST to perform all
2. Then press 1
x1 to see the results of the preset test. If either sequence fails, press
the
keys to find the first occurrence of a FAIL message for tests 2 through
20. See Table 6-2 for further troubleshooting information.
6-16
Chapter 6
Digital Control Troubleshooting
Run the Internal Diagnostic Tests
Table 6-2
Internal Diagnostic Test with Commentary
Test
Sequencea
Probable Failed Assembliesb: Comments and Troubleshooting Hints
0 All Int
—-
— : Executes tests 3-11, 13-16, 20.
1 Preset
—-
— : Executes tests 2-11, 14-16. Runs at power-on or preset.
2 ROM
P,AI
A9: Repeats on fail; refer to “CPU Troubleshooting (A9)” on page 6-5
to replace ROM or A9.
3 CMOS RAM
P,AI
A9: Replace A9.
4 Main DRAM
P,AI
A9: Repeats on fail; replace A9.
5 DSP Wr/Rd
P,AI
A9: Replace A9.
6 DSP RAM
P,AI
A9: Replace A9.
7 DSP ALU
P,AI
A9: Replace A9.
8 DSP Intrpt
P,AI
A9/A10: Remove A10, rerun test. If fail, replace A9. If pass, replace A10.
9 DIF Control
P,AI
A9/A10: Most likely A9 assembly.
10 DIF
Counter
P,AI
A10/A9/A12: Check analog bus node 17 for 1 MHz. If correct, A12 is
verified; suspect A10.
11 DSP
Control
P,AI
A10/A9: Most likely A10.
12 Fr Pan
Wr/Rd
—-
A2/A1/A9: Run test 23. If fail, replace A2. If pass, problem is on bus
between A9 and A2 or on A9 assembly.
13 Rear Panel
AI
A16/A9: Disconnect A16, and check A9J2 pin 48 for 4 MHz clock signal.
If OK, replace A16. If not, replace A9.
14 Post-reg
P,AI
A15/A8/Destination assembly: See Chapter 5 , “Power Supply
Troubleshooting.”
15 Frac-N
Cont
P,AI
A14: Replace A14.
16 Sweep Trig
P,AI
A14,A10: Most likely A14.
17 ADC Lin
—-
A10: Replace A10.
18 ADC Ofs
—-
A10: Replace A10.
19 ABUS Test
—-
A10: Replace A10.
20 FN Count
AI
A14/A13/A10: Most likely A14 or A13, as previous tests check A10. See
Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting.”
a. P = Part of “Preset” sequence; AI = part of “All Internal” sequence
b. In decreasing order of probability.
Chapter 6
6-17
Digital Control Troubleshooting
If the Fault Is Intermittent
If the Fault Is Intermittent
Repeat Test Function
If the failure is intermittent, do the following:
1. Press System SERVICE MENU
repeat function.
2. Then press RETURN
TEST OPTIONS
REPEAT ON to turn on the
TESTS .
3. Select the test desired and press EXECUTE TEST .
4. Press any key to stop the function. The test repeat function is explained in Chapter 10 ,
“Service Key Menus and Error Messages.”
6-18
Chapter 6
Digital Control Troubleshooting
GPIB Failures
GPIB Failures
If you have performed “Step 3. GPIB Systems Check” on page 4-8, and you suspect there is
an GPIB problem in the analyzer, perform the following test. It checks the internal
communication path between the A9 CPU and the A16 rear panel. It does not check the
GPIB paths external to the instrument.
Press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
13
x1
EXECUTE TEST .
• If the analyzer fails the test, the problem is likely to be the A16 rear panel.
• If the analyzer passes the test, it indicates that the A9 CPU can communicate with the
A16 rear panel with a 50% confidence level. There is a good chance that the A16 rear
panel is working. This is because internal bus lines have been tested between the A9
CPU and A16, and GPIB signal paths are not checked external to the analyzer.
Chapter 6
6-19
Digital Control Troubleshooting
GPIB Failures
6-20
Chapter 6
7 Source Troubleshooting
7-1
Source Troubleshooting
Source Troubleshooting
Source Troubleshooting
Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.” This
chapter is divided into two troubleshooting procedures for the following problems:
• Incorrect power levels: Perform the “Power” troubleshooting checks on page 7-5.
• Phase lock error: Perform the “Phase Lock Error” troubleshooting checks on page 7-6.
The source group assemblies consist of the following:
• A3 source
• A4 sampler/mixer
• A7 pulse generator
• A11 phase lock
• A12 reference
• A13 fractional-N (analog)
• A14 fractional-N (digital)
7-2
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Assembly Replacement Sequence
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an Agilent 8753ET/ES
network analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.” Follow up
with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13 , “Replaceable Parts.”
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
Chapter 14 , “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures.”
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3 , “Adjustments and Correction
Constants.”
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2 , “System Verification and
Performance Tests.”
Chapter 7
7-3
Source Troubleshooting
Before You Start Troubleshooting
Before You Start Troubleshooting
Make sure all of the assemblies are firmly seated. Also make sure that input R has a signal
of at least −35 dBm (about 0.01 Vp-p into 50 ohms) at all times to maintain phase lock.
7-4
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Power
Power
If the analyzer output power levels are incorrect but no phase lock error is present,
perform the following checks in the order given.
For the following checks, make sure that the A9 switch is in the Alter position.
1. Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44)
To run this test, press Preset
System SERVICE MENU TESTS 44
x1
EXECUTE TEST . When complete, DONE should appear on the analyzer display. Use a
power meter to verify that source power can be controlled and that the power level is
approximately correct. If the source passes these checks, proceed with step 2. However, if
FAIL appears on the analyzer display, or if the analyzer fails the checks, replace the source.
2. RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)
Follow the instructions for this procedure given in “RF Output Power Correction Constants
(Test 47)” on page 3-11. The procedure is complete when DONE appears on the analyzer
display. Use a power meter to verify that power levels are now correct. If power levels are
not correct, or if the analyzer fails the routine, proceed with step 3, next.
3. Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
Follow the instructions for this procedure given in “Sampler Magnitude and Phase
Correction Constants (Test 53)” on page 3-16. The procedure is complete when DONE
appears on the analyzer display. Next, repeat step 2, above. If the analyzer fails the routine
in step 2, replace the source.
If the analyzer fails the routine in step 3, replace the source.
Chapter 7
7-5
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
Phase Lock Error
Figure 7-1
Basic Phase Lock Error Troubleshooting Equipment Setup
Troubleshooting tools include the assembly location diagram and phase lock diagnostic
tools. The assembly location diagram is on the underside of the instrument top cover. The
diagram shows major assembly locations and RF cable connections. The phase lock
diagnostic tools are explained in the “Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix” on
page 7-30 and should be used to troubleshoot phase lock problems. The equipment setup
shown in Figure 7-1 can be used throughout this chapter.
Phase Lock Loop Error Message Check
Phase lock error messages may appear as a result of incorrect pretune correction
constants. To check this possibility, perform the pretune correction constants routine.
The four phase lock error messages, listed below, are described in the “Source Group
Troubleshooting Appendix” on page 7-30.
• NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
• NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
• PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED
• PHASE LOCK LOST
7-6
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
1. Make sure the A9 CC switch is in the ALTER position:
a. Remove the power line cord from the analyzer.
b. Set the analyzer on its side.
c. Remove the two corner bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with a T-15
TORX screwdriver.
d. Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover’s back edge.
e. Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument.
f. Set the switch to the ALTER position as shown in Figure 7-2.
g. Replace the bottom cover, corner bumpers, and power cord.
Figure 7-2
Switch Positions on the A9 CPU
2. Switch on the analyzer and press System SERVICE MENU TESTS 46
x1
EXECUTE TEST to generate new analog bus correction constants. Then press
System SERVICE MENU TESTS 45
x1 EXECUTE TEST to generate default
pretune correction constants.
Press System SERVICE MENU TESTS 48
generate new pretune correction constants.
3. Press Preset
x1
EXECUTE TEST
YES to
and observe the analyzer display:
• No error message: set the A9 CC switch to the NORMAL position. Then refer to
“Post-Repair Procedures” on page 14-53 to verify operation.
• Error message visible: continue with “A4 Sampler/Mixer Check”.
Chapter 7
7-7
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
A4 Sampler/Mixer Check
The A4, A5, and A6 (R, A and B) sampler/mixers are similar in operation. Any sampler can
be used to phase lock the source. To eliminate the possibility of a faulty R sampler, follow
this procedure.
4. Remove the W8 cable (A11J1 to A4) from the R-channel sampler (A4) and connect it to
either the A-channel sampler (A5) or the B-channel sampler (A6). Refer to Figure 7-3.
Figure 7-3
Sampler/Mixer to Phase Lock Cable Connection Diagram
5. If the analyzer is an 8753ES, and you connected W8 to:
• A5, press Meas
Refl FWD: S11 (A/R)
• A6, press Meas
Refl REV: S22 (B/R)
6. If the analyzer is an 8753ET, and you connected W8 to:
• A5, press Meas
REFLECTION
• A6, connect a cable between the Reflection and Transmission test ports and press
Meas TRANSMISSN .
7. Ignore the displayed trace, but check for phase lock error messages. If the phase lock
problem persists, the R-channel sampler is not the problem.
A3 Source and A11 Phase Lock Check
This procedure checks the source and part of the phase lock assembly. It opens the
phase-locked loop and exercises the source by varying the source output frequency with
the A11 pretune DAC.
7-8
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
NOTE
If the analyzer failed internal test 48, default pretune correction constants
were stored which may result in a constant offset of several MHz. Regardless,
continue with this procedure.
NOTE
Use a spectrum analyzer for problems above 100 MHz.
1. Connect the oscilloscope or spectrum analyzer as shown in Figure 7-1. (Set the
oscilloscope input impedance to 50 ohms.)
2. Press Preset
System SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST MENU
SRC TUNE ON SRC TUNE FREQ to activate the source tune (SRC TUNE) service
mode.
3. Use the front panel knob or front panel keys to set the pretune frequency to 300 kHz,
30 MHz, and 40 MHz. Verify the signal frequency on the oscilloscope.
NOTE
In SRC TUNE mode, the source output frequency changes in 1 to 2 MHz
increments and should be 1 to 6 MHz above the indicated output frequency.
4. Check for the frequencies indicated by Table 7-1.
Table 7-1
Output Frequency in SRC Tune Mode
Setting
Observed Frequency
300 kHz
1.3 to 6.3 MHz
30 MHz
31 to 36 MHz
40 MHz
41 to 46 MHz
5. The signal observed on an oscilloscope should be as solid as the signal in Figure 7-4.
Figure 7-4
Chapter 7
Waveform Integrity in SRC Tune Mode
7-9
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
6. The signal observed on the spectrum analyzer will appear jittery as in Figure 7-5 (B),
not solid as in Figure 7-5 (A). This is because in SRC TUNE mode the output is not
phase locked.
Figure 7-5
Phase Locked Output Compared to Open Loop Output in SRC Tune
Mode
7. Press Power to vary the power and check for corresponding level changes on the test
instrument. (A power change of 20 dB will change the voltage observed on the
oscilloscope by a factor of ten.)
8. Note the results of the frequency and power changes:
• If the frequency and power output changes are correct, skip ahead to “A12 Reference
Check” on page 7-12.
• If the frequency changes are not correct, continue with “YO Coil Drive Check with
Analog Bus” on page 7-11.
• If the power output changes are not correct, check analog bus node 3 by performing
the following steps:
a. Press System
SERVICE MENU
S PARAMETERS
7-10
ANALOG BUS ON
ANALOG IN Aux Input
Format
Meas
MORE
REAL
3
b. Press Marker
2
G/n . The marker should read approximately 434 mU.
c. Press Marker
4
G/n . The marker should read approximately 646 mU.
x1 .
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
YO Coil Drive Check with Analog Bus
NOTE
If the analog bus is not functional, perform the “YO Coil Drive Check with
Oscilloscope” on page 7-11.
1. Press Preset
System
SOURCE PLL OFF
SERVICE MENU
Meas
ANALOG BUS ON
SERVICE MODES
ANALOG IN Aux Input ANALOG BUS .
AUTOSCALE . This
2. Then press 16
x1
Format MORE REAL Scale Ref
keystroke sequence lets you check the pretune DAC and the A11 output to the YO coil
drive by monitoring the 1 V/GHz signal at analog bus node 16.
3. Compare the waveform to Figure 7-6. If the waveform is incorrect, the A11 phase lock
assembly is faulty.
Figure 7-6
1 V/GHz at Analog Bus Node 16 with Source PLL Off.
YO Coil Drive Check with Oscilloscope
NOTE
Use the large extender board for easy access to the voltage points. The
extender board is included with the 8753 Tool Kit. See Chapter 13 ,
“Replaceable Parts,” for part numbers and ordering information.
1. Connect oscilloscope probes to A11P1-1 and A11P1-2. The YO coil drive signal is
actually two signals whose voltage difference drives the coil.
2. Press Preset
System SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SOURCE PLL OFF to
operate the analyzer in a swept open loop mode.
Chapter 7
7-11
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
3. Monitor the two YO coil drive lines. In source tune mode, the voltage difference should
vary from approximately 3.5 to 5.0 volts as shown in Figure 7-7.
• If the voltages are not correct, replace the faulty A11 assembly.
• If the output signals from the A11 assembly are correct, replace the faulty A3 source
assembly.
• If neither the A11, nor the A3 assembly is faulty, continue with the next check.
Figure 7-7
YO− and YO+ Coil Drive Voltage Differences with SOURCE PLL OFF
A12 Reference Check
The signals are evaluated with pass/fail checks. The most efficient way to check the A12
frequency reference signals is to use the analog bus while referring to Table 7-2.
Alternatively, you can use an oscilloscope, while referring to Table 7-3 and Figure 7-8
through Figure 7-14. If any of the observed signals differs from the figures, there is a 90%
probability that the A12 assembly is faulty. Either consider the A12 assembly defective or
perform the “A12 Digital Control Signals Check” on page 7-18.
Both of these procedures are described ahead.
Analog Bus Method
1. Press Preset
System SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON Meas
ANALOG IN Aux Input ANALOG BUS to switch on the analog bus and its counter.
2. Press 21
x1 to count the frequency of the 100 kHz signal.
3. Press Menu CW FREQ 500 k/m . Verify that the counter reading (displayed on
the analyzer next to cnt:) matches the corresponding 100 kHz value for the CW
frequency. (Refer to Table 7-2.)
7-12
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
4. Verify the remaining CW frequencies, comparing the counter reading with the value in
Table 7-2:
• Press 2
• Press 50
Table 7-2
M/µ .
M/µ .
Analog Bus Check of Reference Frequencies
CW Frequency
Analog Bus Node 21
100 kHz
Analog Bus Node 24
2nd LO
Analog Bus Node 25
PLREF
500 kHz
0.100 MHz
0.504 MHz
0.500 MHz
2 MHz
0.100 MHz
2.007 MHz
2.000 MHz
50 MHz
0.100 MHz
0.996 MHz
1.000 MHz
NOTE: The counter should indicate the frequencies listed in this table to within ±0.1%.
Accuracy may vary with gate time and signal strength.
5. Press 24
x1 to count the frequency of the 2nd LO signal.
6. Press Menu CW FREQ 500
k/m . Verify that the counter reading matches the
corresponding 2nd LO value for the CW frequency. (Refer to Table 7-2.)
7. Verify the remaining CW frequencies, comparing the counter reading with the value in
Table 7-2:
• Press 2
• Press 50
8. Press 25
M/µ .
M/µ .
x1 to count the frequency of the PLREF signal.
9. Press Menu CW FREQ 500
k/m . Verify that the counter reading matches the
corresponding PLREF value for the CW frequency. (Refer to Table 7-2.)
10.Verify the remaining CW frequencies, comparing the counter reading with the value in
Table 7-2:
• Press 2
• Press 50
M/µ .
M/µ .
11.Check the results.
• If all the counter readings match the frequencies listed in Table 7-2, skip ahead to
“A13/A14 Fractional-N Check” on page 7-20.
• If the counter readings are incorrect at the 500 kHz and 2 MHz settings only, go to
“FN LO at A12 Check” on page 7-16.
• If all the counter readings are incorrect at all three CW frequencies, the counter may
be faulty. Perform the “Oscilloscope Method” check of the signals described next. (If
the signals are good, either the A10 or A14 assemblies could be faulty.)
Chapter 7
7-13
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
Oscilloscope Method
You need not use the oscilloscope method unless the analog bus is non-functional or any of
the signals fail the specifications listed in Table 7-2.
If the analog bus is non-functional or the previous check has revealed questionable signals,
observe the signals with an oscilloscope. Table 7-3 identifies a convenient test point and a
plot for the five signals listed.
Table 7-3
A12 Reference Frequencies
Mnemonic
Signal Description
Location
See Figure
Analyzer
Setting
FN100kHzREF
100 kHz Reference
A13TP5
Figure 7-8
any
REF
Phase Lock Reference
A11TP9
Figure 7-9
≥16 MHz CW
REF
Phase Lock Reference
A11TP9
Figure 7-10
5 MHz CW
FN LOa*
Fractional-N LO
A14J2
Figure 7-11
10 MHz CW
4MHz REF
4 MHz Reference
A12TP9
Figure 7-12
any
2ND LO+/−
Second LO
A12P1-2,4
Figure 7-13
≥16 MHz CW
2ND LO+/−
Second LO
A12P1-2,4
Figure 7-14
14 MHz CW
a. Not an A12 signal, but required for A12 low band operation.
100 kHz Pulses
The 100 kHz pulses are very narrow and typically 1.5 V in amplitude. You may have to
increase the oscilloscope intensity to see these pulses. (See Figure 7-8.)
Figure 7-8
7-14
Sharp 100 kHz Pulses at A13TP5 (any frequency)
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
PLREF Waveforms
REF Signal At A11TP9 REF is the buffered PLREF+ signal. The 1st IF is phase locked
to this signal. Use an oscilloscope to observe the signal at the frequencies noted in
Figure 7-9 and Figure 7-10.
High Band REF Signal In high band the REF signal is a constant 1 MHz square wave
as indicated by Figure 7-9.
Figure 7-9
High Band REF Signal (≥16 MHz CW)
Low Band REF Signal In low band this signal follows the frequency of the RF output
signal. Figure 7-10 illustrates a 5 MHz CW signal.
Figure 7-10
REF Signal at A11TP9 (5 MHz CW)
• If REF looks good, skip ahead to “4 MHz Reference Signal” on page 7-16.
• If REF is bad in low band, continue with “FN LO at A12 Check,” next.
Chapter 7
7-15
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
FN LO at A12 Check
1. Use an oscilloscope to observe the FN LO from A14 at the cable end of A14J2. Press
Preset
System SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON to
switch on the fractional-N service mode.
2. Use the front panel knob to vary the frequency from 30 to 60 MHz. The signal should
appear similar to Figure 7-11. The display will indicate 10 to 60.8 MHz.
• If the FN LO signal is good, the A12 assembly is faulty.
• If the FN LO signal is not good, skip ahead to “A13/A14 Fractional-N Check” on
page 7-20.
Figure 7-11
Typical FN LO Waveform at A12J1
4 MHz Reference Signal
This reference signal is used to control the receiver. If faulty, this signal can cause
apparent source problems because the CPU uses receiver data to control the source. At
A12TP9 it should appear similar to Figure 7-12.
Figure 7-12
7-16
4 MHz Reference Signal at A12TP9 (Preset)
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
2ND LO Waveforms
The 2nd LO signals appear different in phase and shape at different frequencies.
90 Degree Phase Offset of 2nd LO Signals in High Band In high band, the 2nd LO
is 996 kHz. As indicated by Figure 7-13, the 2nd LO actually consists of two signals 90
degrees out of phase.
Figure 7-13
90 Degree Phase Offset of High Band 2nd LO Signals (≥16 MHz CW)
In-Phase 2nd LO Signals in Low Band The 2nd LO signals in low band, as shown in
Figure 7-14, are not phase shifted. In low band these signals track the RF output with a
4 kHz offset.
Figure 7-14
In-Phase Low Band 2nd LO Signals (14 MHz CW)
If any of the signals of Table 7-2 are incorrect, the probability is 90% that the A12
assembly is faulty. Either consider the A12 assembly faulty or perform the “A12 Digital
Control Signals Check,” described next.
Chapter 7
7-17
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
A12 Digital Control Signals Check
Several digital control signals must be functional for the A12 assembly to operate properly.
Check the control lines listed in Table 7-1 with the oscilloscope in the high input
impedance setting.
Table 7-4
A12-Related Digital Control Signals
Mnemonic
Signal Description
Location
See Figure
Analyzer
Setting
L ENREF
L=Reference Enable
A12P2-16
Figure 7-15
Preset
L HB
L=High Band
A12P2-32
Figure 7-16
Preset
L LB
L=Low Band
A12P1-23
Figure 7-16
Preset
L ENREF Line This is a TTL signal. To observe it, trigger on the negative edge. In
preset state, the signal should show activity similar to Figure 7-15.
Figure 7-15
L ENREF Line at A12P2-16 (Preset)
L HB and L LB Lines These complementary signals toggle when the instrument
switches from low band to high band as illustrated by Figure 7-16.
7-18
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
Figure 7-16
Complementary L HB and L LB Signals (Preset)
If all of the digital signals appear good, the A12 assembly is faulty.
Chapter 7
7-19
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
A13/A14 Fractional-N Check
Use the analog bus or an oscilloscope to check the A14 VCO’s ability to sweep from 30 MHz
to 60 MHz. The faster analog bus method should suffice unless problems are detected.
Fractional-N Check with Analog Bus
1. Press Preset
System SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON Meas
ANALOG IN Aux Input FRAC N to switch on the analog bus and the fractional-N
counter.
2. Press Menu
CW FREQ to set the analyzer to CW mode.
3. Set the instrument as indicated in Table 7-5 and see whether the VCO generates the
frequencies listed.
Table 7-5
VCO Range Check Frequencies
Instrument Setting
Counter Reading
31 MHz
30 ±0.030 MHz
60.999999 MHz
60 ±0.060 MHz
4. Check the counter reading at the frequencies indicated.
• If the readings are within the limits specified, the probability is greater than 90%
that the fractional-N assemblies are functional. Either skip ahead to the “A7 Pulse
Generator Check” on page 7-25, or perform the more conclusive “A14 VCO Range
Check with Oscilloscope” described next.
• If the readings fail the specified limits, perform the “A14 VCO Exercise” on
page 7-22.
A14 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope
1. Remove the W9 HI OUT cable (A14J1 to A7) from the A7 assembly and connect it to an
oscilloscope set for 50 ohm input impedance. Switch on the analyzer.
2. Press Preset
System SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON to
activate the FRACN TUNE service mode. See Chapter 10 , “Service Key Menus and
Error Messages,” for more information on the FRACN TUNE mode.
3. Vary the fractional-N VCO frequency with the front panel knob and check the signal
with the oscilloscope. The waveform should resemble Figure 7-17, Figure 7-18, and
Figure 7-19.
If the fractional-N output signals are correct, continue source troubleshooting by
skipping ahead to “A7 Pulse Generator Check” on page 7-25.
7-20
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
Figure 7-17
10 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1
Figure 7-18
25 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1
Chapter 7
7-21
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
Figure 7-19
60 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1
A14 VCO Exercise
The nominal tuning voltage range of the VCO is +10 to −5 volts. When the analyzer is in
operation, this voltage is supplied by the A13 assembly. This procedure substitutes a
power supply for the A13 assembly to check the frequency range of the A14 VCO.
1. Switch off the analyzer and remove the A13 assembly.
2. Put the A14 assembly on an extender board and switch on the instrument.
3. Prepare to monitor the VCO frequency, either by:
• Activating the analog bus and setting the internal counter to the FRACN node, or
• Connecting an oscilloscope to A14J2 (labeled LO OUT) and looking for waveforms
similar to Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-20
7-22
LO OUT Waveform at A14J2
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
4. Vary the voltage at A14TP14 from +10 to −5 volts either by:
• Connecting an appropriate external power supply to A14TP14, or
• First jumping the +15 V internal power supply from A8TP8 to A14TP14 and then
jumping the −5.2 V supply from A8TP10 to A14TP14.
5. Confirm that the VCO frequency changes from approximately 30 MHz or less to
60 MHz or more.
6. If this procedure produces unexpected results, the A14 assembly is faulty.
7. If this procedure produces the expected results, continue with the “A14 Divide-by-N
Circuit Check” on page 7-23.
A14 Divide-by-N Circuit Check
NOTE
The A13 assembly should still be out of the instrument and the A14 assembly
on an extender board.
1. Ground A14TP14 and confirm (as in the A14 VCO Exercise) that the VCO oscillates at
approximately 50 to 55 MHz.
2. Put the analyzer in CW mode (to avoid relock transitions) and activate the FRACN
TUNE service mode.
3. Connect an oscilloscope to A14J3 and observe the output.
4. With the FRACN TUNE service feature, vary the frequency from 30 MHz to 60.8 MHz.
5. The period of the observed signal should vary from 5.5 µs to 11 µs.
• If this procedure produces unexpected results, the A14 assembly is faulty.
• If this procedure produces the expected results, perform the “A14-to-A13 Digital
Control Signals Check,” next.
6. Remember to replace the A13 assembly.
A14-to-A13 Digital Control Signals Check
The A14 assembly generates a TTL cycle start (CST) signal every 10 microseconds. If the
VCO is oscillating and the CST signal is not detectable at A14TP3, the A14 assembly is
non-functional.
Use the CST signal as an external trigger for the oscilloscope and monitor the signals in
Table 7-6. Since these TTL signals are generated by A14 to control A13, check them at
A13 first. Place A13 on the large extender board. The signals should look similar to
Figure 7-21. If these signals are good, the A13 assembly is defective.
Chapter 7
7-23
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
Table 7-6
A14-to-A13 Digital Control Signal Locations
Mnemonic
A13 Location
A14 Location
CST
none
TP3
L FNHOLD
P2-2
P2-2
FNBIAS
P2-5
P2-5
API1
P2-32
P2-32
API2
P2-3
P2-3
API3
P2-34
P2-34
API4
P2-4
P2-4
API5
P2-35
P2-35
FN LATCH
P1-28
P1-58
Figure 7-21
A14 Generated Digital Control Signals
H MB Line This signal is active during the 16 MHz to 31 MHz sweep. The upper trace of
Figure 7-22 shows relative inactivity of this signal during preset condition. The lower trace
shows its status during a 16 MHz to 31 MHz sweep with inactivity during retrace only.
7-24
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
Figure 7-22
H MB Signal at A14P1-5 (Preset and 16 MHz to 31 MHz Sweep)
A7 Pulse Generator Check
The pulse generator affects phase lock in high band only. It can be checked with either a
spectrum analyzer or an oscilloscope.
A7 Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer
1. Remove the A7-to-A6 SMB cable (W7) from the A7 pulse generator assembly. Set the
analyzer to generate a 16 MHz CW signal. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the
A7 output connector and observe the signal. The A7 comb should resemble the spectral
display in Figure 7-23.
Figure 7-23
Pulse Generator Output
2. If the analyzer malfunction relates to a particular frequency or range, look more closely
at the comb tooth there. Adjust the spectrum analyzer span and bandwidth as required.
Even at 3 GHz, the comb should look as clean as Figure 7-24. For Option 006
instruments at 6 GHz, the comb tooth level should be approximately −46 dBm.
Chapter 7
7-25
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
Figure 7-24
High Quality Comb Tooth at 3 GHz
3. If the signal at the A7 output is good, check the A7-to-A4 cable.
4. If the signal is not as clean as Figure 7-24, observe the HI OUT input signal to the
A7 assembly.
a. On the network analyzer, press System SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES
PLL AUTO OFF . Otherwise do not readjust the instrument. Remove the A14-to-A7
SMB cable (W9) from the A7 pulse generator assembly (CW ≈ 16 MHz).
b. Set the spectrum analyzer to a center frequency of 45 MHz and a span of 30 MHz.
Connect it to the A14-to-A7 cable still attached to the A14 assembly. Narrow the
span and bandwidth to observe the signal closely.
5. If the HI OUT signal is as clean as Figure 7-25, the A7 assembly is faulty.
Otherwise, check the A14-to-A7 cable or recheck the A13/A14 fractional-N as described
ahead.
Rechecking the A13/A14 Fractional-N
Some phase lock problems may result from phase noise problems in the fractional-N loop.
To troubleshoot this unusual failure mode, do the following:
1. Set the network analyzer at 60 MHz in the FRACN TUNE mode.
2. Use a spectrum analyzer, to examine the HI OUT signal from the A14 assembly. The
signal should appear as clean as Figure 7-25. The comb shape may vary from pulse
generator to pulse generator.
7-26
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
Figure 7-25
Stable HI OUT Signal in FRACN TUNE Mode
A7 Pulse Generator Check with Oscilloscope
Perform this check if a spectrum analyzer is not available.
1. Remove the A4-to-A11 SMB cable from the A4 (R) sampler/mixer output. Connect the
oscilloscope to the A4 output (1st IF).
2. Activate the FRACN TUNE service mode and tune the fractional-N to 50 MHz. Press
System SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON 50
M/µ .
3. Activate the SRC service mode of the analyzer and tune the source to 50 MHz. Press
SRC ADJUST MENU SRC TUNE ON SRC TUNE FREQ 50
M/µ .
4. Set the SRC TUNE frequency to those listed in Table 7-7 and observe the 1st IF
waveforms. They should appear similar to Figure 7-26.
• If the signals observed are proper, continue with “A11 Phase Lock Check” on
page 7-28.
• If the signals observed are questionable, use a spectrum analyzer to perform the
“A7 Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer” on page 7-25.
Table 7-7
1st IF Waveform Settings
SRC TUNE
FRACN
Harmonic
1st IF
50 MHz
50 MHz
1
1 to 6 MHz
250 MHz
50 MHz
5
1 to 6 MHz
2550 MHz
50 MHz
51
1 to 6 MHz
Chapter 7
7-27
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
Figure 7-26
Typical 1st IF Waveform in FRACN TUNE/SRC TUNE Mode
A11 Phase Lock Check
At this point, the A11 phase lock assembly appears to be faulty (its inputs should have
been verified already). Nevertheless, you may elect to use the phase lock diagnostic
routines or check the relevant signals at the assembly itself for confirmation.
NOTE
If external source mode is the only operating mode with phase lock problems,
replace the A11 phase lock assembly.
Phase Lock Check with PLL DIAG
Refer to “Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools” on page 7-30 for an explanation of the error
messages and the diagnostic routines. Follow the steps there to determine in which state
the phase lock is lost.
• If NO IF FOUND is displayed, confirm that the analog bus is functional and perform
“Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48)” on page 3-10.
• If phase lock is lost in the ACQUIRE state, the A11 assembly is faulty.
• If phase lock is lost in the TRACK state, troubleshoot source phase lock loop
components other than the A11 assembly.
7-28
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Phase Lock Error
Phase Lock Check by Signal Examination
To confirm that the A11 assembly is receiving the signals required for its proper operation,
perform the following steps.
1. Place the A11 assembly on the large extender board.
2. Switch on the analyzer and press Preset .
3. Check for the signals listed in Table 7-8.
Table 7-8
A11 Input Signals
Mnemonic
I/O
Access
See Figure
Notes
FM COIL −
O
A11P1-3,33
Figure 7-27
Aids YO COIL in setting YIG. Press Preset
Menu NUMBER OF POINTS
x1 to observe this signal.
3
REF
I
A11TP9
Figure 7-9 ,
Figure 7-10
Observe both low band and high band CW
frequencies.
YO COIL +
O
A11P1-2,32
Figure 7-7
Use SOURCE PLL OFF .
YO COIL −
O
A11P1-1,31
Figure 7-7
1ST IF
I
A11 PL IF IN
Figure 7-26
Figure 7-27
Check for 1 MHz with tee a A11 jack (not at
cable end) in high band. Use A7 pulse generator
check setup.
FM Coil – Plot with 3 Point Sweep
4. If any of the input signal is not proper, refer to the overall block diagram in
Chapter 4 as an aid to troubleshooting the problem to its source.
5. If any of the output signals is not proper, the A11 assembly is faulty.
Chapter 7
7-29
Source Troubleshooting
Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix
Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix
Troubleshooting Source Problems with the Analog Bus
The analog bus can perform a variety of fast checks. However, it too is subject to failure
and thus should be tested prior to use. You should have done this in Chapter 4 .
To use the analog bus to check any one of the nodes, press Preset
System
SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS IN . Then press Meas ANALOG IN Aux Input and
enter the analog bus node number followed by x1 . Refer to “Analog Bus” on page 10-20
for additional information.
Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools
• error messages
• diagnostic routines
Phase Lock Error Messages
All phase lock error messages can result from improper front panel connections.
NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL means no IF was detected during pretune: a source
problem. Perform the “A4 Sampler/Mixer Check” on page 7-8.
NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL means the IF was not acquired after pretune: a
source problem. Perform the “A4 Sampler/Mixer Check” on page 7-8.
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED means that a calculation of pretune values was not successful: a
source or receiver failure. Perform “Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48)” on
page 3-10. If the analyzer fails that routine, perform the “A4 Sampler/Mixer Check” on
page 7-8.
PHASE LOCK LOST means that phase lock was lost or interrupted before the band sweep
ended: a source problem. Refer to “Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines,” next, to access the
phase lock loop diagnostic service routine. Then troubleshoot the problem by following the
procedures in this chapter.
Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines
Perform the following steps to determine at what frequencies and bands the phase lock
problem occurs.
1. Press Preset
System SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES PLL AUTO OFF to
switch off the automatic phase-locked loop. Normally, when the phase-locked loop
detects lock problems, it automatically aborts the sweep and attempts to recalibrate the
pretune cycle. Switching off PLL AUTO defeats this routine.
2. Press PLL DIAG ON to switch on the phase-locked loop diagnostic service mode. In
this mode, the phase lock cycle and subsweep number are displayed on the analyzer
display. (See “Service Modes Menu” on page 10-16 for more information.)
7-30
Chapter 7
Source Troubleshooting
Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix
3. Press PLL PAUSE to pause the phase lock sequence and determine where the source
is trying to tune when lock is lost.
Refer to “Source Theory Overview” on page 12-14 for additional information regarding
band related problems. Then use the procedures in this chapter to check source functions
at specific frequencies.
Broadband Power Problems
This section assumes that a power problem exists across the full frequency range, but that
no error message is displayed on the analyzer. The problem may affect Port 1, Port 2, or
both. Assemblies in question include:
• A3 source
• A21 directional coupler
• A22 directional coupler (8753ES only)
• A24 solid-state transfer switch (8753ES only)
• any cables from the A3 source to the outputs of port 1 or port 2
Chapter 7
7-31
Source Troubleshooting
Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix
7-32
Chapter 7
8 Receiver Troubleshooting
8-1
Receiver Troubleshooting
Receiver Troubleshooting
Receiver Troubleshooting
Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.” Follow
the procedures in the order given, unless instructed otherwise.
The receiver group assemblies consist of the following:
• A4/A5/A6 sampler/mixer assemblies
• A10 digital IF assembly
8-2
Chapter 8
Receiver Troubleshooting
Assembly Replacement Sequence
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an Agilent 8753ET/ES
network analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.” Follow up
with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13 , “Replaceable Parts.”
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
Chapter 14 , “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures.”
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3 , “Adjustments and Correction
Constants.”
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2 , “System Verification and
Performance Tests.”
Chapter 8
8-3
Receiver Troubleshooting
Receiver Failure Error Messages
Receiver Failure Error Messages
The error messages which indicate receiver group problems may be caused by the
instrument itself or by external devices or connections. The following three error messages
share the same description.
• CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT A, POWER REDUCED
• CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT B, POWER REDUCED
• CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER REDUCED
If any of the above error messages appear, the analyzer has exceeded approximately
+14 dBm at one of the test ports. The RF output power is automatically reduced to
−85 dBm. The annotation P↓ appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the
power trip function has been activated. To reset the analyzer's power and regain control of
the power level, do the following:
1. Remove any devices under test which may have contributed excess power to the input.
2. Press Power
state.
0
x1
SOURCE PWR ON to return the power level to the preset
• If the power trip indicator (P↓) does not reappear, reconfigure the test setup to keep
input power levels at 0 dBm or below.
• If P↓ reappears, go to “Observe the A and B Input Traces” on page 4-17.
8-4
Chapter 8
Receiver Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting When All Inputs Look Bad
Troubleshooting When All Inputs Look Bad
Run Internal Tests 18 and 17
1. Press Preset
System
run the ADC offset.
SERVICE MENU
TESTS
2. Then, when the analyzer finishes test 18, press 17
ADC linearity test.
18
x1
x1
EXECUTE TEST to
EXECUTE TEST to run the
If either of these tests FAIL, the A10 assembly is probably faulty. This can be confirmed by
checking the 4 MHz signal and substituting the A10 assembly or checking the signals
listed in Table 8-1 on page 8-7.
Check 2nd LO
Check the 2nd LO signal. Refer to “A12 Reference Check” on page 7-12 for analog bus and
oscilloscope checks of the 2nd LO and waveform illustrations.
• If the analyzer passes the checks, continue to “Check the 4 MHz REF Signal,” next.
• If the analyzer fails the checks, perform the “High/Low Band Transition Adjustment” on
page 3-47. If the adjustment fails, or brings no improvement, replace A12.
Chapter 8
8-5
Receiver Troubleshooting
Check the 4 MHz REF Signal
Check the 4 MHz REF Signal
1. Press Preset .
2. Use an oscilloscope to observe the 4 MHz reference signal at A10P2-6.
• If the signal does not resemble Figure 8-1, troubleshoot the signal source (A12P2-36)
and path.
• If the signal is good, the probability is greater than 90% that the A10 assembly is
faulty. For confirmation, perform “Check A10 by Substitution or Signal
Examination,” next.
Figure 8-1
8-6
4 MHz REF Waveform
Chapter 8
Receiver Troubleshooting
Check the 4 MHz REF Signal
Check A10 by Substitution or Signal Examination
If the 4 MHz REF signal is good at the A10 digital IF assembly, check the A10 assembly by
one of the following methods:
• Substitute another A10 assembly or
• Check the signal/control lines required for its operation. The pins and signal sources of
those lines are identified in Table 8-1. It is possible that the A9 assembly may not be
providing the necessary signals. These signal checks allow you to determine which
assembly is faulty. Some of the waveforms are illustrated by Figure 8-2 and Figure 8-3.
If the substitute assembly shows no improvement or if all of the input signals are valid,
continue with “Check the 4 kHz Signal” on page 8-9. Otherwise, troubleshoot the suspect
signals or consider the A10 assembly faulty.
Table 8-1
Signals Required for A10 Assembly Operation
Mnemonic
Description
A10
Location
Signal
Source
See Figure
DIFD0
Digital IF data 0 (LSB)
P2-27
A9P2-27
*
DIFD1
Digital IF data 1
P2-57
A9P2-57
*
DIFD2
Digital IF data 2
P2-28
A9P2-28
*
DIFD3
Digital IF data 3
P2-58
A9P2-58
*
DIFD4
Digital IF data 4
P2-29
A9P2-29
*
DIFD5
Digital IF data 5
P2-59
A9P2-59
*
DIFD6
Digital IF data 6
P2-30
A9P2-30
*
DIFD7
Digital IF data 7 (MSB)
P2-60
A9P2-60
*
L DIFEN0
Digital IF enable 0
P2-34
A9P2-34
*
L DIFEN1
Digital IF enable 1
P2-5
A9P2-5
*
L DIFEN2
Digital IF enable 2
P2-35
A9P2-35
*
DIFCC
Digital IF conversion comp.
P2-33
A10P2-33
Figure 8-2
DIFCLK
Digital IF serial clock
P2-4
A10P2-4
Figure 8-2
DIF DATA
Digital IF serial data out
P2-3
A10P2-3
Figure 8-2
L ENDIF
L=enable digital IF
P2-17
A9P2-17
Figure 8-3
L INTCOP
L=interrupt, DSP
P2-2
A10P2-2
Figure 8-3
*Check for TTL activity.
Chapter 8
8-7
Receiver Troubleshooting
Check the 4 MHz REF Signal
Figure 8-2
Digital Data Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger
Figure 8-3
Digital Control Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger
8-8
Chapter 8
Receiver Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good
Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good
Since at least one input is good, all of the common receiver circuitry beyond the
multiplexer is functional. Only the status of the individual sampler/mixers and their
individual signal paths is undetermined.
Check the 4 kHz Signal
1. Press Preset
Menu
CW FREQ .
2. Use an oscilloscope to check the 4 kHz output of the sampler/mixer in question at the
A10 assembly. The input and output access pins are listed in Table 8-2. The signal
should resemble the waveform of Figure 8-4.
• If the signal is good, continue with “Check the Trace with the Sampler Correction
Constants Off” on page 8-10.
• If the signal is bad, skip ahead to “Check 1st LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer” on
page 8-10.
Table 8-2
2nd IF (4 kHz) Signal Locations
Mnemonic
Description
A10 Location
Signal Source
IFR
4 kHz
A10P1-1, 31
A4P1-6
IFA
4 kHz
A10P1-4, 34
A5P1-6
IFB
4 kHz
A10P1-7, 37
A6P1-6
Figure 8-4
Chapter 8
2nd IF (4 kHz) Waveform
8-9
Receiver Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good
Check the Trace with the Sampler Correction Constants Off
1. Press Preset
Meas
INPUT PORTS
A
Scale Ref
AUTO SCALE .
2. The trace is currently being displayed with the sampler correction constants on and
should resemble Figure 8-5a.
3. Press System
SERVICE MENU
SERVICE MODES
MORE
SAMPLER COR OFF .
4. The trace is now being displayed with sampler correction constants off and should have
worsened to resemble Figure 8-5b.
5. Press SAMPLER COR ON . The trace should improve and resemble Figure 8-5a again.
NOTE
When the correction constants are switched off, an absolute offset and
bandswitch points may be evident.
If the trace shows no improvement when the sampler correction constants are toggled from
off to on, perform “Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)” on
page 3-16. If the trace remains bad after this adjustment, the A10 assembly is defective.
Figure 8-5
Typical Trace with Sampler Correction On and Off
Check 1st LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer
If the 4 kHz signal is bad at the sampler/mixer assembly, check the 1st LO signal where it
enters the sampler/mixer assembly in question.
• If the 1st LO is faulty, check the 1st LO signal at its output connector on the A7
assembly to determine if the failure is in the cable or the assembly.
• If the 1st LO is good, continue with “Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer,” next.
8-10
Chapter 8
Receiver Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good
Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer
Check the 2nd LO signal at the pins identified in Table 8-3. Refer to the “A12 Reference
Check” on page 7-12 for analog bus and oscilloscope checks of the 2nd LO and waveform
illustrations. Table 8-3 identifies the signal location at the samplers and the A12 assembly.
Table 8-3
2nd LO Locations
Mnemonic
Description
Sampler
Location
Signal Source
2nd LO 1
2nd LO (0 degrees)
A4/5/6 P1-11
A12P1-2, 32
2nd LO 2
2nd LO (−90 degrees)
A4/5/6 P1-4
A12P1-4, 34
If the 2nd LO is good at the sampler/mixer, the sampler/mixer assembly is faulty.
Otherwise, troubleshoot the A12 assembly and associated signal path.
Chapter 8
8-11
Receiver Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good
8-12
Chapter 8
9 Accessories Troubleshooting
9-1
Accessories Troubleshooting
Accessories Troubleshooting
Accessories Troubleshooting
Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.” Follow
the procedures in the order given, unless instructed otherwise.
Measurement failures can be divided into two categories:
• Failures which don't affect the normal functioning of the analyzer but render incorrect
measurement data.
• Failures which impede the normal functioning of the analyzer or prohibit the use of a
feature.
This chapter addresses the first category of failures which are usually caused by the
following:
• operator errors
• faulty calibration devices or connectors
• bad cables or adapters
• improper calibration techniques
These failures are checked using the following procedures:
• “Inspect the Accessories” on page 9-4
• “Inspect the Error Terms” on page 9-5
9-2
Chapter 9
Accessories Troubleshooting
Assembly Replacement Sequence
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an Agilent 8753ET/ES
network analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.” Follow up
with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13 , “Replaceable Parts.”
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
Chapter 14 , “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures.”
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3 , “Adjustments and Correction
Constants.”
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2 , “System Verification and
Performance Tests.”
Chapter 9
9-3
Accessories Troubleshooting
Inspect the Accessories
Inspect the Accessories
Inspect the Test Port Connectors and Calibration Devices
1. Check for damage to the mating contacts of the test port center conductors and loose
connector bulkheads.
2. Inspect the calibration kit devices for bent or broken center conductors and other
physical damage. Refer to the calibration kit operating and service manual for
information on gaging and inspecting the device connectors.
If any calibration device is obviously damaged or out of mechanical tolerance, replace
the device.
9-4
Chapter 9
Accessories Troubleshooting
Inspect the Error Terms
Inspect the Error Terms
Error terms are a measure of a “system”: a network analyzer, calibration kit, and any
cables used. As required, refer to Chapter 11 , “Error Terms,” for the following:
• The specific measurement calibration procedure used to generate the error terms.
• The routines required to extract error terms from the instrument.
• Typical error term data.
Use Table 9-1 to cross-reference error term data to system faults.
Table 9-1
Components Related to Specific Error Terms
Component
Directivity
Source
Match
Reflection
Tracking
Isolation
X
X
Load
Match
Transmission
Tracking
Calibration Kit
load
X
open/short
X
X
Analyzer
sampler
A10 digital IF
test port connectors
X
X
X
X
External cables
X
X
X
X
X
X
If you detect problems using error term analysis, use the following approach to isolate the
fault:
1. Check the cable by examining the load match and transmission tracking terms. If those
terms are incorrect, go to “Cable Test” on page 9-6.
2. Verify the calibration kit devices:
• Loads (for 8753ES): If the directivity error term looks good, the load and the test port
are good. If directivity looks bad, connect the same load on the other test port and
measure its directivity. If the second port looks bad, as if the problem had shifted
with the load, replace the load. If the second port looks good, as if the load had not
been the problem, troubleshoot the first port.
• Loads (for 8753ET): If the directivity error term looks good, the load and the test port
are good. If directivity looks bad, connect a known good load to the Reflection port
and measure its directivity. If the directivity now looks good, replace the original
load. If the directivity still looks bad, troubleshoot the Reflection port.
• Shorts and opens: If the source match and reflection tracking terms look good, the
shorts and the opens are good. If these terms look bad while the rest of the terms
look good, proceed to “Verify Shorts and Opens” on page 9-6.
Chapter 9
9-5
Accessories Troubleshooting
Inspect the Error Terms
Cable Test
The load match error term is a good indicator of cable problems. You can further verify a
faulty cable by measuring the reflection of the cable. Perform an S11 1-port calibration
directly at port 1 (no cables). Then connect the suspect cable to port 1 and terminate the
open end in 50 ohms.
Figure 9-1 shows the return loss trace of a good (left side) and faulty (right side) cable.
Note that the important characteristic of a cable trace is its level (the good cable trace is
much lower) not its regularity. Refer to the cable manual for return loss specifications.
Figure 9-1
Typical Return Loss Traces of Good and Poor Cables
Verify Shorts and Opens
Substitute a known good short and open of the same connector type and sex as the short
and open in question. If the devices are not from one of the standard calibration kits, refer
to your analyzer’s user’s guide for information on how to use the MODIFY CAL KIT
function. Set aside the short and open that are causing the problem.
1. Perform an S11 1-port calibration using the good short and open. Then press Format
SMITH CHART to view the devices in Smith chart format.
2. Connect the good short to port 1. Press Scale Ref ELECTRICAL DELAY and turn the
front panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace appears as a dot at
the left side of the circle. (See Figure 9-2a, left.)
Replace the good short with the questionable short at port 1. The trace of the
questionable short should appear very similar to the known good short.
3. Connect the good open to port 1. Press Scale Ref ELECTRICAL DELAY and turn the
front panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace appears as a dot at
the right side of the circle. (See Figure 9-2b, right.)
9-6
Chapter 9
Accessories Troubleshooting
Inspect the Error Terms
Replace the good open with the questionable open at port 1. The trace of the
questionable open should appear very similar to the known good open.
Figure 9-2
Chapter 9
Typical Smith Chart Traces of Good Short (a) and Open (b)
9-7
Accessories Troubleshooting
Inspect the Error Terms
9-8
Chapter 9
10 Service Key Menus and Error
Messages
10-1
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
The functions available in the service key menus allow you to perform the following service
functions:
• test
• verify
• adjust
• control
• troubleshoot
The main section of this chapter, “Service Key Menus,” divides the menus into three
groups:
• “Internal Diagnostics Menus” on page 10-3
• “Service Feature Menus” on page 10-16
• “Firmware Revision Softkey” on page 10-41
Additionally, there are sections providing information on the following:
• “GPIB Service Mnemonic Definitions” on page 10-42
• “Error Messages” on page 10-44
10-2
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Service Key Menus
Internal Diagnostics Menus
The internal diagnostics menus are shown in Figure 10-1 and described in the following
tables. The following keys access the internal diagnostics menus:
•
TESTS
•
TEST OPTIONS
•
SELF DIAGNOSE
Figure 10-1
NOTE
Internal Diagnostics Menus
Throughout this service guide, these conventions are observed:
•
Hardkeys
are labeled front panel keys.
•
SOFTKEYS are display-defined keys (in the menus).
• GPIB COMMANDS (when applicable)
Chapter 10
10-3
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Tests Menu
To access this menu, press System
SERVICE MENU
TESTS .
The Tests menu allows you to select or execute the service tests. The default is set to
internal test 1. To select a test via GPIB command, use the TEST[D] command.
NOTE
Descriptions of tests in each of the categories are given in “Test Descriptions”
on page 10-8.
The tests are divided by function into the following categories:
• Internal Tests (0–20)
• External Tests (21–26)
• System Verification Tests (27–43)
• Adjustment Tests (44–58)
• Display Tests (59–65)
• Test Patterns (66–80)
To access the first test in each category, press the category softkey. To access the other
tests, use the numeric keypad, step keys, or front panel knob. The test number, name, and
status abbreviation will be displayed in the active entry area of the display.
Table 10-1 shows the test status abbreviation that appears on the display, its definition,
and the equivalent GPIB code. The GPIB command to output the test status of the most
recently executed test is OUTPTESS. For more information, refer to “GPIB Service
Mnemonic Definitions” on page 10-42.
Table 10-1
Test Status Terms
Display Abbreviation
Definition
GPIB Code
PASS
PASS
0
FAIL
FAIL
1
-IP-
IN PROGRESS
2
(NA)
NOT AVAILABLE
3
-ND-
NOT DONE
4
DONE
DONE
5
10-4
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Table 10-2
Tests Menu Keys
Key
EXECUTE TEST
GPIB
Mnemonic
EXET
Description
Runs the selected test and may display these softkeys:
CONTINUE (TESR1) continues the selected test.
YES (TESR2) alters correction constants during
adjustment tests.
NEXT (TESR4) displays the next choice.
SELECT (TESR6) chooses the option indicated.
ABORT (TESR8) terminates the test and returns to
the tests menu.
INTERNAL TESTS
N/A
Evaluates the analyzer’s internal operation. These tests are
completely internal and do not require external connections
or user interaction.
EXTERNAL TESTS
N/A
Evaluate the analyzer’s external operation. These additional
tests require some user interaction (such as keystrokes).
SYS VER TESTS
N/A
Verifies the analyzer system operation by examining the
contents of the measurement calibration arrays. Refer to
Chapter 2 , “System Verification and Performance
Tests.” Information about the calibration arrays is provided
in Chapter 11 , “Error Terms.”
ADJUSTMENT TESTS
N/A
Generates and stores the correction constants. For more
information, refer to Chapter 3 , “Adjustments and
Correction Constants.”
DISPLAY TESTS
Chapter 10
N/A
Checks for correct operation of the display and GSP board.
10-5
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Test Options Menu
To access this menu, press System
Table 10-3
SERVICE MENU
TEST OPTIONS .
Test Options Menu Keys
Key
TEST OPTIONS
CONTINUE TEST
GPIB
Mnemonic
N/A
TESR1
Description
Accesses softkeys that affect the way tests (routines) run, or
supply necessary additional data.
Resumes the test from where it was stopped.
REPEAT on OFF
TO2
Toggles the repeat function on and off. When the function is
ON, the selected test will run 10,000 times unless you press
any key to stop it. The analyzer shows the current number of
passes and fails.
RECORD on OFF
TO1
Toggles the record function on and off. When the function is
on, certain test results are sent to a printer via GPIB. This is
especially useful for correction constants. The instrument
must be in system controller mode or pass control mode to
print (refer to your analyzer’s user’s guide for more
information on printing).
LIMITS [NORM/SPCL]
N/A
Selects either NORMal or SPeCiaL (tighter) limits for the
operator's check. The SPCL limits are useful for a guard
band.
PWR LOSS on OFF
PWRLOSS
LOSS/SENSR LISTS
N/A
Selects whether or not to use the power loss table for a power
meter calibration.
Accesses the power loss/sensor lists menu that contains the
following softkeys:
USE SENSOR A/B (USESENS<A|B>) selects the A or
B power sensor calibration factor list for use in power
meter calibration measurements.
CAL FACTOR SENSOR A (CALFSENA) accesses the
Edit List menu to allow modification of the calibration
data table for power sensor A.
CAL FACTOR SENSOR B (CALFSENB) accesses the
Edit List menu to allow modification of the calibration
data table for power sensor B.
POWER LOSS (POWLLIST) accesses the Edit List
menu to allow modification of the external power loss
data table that corrects coupled-arm power loss when a
directional coupler samples the RF output.
DUMP GRAPH
10-6
N/A
Generates printed graphs of verification results when
activated during a system verification.
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Edit List Menu
To access this menu, press System SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS
LOSS/SENSR LISTS and then press one of the following: CAL FACTOR SENSOR A or
CAL FACTOR SENSOR B or POWER LOSS .
Table 10-4
Edit List Menu Keys
Key
SEGMENT
EDIT
GPIB
Mnemonic
N/A
SEDI[D]
Description
Selects a segment (frequency point) to be edited, deleted
from, or added to the current data table. Works with the
entry controls.
Allows modification of frequency, cal factor and loss values
previously entered in the current data table.
DELETE
SDEL
Deletes frequency, cal factor and loss values previously
entered in the current data table.
ADD
SADD
Adds new frequency, cal factor and loss values to the current
data table up to a maximum of 12 segments (frequency
points, PTS).
CLEAR LIST
CLEL
Deletes the entire current data table (or list) when YES is
pressed. Press NO to avoid deletion.
DONE
EDITDONE
Selects whether or not to use the power loss table for a power
meter calibration.
Self Diagnose Softkey
You can access the self diagnosis function by pressing System SERVICE MENU
SELF DIAGNOSE . This function examines, in order, the pass/fail status of all internal
tests and displays NO FAILURE FOUND if no tests have failed.
If a failure is detected, the routine displays the assembly or assemblies most probably
faulty and assigns a failure probability factor to each assembly.
Chapter 10
10-7
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Test Descriptions
The analyzer has up to 80 routines that test, verify, and adjust the instrument. This
section describes those tests.
Internal Tests This group of tests runs without external connections or operator
interaction. All return a PASS or FAIL condition. All of these tests run on power-up and
PRESET except as noted.
Table 10-5
Test
Number
10-8
Internal Tests
Test Name
Description
0
ALL INT
Runs only when selected. It consists of internal tests 3–11, 13–16, and 20. Use
the front panel knob to scroll through the tests and see which failed. If all pass,
the test displays a PASS status. Each test in the subset retains its own test
status.
1
PRESET
Runs the following subset of internal tests: first, the ROM/RAM tests 2, 3, and
4; then tests 5–11, 14, 15, and 16. If any of these tests fail, this test returns a
FAIL status. Use the front panel knob to scroll through the tests and see which
failed. If all pass, this test displays a PASS status. Each test in the subset
retains its own test status. This same subset is available over GPIB as “TST?”.
It is not performed upon remote preset.
2
ROM
Part of the ROM/RAM tests and cannot be run separately. Refer to Chapter 6 ,
“Digital Control Troubleshooting,” for more information.
3
SRAM RAM
Verifies the A9 CPU SRAM (long-term) memory with a non-destructive
write/read pattern. A destructive version that writes over stored data at
power-on can be enabled by changing the 4th switch position of the A9 CPU
switch as shown below.
4
Main DRAM
Verifies the A9 CPU main memory (DRAM) with a non-destructive write/read
test pattern. A destructive version of this test is run during power-on. For
additional information, see Chapter 6 , “Digital Control Troubleshooting.”
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Table 10-5
Test
Number
Internal Tests
Test Name
Description
5
DSP Wr/Rd
Verifies the ability of the main processor and the DSP (digital signal processor),
both on the A9 CPU assembly, to communicate with each other through DRAM.
This also verifies that programs can be loaded to the DSP, and that most of the
main RAM access circuits operate correctly.
6
DSP RAM
Verifies the A9 CPU RAM associated with the digital signal processor by using
a write/read pattern.
7
DSP ALU
Verifies the A9 CPU high-speed math processing portions of the digital signal
processor.
8
DSP Intrpt
Tests the ability of the A9 CPU digital signal processor to respond to interrupts
from the A10 digital IF ADC.
9
DIF Control
Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write/read to the control
latches on the A10 digital IF.
10
DIF Counter
Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write/read to the triple
divider on the A10 CPU. It tests the A9 CPU data buffers and A10 digital IF,
the 4 MHz clock from the A12 reference.
11
DSP Control
Tests the ability of the A9 CPU digital signal processor to write to the control
latches on the A10 digital IF. Feedback is verified by the main processor. It
primarily tests the A10 digital IF, but failures may be caused by the A9 CPU.
12
Fr Pan Wr/Rd
Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write/read to the front panel
processor. It tests the A2 front panel interface and processors A9 CPU data
buffering and address decoding. (See also tests 23 and 24.) This runs only when
selected.
13
GPIB
Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write/read to the rear panel
control elements. It tests the A16 rear panel, and A9 CPU data buffering and
address decoding. (It does not test the GPIB interface; for that, see the
analyzer’s programmer’s guide.) This runs only when selected or with ALL
INTERNAL.
14
Post Reg
Polls the status register of the A8 post-regulator, and flags these conditions:
heat sink too hot, inadequate air flow, or post-regulated supply shutdown.
15
Frac N Cont
Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write/read to the control
element on the A14 fractional-N (digital) assembly. The control element must
be functioning, and the fractional-N VCO must be oscillating (although not
necessarily phase-locked) to pass.
16
Sweep Trig
Tests the sweep trigger (L SWP) line from the A14 fractional-N to the A10
digital IF. The receiver with the sweep synchronizes L SWP.
17
ADC Lin
It tests the linearity of the A10 digital IF ADC using the built-in ramp
generator. The test generates a histogram of the ADC linearity, where each data
point represents the relative “width” of a particular ADC code. Ideally, all codes
have the same width; different widths correspond to non-linearities.
18
ADC Ofs
This runs only when selected. It tests the ability of the offset DAC, on the A10
digital IF, to apply a bias offset to the IF signals before the ADC input. This
runs only when selected.
Chapter 10
10-9
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Table 10-5
Test
Number
Internal Tests
Test Name
Description
19
ABUS Test
Tests analog bus accuracy, by measuring several analog bus reference voltages
(all nodes from the A10 digital IF). This runs only when selected.
20
FN Count
Uses the internal counter to count the A14 fractional-N VCO frequency (120 to
240 MHz) and the divided fractional-N frequency (100 kHz). It requires the
100 kHz signal from A12 and the counter gate signal from A10 to pass.
External Tests These tests require either external equipment and connections or
operator interaction of some kind to run. Tests 30 and 60 are comprehensive front panel
checks, more complete than test 12, that checks the front panel keys and knob entry.
Table 10-6
External Tests
Test
Number
Test Name
Description
21
Port 1 Op Chk
Part of “Step 2. Operator's Check” on page 4-6 . The procedure requires the
external connection of a short to PORT 1.
22
Port 2 Op Chk
Same as 21, but tests PORT 2 (for 8753ES). A through cable is required for the
8753ET.
23
Fr Pan Seq
Tests the front panel knob entry and all A1 front panel keys, as well as the
front panel microprocessor on the A2 assembly. It prompts the user to rotate
the front panel knob, then press each key in an ordered sequence. It continues
to the next prompt only if the current prompt is correctly satisfied.
24
Fr Pan Diag
Similar to 23 above, but the user rotates the front panel knob or presses the
keys in any order. This test displays the command the instrument received.
25
ADC Hist
Factory use only.
26
Source Ex
Factory use only.
10-10
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
System Verification Tests These tests apply mainly to system-level, error-corrected
verification and troubleshooting. Tests 27 to 31 are associated with the system verification
procedure, documented in Chapter 2 , “System Verification and Performance Tests.” Tests
32 to 43 facilitate examining the calibration coefficient arrays (error terms) resulting from
a measurement calibration; refer to Chapter 11 , “Error Terms,” for details.
Table 10-7
Test
Number
System Verification Tests
Test Name
Description
27
Sys Ver Init
Recalls the initialization state for system verification from an 8753ET/ES
verification disk, in preparation for a measurement calibration. It must be done
before service internal tests 28, 29, 30, or 31 are performed.
28
Ver Dev 1
Recalls verification limits from disk for verification device #1 in all applicable
measurements. It performs pass/fail limit testing of the current measurement.
29
Ver Dev 2
Same as 28 above for device #2.
30
Ver Dev 3
Same as 28 above for device #3.
31
Ver Dev 4
Same as 28 above for device #4.
Cal Coef 1–12
Copies error term data from a measurement calibration array to display
memory. A measurement calibration must be complete and active. The
definition of calibration arrays depends on the current calibration type. After
execution, the memory is automatically displayed. Refer to Chapter 11 ,
“Error Terms,” for details.
32–43
Chapter 10
10-11
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Adjustment Tests These tests (except as noted) are used in the procedures located in
Chapter 3 , “Adjustments and Correction Constants.”
Table 10-8
Test
Number
Adjustment Tests
Test Name
Description
44
Source Def
Writes default correction constants for rudimentary source power accuracy. Use
this test before running test 47, below.
45
Pretune Def
Writes default correction constants for rudimentary phase lock pretuning
accuracy. Use this test before running test 48, below.
46
ABUS Cor
Measures three fixed voltages on the ABUS, and generates new correction
constants for ABUS amplitude accuracy in both high resolution and low
resolution modes. Use this test before running test 48, below.
47
Source Cor
Measures source output power accuracy, flatness, and linearity against an
external power meter via GPIB to generate new correction constants. Run tests
44, 45, 46, and 48 first.
48
Pretune Cor
Generates source pretune values for proper phase-locked loop operation. Run
tests 44, 45, and 46 first.
50
Disp 2 Exa
Writes the “secondary test pattern” to the display for adjustments. Press
Preset
to exit this routine.
51
IF Step Cor
Measures the gain of the IF amplifiers (A and B only) located on the A10 digital
IF, to determine the correction constants for absolute amplitude accuracy. It
provides smooth dynamic accuracy and absolute amplitude accuracy in the
−30 dBm input power region.
52
ADC Ofs Cor
Measures the A10 Digital IF ADC linearity characteristics, using an internal
ramp generator, and stores values for the optimal operating region. During
measurement, IF signals are centered in the optimal region to improve
low-level dynamic accuracy.
53
Sampler Cor
Measures the absolute amplitude response of the R sampler against an external
power meter via GPIB, then compares A and B, (magnitude and phase), against
R. It improves the R input accuracy and A/B/R tracking.
54
Cav Osc Cor
Calculates the frequency of the cavity oscillator and the instrument
temperature for effective spur avoidance.
55
Serial Cor
Stores the serial number (input by the user in the Display Title menu) in
EEPROM. This routine will not overwrite an existing serial number.
56
Option Cor
Stores the option keyword (required for Option 002, 006, 010 or any
combination).
57
58
Not used
Init
EEPROM
This test initializes certain EEPROM addresses to zeros and resets the display
intensity correction constants to the default values. Also, the test will not alter
the serial number and correction constants for Option 002, 006, and 010.
a. Not used in the adjustment procedures.
10-12
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Display Tests These tests return a PASS/FAIL condition. All six amber front panel
LEDs will turn off if the test passes. Press Preset to exit the test. If any of the six LEDs
remain on, the test has failed.
Table 10-9
Display Tests
Test
Number
Test Name
Description
59
Disp/cpu com
Checks to confirm that the CPU can communicate with the A19 GSP board. The
CPU writes all zeros, all ones, and then a walking one pattern to the GSP and
reads them back. If the test fails, the CPU repeats the walking 1 pattern until
Preset is pressed.
60
DRAM cell
Tests the DRAM on A19 by writing a test pattern to the DRAM and then
verifying that it can be read back.
61
Main VRAM
Tests the VRAM by writing all zeros to one location in each bank and then
writing all ones to one location in each bank. Finally a walking one pattern is
written to one location in each bank.
62
VRAM bank
Tests all the cells in each of the 4 VRAM banks.
63
VRAM/video
Verifies that the GSP is able to successfully perform both write and read shift
register transfers. It also checks the video signals LHSYNC, LVSYNC, and
LBLANK to verify that they are active and toggling.
64
RGB outputs
Confirms that the analog video signals are correct and it verifies their
functionality.
65
Inten DAC
Verifies that the intensity DAC can be set both low and high.
Chapter 10
10-13
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Test Patterns Test patterns are used in the factory for display adjustments, diagnostics,
and troubleshooting, but they are not used for field service. Test patterns are executed by
entering the test number (66 through 80), then pressing EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE .
The test pattern will be displayed and the softkey labels blanked. To increment to the next
pattern, press softkey 1; to go back to a previous pattern, press softkey 2. To exit the test
pattern and return the softkey labels, press softkey 8 (bottom softkey). The following is a
description of the test patterns.
Table 10-10
Test
Number
66
Test-Patterns
Test Name
Description
Test Pat 1
Displays an all white screen for verifying the light output of the A18 display
and checks for color purity.
Test Pat 2–4
Displays a red, green, and blue pattern for verifying the color purity of the
display and also the ability to independently control each color.
70
Test Pat 5
Displays an all black screen. This is used to check for stuck pixels.
71
Test Pat 6
Displays a 16-step gray scale for verifying that the A19 GSP board can produce
16 different amplitudes of color (in this case, white). The output comes from the
RAM on the GSP board, it is then split. The signal goes through a video DAC
and then to an external monitor or through some buffer amplifiers and then to
the internal LCD display. If the external display looks good but the internal
display is bad, then the problem may be with the display or the cable
connecting it to the GSP board. This pattern is also very useful when using an
oscilloscope for troubleshooting. The staircase pattern it produces will quickly
show missing or stuck data bits.
72
Test Pat 7
Displays the following seven colors: Red, Yellow, Green, Cyan, Blue, Magenta
and White.
73
Test Pat 8
This pattern is intended for use with an external display. The pattern displays a
color rainbow pattern for showing the ability of the A19 GSP board to display
15 colors plus white. The numbers written below each bar indicate the tint
number used to produce that bar (0 &100=pure red, 33=pure green, 67=pure
blue).
74
Test Pat 9
Displays the three primary colors Red, Green, and Blue at four different
intensity levels. You should see 16 color bands across the screen. Starting at the
left side of the display the pattern is; Black four bands of Red (each band
increasing in intensity) Black four bands of Green (each band increasing in
intensity) Black four bands of Blue (each band increasing in intensity) Black If
any one of the four bits for each color is missing the display will not look as
described.
75
Test Pat 10
Displays a character set for showing the user all the different types and sizes of
characters available. Three sets of characters are drawn in each of the three
character sizes. 125 characters of each size are displayed. Characters 0 and 3
cannot be drawn and several others are really control characters (such as
carriage return and line feed).
76
Test Pat 11
Displays a bandwidth pattern for verifying the bandwidth of the EXTERNAL
display. It consists of multiple alternating white and black vertical stripes. Each
stripe should be clearly visible. A limited bandwidth would smear these lines
together. This is used to test the quality of the external monitor.
67–69
10-14
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Table 10-10
Test
Number
Test-Patterns
Test Name
Description
77
Test Pat 12
Displays a repeating gray scale for troubleshooting, using an oscilloscope. It is
similar to the 16 step gray scale but is repeated 32 times across the screen.
Each of the 3 outputs of the video palette will then show 32 ramps (instead of
one staircase) between each horizontal sync pulse. This pattern is used to
troubleshoot the pixel processing circuit of the A19 GSP board.
78
Test Pat 13
Displays a convergence pattern for measuring the accuracy of the color
convergence of the external monitor.
Test Pat
14–15
Displays crosshatch and inverse crosshatch patterns for testing color
convergence, linearization alignment. This is useful when aligning the LCD
display in the bezel.
79–80
Chapter 10
10-15
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Service Feature Menus
The service feature menus are shown in Figure 10-2 and described in the following tables.
The following keys access the service feature menus:
•
SERVICE MODES
•
ANALOG BUS on OFF
•
PEEK/POKE
•
FIRMWARE REVISION
Figure 10-2
Service Feature Menus
Service Modes Menu
The service modes menu allows you to control and monitor various circuits for
troubleshooting. To access this menu, press System SERVICE MENU .
10-16
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
SERVICE MODES .
Table 10-11
Service Modes Menu Keys
Key
FRACN TUNE on OFF
GPIB
Mnemonic
SM1
Description
Tests the A13 and A14 fractional-N circuits. It allows you to
directly control and monitor the output frequency of the
fractional-N synthesizer (10 MHz to 60 MHz). Set the
instrument to CW sweep mode and then set FRACN TUNE
ON.
Change frequencies with the front panel keys or knob. The
output of the A14 assembly can be checked at A14J1 HI OUT
(in high band) or A14J2 LO OUT (in low band) with an
oscilloscope, a frequency counter, or a spectrum analyzer.
Signal jumps and changes in shape at 20 MHz and 30 MHz
when tuning up in frequency, and at 29.2 MHz and 15 MHz
when tuning down, are due to switching of the digital divider.
This mode can be used with the SRC TUNE mode as
described in Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting.”
SRC ADJUST MENU
N/A
Accesses the functions that allow you to adjust the source:
SRC TUNE on OFF tests the pretune functions of
the phase lock and source assemblies. Use the entry
controls to set test port output to any frequency from
300 kHz to 6 GHz. When in this mode:
— Set analyzer to CW frequency before pressing
SRC TUNE ON .
— Test port output is 1 to 6 MHz above indicated
(entered) frequency.
— Instrument does not attempt to phase lock.
— Residual FM increases.
SRC TUNE FREQ allows you to change the source
tune frequency.
ALC ON off toggles the automatic leveling control
(ALC) on and off.
MAIN PWR DAC
SLOPE DAC
SRC ADJUST DACS
HB FLTR SW on OFF
SOURCE PLL ON off
Chapter 10
SM3
With this mode switched OFF, the source stays in the pretune
mode and does not attempt to complete the phase lock
sequence. Also, all phase lock error messages are disabled.
The fractional-N circuits and the receiver operate normally.
Therefore, the instrument sweeps, but the source is being
driven by the pretune DAC in a stair-stepped fashion.
10-17
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Table 10-11
Service Modes Menu Keys
Key
PLL AUTO ON off
GPIB
Mnemonic
SM4
Description
Automatically attempts to determine new pretune values
when the instrument encounters phase lock problems (for
example, “harmonic skip”). With PLL AUTO OFF , the
frequencies and voltages do not change, like when they are
attempting to determine new pretune values, so
troubleshooting the phase-locked loop circuits is more
convenient. This function may also be turned off to avoid
pretune calibration errors in applications where there is a
limited frequency response in the R (reference) channel. For
example, in a high power test application, using band limited
filters for R channel phase locking.
PLL DIAG on OFF
N/A
Displays a phase lock sequence at the beginning of each band.
This sequence normally occurs very rapidly, making it
difficult to troubleshoot phase lock problems. Switching this
mode ON slows the process down, allowing you to inspect the
steps of the phase lock sequence (pretune, acquire, and track)
by pausing at each step. The steps are indicated on the
display, along with the channel (C1 or C2) and band number
(B1 through B13).
This mode can be used with PLL PAUSE to halt the process
at any step. It can also be used with the analog bus counter.
PLL PAUSE
N/A
Used only with PLL DIAG mode. CONT indicates that it
will continuously cycle through all steps of the phase lock
sequence. PAUSE holds it at any step of interest. This
mode is useful for troubleshooting phase-locked loop
problems.
MORE
N/A
Provides access to the rest of the service modes keys.
SAMPLER COR ON off
SM5
Toggles the sampler correction routine ON, for normal
operation, or OFF, for diagnosis or adjustment purposes.
IF GAIN AUTO
N/A
Normal operating condition and works in conjunction with IF
GAIN ON and OFF. The A10 assembly includes a switchable
attenuator section and an amplifier that amplifies low-level
4 kHz IF signals (for A and B inputs only). This mode allows
the A10 IF section to automatically determine if the
attenuator should be switched in or out. The switch occurs
when the A or B input signal is approximately −30 dBm.
IF GAIN ON
N/A
Locks out the A10 IF attenuator sections for checking the
A10 IF gain amplifier circuits, regardless of the amplitude of
the A or B IF signal. Switches out both the A and B
attenuation circuits; they cannot be switched independently.
Be aware that input signal levels above −30 dBm at the
sampler input will saturate the ADC and cause measurement
errors.
10-18
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Table 10-11
Service Modes Menu Keys
Key
GPIB
Mnemonic
Description
IF GAIN OFF
N/A
Switches in both of the A10 IF attenuators for checking the
A10 IF gain amplifier circuits. Small input signals will
appear noisy, and raise the apparent noise floor of the
instrument.
SPUR TEST on OFF
SM7
For factory use only.
STORE EEPR on OFF
N/A
Allows you to store the correction constants that reside in
non-volatile memory (EEPROM) onto a disk. Correction
constants improve instrument performance by compensating
for specific operating variations due to hardware limitations
(refer to Chapter 3 , “Adjustments and Correction
Constants”). Having this information on disk is useful as a
backup, in case the constants are lost (due to a CPU board
failure). Without a disk backup the correction constants can
be regenerated manually, although the procedures are more
time consuming.
SPUR AVOID ON off
SM8
Offsets the frequency of both the A3 YIG oscillator and the
A3 cavity oscillator to avoid spurs which cannot otherwise be
filtered out. SPUR AVOID OFF allows examination of
these spurs for service.
Chapter 10
10-19
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Analog Bus
To access the analog bus, press System
SERVICE MENU
ANALOG BUS ON .
Description of the Analog Bus The analog bus is a single multiplexed line that
networks 31 nodes within the instrument. It can be controlled from the front panel, or
through GPIB, to make voltage and frequency measurements just like a voltmeter,
oscilloscope, or frequency counter. The next few paragraphs provide general information
about the structure and operation of the analog bus. See “Analog Bus Nodes” on page 10-22
for a description of each individual node. Refer to the “Overall Block Diagram” in Chapter
4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here” to see where the nodes are located in the instrument.
The analog bus consists of a source section and a receiver section. The source can be the
following:
• any one of the 31 nodes described in “Analog Bus Nodes” on page 10-22
• the A14 fractional-N VCO
• the A14 fractional-N VCO divided down to 100 kHz
The receiver portion can be the following:
• the main ADC
• the frequency counter
When analog bus traces are displayed, frequency is the x-axis. For a linear x-axis in time,
switch to CW time mode (or sweep a single band).
The Main ADC The main ADC is located on the A10 digital IF assembly and makes
voltage measurements in two ranges. See “Analog In Menu” on page 10-21 for more
information.
The Frequency Counter The frequency counter is located on the A14 assembly and can
count one of three sources:
• selected analog bus node
• A14 fractional-N VCO (FRAC N)
• A14 fractional-N VCO divided down to 100 kHz (DIV FRAC N) (frequency range is
100 kHz to 16 MHz)
The counts are triggered by the phase lock cycle; one at each pretune, acquire, and track
for each bandswitch. (The service mode, SOURCE PLL, must be ON for the counter to be
updated at each bandswitch). The counter works in swept modes or in CW mode. It can be
used in conjunction with SERVICE MODES for troubleshooting phase lock and source
problems.
To read the counter over GPIB, use the command OUTPCNTR.
Notes
• The display and marker units (U) correspond to volts.
• Nodes 17 (1st IF) and 24 (2nd LO) are unreliable above 1 MHz.
10-20
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
• About 0.750 MHz is a typical counter reading with no AC signal present.
• Anything occurring during bandswitches is not visible.
• Fast-moving waveforms may be sensitive to sweep time.
• The analog bus input impedance is about 50K ohms.
• Waveforms up to approximately 200 Hz can be reproduced.
Analog In Menu
Select this menu to monitor voltage and frequency nodes, using the analog bus and
internal counter, as explained below.
To switch on the analog bus and access the analog in menu, press:
System
SERVICE MENU
ANALOG BUS ON
Meas
ANALOG IN
The RESOLUTION key toggles between low and high resolution.
Resolution
Maximum Signal
Minimum Signal
LOW
+0.5 V
−0.5 V
HIGH
+10 V
−10 V
Table 10-12
Analog In Menu Keys
Key
AUX OUT on OFF
GPIB
Mnemonic
N/A
Description
Allows you to monitor the analog bus nodes (except
nodes 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 12) with external equipment
(oscilloscope, voltmeter, etc.). To do this, connect the
equipment to the AUX INPUT BNC connector on the
rear panel, and press AUX OUT , until ON is
highlighted.
CAUTION
COUNTER: OFF
N/A
Switches the internal counter off and removes the counter
display from the display. The counter can be switched on with
one of the next three keys. (Note: Using the counter slows the
sweep.) The counter bandwidth is 16 MHz unless otherwise
noted for a specific node.
NOTE
ANALOG BUS
Chapter 10
N/A
To prevent damage to the analyzer, first
connect the signal to the rear panel AUX
INPUT, and then switch the function ON.
OUTPCNTR is the GPIB command to output
the counter’s frequency data.
Switches the counter to monitor the analog bus.
10-21
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Table 10-12
Analog In Menu Keys
Key
GPIB
Mnemonic
Description
FRAC N
N/A
Switches the counter to monitor the A14 fractional-N VCO
frequency at the node shown on the “Overall Block Diagram,”
in Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.”
DIV FRAC N
N/A
Switches the counter to monitor the A14 fractional-N VCO
frequency after it has been divided down to 100 kHz for phase
locking the VCO.
Analog Bus Nodes
The following paragraphs describe the 31 analog bus nodes. The nodes are listed in
numerical order and are grouped by assembly. Refer to the “Overall Block Diagram” in
Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here” for node locations.
A3 Source To observe six of the eight A3 analog bus nodes (not node 5 or 8), perform step
A3 to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then follow the node specific instructions.
Step A3: Press Preset
ANALOG IN
Format
SWEEP TYPE MENU
10-22
System
MORE
SERVICE MENU
REAL
POWER SWEEP
Sweep Setup
Start
−15
ANALOG BUS ON
CW FREQ
3
x1
10
Stop
Meas
G/n
x1 .
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 1
Mn Pwr DAC (main power DAC)
Perform step A3 to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then press Meas
ANALOG IN 1
AUTO SCALE .
x1
Scale Ref
Node 1 is the output of the main power DAC. It sets the reference voltage to the ALC loop.
At normal operation, this node should read approximately −4 volts at 0 dBm with a slope of
about −150 mV/dB. This corresponds to approximately 4 volts from −15 to +10 dBm.
Figure 10-3
Chapter 10
Analog Bus Node 1
10-23
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 2
Src 1V/GHz (source 1 volt per GHz)
Press the following to view analog bus node 2:
Preset
Start
ANALOG IN
30
2
k/m
x1
System
Format
SERVICE MENU
MORE
REAL
ANALOG BUS ON
Scale Ref
Meas
AUTO SCALE .
Node 2 measures the voltage on the internal voltage controlled oscillator. Or, in normal
operation, it should read −1 V/GHz.
Figure 10-4
10-24
Analog Bus Node 2
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 3
Amp Id (amplifier current)
Press the following keys to view analog node 3:
Preset
System
Format
MORE
SERVICE MENU
REAL
Scale Ref
ANALOG BUS ON
Meas
ANALOG IN
3
x1
AUTO SCALE .
Node 3 measures the current that goes to the main IF amplifier. At normal operation this
node should read about:
• 15 mA from 30 kHz to 299 kHz
• 130 mA from 300 kHz to 3 GHz
• 500 mA from 3 GHz to 6 GHz
Figure 10-5
Chapter 10
Analog Bus Node 3
10-25
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 4
Det (detects RF OUT power level)
Perform step A3, described previously, to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then
AUTO SCALE .
press Meas ANALOG IN 4
x1 Scale Ref
Node 4 detects power that is coupled and detected from the RF OUT arm to the ALC loop.
Note that the voltage exponentially follows the power level inversely. Flat segments
indicate ALC saturation and should not occur between −85 dBm and +10 dBm.
Figure 10-6
Node 5
Analog Bus Node 4
Temp (temperature sensor)
This node registers the temperature of the cavity oscillator which must be known for
effective spur avoidance. The sensitivity is 10 mV/°C. The oscillator changes frequency
slightly as its temperature changes. This sensor indicates the temperature so that the
frequency can be predicted.
10-26
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 6
Integ (ALC leveling integrator output)
Perform step A3 to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then press Meas
ANALOG IN 6
AUTO SCALE .
x1 Scale Ref
Node 6 displays the output of the summing circuit in the ALC loop. Absolute voltage level
variations are normal. When node 6 goes above 0 volts, the ALC saturation is indicated.
Figure 10-7
Chapter 10
Analog Bus Node 6
10-27
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 7
Log (log amplifier output detector)
Perform step A3 to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then press Meas
ANALOG IN 7
AUTO SCALE .
x1 Scale Ref
Node 7 displays the output of a logger circuit in the ALC loop. The trace should be a linear
ramp with a slope of 33 mv/dB with approximately 0 volts at −3 dBm. Absolute voltage
level variations are normal. Flat segments indicate ALC saturation and should not occur
between −15 dBm and +10 dBm.
The proper waveform at node 7 indicates that the circuits in the A3 source ALC loop are
normal and the source is leveled.
Figure 10-8
Node 8
Analog Bus Node 7
A3 Gnd (ground)
A10 Digital IF To observe the A10 analog bus nodes, perform step A10, below. Then
follow the node-specific instructions.
Step A10: Press: Preset
ANALOG BUS ON
10-28
Format
Meas
ANALOG IN
MORE
Marker
System
SERVICE MENU
REAL .
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 9
+0.37 V (+0.37 V reference)
Perform step A10, above, and then press Meas
9
x1 .
ANALOG IN
RESOLUTION [HIGH]
Check for a flat line at approximately +0.37 V. This is used as the voltage reference in
“Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46)” on page 3-9. The voltage level should be the
same in high and low resolution; the absolute level is not critical.
Node 10
+2.50 V (+2.50 V reference)
Perform step A10, above, and then press Meas
10
x1
Scale Ref
1
x1 .
ANALOG IN
RESOLUTION [LOW]
Check for a flat line at approximately +2.5 V. This voltage is used in “Analog Bus
Correction Constants (Test 46)” on page 3-9 as a reference for calibrating the analog bus
low resolution circuitry.
Node 11
Aux Input (rear panel input)
Perform step A10 and then press Meas
ANALOG IN
11
x1 .
This selects the rear panel AUX INPUT to drive the analog bus for voltage and frequency
measurements. It can be used to look at test points within the instrument, using the
analyzer's display as an oscilloscope. Connect the test point of interest to the rear panel
AUX INPUT BNC connector.
This feature can be useful if an oscilloscope is not available. Also, it can be used for testing
voltage-controlled devices by connecting the driving voltage of the device under test to the
AUX IN connector. Look at the driving voltage on one display channel, while displaying the
S-parameter response of the test device on the other display channel.
With AUX OUT switched ON, you can examine the analyzer's analog bus nodes with
external equipment (see AUX OUT on OFF in Table 10-12 on page 10-21). For GPIB
considerations, see “GPIB Service Mnemonic Definitions” on page 10-42.
Node 12
A10 Gnd (ground reference)
This node is used in “Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46)” on page 3-9 as a reference
for calibrating the analog bus low and high resolution circuitry.
A11 Phase Lock To observe the A11 analog bus nodes, perform step A11, below. Then
follow the node-specific instructions.
Step A11: Press Preset
ANALOG BUS ON
Node 13
Chapter 10
Meas
Format
ANALOG IN
MORE
Marker
System
SERVICE MENU
REAL .
VCO Tune 2 (not used)
10-29
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 14
Vbb Ref (ECL reference voltage level)
Perform step A11 and then press Meas
REFERENCE VALUE −1.29 x1 .
ANALOG IN
14
x1
Scale Ref
0.3
x1
The trace should be a flat line across the entire operation frequency range within 0.3 V
(one division) of the reference value. Vbb Ref is used to compensate for ECL voltage drift.
Figure 10-9
10-30
Analog Bus Node 14
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 15
Pretune (open-loop source pretune voltage)
Perform step A11 and then press Meas
AUTO SCALE .
ANALOG IN
15
x1
Scale Ref
This node displays the source pretune signal and should look like a stair-stepped ramp.
Each step corresponds to the start of a band.
Figure 10-10
Chapter 10
Analog Bus Node 15
10-31
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 16
1V/GHz (source oscillator tuning voltage)
Perform step A11 and then press Meas
AUTO SCALE .
ANALOG IN
16
x1
Scale Ref
This node displays the tuning voltage ramp used to tune the source oscillator. You should
see a voltage ramp like the one shown in Figure 10-11. If this waveform is correct, you can
be confident that the A11 phase lock assembly, the A3 source assembly, the A13/A14
fractional-N assemblies, and the A7 pulse generator are working correctly and the
instrument is phase locked. If you see anything else, refer to Chapter 7 , “Source
Troubleshooting.”
Figure 10-11
10-32
Analog Bus Node 16
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 17
1st IF (IF used for phase lock)
Perform step A11 and then press Meas
COUNTER: ANALOG BUS
ANALOG IN
Sweep Setup
17
x1
CW FREQ .
Vary the frequency and compare the results to the table below.
Entered Frequency
Counter Reading
0.2 to 15.999 MHz
same as entered
16 MHz to 3 GHz
1 MHz
This node displays the IF frequency (see Figure 10-12) as it enters the A11 phase lock
assembly via the A4 R sampler assembly. This signal comes from the R sampler output and
is used to phase lock the source.
Figure 10-12
Chapter 10
Counter Readout Location
10-33
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 18
IF Det 2N (IF on A11 phase lock after 3 MHz filter)
Perform step A11 and then press Meas
Scale Ref AUTOSCALE .
ANALOG IN
18
x1
Stop
20
M/µ
This node detects the IF within the low pass filter/limiter. The filter is used during the
track and sweep sequences but never in band 1 (3.3 to 16 MHz). The low level (about
−1.7 V) means IF is in the passband of the filter. This node can be used with the FRAC N
TUNE and SRC TUNE service modes.
Figure 10-13
Analog Bus Node 18
Node 19
IF Det 2W (IF after 16 MHz filter)
Perform step A11 and then press Meas
Scale Ref
0.2
x1
ANALOG IN
REFERENCE VALUE
−1.2
19
x1
Stop
20
x1
x1 .
This node detects IF after the 16 MHz filter/limiter. The filter is used during pretune and
acquire, but not in band 1. Normal state is a flat line at about −1.7 V.
10-34
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 20
IF Det 1 (IF after 30 MHz filter)
Perform step A11 and then press Meas
REFERENCE VALUE −1.29
x1 .
ANALOG IN
20
x1
Scale Ref
0.3
x1
The trace should be a flat line across the entire frequency band at least 0.5 V greater than
Vbb (node 14). The correct trace indicates the presence of IF after the first 30 MHz
filter/limiter.
Figure 10-14
Analog Bus Node 20
A12 Reference To observe the A12 analog bus nodes perform step A12, below. Then
follow the node-specific instructions.
Step A12: Press Preset
ANALOG BUS ON
Node 21
Meas
Format
ANALOG IN
MORE
Marker
System
SERVICE MENU
REAL .
100 kHz (100 kHz reference frequency)
Perform step A12 and then press Meas ANALOG IN 21
x1
COUNTER: ANALOG BUS . This node counts the A12 100 kHz reference signal that is
used on A13 (the fractional-N analog assembly) as a reference frequency for the phase
detector.
Node 22
Chapter 10
A12 Gnd 1 (ground)
10-35
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 23
VCO Tune (A12 VCO tuning voltage)
Perform Step A12 and then press Start
ANALOG IN
23
x1
Marker
11
Scale Ref
M/µ
Stop
21
M/µ
Meas
AUTO SCALE .
The trace should show a voltage step as shown in Figure 10-15. At normal operation, the
left half trace should be 0 ±1000 mV and the right half trace should be 100 to 200 mV
higher (that is, one to two divisions). If the trace does not appear as shown in Figure 10-15,
refer to “High/Low Band Transition Adjustment” on page 3-47.
Figure 10-15
10-36
Analog Bus Node 23
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 24
2nd LO
Perform step A12 and then press Meas
COUNTER: ANALOG BUS
ANALOG IN
24
x1
CW FREQ .
Sweep Setup
This node counts the 2nd LO used by the sampler/mixer assemblies to produce the 2nd IF
of 4 kHz. As you vary the frequency, the counter reading should change to values very close
to those indicated below:
Frequency Entered
Counter Reading
0.03 to 1 MHz
(frequency-entered) +4 kHz
1 to 16 MHz
not accurate
16 to 3,000 MHz
996 kHz
Node 25
PL Ref (phase lock reference)
Perform step A12 and then press Meas
COUNTER: ANALOG BUS
ANALOG IN
25
x1
CW FREQ .
Sweep Setup
This node counts the reference signal used by the phase comparator circuit on the A11
phase lock assembly. As you vary the frequency, the counter reading should change as
indicated below:
Frequency Entered
Counter Reading
0.3 to 1 MHz
frequency entered
1 to 16 MHz
not accurate
16 to 3,000 MHz
1 MHz
Node 26
Ext Ref (rear panel external reference input)
Perform step A12 and then press Meas
ANALOG IN
26
x1 .
The voltage level of this node indicates whether an external reference timebase is being
used:
• No external reference: about −0.9 V
• With external reference: about −0.6 V
Chapter 10
10-37
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 27
VCXO Tune (40 MHz VCXO tuning voltage)
Perform step A12 and then press Meas
MARKER →REFERENCE .
ANALOG IN
27
x1
Marker Fctn
This node displays the voltage used to fine tune the A12 reference VCXO to 40 MHz. You
should see a flat line at some voltage level (the actual voltage level varies from instrument
to instrument). Anything other than a flat line indicates that the VCXO is tuning to
different frequencies. Refer to “Frequency Accuracy Adjustment” on page 3-43.
Node 28
A12 Gnd 2 (Ground reference)
A14 Fractional-N (Digital) To observe the A14 analog bus nodes perform step A14,
below. Then follow the node-specific instructions.
Step A14: Press Preset
ANALOG BUS ON
Node 29
Meas
Format
ANALOG IN
MORE
System
SERVICE MENU
REAL .
FN VCO Tun (A14 FN VCO tuning voltage)
Perform step A14 and then press Meas
AUTOSCALE .
ANALOG IN
29
x1
Scale Ref
Observe the A14 FN VCO tuning voltage. If the A13 and A14 assemblies are functioning
correctly and the VCO is phase locked, the trace should look like Figure 10-16. Any other
waveform indicates that the FN VCO is not phase locked. The vertical lines in the trace
indicate the band crossings. (The counter can also be enabled to count the VCO frequency
in CW mode.)
Figure 10-16
10-38
Analog Bus Node 29
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Node 30
FN VCO Det (A14 VCO detector)
Perform step A14 and then press Meas
Scale Ref
50
k/m .
ANALOG IN
30
x1
RESOLUTION [HIGH]
See whether the FN VCO is oscillating. The trace should resemble Figure 10-17.
Figure 10-17
Analog Bus Node 30
Node 31
Count Gate (analog bus counter gate)
Perform step A14 and then press Meas
ANALOG IN
31
x1
Scale Ref
2
x1 .
You should see a flat line at +5 V across the operating frequency range. The counter gate
activity occurs during bandswitches, and therefore is not visible on the analog bus. To view
the bandswitch activity, look at this node on an oscilloscope, using AUX OUT ON . Refer to
AUX OUT on OFF in Table 10-12 on page 10-21.
Chapter 10
10-39
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
PEEK/POKE Menu
To access this menu, press System
Table 10-13
SERVICE MENU
PEEK/POKE .
PEEK/POKE Menu Keys
Key
PEEK/POKE
GPIB
Mnemonic
N/A
Description
Allows you to edit the content of one or more memory
addresses. The keys are described below.
CAUTION
PEEK/POKE ADDRESS
PEEL[D]
PEEK
PEEK
POKE
POKE[D]
The PEEK/POKE capability is intended for
service use only.
Accesses any memory address and shows it in the active
entry area of the display. Use the front panel knob, entry
keys, or step keys to enter the memory address of interest.
Displays the data at the accessed memory address.
allows you to change the data at the memory address
accessed by the PEEK/POKE ADDRESS softkey. Use
the front panel knob, entry keys, or step keys to change the
data. The A9CC switch must be in the “ALTER” position in
order to poke.
RESET MEMORY
N/A
Resets or clears the memory where instrument states are
stored. To do this, press RESET MEMORY
10-40
Preset .
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
Firmware Revision Softkey
Press System SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION to display the current
firmware revision information. The number and implementation date appear in the active
entry area of the display as shown in Figure 10-18. The analyzer’s serial number and
installed options are also displayed. Another way to display the firmware revision
information is to cycle the line power.
Figure 10-18
Chapter 10
Location of Firmware Revision Information on Display
10-41
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
GPIB Service Mnemonic Definitions
GPIB Service Mnemonic Definitions
All service routine keystrokes can be made through GPIB in one of the following
approaches:
• sending equivalent remote GPIB commands. (Mnemonics have been documented
previously with the corresponding keystroke.)
• invoking the System Menu (MENUSYST) and using the analyzer mnemonic (SOFTn),
where “n” represents the softkey number. (Softkeys are numbered 1 to 8 from top to
bottom.)
GPIB programming information is provided in the analyzer’s programmer’s guide.
Invoking Tests Remotely
Many tests require a response to the displayed prompts. Since bit 1 of the Event Status
Register B is set (bit 1 = service routine waiting) any time a service routine prompts the
user for an expected response, you can send an appropriate response using one of the
following techniques:
• Read event status register B to reset the bit.
• Enable bit 1 to interrupt (ESNB[D]). See “Status Reporting” in the analyzer’s
programmer’s guide.
• Respond to the prompt with a TESRn command (see “Tests Menu” on page 10-4).
Symbol Conventions
[]
An optional operand
D
A numerical operand
<>
A necessary appendage
|
An either/or choice in appendages
10-42
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
GPIB Service Mnemonic Definitions
Analog Bus Codes
ANAI[D]
Measures and displays the analog input. The preset state input to
the analog bus is the rear panel AUX IN. The other 30 nodes may
be selected with D only if the ABUS is enabled (ANABon).
OUTPCNTR
Outputs the counter’s frequency data.
OUTPERRO
Reads any prompt message sent to the error queue by a service
routine.
OUTPTESS
Outputs the integer status of the test most recently executed.
Status codes are those listed under “TST?”.
TST?
Executes the power-on self test (internal test 1) and outputs an
integer test status. Status codes are as follows:
0 =pass
1 =fail
2 =in progress
3 =not available
4 =not done
5 =done
Chapter 10
10-43
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Error Messages
Error Messages
This section contains an alphabetical list of the error messages that pertain to servicing
the analyzer. The information in the list includes explanations of the displayed messages
and suggestion to help solve the problem.
NOTE
The error messages that pertain to measurement applications are included in
the your analyzer’s reference guide.
BATTERY FAILED. STATE MEMORY CLEARED
Error Number 183
The battery protection of the non-volatile SRAM memory has failed. The SRAM
memory has been cleared. Refer to Chapter 14 , “Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures,” for battery replacement instructions. See the chapter
titled “Preset State and Memory Allocation” in the analyzer’s reference guide for more
information about the SRAM memory.
BATTERY LOW! STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK
Error Number 184
The battery protection of the non-volatile SRAM memory is in danger of failing. If this
occurs, all of the instrument state registers stored in SRAM memory will be lost. Save
these states to a disk and refer to Chapter 14 , “Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures,” for battery replacement instructions. See the chapter
titled “Preset State and Memory Allocation” in the analyzer’s reference guide for more
information about the SRAM memory.
CALIBRATION ABORTED
Error Number 74
You have changed the active channel during a calibration so the calibration in
progress was terminated. Make sure the appropriate channel is active and restart the
calibration.
CALIBRATION REQUIRED
Error Number 63
A calibration set could not be found that matched the current stimulus state or
measurement parameter. You will have to perform a new calibration.
CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED
Error Number 3
A store operation to the EEPROM was not successful. You must change the position of
the switch on the A9 CPU assembly. Refer to “A9 Switch Positions” on page 3-6.
CORRECTION TURNED OFF
Error Number 66
10-44
Critical parameters in your current instrument state do not match the parameters for
the calibration set, therefore correction has been turned off. The critical instrument
state parameters are sweep type, start frequency, frequency span, and number of
points.
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Error Messages
CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET
Error Number 64
Correction is not valid for your selected measurement parameter. Either change the
measurement parameters or perform a new calibration.
DEADLOCK
Error Number 111
A fatal firmware error occurred before instrument preset completed.
DEVICE: not on, not connect, wrong addrs
Error Number 119
The device at the selected address cannot be accessed by the analyzer. Verify that the
device is switched on, and check the GPIB connection between the analyzer and the
device. Ensure that the device address recognized by the analyzer matches the GPIB
address set on the device itself.
DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM
Error Number 39
The disk drive is not responding correctly. Refer to the disk drive operating manual.
DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR
Error Number 190
The analyzer and the external disk drive aren’t communicating properly. Check the
GPIB connection and then try substituting another disk drive to isolate the problem
instrument.
DISK: not on, not connected, wrong addrs
Error Number 38
The disk cannot be accessed by the analyzer. Verify power to the disk drive, and check
the GPIB connection between the analyzer and the disk drive. Ensure that the disk
drive address recognized by the analyzer matches the GPIB address set on the disk
drive itself.
DISK READ/WRITE ERROR
Error Number 189
There may be a problem with your disk. Try a new floppy disk. If a new floppy disk
does not eliminate the error, suspect hardware problems.
INITIALIZATION FAILED
Error Number 47
The disk initialization failed, probably because the disk is damaged.
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PWR MTR CAL OFF
Error Number 154
Chapter 10
There is not enough memory space for the power meter calibration array. Increase the
available memory by clearing one or more save/recall registers, or by reducing the
number of points.
10-45
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Error Messages
NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
Error Number 69
The RESUME CAL SEQUENCE softkey is not valid unless a calibration is
already in progress. Start a new calibration.
NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE
Error Number 44
The store operation will overflow the available disk space. Insert a new disk or purge
files to create free disk space.
NO FILE(S) FOUND ON DISK
Error Number 45
No files of the type created by an analyzer store operation were found on the disk. If
you requested a specific file title, that file was not found on the disk.
NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
Error Number 5
The first IF signal was not detected during pretune. Check the front panel R channel
jumper. If there is no visible problem with the jumper, refer to Chapter 7 , “Source
Troubleshooting.”
NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
Error Number 7
The first IF signal was detected at pretune, but phase lock could not be acquired. Refer
to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting.”
NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL. CLEAR REGISTERS
Error Number 70
You cannot store a calibration set due to insufficient memory. You can free more
memory by clearing a saved instrument state from an internal register (which may
also delete an associated calibration set, if all the instrument states using the
calibration kit have been deleted). You can store the saved instrument state and
calibration set to a disk before clearing them. After deleting the instrument states,
press Preset
to run the memory packer.
NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER METER CAL
Error Number 198
When the analyzer is performing a power meter calibration, the GPIB bus is
unavailable for other functions such as printing or plotting.
OVERLOAD ON INPUT A, POWER REDUCED (ES only)
Error Number 58
See OVERLOAD ON INPUT R POWER REDUCED (error number 57).
OVERLOAD ON INPUT B, POWER REDUCED (ES only)
Error Number 59
10-46
See OVERLOAD ON INPUT R POWER REDUCED (error number 57).
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Error Messages
OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER REDUCED
Error Number 57
You have exceeded approximately +14 dBm at one of the test ports. The RF output
power is automatically reduced to −85 dBm. The annotation P⇓ appears in the left
margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been activated.
When this occurs, reset the power to a lower level, then toggle the
SOURCE PWR on OFF softkey to switch on the power again.
OVERLOAD ON REFL PORT, POWER REDUCED (ET only)
Error Number 58
See OVERLOAD ON INPUT R POWER REDUCED (error number 57).
OVERLOAD ON TRANS PORT, POWER REDUCED (ET only)
Error Number 59
See OVERLOAD ON INPUT R POWER REDUCED (error number 57).
PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR GPIO
Error Number 165
You have defined the parallel port as COPY for sequencing in the GPIB menu. To
access the parallel port for general purpose I/O (GPIO), set the selection to [GPIO].
PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR COPY
Error Number 167
You have defined the parallel port as general purpose I/O (GPIO) for sequencing. The
definition was made under the Local
key menus. To access the parallel port for
copy, set the selection to PARALLEL [COPY] .
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED
Error Number 4
An internal phase lock calibration routine is automatically executed at power-on,
preset, and any time a loss of phase lock is detected. This message indicates that
phase lock calibration was initiated and the first IF detected, but a problem prevented
the calibration from completing successfully. Refer to Chapter 3 , “Adjustments and
Correction Constants,” and execute pretune correction (test 48). This message may
appear if you connect a mixer between the RF output and R input before turning on
frequency offset mode. Ignore it: it will go away when you turn on frequency offset.
This message may also appear if you turn on frequency offset mode before you define
the offset.
PHASE LOCK LOST
Error Number 8
Phase lock was acquired but then lost. Refer to Chapter 7 , “Source
Troubleshooting.”
POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK
Error Number 6
Chapter 10
Phase lock has been achieved, but the source may be phase-locked to the wrong
harmonic of the synthesizer. Perform “Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test
48)” on page 3-10 .
10-47
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Error Messages
POWER METER INVALID
Error Number 116
The power meter indicates an out-of-range condition. Check the test setup.
POWER METER NOT SETTLED
Error Number 118
Sequential power meter readings are not consistent. Verify that the equipment is set
up correctly. If so, preset the instrument and restart the operation.
POWER SUPPLY HOT!
Error Number 21
The temperature sensors on the A8 post-regulator assembly have detected an
over-temperature condition. The power supplies regulated on the post-regulator have
been shut down. Refer to Chapter 5 , “Power Supply Troubleshooting.”
POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!
Error Number 22
One or more supplies on the A8 post-regulator assembly have been shut down due to
an over-current, over-voltage, or under-voltage condition. Refer to Chapter 5 ,
“Power Supply Troubleshooting.”
POWER UNLEVELED
Error Number 179
There is either a hardware failure in the source or you have attempted to set the power
level too high. Check to see if the power level you set is within specifications. If it is,
refer to Chapter 7 , “Source Troubleshooting.” You will only receive this message
over the GPIB. On the analyzer, P? is displayed.
PRINTER: error
Error Number 175
The parallel port printer is malfunctioning. The analyzer cannot complete the copy
function.
PRINTER: not handshaking
Error Number 177
The printer at the parallel port is not responding.
PRINTER: not on, not connected, wrong addrs
Error Number 24
The printer does not respond to control. Verify power to the printer, and check the
GPIB connection between the analyzer and the printer. Ensure that the printer
address recognized by the analyzer matches the GPIB address set on the printer itself.
PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN!
Error Number 23
The analyzer biasing supplies to the HP/Agilent 85024A external probe are shut down
due to excessive current. Troubleshoot the probe, and refer to Chapter 5 , “Power
Supply Troubleshooting.”
10-48
Chapter 10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Error Messages
PWR MTR: NOT ON/CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDRS
Error Number 117
The power meter cannot be accessed by the analyzer. Verify that the power meter
address and model number set in the analyzer match the address and model number
of the actual power meter.
SAVE FAILED.INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
Error Number 151
You cannot store an instrument state in an internal register due to insufficient
memory. Increase the available memory by clearing one or more save/recall registers
and pressing Preset , or by storing files to a disk.
SELF TEST #n FAILED
Service Error
Number 112
Internal test #n has failed. Several internal test routines are executed at instrument
preset. The analyzer reports the first failure detected. Refer to the internal tests and
the self-diagnose feature descriptions earlier in this chapter.
SOURCE POWER TURNED OFF, RESET UNDER POWER MENU
Information
Message
You have exceeded the maximum power level at one of the inputs and power has been
automatically reduced. The annotation P⇓ indicates that power trip has been
activated. When this occurs, reset the power and then press Power
SOURCE PWR on OFF , to switch on the power. This message follows error
numbers 57, 58, and 59.
SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP
Error Number 187
If you select external source auto or manual instrument mode and you do not also
select CW mode, the analyzer is automatically switched to CW.
TEST ABORTED
Error Number 113
You have prematurely stopped a service test.
TROUBLE!CHECK SETUP AND START OVER
Service Error
Number 115
Your equipment setup for the adjustment procedure in progress is not correct. Check
the setup diagram and instructions in “Source Pretune Correction Constants
(Test 48)” on page 3-10. Start the procedure again.
WRONG DISK FORMAT, INITIALIZE DISK
Error Number 77
Chapter 10
You have attempted to store, load, or read file titles, but your disk format does not
conform to the Logical Interchange Format (LIF). You must initialize the disk before
reading or writing to it.
10-49
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Error Messages
10-50
Chapter 10
11 Error Terms
11-1
Error Terms
Error Terms
Error Terms
The analyzer generates and stores factors in internal arrays when measurement
error-correction (measurement calibration) is performed. These factors are known by the
following terms:
• error terms
• E-terms
• measurement calibration coefficients
The analyzer determines error terms by measuring well-defined calibration devices over
the frequency range of interest and comparing the measured data with the ideal model for
the devices. The differences represent systematic (repeatable) errors of the analyzer
system. The resulting calibration coefficients are good representations of the systematic
error sources. For details on the various levels of error-correction, refer to the “Optimizing
Measurement Results” chapter of your analyzer’s user’s guide. For details on the theory of
error-correction, refer to the “Operating Concepts” chapter of your analyzer’s user’s guide.
11-2
Chapter 11
Error Terms
Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose
Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose
Specific parts of the analyzer and its accessories directly contribute to the magnitude and
shape of the error terms. Since we know this correlation and we know what typical error
terms look like, we can examine error terms to monitor system performance (preventive
maintenance) or to identify faulty components in the system (troubleshooting).
• Preventive Maintenance: A stable, repeatable system should generate repeatable
error terms over long time intervals, for example, six months. If you make a hardcopy
record (print or plot) of the error terms, you can periodically compare current error
terms with the record. A sudden shift in error terms reflects a sudden shift in
systematic errors, and may indicate the need for further troubleshooting. A long-term
trend often reflects drift, connector and cable wear, or gradual degradation, indicating
the need for further investigation and preventive maintenance. Yet, the system may
still conform to specifications. The cure is often as simple as cleaning and gaging
connectors or inspecting cables.
• Troubleshooting: If a subtle failure or mild performance problem is suspected, the
magnitude of the error terms should be compared against values generated previously
with the same instrument and calibration kit. This comparison will produce the most
precise view of the problem.
However, if previously generated values are not available, compare the current values
to the typical values listed in “9. Uncorrected Port Performance” on page 2-50 and “10.
Uncorrected Port Performance” on page 2-131, and shown graphically on the plots in
this chapter. If the magnitude exceeds its limit, inspect the corresponding system
component. If the condition causes system verification to fail, replace the component.
Consider the following while troubleshooting:
— All parts of the system, including cables and calibration devices, can contribute to
systematic errors and affect the error terms.
— Connectors must be clean, gaged, and within specification for error term analysis to
be meaningful.
— Avoid unnecessary bending and flexing of the cables following measurement
calibration, minimizing cable instability errors.
— Use good connection techniques during the measurement calibration. The connector
interface must be repeatable. Refer to Table 1-3 on page 1-7 for information on
connection techniques and on cleaning and gaging connectors.
— Use error term analysis to troubleshoot minor, subtle performance problems. Refer
to Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here,” if a blatant failure or gross
measurement error is evident.
— It is often worthwhile to perform the procedure twice (using two distinct
measurement calibrations) to establish the degree of repeatability. If the results do
not seem repeatable, check all connectors and cables.
Chapter 11
11-3
Error Terms
Error Correction
Error Correction
Use one of the following error-correction procedures depending on which analyzer you
have:
• 8753ES: “9. Uncorrected Port Performance” on page 2-50
• 8753ET: “10. Uncorrected Port Performance” on page 2-131
Error Term Inspection
Make a hardcopy of the measurement results:
1. Connect a printing or plotting peripheral to the analyzer.
2. Press Local SYSTEM CONTROLLER SET ADDRESSES and select the appropriate
peripheral to verify that the GPIB address is set correctly on the analyzer.
3. Press Save/Recall and then choose either PRINT or PLOT .
4. Press Display
later.
MORE
TITLE and title each data trace so that you can identify it
For detailed information on creating hardcopies, refer to “Printing, Plotting, and Saving
Measurement Results” in your analyzer’s user’s guide.
If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values
1. Perform a system verification to verify that the system still conforms to specifications.
2. If system verification fails, refer to Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.”
11-4
Chapter 11
Error Terms
Error Correction
Error Term Descriptions
The error term descriptions in this section include the following information:
• significance of each error term
• typical results following a full 2-port error-correction
• guidelines to interpret each error term
Table 11-1
Error Coefficient Arrays and Tests
Array
Enhanced
Response
2-port
Test
Number
01
ED
EDF
32
02
ES
ESF
33
03
ER
ERF
34
04
EX
EXF
35
05
ELa
ELF
36
06
ET
ETF
37
07
EDR
38
08
E SR
39
09
ERR
40
10
EXR
41
11
ELR
42
12
ETR
43
a. This term is used to generate the calibration
coefficients, but is not used during
measurement error correction.
Meaning of first subscript:
Meaning of second subscript:
D: directivity
F: forward
S: source match
R: reverse
R: reflection tracking
X: crosstalk or isolation
L: load match
T: transmission tracking
The same description applies to both the forward (F) and reverse (R) terms. Reverse terms
do not apply to the 8753ET.
Chapter 11
11-5
Error Terms
Error Correction
Directivity (EDF and EDR)
Description Directivity is a measure of any detected power that is reflected when a load
is attached to the test port. These are the uncorrected forward and reverse directivity error
terms of the system. The directivity error of the test port is determined by measuring the
reflection (S11, S22) of the load during the error-correction procedure.
Significant System Components
• load used in the error-correction (calibration)
• test port connectors
• test port cables
Affected Measurements
Low reflection device measurements are most affected by directivity errors.
Figure 11-1
11-6
Typical EDF/EDR without and with Cables
Chapter 11
Error Terms
Error Correction
Source Match (ESF and ESR)
Description Source match is a measure of test port connector match, as well as the
match between all components from the source to the test port. These are the forward and
reverse uncorrected source match terms of the driven port.
Significant System Components
• load calibration kit device
• open calibration kit device
• short calibration kit device
• bridge
• test port connectors
• bias tees
• step attenuator
• transfer switch
• test port cables
Affected Measurements Reflection and transmission measurements of highly
reflective devices are most affected by source match errors.
Figure 11-2
Chapter 11
Typical ESF/ESR without and with Cables
11-7
Error Terms
Error Correction
Reflection Tracking (ERF and ERR)
Description Reflection tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the
reference path (R path) and the frequency response of the reflection test path (A or B input
path).
Significant System Components
• open calibration kit device
• short calibration kit device
• R signal path if large variation in both ERF and ERR
• A or B input paths if only one term is affected
Affected Measurements All reflection measurements (high or low return loss) are
affected by the reflection tracking errors.
Figure 11-3
11-8
Typical ERF/ERR without and with Cables
Chapter 11
Error Terms
Error Correction
Isolation (Crosstalk, EXF and EXR)
Description Isolation is a measure of the leakage between the test ports and the signal
paths. The isolation error terms are characterized by measuring transmission (S21, S12)
with loads attached to both ports during the error-correction procedure. Since these terms
are low in magnitude, they are usually noisy (not very repeatable). The error term
magnitude changes dramatically with IF bandwidth: a 10 Hz IF bandwidth must be used
in order to lower the noise floor beyond the crosstalk specification. Using averaging will
also reduce the peak-to-peak noise in this error term.
Significant System Components
• sampler crosstalk
Affected Measurements Transmission measurements, (primarily where the measured
signal level is very low), are affected by isolation errors. For example, transmission
measurements where the insertion loss of the device under test is large.
Figure 11-4
Chapter 11
Typical EXF/EXR with 10 Hz Bandwidth and with 3 kHz Bandwidth
11-9
Error Terms
Error Correction
Load Match (ELF and ELR)
Description Load match is a measure of the impedance match of the test port that
terminates the output of a 2-port device. Load match error terms are characterized by
measuring the reflection (S11, S22) responses of a “through” configuration during the
calibration procedure.
Significant System Components
• “through” cable
• cable connectors
• test port connectors
Affected Measurements All transmission and reflection measurements of a low
insertion loss two-port devices are most affected by load match errors. Transmission
measurements of lossy devices are also affected.
Figure 11-5
11-10
Typical ELF/ELR
Chapter 11
Error Terms
Error Correction
Transmission Tracking (ETF and ETR)
Description Transmission tracking is the difference between the frequency response of
the reference path (including R input) and the transmission test path (including A or B
input) while measuring transmission. The response of the test port cables is included.
These terms are characterized by measuring the transmission (S21, S12) of the “through”
configuration during the error-correction procedure.
Significant System Components
• R signal path (if both ETF and ETR are bad)
• A or B input paths
• “through” cable
Affected Measurements All transmission measurements are affected by transmission
tracking errors.
Figure 11-6
Chapter 11
Typical ETF/ETR
11-11
Error Terms
Error Correction
11-12
Chapter 11
12 Theory of Operation
12-1
Theory of Operation
This chapter is divided into two major sections:
• “How the Analyzer Works” gives a general description of the analyzers’ operation.
• “A Close Look at the Analyzer's Functional Groups” provides more detailed operating
theory for each of the analyzer's functional groups.
12-2
Chapter 12
Theory of Operation
How the Analyzer Works
How the Analyzer Works
Network analyzers measure the reflection and transmission characteristics of devices and
networks. A network analyzer test system consists of the following:
• source
• signal-separation devices
• receiver
• display
The analyzer applies a signal that is either transmitted through the device under test, or
reflected from its input, and then compares it with the incident signal generated by the
swept RF source. The signals are then applied to a receiver for measurement, signal
processing, and display.
The analyzer consists of a high resolution synthesized RF source, test set, and a dual
channel three-input receiver to measure and display magnitude, phase, and group delay of
transmitted and reflected power. Analyzers with Option 010 provide the additional
capability of transforming measured data from the frequency domain to the time domain.
Figure 12-1 is a simplified block diagram of the network analyzer system. A detailed block
diagram of the analyzer is located at the end of Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.”
Figure 12-1
Simplified Block Diagram of the Network Analyzer System
The Built-In Synthesized Source
The analyzer's built-in synthesized source produces a swept RF signal in the range of
30 kHz to 3.0 GHz. The Agilent 8753ET/ES Option 006 is able to generate signals up to
6 GHz. The source output power is leveled by an internal ALC (automatic leveling control)
circuit. To achieve frequency accuracy and phase measuring capability, the analyzer is
phase locked to a highly stable crystal oscillator.
For this purpose, a portion of the transmitted signal is routed to the R channel input of the
receiver, where it is sampled by the phase detection loop and fed back to the source.
Chapter 12
12-3
Theory of Operation
How the Analyzer Works
The Source Step Attenuator
The step attenuator is standard in 8753ES analyzers and available with Option 004 on
8753ET analyzers. The 70 dB, electro-mechanical, step attenuator contained in the source
has very low loss. It is used to adjust the power level to the device under test (DUT)
without changing the level of the incident power in the reference path. Attenuation levels
are set via the front panel softkeys.
The Built-In Test Set
Both the 8753ET and the 8753ES have built-in test sets that provide signal separation
capability. The test sets differ between the two types of network analyzers.
• The 8753ET has a “transmission/reflection” test set. With this configuration,
measurements can be made only in the “forward” direction. Signals incident to and
reflected from the DUT are separated by the dual directional coupler that is connected
to the reflection port of the network analyzer. Incident signals are routed to the
R-sampler, and reflected signals are routed to the A-sampler. Signals transmitted
through the DUT are measured by the B-sampler which is connected directly to the
transmission port. No “reverse” measurements can be made unless the DUT is turned
around so that the RF power is now applied to its former “output port.”
• The 8753ES has an “S-parameter” test set. The test set consists of two directional
couplers and a solid-state transfer switch. The couplers, which separate incident,
reflected, and transmitted signals from the DUT are connected to the analyzer’s test
ports, Port 1 and Port 2. The transfer switch directs RF power from the source to either
test port. This allows both “forward” and “reverse” measurements to be made without
changing the connections to the DUT. All incident signals—whether applied to Port 1 or
Port 2—are routed to the R-sampler. Reflected and transmitted signals are routed to
either the A-sampler or the B-sampler after signal separation by the directional
couplers.
The Receiver Block
The receiver block contains three sampler/mixers for the R, A and B inputs. The signals
are sampled, and down-converted to produce a 4 kHz IF (intermediate frequency). A
multiplexer sequentially directs each of the three IF signals to the ADC (analog-to-digital
converter) where it is converted from an analog to a digital signal to be measured and
processed for viewing on the display. Both amplitude and phase information are measured
simultaneously, regardless of what is displayed on the analyzer.
The Microprocessor
A microprocessor takes the raw data and performs all the required error correction, trace
math, formatting, scaling, averaging, and marker operations, according to the instructions
from the front panel or over GPIB. The formatted data is then displayed.
Required Peripheral Equipment
In addition to the analyzer, the network analyzer measurement system requires
calibration standards for vector accuracy enhancement, and cables for interconnections.
12-4
Chapter 12
Theory of Operation
A Close Look at the Analyzer’s Functional Groups
A Close Look at the Analyzer’s Functional Groups
The operation of the analyzer is most logically described in five functional groups. Each
group consists of several major assemblies, and performs a distinct function in the
instrument. Some assemblies are related to more than one group, and in fact all the groups
are to some extent interrelated and affect each other’s performance.
• Power Supply: The power supply functional group consists of the A8 post regulator
and the A15 preregulator. It supplies power to the other assemblies in the instrument.
• Digital Control: The digital control group consists of the A1 front panel and A2 front
panel processor, the A9 CPU, the A16 rear panel, the A18 display and the A19 graphics
system processor (GSP). The A10 digital IF assembly is also related to this group. These
assemblies combine to provide digital control for the analyzer.
• Source: The source group consists of the A3 source, A7 pulse generator, A11 phase lock,
A12 reference, A13 fractional-N (analog), and A14 fractional-N (digital) assemblies. The
A4 sampler is also related since it is part of the source phase lock loop. The source
supplies a phase-locked RF signal to the device under test.
• Signal Separation:
8753ET
Reflected power is separated from incident power by the A21 dual directional coupler
and sent to the A sampler. Power transmitted through the device under test is routed
through the transmission port to the B sampler.
8753ES
The signal separation group performs the function of an S-parameter test set, dividing
the source signal into a reference path and a test path, and providing connections to the
device under test. It consists of the A24 transfer switch, the A21 test port 1 coupler, and
the A22 test port 2 coupler.
• Receiver: The receiver group consists of the A4/A5/A6 sampler/mixers and the A10
digital IF. The A12 reference assembly and the A9 CPU are also related. The receiver
measures and processes input signals for display.
The following pages describe the operation of each of the functional groups.
Chapter 12
12-5
Theory of Operation
Power Supply Theory
Power Supply Theory
The power supply functional group consists of the A15 preregulator and the A8 post
regulator. These two assemblies comprise a switching power supply that provides
regulated DC voltages to power all assemblies in the analyzer. The A15 preregulator is
enclosed in a casting at the rear of the instrument. It is connected to the A8 post regulator
by a wire bus A15W1. Figure 12-2 is a simplified block diagram of the power supply group.
Figure 12-2
Power Supply Functional Group, Simplified Block Diagram
A15 Preregulator
The A15 preregulator steps down and rectifies the line voltage. It provides a fully
regulated +5 V digital supply, and several preregulated voltages that go to the A8 post
regulator assembly for additional regulation.
The A15 preregulator assembly includes the line power module, a 60 kHz switching
preregulator, and overvoltage protection for the +5 V digital supply. It provides LEDs,
visible from the rear of the instrument, to indicate either normal or shutdown status.
Line Power Module
The line power module includes the line power switch, voltage selector switch, and main
fuse. The line power switch is activated from the front panel. The voltage selector switch,
accessible at the rear panel, adapts the analyzer to local line voltages of approximately
115 V or 230 V (with 350 VA maximum). The main fuse, which protects the input side of
the preregulator against drawing too much line current, is also accessible at the rear
panel. Refer to your analyzer’s installation and quick start guide for line voltage tolerances
and other power considerations. Refer to “8753ET/ES: Hardware, Preregulator” on
page 13-55 for the recommended fuse part number and values.
12-6
Chapter 12
Theory of Operation
Power Supply Theory
Preregulated Voltages
The switching preregulator converts the line voltage to several DC voltages. The regulated
+5 V digital supply goes directly to the motherboard. The following partially regulated
voltages are routed through A15W1 to the A8 post regulator for final regulation:
+70 V (not used)
+25 V
+18 V
−18 V
+8 V
−8 V
Regulated +5 V Digital Supply
The +5 VD supply is regulated by the control circuitry in the A15 preregulator. It goes
directly to the motherboard, and from there to all assemblies requiring a low noise digital
supply. A +5 V sense line returns from the motherboard to the A15 preregulator. The +5 V
CPU is derived from the +5 VD in the A8 post regulator and goes directly to the A19
graphics system processor.
In order for the preregulator to function, the +5 V digital supply must be loaded by one or
more assemblies, and the +5 V sense line must be working. If not, the other preregulated
voltages will not be correct.
Shutdown Indications: the Green LED and Red LED
The green LED is on in normal operation. It is off when line power is not connected, not
switched on, or set too low, or if the line fuse has blown.
The red LED, which is off in normal operation, turns on to indicate a fault in the +5 V
supply. This may be an over/under line voltage, over line current, or overtemperature
condition. Refer to the troubleshooting chapters for more information.
A8 Post Regulator
The A8 post regulator filters and regulates the DC voltages received from the A15
preregulator. It provides fusing and shutdown circuitry for individual voltage supplies. It
distributes regulated constant voltages to individual assemblies throughout the
instrument. It includes the overtemperature shutdown circuit, the variable fan speed
circuit, and the air flow detector. Nine green LEDs provide status indications for the
individual voltage supplies.
Refer to the power supply block diagram located at the end of Chapter 5 , “Power Supply
Troubleshooting,” to see the voltages provided by the A8 post regulator.
Voltage Indications: the Green LEDs
The nine green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 assembly are on during normal
operation, to indicate the correct voltage is present in each supply. If they are off or
flashing, a problem is indicated. The troubleshooting procedures (later in this chapter)
detail the steps to trace the cause of the problem.
Chapter 12
12-7
Theory of Operation
Power Supply Theory
Shutdown Circuit
The shutdown circuit is triggered by overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, or
overtemperature. It protects the instrument by causing the regulated voltage supplies to
be shut down. It also sends status messages to the A9 CPU to trigger warning messages on
the analyzer display. The voltages that are not shut down are the +5 VD and +5 VCPU
digital supplies from the preregulator, the fan supplies, the probe power supplies, and the
display supplies. The shutdown circuit can be disabled momentarily for troubleshooting
purposes by using a jumper to connect the SDIS line (A8TP4) to ground.
Variable Fan Circuit and Air Flow Detector
The fan power is derived directly from the +18 V and −18 V supplies from the A15
preregulator. The fan is not fused, so that it will continue to provide airflow and cooling
when the instrument is otherwise disabled. If overheating occurs, the main instrument
supplies are shut down and the fan runs at full speed. An overtemperature status message
is sent to the A9 CPU to initiate a warning message on the analyzer display. The fan also
runs at full speed if the air flow detector senses a low output of air from the fan. (Full
speed is normal at initial power on.)
Display Power
The A8 assembly supplies +5 VCPU to the A19 GSP through the motherboard. The GSP
converts a portion of the +5 VCPU to 3.3 V to drive the display and LVDS (low voltage
differential signaling) logic. The A19 GSP also controls and supplies power to the A27
backlight inverter. The voltages generated by the inverter are then routed to the display.
Display power is not connected to the protective shutdown circuitry so that the A18 display
assemblies can operate during troubleshooting when other supplies do not work.
NOTE
If blanking pulses from the A19 GSP are not present, then +3.3 V will
not be sent to the display.
Probe Power
The +18 V and −18 V supplies are post regulated to +15 V and −12.6 V to provide a power
source at the front panel for an external RF probe or millimeter modules.
12-8
Chapter 12
Theory of Operation
Digital Control Theory
Digital Control Theory
The digital control functional group consists of the following assemblies:
• A1 front panel
• A2 front panel processor
• A9 CPU
• A10 digital IF
• A16 rear panel
• A18 display
• A19 GSP
• A27 Inverter
These assemblies combine to provide digital control for the entire analyzer. They provide
math processing functions, as well as communications between the analyzer and an
external controller and/or peripherals. Figure 12-3 is a simplified block diagram of the
digital control functional group.
Chapter 12
12-9
Theory of Operation
Digital Control Theory
Figure 12-3
12-10
Digital Control Group, Simplified Block Diagram
Chapter 12
Theory of Operation
Digital Control Theory
A1 Front Panel
The A1 front panel assembly provides user interface with the analyzer. It includes the
keyboard for local user inputs, and the front panel LEDs that indicate instrument status.
The RPG (rotary pulse generator) is not electrically connected to the front panel, but
provides user inputs directly to the front panel processor.
A2 Front Panel Processor
The A2 front panel processor detects and decodes user inputs from the front panel and the
RPG, and transmits them to the CPU. It has the capability to interrupt the CPU to provide
information updates. It controls the front panel LEDs that provide status information to
the user.
The A2 also contains the LVDS (low voltage differential signaling) receivers which connect
to the graphics processor. The received video signals are routed to the A18 display.
A9 CPU/A10 Digital IF
The A9 CPU assembly contains the main CPU (central processing unit), the digital signal
processor, memory storage, and interconnect port interfaces. The main CPU is the master
controller for the analyzer, including the other dedicated microprocessors. The memory
includes EEPROM, DRAM, flash ROM, SRAM and boot ROM.
Data from the receiver is serially clocked into the A9 CPU assembly from the A10 digital
IF. The data taking sequence is triggered either from the A14 fractional-N assembly,
externally from the rear panel, or by software on the A9 assembly.
Main CPU
The main CPU is a 32-bit microprocessor that maintains digital control over the entire
instrument through the instrument bus. The main CPU receives external control
information from the front panel or GPIB, and performs processing and formatting
operations on the raw data in the main RAM. It controls the digital signal processor, the
front panel processor, the display processor, and the interconnect port interfaces. In
addition, when the analyzer is in the system controller mode, the main CPU controls
peripheral devices through the peripheral port interfaces.
The main CPU has a dedicated flash ROM that contains the operating system for
instrument control. Front panel settings are stored in SRAM, with a battery providing at
least 5 years of backup storage when external power is off.
Main RAM
The main RAM (random access memory) is shared memory for the CPU and the digital
signal processor. It stores the raw data received from the digital signal processor, while
additional calculations are performed on it by the CPU. The CPU reads the resulting
formatted data from the main RAM and converts it to GSP commands. It writes these
commands to the GSP for output to the analyzer display.
Chapter 12
12-11
Theory of Operation
Digital Control Theory
EEPROM
EEPROM (electrically-erasable programmable read only memory) contains factory set
correction constants unique to each instrument. These constants correct for hardware
variations to maintain the highest measurement accuracy. The correction constants can be
updated by executing the routines in Chapter 3 , “Adjustments and Correction Constants.”
Digital Signal Processor
The digital signal processor receives the digitized data from the A10 digital IF. It computes
discrete Fourier transforms to extract the complex phase and magnitude data from the
4 kHz IF signal. The resulting raw data is written into the main RAM.
A18 Display
The A18 display is an 8.4-inch liquid crystal display (LCD) with associated drive circuitry.
It receives a +3.3 V power supply from the A19 GSP, along with the voltage generated from
the A27 backlight inverter. It receives the following signals from the A19 GSP:
• digital TTL horizontal sync
• digital TTL vertical sync
• blanking
• data clock
• digital TTL red video
• digital TTL green video
• digital TTL blue video
A19 GSP
The A19 graphics system processor is the main interface between the A9 CPU and the A18
display. The CPU (A9) converts the formatted data to GSP commands and writes it to the
GSP. The GSP processes the data to obtain the necessary video signals, which are then
used for the following purposes:
• The video signals are used to produce VGA compatible RGB output signals, which are
routed to the A16 rear panel.
• The video signals are converted by an LVDS (low voltage differential signaling) driver
which translates the signals to low level differential signals to help eliminate radiated
emissions. The converted video signals are then routed to the A2 assembly, where they
are received and sent to the A18 display.
The A19 assembly receives the +5 VCPU which is used for processing and supplying power
to the A27 backlight inverter (+5 VCPU) and the A18 display (3.3 V).
12-12
Chapter 12
Theory of Operation
Digital Control Theory
A27 Inverter
The A27 backlight inverter assembly supplies the ac voltage for the backlight tube in the
A18 display assembly. This assembly takes the +5 VCPU and converts it to approximately
680 Vac steady state. At start-up the voltage can reach up to 1.5 kVac. There are two
control lines:
• Digital ON/OFF
• Analog Brightness
— 100% intensity is 0 V
— 50% intensity is 4.5 V
A16 Rear Panel
The A16 rear panel includes the following interfaces:
TEST SET I/O INTERCONNECT. This provides control signals and power to operate
duplexer test adapters.
EXT REF. This allows for a frequency reference signal input that can phase lock the
analyzer to an external frequency standard for increased frequency accuracy.
The analyzer automatically enables the external frequency reference feature when a
signal is connected to this input. When the signal is removed, the analyzer
automatically switches back to its internal frequency reference.
10 MHZ PRECISION REFERENCE. (Option 1D5) This output is connected to the
EXT REF (described above) to improve the frequency accuracy of the analyzer.
AUX INPUT. This allows for a dc or ac voltage input from an external signal source,
such as a detector or function generator, which you can then measure using the
Measure menu.(You can also use this connector as an analog output in service routines.)
EXT AM. This allows for an external analog signal input that is applied to the ALC
circuitry of the analyzer's source. This input analog signal amplitude modulates the RF
output signal.
EXT TRIG. This allows connection of an external negative TTL-compatible signal that
will trigger a measurement sweep. The trigger can be set to external through softkey
functions.
TEST SEQ. This outputs a TTL signal that can be programmed in a test sequence to be
high or low, or pulse (10 µs) high or low at the end of a sweep for a robotic part handler
interface.
LIMIT TEST. This outputs a TTL signal of the limit test results as follows:
— Pass: TTL high
— Fail: TTL low
VGA OUTPUT. This provides a video output of the analyzer display that is capable of
running a PC VGA monitor.
Chapter 12
12-13
Theory of Operation
Source Theory Overview
Source Theory Overview
The source produces a highly stable and accurate RF output signal by phase locking a YIG
oscillator to a harmonic of the synthesized VCO (voltage controlled oscillator). The source
output produces a CW or swept signal between 300 kHz and 3 GHz (or 300 kHz and 6 GHz
for Option 006) with a maximum leveled power of +10 dBm. The source’s built-in 70 dB
step attenuator allows the power to go as low as −85 dBm. (The step attenuator is standard
on 8753ES analyzers, and available as Option 004 on 8753ET analyzers.)
The full frequency range of the source is produced in 14 subsweeps, one in super low band,
two in low band, and eleven in high band. The high band frequencies (16 MHz to 3 GHz) or
(16 MHz to 6 GHz for Option 006) are achieved by harmonic mixing, with a different
harmonic number for each subsweep. The low band frequencies (300 kHz to 16 MHz) are
down-converted by fundamental mixing. The super low band frequencies (10 kHz to
300 kHz) are sent directly from the A12 reference board to the output of the A3 source
assembly. This band is not phased locked nor does it use the ALC. It is the basic amplified
output of the fractional-N synthesizer.
The source functional group consists of the individual assemblies described below.
A14/A13 Fractional-N
These two assemblies comprise the synthesizer. The 30 to 60 MHz VCO in the A14
assembly generates the stable LO frequencies for fundamental and harmonic mixing.
A12 Reference
This assembly provides stable reference frequencies to the rest of the instrument by
dividing down the output of a 40 MHz crystal oscillator. In low band operation, the output
of the fractional-N synthesizer is mixed down in the A12 reference assembly. (The 2nd LO
signal from the A12 assembly is explained in “Receiver Theory” on page 12-27.) The A12 is
also the origin of the super low band portion of the analyzer’s source.
A7 Pulse Generator
A step recovery diode in the pulse generator produces a comb of harmonic multiples of the
VCO output. These harmonics provide the high band LO (local oscillator) input to the
samplers. In low band and super low band, the operation the pulse generator is turned off.
A11 Phase Lock
This assembly compares the first IF (derived from the source output in the A4 sampler) to
a stable reference, and generates an error voltage that is integrated into the drive for the
A3 source assembly.
12-14
Chapter 12
Theory of Operation
Source Theory Overview
A3 Source
This assembly includes a 3.0 to 6.8 GHz YIG oscillator and a 3.8 GHz cavity oscillator. The
outputs of these oscillators are mixed to produce the RF output signal. In Option 006
(30 kHz to 6 GHz) the frequencies 3.0 to 6.0 GHz are no longer a mixed product, but are
the direct output of the YIG oscillator. The signal tracks the stable output of the
synthesizer. The ALC (automatic leveling control) circuitry is also in the A3 assembly.
Source Super Low Band Operation
The Super Low Band Frequency Range is 10 kHz to 300 kHz. These frequencies are
generated by the A12 Reference Board. They are the amplified output of the fractional-N
synthesizer. This output is not phase locked and is not subject to ALC control. Refer to
Table 12-1.
Table 12-1
Super Low Band Subsweep Frequencies
Fractional-N
1st IF
RF Output
40.0 to 43.3 MHz
0.010 to 0.300 MHz
0.010 to 0.300 MHz
Source Low Band Operation
The low band frequency range is 300 kHz to 16 MHz. These frequencies are generated by
locking the A3 source to a reference signal. The reference signal is synthesized by mixing
down the fundamental output of the fractional-N VCO with a 40 MHz crystal reference
signal. Low band operation differs from high band in these respects: The reference
frequency for the A11 phase lock is not a fixed 1 MHz signal, but varies with the frequency
of the fractional-N VCO signal. The sampler diodes are biased on to pass the signal
through to the mixer. The 1st IF signal from the A4 sampler is not fixed but is identical to
the source output signal and sweeps with it.
The following steps outline the low band sweep sequence, illustrated in Figure 12-4.
1. A signal (FN LO) is generated by the fractional-N VCO. The VCO in the A14
Fractional-N assembly generates a CW or swept signal that is 40 MHz greater than the
start frequency. The signal is divided down to 100 kHz and phase locked in the A13
assembly, as in high band operation.
2. The fractional-N VCO signal is mixed with 40 MHz to produce a reference
signal. The signal (FN LO) from the Fractional-N VCO goes to the A12 reference
assembly, where it is mixed with the 40 MHz VCXO (voltage controlled crystal
oscillator). The resulting signal is the reference to the phase comparator in the A11
assembly.
3. The A3 source is pretuned. The source output is fed to the A4 sampler. The
pretuned DAC in the A11 phase lock assembly sets the A3 source to a frequency 1 MHz
to 6 MHz above the start frequency. This signal (source output) goes to the A4 R input
sampler/mixer assembly.
Chapter 12
12-15
Theory of Operation
Source Theory Overview
4. The signal from the source is fed back (1st IF) to the phase comparator. The
source output signal passes directly through the sampler in the A4 assembly, because
the sampler is biased on. The signal (1st IF) is fed back unaltered to the phase
comparator in the A11 phase lock assembly. The other input to the phase comparator is
the heterodyned reference signal from the A12 assembly. Any frequency difference
between these two signals produces a proportional error voltage.
5. A tuning signal (YO DRIVE) tunes the source and phase lock is achieved. The
error voltage is used to drive the A3 source YIG oscillator to bring the YIG closer to the
reference frequency. The loop process continues until the source frequency and the
reference frequency are the same, and phase lock is achieved.
6. A synthesized sub sweep is generated. The source tracks the synthesizer.
When lock is achieved at the start frequency, the synthesizer starts to sweep. This
changes the phase lock reference frequency, and causes the source to track at a
difference frequency 40 MHz below the synthesizer.
Figure 12-4
12-16
Low Band Operation of the Source
Chapter 12
Theory of Operation
Source Theory Overview
The full low band is produced in two subsweeps, to allow addition IF filtering below
3 MHz. At the transition between subsweeps, the source is pretuned and then relocks.
Table 12-2 lists the low band subsweep frequencies at the fractional-N VCO and the RF
output.
Table 12-2
Low Band Subsweep Frequencies
Fractional-N
1st IF
Source Output
40.3 to 43.3 MHz
0.3 to 3.3 MHz
0.3 to 3.3 MHz
43.3 to 56.0 MHz
3.3 to 16.0 MHz
3.3 to 16.0 MHz
Source High Band Operation
The high band frequency range is 16 MHz to 3.0 GHz (or 16 MHz to 6.0 GHz with
Option 006). These frequencies are generated in subsweeps by phase-locking the A3 source
signal to harmonic multiples of the fractional-N VCO. The high band subsweep sequence,
illustrated in Figure 12-5, follows these steps:
1. A signal (HI OUT) is generated by the fractional-N VCO. The VCO in the A14
fractional-N assembly generates a CW or swept signal in the range of 30 to 60 MHz.
This signal is synthesized and phase locked to a 100 kHz reference signal from the A12
reference assembly. The signal from the fractional-N VCO is divided by 1 or 2, and goes
to the pulse generator.
2. A comb of harmonics (1st LO) is produced in the A7 pulse generator. The
divided down signal from the fractional-N VCO drives a step recovery diode (SRD) in
the A7 pulse generator assembly. The SRD multiplies the fundamental signal from the
fractional-N into a comb of harmonic frequencies. The harmonics are used as the 1st LO
(local oscillator) signal to the samplers. One of the harmonic signals is 1 MHz below the
start signal set from the front panel.
3. The A3 source is pretuned. The source output is fed to the A4 sampler. The
pretune DAC in the A11 phase lock assembly sets the A3 source to a first approximation
frequency (1 to 6 MHz higher than the start frequency). This signal (RF OUT) goes to
the A4 R input sampler/mixer assembly.
4. The synthesizer signal and the source signal are combined by the sampler. A
difference frequency is generated. In the A4 sampler, the 1st LO signal from the
pulse generator is combined with the source output signal. The IF (intermediate
frequency) produced is a first approximation of 1 MHz. This signal (1st IF) is routed
back to the A11 phase lock assembly.
5. The difference frequency (1st IF) from the A4 sampler is compared to a
reference. The 1st IF feedback signal from the A4 is filtered and applied to a phase
comparator circuit in the A11 phase lock assembly. The other input to the phase
comparator is a crystal controlled 1 MHz signal from the A12 reference assembly. Any
frequency difference between these two signals produces a proportional error voltage.
Chapter 12
12-17
Theory of Operation
Source Theory Overview
6. A tuning signal (YO DRIVE) tunes the source and phase lock is achieved. The
error voltage is used to drive the A3 source YIG oscillator, in order to bring it closer to
the required frequency. The loop process continues until the 1st IF feedback signal to
the phase comparator is equal to the 1 MHz reference signal, and phase lock is
achieved.
7. A synthesized subsweep is generated by A13/A14. The A3 source tracks the
synthesizer. When the source is phase locked to the synthesizer at the start frequency,
the synthesizer starts to sweep. The phase locked loop forces the source to track the
synthesizer, maintaining a constant 1 MHz 1st IF signal.
The full high band sweep is generated in a series of subsweeps, by phase locking the A3
source signal to harmonic multiples of the fractional-N VCO. The 16 to 31 MHz
subsweep is produced by a one half harmonic, using the divide-by-2 circuit on the A14
assembly. At the transitions between subsweeps, the source is pretuned and then
relocks. Table 12-3 lists the high band subsweep frequencies from the fractional-N VCO
and the source output.
Figure 12-5
12-18
High Band Operation of the Source
Chapter 12
Theory of Operation
Source Theory Overview
Table 12-3
High Band Subsweep Frequencies
Fractional-N (MHz)
Harmonic
Source Output
(MHz)
30 to 60
1/2
16 to 31
30 to 60
1
31 to 61
30 to 60
2
61 to 121
40 to 59
3
121 to 178
35.4 to 59.2
5
178 to 296
32.8 to 59.4
9
296 to 536
35.7 to 59.5
15
536 to 893
33.0 to 59.5
27
893 to 1607
31.5 to 58.8
51
1607 to 3000
Option 006
37.0 to 59.6
83
3000 to 4950
49.0 to 59.4
101
4950 to 6000
Source Operation in other Modes and Features
Besides the normal network analyzer mode, the analyzer has extra modes and features to
make additional types of measurements. The following describes the key differences in
how the analyzer operates to achieve these new measurements.
Frequency Offset
The analyzer can measure frequency-translating devices with the frequency offset feature.
The receiver operates normally. However, the source is pretuned to a different frequency
by an offset entered by the user. The device under test will translate this frequency back to
the frequency the receiver expects. Otherwise, phase locking and source operation occur as
usual.
Harmonic Analysis (Option 002)
The analyzer can measure the 2nd or 3rd harmonic of the fundamental source frequency,
on a swept or CW basis, with the harmonic analysis feature (optional).
To make this measurement, the reference frequency (normally 1 MHz) from the A12
reference assembly to the A11 phase lock assembly is divided by 1, 2, or 3. See Figure 12-6.
The fractional-N assemblies are also tuned so that the correct harmonic (comb tooth) of the
1st LO is 0.500 or 0.333 MHz below the source frequency instead of the usual 1.000 MHz.
The analyzer pretunes the A3 source normally, then phase locks the 1st IF to the new
reference frequency to sweep the fundamental source frequency in the usual way. The key
difference is that the 1st IF (output from the R sampler) due to the fundamental and used
for phase locking is now 0.500 or 0.333 MHz instead of 1.000 MHz.
Chapter 12
12-19
Theory of Operation
Source Theory Overview
Since the chosen VCO harmonic and the source differ by 0.500 or 0.333 MHz, then another
VCO harmonic, 2 or 3 times higher in frequency, will be exactly 1.000 MHz away from the
2nd or 3rd harmonic of the source frequency. The samplers, then, will also down-convert
these harmonics to yield the desired components in the 1st IF at 1.000 MHz. Narrow
bandpass filters in the receiver eliminate all but the 1.000 MHz signals; these pass
through to be processed and displayed.
Figure 12-6
Harmonic Analysis
External Source Mode
In external source mode, the analyzer phase locks its receiver to an external signal source.
This source must be CW (not swept), but it does not need to be synthesized. The user must
enter the source frequency into the analyzer. (The analyzer’s internal source output is not
used.)
To accomplish this, the phase lock loop is reconnected so that the tuning voltage from the
A11 phase lock assembly controls the VCO of the A14 fractional-N assembly and not the
A3 source. See Figure 12-7. The VCO’s output still drives the 1st LO of the samplers and
down-converts the RF signal supplied by the external source. The resulting 1st IF is fed
back to the A11 phase lock assembly, compared to the 1.000 MHz reference, and used to
generate a tuning voltage as usual. However, the tuning voltage controls the VCO to lock
on to the external source, keeping the 1st IF at exactly 1.000 MHz.
12-20
Chapter 12
Theory of Operation
Source Theory Overview
The analyzer normally goes through a pretune-acquire-track sequence to achieve phase
lock. In external source mode, the fractional-N VCO pretunes as a closed-loop synthesizer
referenced to the 100 kHz signal from the A12 reference assembly. Then, to acquire or
track, a switch causes the VCO to be tuned by the A11 phase lock assembly instead. (Refer
to the Overall Block Diagram at the end of Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.”)
Figure 12-7
Chapter 12
External Source Mode
12-21
Theory of Operation
Source Theory Overview
Tuned Receiver Mode
In tuned receiver mode, the analyzer is a synthesized, swept, narrow-band receiver only.
The external signal source must be synthesized and reference-locked to the analyzer.
To achieve this, the analyzer’s source and phase lock circuits are completely unused. See
Figure 12-8. The fractional-N synthesizer is tuned so that one of its harmonics (1st LO)
down-converts the RF input to the samplers. (In contrast to external source mode, the
analyzer does not phase lock at all. However, the 1st LO is synthesized.)
The analyzer can function as a swept tuned receiver, similar to a spectrum analyzer, but
the samplers create spurious signals at certain frequencies, which limit the accuracy of
such measurements.
Figure 12-8
12-22
Tuned Receiver Mode
Chapter 12
Theory of Operation
Signal Separation (8753ET)
Signal Separation (8753ET)
The A21 Dual Directional Coupler
Signal separation in the analyzer is accomplished with a dual directional coupler which, by
itself, comprises the analyzer’s built-in test set. The dual directional coupler is connected
to the reflection test port. It is used to separate the incident signal going to the device
under test from reflected signals coming from the device under test. A portion of the
incident signal is applied to the R sampler/mixer via one of the coupled arms of the dual
directional coupler. Meanwhile, the reflected signal is routed from the reflection test port
via the other coupled arm to the input of the A sampler/mixer in the receiver.
If the 8753ET network analyzer is equipped with a step attenuator in the source assembly
(Option 004), one of the coupled arms of the dual directional coupler is not used for
transmitting part of the incident signal to the R sampler/mixer. Instead, the R sampler
signal is taken directly from the source prior to the step attenuator.
Signals applied to the transmission test port are fed directly to the B sampler/mixer.
Figure 12-9
Chapter 12
8753ET Dual Directional Coupler without Option 004
12-23
Theory of Operation
Signal Separation (8753ET)
Figure 12-10
12-24
8753ET Dual Directional Coupler with Option 004
Chapter 12
Theory of Operation
Signal Separation (8753ES)
Signal Separation (8753ES)
The Built-In Test Set
Figure 12-11 shows a simplified block diagram of the analyzer’s built-in test set.
A21 and A22 Test Port Couplers
The analyzer’s test port couplers are used to separate signals incident to, reflected from,
and transmitted from the device under test. Each test port coupler has a coupling
coefficient factor of 16 dB.
A23 LED Front Panel
The LED front panel board indicates whether the source power is incident on the
analyzer’s test port 1 or test port 2. The analyzer’s source power is directed to test port 1
when making a forward transmission/reflection measurement. Similarly, source power is
incident at test port 2 when making a reverse transmission/reflection measurement.
A24 Transfer Switch
The A3 source output power is directed to either the analyzer’s test port 1 or test port 2 via
a low loss solid state transfer switch. With this switch, all four S-parameters can be
updated continuously (for example, the data obtained from a full 2-port calibration). In
addition, the transfer switch provides termination for the inactive test port in order to
minimize the crosstalk between the source and receiver sampler.
A25 Test Set Interface
The test set interface board provides biasing for active devices under test with an external
dc voltage. This dc voltage is applied directly to the test port center pin. In addition, the
test set interface board provides the drive signal for the A24 forward/reverse transfer
switch.
Chapter 12
12-25
Theory of Operation
Signal Separation (8753ES)
Figure 12-11
12-26
Simplified Block Diagram of the 8753ES Built-In Test Set
Chapter 12
Theory of Operation
Receiver Theory
Receiver Theory
The receiver functional group consists of the following assemblies:
• A4 sampler/mixer
• A5 sampler/mixer
• A6 sampler/mixer
• A10 digital IF
These assemblies combine with the A9 CPU (described in “Digital Control Theory” on
page 12-9) to measure and process input signals into digital information for display on the
analyzer. Figure 12-12 through Figure 12-14 are simplified block diagrams of the receiver
functional group. The A12 reference assembly is also included in the illustration to show
how the 2nd LO signal is derived.
Figure 12-12
Chapter 12
Receiver Functional Group, 8753ET without Option 004
12-27
Theory of Operation
Receiver Theory
Figure 12-13
Receiver Functional Group, 8753ET with Option 004
Figure 12-14
Receiver Functional Group, 8753ES
12-28
Chapter 12
Theory of Operation
Receiver Theory
A4/A5/A6 Sampler/Mixer
The A4, A5, and A6 sampler/mixers all down-convert the RF input signals to fixed 4 kHz
2nd IF signals with amplitude and phase corresponding to the RF input.
The Sampler Circuit in High Band
In high band operation, the sampling rate of the samplers is controlled by the 1st LO from
the A7 pulse generator assembly. The 1st LO is a comb of harmonics produced by a step
recovery diode driven by the fractional-N VCO fundamental signal. One of the harmonic
signals is 1 MHz below the start frequency set at the front panel. The 1st LO is combined
in the samplers with the RF input signal from the source. In the Option 006, samplers are
additionally capable of recognizing RF input signals from 3 to 6 GHz. The mixing products
are filtered, so that the only remaining response is the difference between the source
frequency and the harmonic 1 MHz below it. This fixed 1 MHz signal is the 1st IF. Part of
the 1st IF signal from the R sampler is fed back to the A11 phase lock assembly.
The Sampler Circuit in Low Band or Super Low Band
In low band or super low band, the sampler diodes are biased continuously on, so that the
RF input signal passes through them unchanged. Thus the 1st IF is identical to the RF
output signal from the source (300 kHz to 16 MHz for lowband; 10 to 300 kHz for super
lowband), and sweeps with it. Part of the 1st IF signal from the R sampler is fed back to
the A11 phase lock assembly.
(Refer to “Source Theory Overview” on page 12-14 for information on high band and low
band operation of the source.)
The 2nd LO Signal
The 2nd LO is obtained from the A12 reference assembly. In high band, the 2nd LO is fixed
at 996 kHz. This is produced by feeding the 39.84 MHz output of a phase-locked oscillator
in the A12 assembly through a divide-by-40 circuit.
In low band, the 2nd LO is a variable frequency produced by mixing the output of the
fractional-N VCO with a fixed 39.996 MHz signal in the A12 assembly. The 2nd LO covers
the range of 0.014 to 16.004 MHz in two subsweeps that correspond with the source
subsweeps. These subsweeps are 0.304 to 3.304 MHz and 3.304 to 16.004 MHz.
The Mixer Circuit
The 1st IF and the 2nd LO are combined in the mixer circuit. The resulting difference
frequency (the 2nd IF) is a constant 4 kHz in both bands, as Table 12-4 shows.
Table 12-4
Band
High Band Subsweep Frequencies
1st IF
2nd LO
2nd IF
Super Low
0.010 to 0.300 MHz
0.014 to 0.304 MHz
4.0 kHz
Low
0.300 to 16.0 MHz
0.304 to 16.004 MHz
4.0 kHz
High
1.000 MHz
0.996 MHz
4.0 kHz
Chapter 12
12-29
Theory of Operation
Receiver Theory
A10 Digital IF
The three 4 kHz 2nd IF signals from the sampler/mixer assemblies are input to the A10
digital IF assembly. These signals are sampled at a 16 kHz rate. A fourth input is the
analog bus, which can monitor either an external input at the rear panel AUX IN
connector, or one of 31 internal nodes. A multiplexer sequentially directs each of the
signals to the ADC (analog-to-digital converter). Here they are converted to digital form
and sent to the A9 CPU assembly for processing. Refer to “Digital Control Theory” on
page 12-9 for more information on signal processing.
12-30
Chapter 12
13 Replaceable Parts
13-1
Replaceable Parts
This chapter contains information for ordering replacement parts for the Agilent 8753ES
and 8753ET network analyzers. Replaceable parts include the following:
• major assemblies
• cables
• chassis hardware
In general, parts of major assemblies are not listed. Refer to Table 13-1 on page 13-62 to
help interpret part descriptions in the replaceable parts lists that follow.
13-2
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replacing an Assembly
Replacing an Assembly
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly (ASSY) in the analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.” Follow up
with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to the information in this chapter.
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
Chapter 14 , “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures.”
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3 , “Adjustments and Correction
Constants.”
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2 , “System Verification and
Performance Tests.”
Chapter 13
13-3
Replaceable Parts
Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies
Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies
Under the rebuilt-exchange assembly program, certain factory-repaired and tested
modules (assemblies) are available on a trade-in basis. These assemblies are offered for
lower cost than a new assembly, but meet all factory specifications required of a new
assembly.
The defective assembly must be returned for credit under the terms of the
rebuilt-exchange assembly program. Any spare assembly stock desired should be ordered
using the new assembly part number. Figure 13-1 illustrates the module exchange
procedure. “Major Assemblies, Top” and “Major Assemblies, Bottom” list all major
assemblies, including those that can be replaced on an exchange basis.
13-4
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Ordering Information
Ordering Information
To order a part listed in the replaceable parts lists, quote the Agilent Technologies part
number, indicate the quantity required, and address the order to the nearest Agilent
Technologies office.
To order a part that is not listed in the replaceable parts lists, include the instrument
model number, complete instrument serial number, the description and function of the
part, and the number of parts required. Address the order to the nearest Agilent
Technologies office.
Chapter 13
13-5
Replaceable Parts
Ordering Information
Figure 13-1
13-6
Module Exchange Procedure
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Replaceable Part Listings
The following pages list the replacement part numbers and descriptions for 8753ET and
8753ES network analyzers. Illustrations with reference designators are provided to help
identify and locate the part needed. The parts lists are organized into the following
categories:
• 8753ET: Major Assemblies, Top on page 13-10
• 8753ES: Major Assemblies, Top on page 13-12
• 8753ET: Major Assemblies, Bottom on page 13-14
• 8753ES: Major Assemblies, Bottom on page 13-15
• 8753ES Option 014: Major Assemblies and Cables, Bottom on page 13-16
• 8753ET: Cables, Top on page 13-18
• 8753ES: Cables, Top on page 13-20
• 8753ES Option 014: Cables, Top on page 13-22
• 8753ET: Cables, Bottom on page 13-24
• 8753ES: Cables, Bottom on page 13-26
• 8753ET: Cables, Front on page 13-28
• 8753ES: Cables, Front on page 13-30
• 8753ET/ES: Cables, Rear on page 13-32
• 8753ET/ES: Cables, Source on page 13-34
• 8753ET/ES: Front Panel Assembly, Outside on page 13-36
• 8753ET/ES: Front Panel Assembly, Inside on page 13-38
• 8753ET: Rear Panel Assembly on page 13-40
• 8753ES: Rear Panel Assembly on page 13-42
• 8753ET/ES: Rear Panel Assembly, Option 1D5 on page 13-44
• 8753ET/ES: Hardware, Top on page 13-46
• 8753ET: Hardware, Bottom on page 13-48
• 8753ES: Hardware, Bottom on page 13-49
• 8753ET/ES: Hardware, Front on page 13-50
• 8753ET: Hardware, Test Set Deck on page 13-51
• 8753ES: Hardware, Test Set Deck on page 13-52
• 8753ET/ES: Hardware, Disk Drive Support on page 13-53
• 8753ET/ES: Hardware, Memory Deck on page 13-54
• 8753ET/ES: Hardware, Preregulator on page 13-55
Chapter 13
13-7
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
• 8753ET/ES: Chassis Parts, Outside on page 13-56
• 8753ET/ES: Chassis Parts, Inside on page 13-58
• Miscellaneous on page 13-59
13-8
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 13
13-9
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET: Major Assemblies, Top
Ref.
Desig.
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
A1, A2
Description
NOT SHOWNa
A3
08753-60234
1
ASSY-SOURCE 3 GHz (EXCHANGE: 08753-69234)
A3
004
08753-60231
1
ASSY-SOURCE 3 GHz (EXCHANGE: 08753-69231)
A3
006
08753-60233
1
ASSY-SOURCE 6 GHz (EXCHANGE: 08753-69233)
A3
004, 006
08753-60146
1
ASSY-SOURCE 6 GHz (EXCHANGE: 08753-69146)
A4
08753-60907
1
ASSY-SAMPLER R
A5
08753-60908
1
ASSY-SAMPLER A
A6
08753-60951
1
ASSY-SAMPLER B
A7
08753-60164
1
BD ASSY-PULSE GENERATOR
A8b
08753-60949
1
BD ASSY-POST REGULATOR
A9
NOT SHOWNc
A10
08753-60958
1
BD ASSY-DIGITAL IF
A11
08753-60162
1
BD ASSY-PHASE LOCK
A12
08753-60957
1
BD ASSY-REFERENCE
A13
08753-60013
1
BD ASSY-FRAC N ANALOG
A14
08753-60068
1
BD ASSY-FRAC N DIGITAL
A15
0950-3488
1
ASSY-PREREGULATOR
A16
NOT SHOWNd
A17
NOT SHOWNe
A18
NOT SHOWNa
A19
08753-60359
1
BD ASSY-GRAPHICS PROCESSOR (GSP) (under sheet
metal cover)
A20
0950-2782
1
ASSY-DISK DRIVE
A26
1D5
NOT SHOWNf
A27
NOT SHOWNa
B1
NOT SHOWNd
RPG
NOT SHOWNa
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
13-10
See “8753ET/ES: Front Panel Assembly, Inside” on page 13-38.
For fuse part numbers on the A8 Post Regulator, refer to “Miscellaneous” on page 13-59.
See “8753ET: Major Assemblies, Bottom” on page 13-14.
See “8753ET: Rear Panel Assembly” on page 13-40.
See “8753ET/ES: Chassis Parts, Inside” on page 13-58.
See “8753ET/ES: Rear Panel Assembly, Option 1D5” on page 13-44.
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-2
Chapter 13
8753ET: Major Assemblies, Top
13-11
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ES: Major Assemblies, Top
Ref.
Desig.
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
A1, A2
Description
NOT SHOWNa
A3
08753-60231
1
ASSY-SOURCE 3 GHz (EXCHANGE: 08753-69231)
08753-60146
1
ASSY-SOURCE 6 GHz (EXCHANGE: 08753-69146)
A4
08753-60907
1
ASSY-SAMPLER R
A5
08753-60908
1
ASSY-SAMPLER A
A6
08753-60908
1
ASSY-SAMPLER B
A7
08753-60164
1
BD ASSY-PULSE GENERATOR
A8b
08753-60949
1
BD ASSY-POST REGULATOR
A3
006
A9
NOT SHOWNc
A10
08753-60958
1
BD ASSY-DIGITAL IF
A11
08753-60162
1
BD ASSY-PHASE LOCK
A12
08753-60957
1
BD ASSY-REFERENCE
A13
08753-60013
1
BD ASSY-FRAC N ANALOG
A14
08753-60068
1
BD ASSY-FRAC N DIGITAL
A15
0950-3488
1
ASSY-PREREGULATOR
A16
NOT SHOWNd
A17
NOT SHOWNe
A18
NOT SHOWNa
A19
08753-60359
1
BD ASSY-GRAPHICS PROCESSOR (GSP) (under sheet
metal cover)
A20
0950-2782
1
ASSY-DISK DRIVE
A26
1D5
NOT SHOWNf
A27
NOT SHOWNa
B1
NOT SHOWNd
RPG
NOT SHOWNa
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
13-12
See “8753ET/ES: Front Panel Assembly, Inside” on page 13-38.
For fuse part numbers on the A8 Post Regulator, refer to “Miscellaneous” on page 13-59.
See “8753ES: Major Assemblies, Bottom” on page 13-15.
See “8753ES: Rear Panel Assembly” on page 13-42.
See “8753ET/ES: Chassis Parts, Inside” on page 13-58.
See “8753ET/ES: Rear Panel Assembly, Option 1D5” on page 13-44.
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-3
Chapter 13
8753ES: Major Assemblies, Top
13-13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET: Major Assemblies, Bottom
Ref.
Desig.
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
08753-60315
1
CPU REPAIR KIT (EXCHANGE: 08753-69315)
CPU FAN
5060-8776
1
A9 CPU FAN
A9BT1
1420-0338
1
BATTERY-LITHIUM 3V 1.2AH
A21
5087-7069
1
ASSY-DUAL COUPLER (EXCHANGE: 5087-6069)
A9
Figure 13-4
13-14
Option
Description
8753ET: Major Assemblies, Bottom
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ES: Major Assemblies, Bottom
Ref.
Desig.
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
08753-60315
1
CPU REPAIR KIT (EXCHANGE: 08753-69315)
CPU FAN
5060-8776
1
A9 CPU FAN
A9BT1
1420-0338
1
BATTERY-LITHIUM 3V 1.2AH
A21
5087-7007
1
ASSY-TEST PORT COUPLER (EXCHANGE: 5087-6007)
5087-7008
1
ASSY-TEST PORT COUPLER (EXCHANGE: 5087-6008)
5087-7007
1
ASSY-TEST PORT COUPLER (EXCHANGE: 5087-6007)
5087-7008
1
ASSY-TEST PORT COUPLER (EXCHANGE: 5087-6008)
A23
08753-60145
1
BD ASSY-LED FRONT PANEL
A24
5087-7067
1
ASSY-TRANSFER SWITCH, SOLID STATE (EXCHANGE:
5087-6067)
A25
08753-60280
1
BD ASSY-TEST SET INTERFACE
A9
A21
075
A22
A22
075
Figure 13-5
Chapter 13
Description
8753ES: Major Assemblies, Bottom
13-15
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ES Option 014: Major Assemblies and Cables, Bottom
Item
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
014
08753-20184
1
SWITCH RF IN to A24 PORT C
2
014
08753-20181
1
A22 COUPLER ARM to B SAMPLER OUT
3
014
08753-20176
1
SWITCH A24 to PORT 2 SWITCH
4
014
08753-20180
1
PORT 2 COUPLER to A22 COUPLER MAIN
5
014
08753-20951
1
SOURCE A3 to RF OUT
6
08753-20291
1
SOURCE A3 to R CHANNEL OUT
7
08753-20290
1
R CHANNEL IN to R SAMPLER
08753-20954
1
B SAMPLER IN to B SAMPLER
9
5087-7007
1
A22 COUPLER, TEST PORT 2
10
5087-7007
1
A21 COUPLER, TEST PORT 1
8
014
11
014
08753-20177
1
PORT 1 COUPLER to A21 COUPLER MAIN
12
014
08753-20179
1
A SAMPLER IN to A SAMPLER
13
014
08753-20175
1
SWITCH A24 to PORT 1 SWITCH
14
014
08753-20178
1
A21 COUPLER ARM to A SAMPLER OUT
5087-7067
1
A24 SWITCH
15
Figure 13-6
13-16
8753ES Option 014, Major Assemblies and Cables, Bottom
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 13
13-17
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET: Cables, Top
Ref.
Desig.
Opt
Typea
1
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
1400-0249
1
CABLE TIE (15W1 to CHASSIS)
A15W1
18W
(part of A15)
1
PREREGULATOR (A15) to POST REGULATOR
(A8J2) and MOTHERBOARD (A17J3)
W1
SR
08753-20363
1
SOURCE ASSY (A3W7) to DUAL DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER (A21)
W2
SR
08753-20290
1
FP (R CHANNEL IN) to SAMPLER-R (A4)
W3
SR
08753-20361
1
DUAL DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (A21) to
SAMPLER-A (A5)
W4
SR
08753-20364
1
TRANSMISSION PORT to SAMPLER-B (A6)
W5
F
08753-60027
1
SAMPLER-R (A4) to PULSE GENERATOR (A7)
W6
F
08753-60027
1
SAMPLER-A (A5) to PULSE GENERATOR (A7)
W7
F
08753-60027
1
SAMPLER-B (A6) to PULSE GENERATOR (A7)
W8
F
08753-60029
1
PHASE LOCK (A11J1) to SAMPLER-R (A4)
W9
F
8120-5021
1
FRAC-N DIGITAL (A14J1) to PULSE GENERATOR
(A7)
W10
F
08753-60029
1
FRAC-N DIGITAL (A14J2) to REFERENCE (A12J1)
W11
F
08753-60029
1
FRAC-N DIGITAL (A14J3) to FRAC-N ANALOG
(A13J1)
W12
F
08753-60029
1
FRAC-N ANALOG (A13J2) to REFERENCE (A12J2)
W13
F
08753-60026
1
REFERENCE (A12J3) to RP (EXT REF)
W20
34R
8120-6890
1
MOTHERBOARD (A17J11) to CPU (A9J5)
W21
14R
8120-6876
1
MOTHERBOARD (A17J12) to REAR PANEL VGA
OUT
SR
08753-20291
1
SOURCE ASSY (A3) to FP (R CHANNEL OUT)
8120-5026
1
SOURCE ASSY (A3) to REFERENCE (A12J4)
W24
W26
004
F
a.
nW = Wire Bundle (n is the number of wires in the bundle)
nR = Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon)
F = Flexible Coax Cable
SR = Semi-Rigid Coax Cable
13-18
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-7
Chapter 13
8753ET: Cables, Top
13-19
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ES: Cables, Top
Ref.
Desig.
Opt
Typea
1
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
1400-0249
1
CABLE TIE (15W1 to CHASSIS)
A15W1
18W
(part of A15)
1
PREREGULATOR (A15) to POST REGULATOR
(A8J2) and MOTHERBOARD (A17J3)
W1
SR
08753-20952
1
SOURCE ASSY (A3W4) to TRANSFER SWITCH
(A24)
W2
SR
08753-20290
1
FP (R CHANNEL IN) to SAMPLER-R (A4)
W3
SR
08753-20286
1
TEST PORT 1 COUPLER (A21) to SAMPLER-A (A5)
W4
SR
08753-20953
1
TEST PORT 2 COUPLER (A22) to SAMPLER-B (A6)
W5
F
08753-60027
1
SAMPLER-R (A4) to PULSE GENERATOR (A7)
W6
F
08753-60027
1
SAMPLER-A (A5) to PULSE GENERATOR (A7)
W7
F
08753-60027
1
SAMPLER-B (A6) to PULSE GENERATOR (A7)
W8
F
08753-60029
1
PHASE LOCK (A11J1) to SAMPLER-R (A4)
W9
F
8120-5021
1
FRAC-N DIGITAL (A14J1) to PULSE GENERATOR
(A7)
W10
F
08753-60029
1
FRAC-N DIGITAL (A14J2) to REFERENCE (A12J1)
W11
F
08753-60029
1
FRAC-N DIGITAL (A14J3) to FRAC-N ANALOG
(A13J1)
W12
F
08753-60029
1
FRAC-N ANALOG (A13J2) to REFERENCE (A12J2)
W13
F
08753-60026
1
REFERENCE (A12J3) to RP (EXT REF)
W20
34R
8120-6890
1
MOTHERBOARD (A17J11) to CPU (A9J5)
W21
14R
8120-6876
1
MOTHERBOARD (A17J12) to REAR PANEL VGA
OUT
W24
SR
08753-20291
1
SOURCE ASSY (A3) to FP (R CHANNEL OUT)
W26
F
8120-5026
1
SOURCE ASSY (A3) to REFERENCE (A12J4)
a.
nW = Wire Bundle (n is the number of wires in the bundle)
nR = Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon)
F = Flexible Coax Cable
SR = Semi-Rigid Coax Cable
13-20
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-8
Chapter 13
8753ES: Cables, Top
13-21
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ES Option 014: Cables, Top
Item
1
Option
014
2
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
08753-20951
1
CABLE, SOURCE to RF OUT
08753-20291
1
CABLE, R CHANNEL OUT to A3 SOURCE
3
014
08753-20954
1
CABLE, B SAMPLER IN to B SAMPLER
4
014
08753-20179
1
CABLE, A SAMPLER IN to A SAMPLER
08753-20290
1
CABLE, R CHANNEL IN to R SAMPLER
5
Figure 13-9
13-22
8753ES Option 014: Cables, Top
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 13
13-23
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET: Cables, Bottom
Ref.
Desig.
Opt
Typea
1
2
004
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
1400-0611
1
CABLE CLAMP
1250-0590
1
CAP (FEMALE SMA)
W1
SR
08753-20363
1
SOURCE ASSY (A3W7) to
DUAL-DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (A21)
W3
SR
08753-20361
1
DUAL-DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (A21) to
SAMPLER-A (A5)
W4
SR
08753-20364
1
TRANSMISSION PORT to SAMPLER-B (A6)
W20
34R
8120-6890
1
CPU (A9J7) to MOTHERBOARD (A17J11)
SR
08753-20365
1
DUAL-DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (A21) TO FP
(R CHANNEL OUT)
26R
8120-8670
1
DISK DRIVE (A20) TO CPU (A9J8)
W31
W37
Std., 006
a.
nW = Wire Bundle (n is the number of wires in the bundle)
nR = Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon)
SR = Semi-Rigid Coax Cable
13-24
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-10
Chapter 13
8753ET: Cables, Bottom
13-25
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ES: Cables, Bottom
Ref.
Desig.
Opt
Typea
1
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
1400-0611
1
CABLE CLAMP
A21W1
1W
8120-6483
1
GRAY WIRE-TEST PORT 1 COUPLER (A21) to TEST
SET INTERFACE (A25TP1)
A22W1
1W
8120-6483
1
GRAY WIRE-TEST PORT 2 COUPLER (A22) to TEST
SET INTERFACE (A25TP2)
A24W1
3W
85047-60004
1
TRANSFER SWITCH (A24) to TEST SET
INTERFACE (A25J3)
W1
SR
08753-20952
1
SOURCE ASSY (A3W4) to TRANSFER SWITCH (A24)
W20
34R
8120-6890
1
CPU (A9J7) to MOTHERBOARD (A17J11)
W31
SR
08753-20288
1
TEST PORT 1 COUPLER (A21) to TRANSFER
SWITCH (A24)
W32
SR
08753-20289
1
TEST PORT 2 COUPLER (A22) to TRANSFER
SWITCH (A24)
W33
4W
08753-60221
1
LED (A23J1) to TEST SET INTERFACE (A25J2)
W37
26R
8120-8670
1
DISK DRIVE (A20) to CPU (A9J8)
W38
40R
8120-6882
1
TEST SET INTERFACE (A25J1) to MOTHERBOARD
(A17J2)
a.
nW = Wire Bundle (n is the number of wires in the bundle)
nR = Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon)
SR = Semi-Rigid Coax Cable
13-26
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-11
Chapter 13
8753ES: Cables, Bottom
13-27
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET: Cables, Front
Ref.
Desig.
Opt
Typea
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
A1W1
30R
8120-8439
1
FP KEYBOARD (A1J1) to FP INTERFACE (A2J2)
RPG1W1
5R
(part of RPG1)
1
RPG to FP INTERFACE (A2J5)
W1
SR
08753-20363
1
SOURCE ASSY (A3W7)
to DUAL DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (A21)
W2
SR
08753-20290
1
FP (R CHANNEL IN) to SAMPLER-R (A4)
W3
SR
08753-20361
1
DUAL DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (A21) to
SAMPLER-A (A5)
W4
SR
08753-20364
1
TRANSMISSION PORT to SAMPLER-B (A6)
W17
50R
8120-8431
1
FP INTERFACE (A2J1) to MOTHERBOARD (A17J1)
W18
3W
08753-60364
1
FP INTERFACE (A2J4) to FP (PROBE POWER)
W19
3W
08753-60364
1
FP INTERFACE (A2J3) to FP (PROBE POWER)
W22
5R
8120-8842
1
FP INTERFACE (A2J7) to INVERTER (A27)
W23
31R
8120-8409
1
FP INTERFACE (A2J6) to DISPLAY (A18)
SR
08753-20291
1
SOURCE ASSY (A3) TO FP (R CHANNEL OUT)
W25
SR
08720-20075
1
FP (R CHANNEL OUT) to FP (R CHANNEL IN)
W31
SR
08753-20365
W24
004
DUAL COUPLER (A21) to R CHANNEL OUT
a.
nW = Wire Bundle (n is the number of wires in the bundle)
nR = Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon)
SR = Semi-Rigid Coax Cable
13-28
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-12
8753ET: Cables, Front
8753ET Option 004
Chapter 13
13-29
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ES: Cables, Front
Ref.
Desig.
Opt
Typea
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
A1W1
30R
8120-8439
1
FP KEYBOARD (A1J1) to FP INTERFACE (A2J2)
RPG1W1
5R
(part of RPG1)
1
RPG to FP INTERFACE (A2J5)
W1
SR
08753-20952
1
SOURCE ASSY (A3W4) to TRANSFER SWITCH
(A24)
W2
SR
08753-20290
1
FP (R CHANNEL IN) to SAMPLER-R (A4)
W3
SR
08753-20286
1
TEST PORT 1 COUPLER (A21)
to SAMPLER-A (A5)
W4
SR
08753-20953
1
TEST PORT 2 COUPLER (A22)
to SAMPLER-B (A6)
W17
50R
8120-8431
1
FP INTERFACE (A2J1) to MOTHERBOARD (A17J1)
W18
3W
08753-60364
1
FP INTERFACE (A2J4) to FP (PROBE POWER)
W19
3W
08753-60364
1
FP INTERFACE (A2J3) to FP (PROBE POWER)
W22
5R
8120-8842
1
FP INTERFACE (A2J7) to INVERTER (A27)
W23
31R
8120-8409
1
FP INTERFACE (A2J6) to DISPLAY (A18)
W24
SR
08753-20291
1
SOURCE ASSY (A3) to FP (R CHANNEL OUT)
W25
SR
08720-20075
1
FP (R CHANNEL OUT) to FP (R CHANNEL IN)
1
014
SR
08753-20179
1
CABLE, A SAMPLER IN to A SAMPLER
2
014
SR
08753-20954
1
CABLE, B SAMPLER IN to B SAMPLER
3
014
SR
08753-20951
1
CABLE, SOURCE to RF OUT
a.
nW = Wire Bundle (n is the number of wires in the bundle)
nR = Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon)
SR = Semi-Rigid Coax Cable
13-30
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-13
Chapter 13
8753ES: Cables, Front
13-31
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET/ES: Cables, Rear
Ref.
Desig.
ET/ES
Opt
Typea
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
B1W1
ET/ES
2W
(part of B1)
1
FAN (B1) to MOTHERBOARD (A17J5)
W13
ET/ES
F
08753-60026
1
REFERENCE (A12J3) to RP
(EXT REF)
W21
ET/ES
14R
8120-6876
1
MOTHERBOARD (A17J12) to RP
(VGA OUT)
W27
ET/ES
34R
8120-6407
1
RP INTERFACE (A16J4) to
MOTHERBOARD (A17J6)
W28
ES
2W
85047-60005
1
RP INTERFACE (A16J10) to RP
(PORT 1 FUSE)
W29
ES
2W
85047-60005
1
RP INTERFACE (A16J11) to RP
(PORT 2 FUSE)
W30
ET/ES
3W
8120-6458
1
RP INTERFACE (A16J3) to
HIGH-STABILITY FREQ REF (A26J1)
W35
ET/ES
50R
8120-6379
1
CPU (A9J1) to MOTHERBOARD
(A17J7)
W36
ET/ES
26R
8120-6382
1
CPU (A9J2) to MOTHERBOARD
(A17J8)
1D5
a.
nW = Wire Bundle (n is the number of wires in the bundle)
nR = Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon)
F = Flexible Coax Cable
13-32
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-14
Chapter 13
8753ET/ES: Cables, Rear
13-33
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET/ES: Cables, Source
Ref.
Desig.
ET/ES
Opt
Typea
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
A3A2W1
ET/ES
10R
08753-60034
1
EYO (A3A3) to ALC (A3A2J3)
A3A4W1
ET/ES
4W
08753-60035
1
CAVITY OSC (A3A4) to ALC (A3A2J2)
A3W1
ET/ES
SR
08753-20107
1
EYO (A3A3) to SOURCE ASSY
(A3)
A3W2
ET/ES
SR
08753-20032
1
CAVITY OSC (A3A4) to SOURCE ASSY
(A3)
A3W3
ET
SR
08753-20106
1
SOURCE ASSY (A3) to ATTENUATOR
(A3A5)
A3W3
ES
SR
08753-20106
1
SOURCE ASSY (A3) to ATTENUATOR
(A3A5)
A3W4
ET
SR
08753-20111
1
ATTENUATOR (A3A5) to W1
A3W4
ES
SR
08753-20111
1
ATTENUATOR (A3A5) to W1
A3W5
ES
10R
5062-0701
1
ALC (A3A2J1) to ATTENUATOR (A3A5)
A3W5
ET
10R
5062-0701
1
ALC (A3A2J1) to ATTENUATOR (A3A5)
A3MP1
ET
1250-0590
1
CAP (FEMALE SMA)
A3W7
ET
004
004
004
SR
08752-20024
4 dB ATTENUATOR (A3AT1) to
BULKHEAD (A3 OUTPUT)
a.
nW = Wire Bundle (n is the number of wires in the bundle)
nR = Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon)
SR = Semi-Rigid Coax Cable
13-34
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-15
8753ES and 8753ET Option 004: Cables, Source
Figure 13-16
8753ET: Cables, Source
Chapter 13
13-35
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET/ES: Front Panel Assembly, Outside
Ref.
Desig.
ET/ES
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
08753-80168
1
OVERLAY, LOWER FRONT PANEL
1
ES
1
ES
075
08753-80170
1
OVERLAY, LOWER FRONT PANEL
1
ES
014
08753-80198
1
OVERLAY, LOWER FRONT PANEL
1
ET
08753-80218
1
OVERLAY, LOWER FRONT PANEL
2
ES
08753-60938
1
FP REPAIR KITa
2
ES
075
08753-60940
1
FP REPAIR KITa
2
ES
014
08753-60942
1
FP REPAIR KITa
2
ET
08753-60941
1
FP REPAIR KITa
3
ET/ES
1510-0038
1
GROUND POST
4
ET/ES
2950-0006
1
NUT HEX 1/4-32
4
ET/ES
2190-0067
1
WASHER LK .256 ID
5
ET/ES
08753-40015
1
LINE BUTTON
6
ET/ES
08753-80216
1
OVERLAY, UPPER FRONT PANEL
7
ES
08753-80208
1
NAMEPLATE, 8753ES, 30 kHz − 3 GHz
7
ES
08753-80205
1
NAMEPLATE, 8753ES, 30 kHz − 6 GHz
7
ET
08753-80207
1
NAMEPLATE, 8753ET, 300 kHz − 3 GHz
7
ET
08753-80204
1
NAMEPLATE, 8753ET, 300 kHz − 6 GHz
006
006
a. Comes with casting, gasket, upper and lower overlays.
13-36
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-17
Chapter 13
8753ET/ES: Front Panel Assembly, Outside
13-37
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET/ES: Front Panel Assembly, Inside
Ref.
Desig.
Opt
Typea
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
08753-00150
1
DISPLAY HOLD DOWN
2
2090-0386
1
DISPLAY LAMP
3
1000-0995
1
DISPLAY GLASS
7
1990-1864
1
RPG (INCLUDES CABLE AND
HARDWARE)
8
E4400-40003
1
RPG KNOB
9
08720-40016
1
FLUBBER KEYPAD
10
0515-0430
8
SCREW SM 3.0 6CWPNTX
11
0515-0665
4
SCREW SMM 3.0 14CWPNTX
12
1400-1439
2
CABLE CLIP
13
0515-0372
3
SCREW SMM 3.0 8CWPNTX
14
08753-60364
2
CABLE ASSY, PROBE POWER
14
2950-0144
2
NUT, HEX 3/8-32
15
08753-00112
1
PLATE, PROBE POWER
16
0515-0430
2
SCREW SMM 3.0 6CWPNTX
17
08753-20948
1
COVER, INVERTER
A1
08720-60267
1
BD ASSY-FRONT PANEL
A2
08753-60358
1
BD ASSY-FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
A18
08753-60937
1
LCD REPLACEMENT ASSY
A27
0950-3379
1
ASSY-INVERTER
A1W1
26R
8120-8439
1
A1 TO A2
W17
50R
8120-8431
1
A2 TO A17
W22
5R
8120-8842
1
CABLE-FP INTF (A2J7) to INVERTER (A27)
W23
31R
8120-8409
1
CABLE-FP INTF (A2J6) to DISPLAY (A18)
a. nR = Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon)
13-38
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-18
Chapter 13
8753ET/ES: Front Panel Assembly, Inside
13-39
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET: Rear Panel Assembly
Ref.
Desig.
Opt
Typea
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
8120-6407
1
RP INTERFACE (A16J4) TO MB (A17J6) (W27)
3 (A16)
08720-60138
1
BD ASSY-REAR PANEL INTERFACE (A16)
4
08753-60026
1
ASSY-EXTERNAL REFERENCE CABLE (W13)
5
08415-60036
1
ASSY-FAN
6
1251-2942
4
FASTENER CONN RP LOCK
7
2190-0034
2
WASHER LK .194ID10
7
0380-0644
2
NUT STDF .327L 6-32
8
1251-7812
4
FASTENER CONN RP LOCK
9
0515-0379
4
SCREW SMM3.5X16 CWPNTX
9
3050-1192
4
FLAT WASHER
10
0515-0372
10
SCREW SMM3.0X8 CWPNTX
11
08720-00071
1
REAR PANEL SHEET METAL
12
3160-0281
1
FAN GUARD
13
6960-0419
1
HOLE PLUG
14
6960-0086
1
HOLE PLUG
15
2190-0102
8
WASHER LK .472ID
15
2950-0035
8
NUT HEX 15/32-32
16
0400-0271
1
GROMMET SN.5-515ID
17
6960-0027
4
HOLE PLUG
18
6960-0149
2
HOLE PLUG
1
34R
19
1D5
Description
HIGH STABILITY FREQUENCY REFERENCEb
a. nR = Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon)
b. See “8753ET/ES: Rear Panel Assembly, Option 1D5” on page 13-44.
13-40
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-19
Chapter 13
8753ET: Rear Panel Assembly
13-41
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ES: Rear Panel Assembly
Ref.
Desig.
Opt
Typea
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
8120-6407
1
RP INTERFACE (A16J4) TO MB (A17J6) (W27)
2
85047-60005
2
FUSE HARNESS ASSEMBLY
3 (A16)
08720-60138
1
BD ASSY-REAR PANEL INTERFACE (A16)
4
08753-60026
1
ASSY-EXTERNAL REFERENCE CABLE (W13)
5
08415-60036
1
ASSY-FAN
6
1251-2942
4
FASTENER CONN RP LOCK
7
2190-0034
2
WASHER LK .194ID10
7
0380-0644
2
NUT STDF .327L 6-32
8
1251-7812
4
FASTENER CONN RP LOCK
9
0515-0379
4
SCREW SMM3.5X16 CWPNTX
9
3050-1192
4
FLAT WASHER
10
0515-0372
10
SCREW SMM3.0X8 CWPNTX
11
08720-00071
1
REAR PANEL SHEET METAL
12
3160-0281
1
FAN GUARD
13
6960-0419
1
HOLE PLUG
14
6960-0086
1
HOLE PLUG
15
2190-0102
8
WASHER LK .472ID
15
2950-0035
8
NUT HEX 15/32-32
16
0400-0271
1
GROMMET SN.5-515ID
17
2110-0047
2
FUSE
17
1400-0112
2
FUSE CAP
18
6960-0027
2
HOLE PLUG
1
34R
19
1D5
Description
HIGH STABILITY FREQUENCY REFERENCEb
a. nR = Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon)
b. See “8753ET/ES: Rear Panel Assembly, Option 1D5” on page 13-44.
13-42
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-20
Chapter 13
8753ES: Rear Panel Assembly
13-43
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET/ES: Rear Panel Assembly, Option 1D5
Ref.
Desig.
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
1D5
1250-1859
1
ADAPTER-COAX
2
1D5
0515-0374
1
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×10 CW-PN-TX
3
1D5
3050-1546
1
WASHER-FLAT .505ID NY
4
1D5
2190-0068
1
WASHER-LOCK .505ID
5
1D5
0590-1310
1
NUT-SPECIALTY 1/2-28
6
1D5
0515-0430
1
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×6 CW-PN-TX
7
1D5
08753-00078
1
BRACKET-OSC BD
6960-0027
2
HOLE PLUGS
8
A26
1D5
08753-60158
1
BD ASSY-HIGH STABILITY FREQ REF
W30
1D5
8120-6458
1
RP INTERFACE (A16J3) to HIGH-STABILITY FREQ
REF (A26J1)
13-44
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-21
Chapter 13
8753ET/ES: Rear Panel Assembly, Option 1D5
13-45
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Top
Ref.
Desig.
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
1
0515-2799
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×10 CW-FL-TX
2
08753-40014
1
STABILIZER-PC BOARD
3
08753-20062
1
STABILIZER CAP
4
0515-2035
1
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×16 PC-FL-TX
5
0515-0458
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.5×8 CW-PN-TX
6
08753-00107
1
AIR FLOW COVER
7
0515-0374
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0 X 10 CW-PN-TX
8
0515-0377
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.5×10 CW-PN-TX
9
0515-0374
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×12 CW-PN-TX
10
08753-00129
1
GSP COVER
11
08753-00145
1
BRACKET-SOURCE (SOURCE STRAP)
12
0515-0374
6
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0 X 10 CW-PN-TX
13
0515-0374
15
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×10 CW-PN-TX
14
08753-00040
1
CLIP-PULSER GROUND
15
0515-1400
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.5×8 PC-FL-TX
13-46
Option
Description
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-22
Chapter 13
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Top
13-47
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET: Hardware, Bottom
Ref.
Desig.
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
1
0515-0458
4
SCREW-MACHINE M3.5×8 CW-PN-TX
2
0515-0430
3
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×6 CW-PN-TX
3
0515-2086
4
SCREW-MACHINE M4.0×7 PC-FL-TX
4
0515-2038
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.5×10 PC-FL-TX
5
0515-1400
3
SCREW-MACHINE M3.5×8 PC-FL-TX
6
0515-0375
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×16 CW-PN-TX
7
0515-0458
4
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×16 CW-PN-TX
Figure 13-23
13-48
Description
8753ET: Hardware, Bottom
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ES: Hardware, Bottom
Ref.
Desig.
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
1
0515-0458
4
SCREW-MACHINE M3.5×8 CW-PN-TX
2
0515-0430
3
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×6 CW-PN-TX
3
0515-0667
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×25 CW-PN-TX
4
0515-0430
5
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×6 CW-PN-TX
5
0515-1400
3
SCREW-MACHINE M3.5×8 PC-FL-TX
6
0515-0375
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×16 CW-PN-TX
7
0515-0458
4
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×16 CW-PN-TX
8
0515-2086
4
SCREW-MACHINE M4.0×7 PC-FL-TX
Figure 13-24
Chapter 13
Description
8753ES: Hardware, Bottom
13-49
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Front
Ref.
Desig.
ET/ES
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
ET/ES
0515-0665
1
SMM 3.0×14 CWPNTX
2
ET/ES
08753-00137
1
BRACKET - CABLE SUPPORT
3
ET/ES
1250-1251
2
ADAPTER FEMALE SMA/FEMALE SMA
4
ES
0515-1946
1
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×6 PC-FL-TX
Figure 13-25
13-50
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Front
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET: Hardware, Test Set Deck
Ref.
Desig.
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
1
0515-0458
4
SCREW-MACHINE M 3.0 X 16 CW-PN-TK
4
08753-00127
1
CHASSIS-TEST SET
6
0515-0375
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×16 CW-PN-TX
7
0515-0430
1
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×6 CW-PN-TX
Figure 13-26
Chapter 13
Description
8753ET: Hardware, Test Set Deck
13-51
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ES: Hardware, Test Set Deck
Ref.
Desig.
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
1
08753-20296
8
SHOULDER SCREW
2
08753-40013
8
GUIDE WASHER
3
08753-20293
8
PRESSURE SPRING
4
08753-00127
1
CHASSIS-TEST SET
5
0515-1946
1
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×6 PC-FL-TX
6
0515-0375
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×16 CW-PN-TX
7
0515-0430
1
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×6 CW-PN-TX
8
0515-0667
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×25 CW-PN-TX
9
0515-0430
5
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×6 CW-PN-TX
Figure 13-27
13-52
Description
8753ES: Hardware, Test Set Deck
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Disk Drive Support
Ref.
Desig.
ET/ES
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
ET/ES
0515-1048
4
SCREW-M 2.5X4 SOCKET HEAD, HEX.
2
ET/ES
08753-00152
1
DISK DRIVE BRACKET
3
ET/ES
0515-0374
4
SCREWS -MACHINE M 3.0X10 CWPNTX
4
ET/ES
08753-40016
1
PLUG, DISK DRIVE
Figure 13-28
Chapter 13
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Disk Drive Support
13-53
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Memory Deck
Ref.
Desig.
ET/ES
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
ET/ES
0515-0458
4
SCREW-MACHINE M3.5×8 CW-PN-TX
2
ET/ES
0515-0430
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×6 CW-PN-TX
3
ET/ES
0515-0375
1
SCREW-MACHINE M3.0×14 CW-PN-TX
4
ET/ES
08753-00128
1
DECK-MEMORY
Figure 13-29
13-54
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Memory Deck
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Preregulator
Ref.
Desig.
ET/ES
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
ET/ES
2110-1059
1
FUSE, T 5A 125V, UL LISTED/CSA
CERTIFIED TO 248 STANDARD (for 115V
operations)
1
ET/ES
2110-1036
1
FUSE, T 4A H 250V, BUILT TO IEC127-2/5
STANDARD (for 230V operations)
2
ET/ES
08753-00065
1
BRACKET-PREREGULATOR
3
ET/ES
0515-1400
2
SCREW-MACHINE M3.5×8 CW-FL-TX
A15
ET/ES
0950-3488
1
PREREGULATOR-ASSY
Figure 13-30
Chapter 13
8753ET/ES: Hardware, Preregulator
13-55
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET/ES: Chassis Parts, Outside
Ref.
Desig.
ET/ES
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
ET/ES
5041-9176
1
TRIM STRIP
2
ET/ES
08720-00078
1
COVER-TOP
3
ET/ES
5041-9188
4
REAR STANDOFF
4
ET/ES
0515-1402
4
SCREW SMM 3.5 8 PCPNTX
5
ET/ES
5041-9187
2
REAR CAP-SIDE STRAP
6
ET/ES
0515-1384
4
SCREW SMM 5.0 10 PCFLTX
7
ET/ES
08720-00081
2
SIDE STRAP
8
ET/ES
08720-00080
2
COVER-SIDE
9
ET/ES
5041-9186
2
FRONT CAP-SIDE STRAP
10
ET/ES
08720-00079
2
COVER-BOTTOM
11
ET/ES
1460-1345
2
FOOT ELEVATOR
12
ET/ES
5041-9167
4
FOOT
13
ET/ES
08753-80066
1
LABEL: CAUTION WARNING
15
ET/ES
08753-40015
1
LINE BUTTON
16
ET/ES
5180-8500
1
MYLAR INSULATOR
13-56
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Figure 13-31
Chapter 13
8753ET/ES: Chassis Parts, Outside
13-57
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
8753ET/ES: Chassis Parts, Inside
Ref.
Desig.
ET/ES
Option
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
ET/ES
5022-1190
1
FRONT PANEL FRAME
2
ET/ES
5021-5808
1
REAR FRAME
3
ET/ES
08753-60936
1
ASSY-CARDCAGE/MOTHER
4
ET/ES
0515-2086
16
SCREW SMM4.0×7 PCFLTX
5
ET/ES
0515-0430
1
SCREW M3.0×6 CWPNTXa
6
ET/ES
08720-00083
1
INSULATOR SWITCHa
7
ET/ES
1460-1573
1
SPRING EXTENSION 0.138 OD
8
ET/ES
08720-00077
1
SWITCH RODa
9
ET/ES
0515-1400
1
SMM 3.5×8 PCFLTX
A17
ET/ES
08753-60360
1
BD ASSY-MOTHERBOARD
a. Part of CARDCAGE/MOTHER assembly (item 3).
Figure 13-32
13-58
8753ET/ES: Chassis Parts, Inside
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Miscellaneous
Description
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Service Tools
8753 TOOL KIT includes the following:
08753-60023
RF CABLE-INPUT R
08753-20028
EXTENDER BOARD ASSEMBLY-RECEIVER
08753-60019
EXTENDER BOARD ASSEMBLY-SOURCE
08753-60020
EXTENDER BOARD ASSEMBLY-CARD CAGE
08753-60155
EXTENDER BOARD ASSEMBLY-GSP
08753-60309
ADAPTER-MALE SMB TO MALE SMB
1250-0669
ADAPTER-MALE TYPE N TO FEMALE SMA
1250-1250
CABLE ASSEMBLY
5061-1022
BAG-ANTISTATIC 13×15
9222-1132
Documentation
Agilent Technologies 8753ET/ES and 8753ES Option 011 Manual Sets CD-ROM
- includes 8753ET/ES Manual Set (08753-90470) and 8753ES Option 011
Manual Set (08753-90477 )
08753-90469
Agilent Technologies 8753ET/ES MANUAL SET includes the following:
08753-90470
8753ET/ES INSTALLATION/QUICK START GUIDE
08753-90471
8753ET/ES USER’S GUIDE
08753-90472
8753ET/ES REFERENCE GUIDE
08753-90473
8753ET/ES PROGRAMMER’S GUIDE (includes example programs on
CD-ROM)
08753-90475
Agilent Technologies 8753ES Option 011 Manual Set includes the following:
08753-90477
8753ES OPTION 011 INSTALLATION/QUICK START GUIDE
08753-90478
8753ES OPTION 011 USER'S GUIDE
08753-90479
8753ES OPTION 011 REFERENCE GUIDE
08753-90480
8753ES OPTION 011 PROGRAMMER’S GUIDE
08753-90475
Agilent Technologies 8753ET/ES and 8753ES Option 011 Service Documentation:
8753ET/ES SERVICE GUIDEa
08753-90484
8753ES OPTION 011 SERVICE GUIDEa
08753-90485
a. Includes the service guide CD-ROM (part number 08753-90504).
Chapter 13
13-59
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Description
HP/Agilent Part or
Model Number
Agilent 8753ET Upgrade Kits
HARMONIC MEASUREMENT UPGRADE KIT
8753ETU OPT 002
STEP ATTENUATOR UPGRADE KIT
8753ETU OPT 004
6 GHz UPGRADE KIT
8753ETU OPT 006
TIME DOMAIN UPGRADE KIT
8753ETU OPT 010
FIRMWARE UPGRADE KIT
8753ETU OPT 099
HIGH-STABILITY FREQUENCY REFERENCE RETROFIT KIT
8753ETU OPT 1D5
Agilent 8753ES Upgrade Kits
HARMONIC MEASUREMENT UPGRADE KIT
8753ESU OPT 002
6 GHz UPGRADE KIT
8753ESU OPT 006
6 GHz UPGRADE KIT (for 8753ES Option 011)
8753ESU OPT 611
TIME DOMAIN UPGRADE KIT
8753ESU OPT 010
FIRMWARE UPGRADE KIT
8753ESU OPT 099
HIGH-STABILITY FREQUENCY REFERENCE RETROFIT KIT
8753ESU OPT 1D5
Protective Caps for Connectors
FEMALE GPIB CONNECTOR
1252-5007
FEMALE TEST SET I/O
1252-4690
FEMALE PARALLEL PORT
1252-4690
RS-232 CONNECTOR
1252-4697
7-mm TEST PORTS
1401-0249
FEMALE TYPE-N TEST PORTS (OPTIONS 011 AND 075)
1401-0247
13-60
Chapter 13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Description
HP/Agilent Part
or Model Number
Fuses used on the A8 Post Regulator
FUSE 0.5A 125V NON-TIME DELAY 0.25×0.27
2110-0046
FUSE 0.75A 125V NON-TIME DELAY 0.25×0.27
2110-0424
FUSE 1A 125V NON-TIME DELAY 0.25×0.27
2110-0047
FUSE 2A 125V NON-TIME DELAY 0.25×0.27
2110-0425
FUSE 4A 125V NON-TIME DELAY 0.25×0.27
2110-0476
For Line Fuse part numbers, refer to “8753ET/ES: Hardware, Preregulator” on
page 13-55.
GPIB Cables
GPIB CABLE, 1M (3.3 FT)
10833A
GPIB CABLE, 2M (6.6 FT)
10833B
GPIB CABLE, 4M (13.2 FT)
10833C
GPIB CABLE, 0.5M (1.6 FT)
10833D
ESD Supplies
ADJUSTABLE ANTISTATIC WRIST STRAP
9300-1367
5 FT GROUNDING CORD for wrist strap
9300-0980
2 × 4 FT ANTISTATIC TABLE MAT WITH 15 FT GROUND WIRE
9300-0797
ANTISTATIC HEEL STRAP for use on conductive floors
9300-1126
Other
8753E KEYBOARD OVERLAY for external keyboard
08753-80131
RACK MOUNT KIT WITHOUT HANDLES
5063-9216
RACK MOUNT KIT WITH HANDLES
5063-9236
FRONT HANDLE
5063-9229
FLOPPY DISKS, 3.5 INCH DOUBLE-SIDED (box of 10)
92192A
Chapter 13
13-61
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Part Listings
Table 13-1
Abbreviation Definitions
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
LED........................................light-emitting diode
A................................................................Assembly
M...............................................................meters
B...............................................................fan; motor
M...............................................meteric hardware
J..........electrical connector (stationary portion); jack
MB.......................................................motherboard
RPG.........................................rotary pulse generator
MHz........................................................megahertz
W................................cable; transmission path; wire
mm.....................................................millimeters
ABBREVIATIONS
MON........................................................monitor
A.......................................................................ampere
NOM.......................................................nominal
ALC.......................................automatic level control
NY...............................................................nylon
ASSY..........................................................assembly
OD...............................................outside diameter
AUX............................................................auxiliary
Opt..............................................................option
BD.......................................................................board
OSC........................................................oscillator
COAX.............................................................coaxial
PC..........................................................patch lock
CPU.......................................central processing unit
PC....................................................printed circuit
CW........................................conical washer (screws)
PN...............................................panhead (screws)
D................................................................diameter
REF........................................................reference
ESD........................................electrostatic discharge
REPL.................................................replacement
EXT.............................................................external
RP.........................................................rear panel
EYO.....................................................YIG oscillator
SH....................................socket head cap (screws)
FL...................................................flathead (screws)
TX........................................TORX recess (screws)
FP............................................................front panel
Qty...........................................................quantity
FRAC-N..................................................fractional N
V.....................................................................volt
FREQ........................................................frequency
WFR......................................................wire formed
GHz...........................................................gigahertz
W/O..........................................................without
GPIB............................general purpose interface bus
YIG..........................................yttrium-iron garnet
HEX..........................................................hexagonal
OPTIONS
HP..................................................Hewlett-Packard
002..................................harmonics measurement
HX...............................................hex recess (screws)
004.........................55dB step attenuator (ET only)
ID......................................................inside diameter
006.................................................6 GHz operation
IF..........................................intermediate frequency
010.....................................................time domain
I/O.........................................................input/output
011.........................................w/o test set (ES only)
kHz............................................................kilahertz
075...................................75 ohm test set (ES only)
LCD...........................................liquid crystal display
1D5........................................10 MHz precision ref
13-62
Chapter 13
14 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
14-1
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
This chapter contains procedures for removing and replacing the major assemblies of the
network analyzer. A table showing the corresponding post-repair procedures for each
replaced assembly is located at the end of this chapter.
14-2
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Replacing an Assembly
Replacing an Assembly
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in the network analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4 , “Start Troubleshooting Here.” Follow up
with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13 , “Replaceable Parts.”
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
the information provided in this chapter for assembly replacement instructions.
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3 , “Adjustments and Correction
Constants.”
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2 , “System Verification and
Performance Tests.”
WARNING
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only.
To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you
are qualified to do so.
WARNING
The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose
dangerous voltages. Disconnect the instrument from all voltage
sources while it is being opened.
WARNING
The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain
live for 10 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power
supply.
CAUTION
Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible to damage
from ESD (electrostatic discharge). Perform the following procedures only at
a static-safe workstation and wear a grounding strap.
Chapter 14
14-3
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Replacing an Assembly
Procedures described in this chapter
The following pages describe assembly replacement procedures for the analyzer
assemblies listed below:
• Line Fuse on page 14-5
• Covers on page 14-6
• Front Panel Assembly on page 14-8
• Front Panel Keyboard and Interface Assemblies (A1, A2) on page 14-10
• Display, Display Lamp and Inverter Assemblies (A18, A27) on page 14-12
• Rear Panel Assembly on page 14-14
• Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly (A16) on page 14-16
• A3 Source Assembly on page 14-18
• A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator on page 14-20
• A8, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14 Card Cage Boards on page 14-22
• A9 CPU Board on page 14-24
• A9BT1 Battery on page 14-26
• A15 Preregulator on page 14-28
• A17 Motherboard Assembly on page 14-30
• A19 Graphics Processor on page 14-34
• A20 Disk Drive Assembly on page 14-36
• A21, A22 Test Port Couplers (8753ES Only) on page 14-40
• A21 Dual Directional Coupler (8753ET Only) on page 14-42
• A23 LED Board (8753ES Only) on page 14-44
• A24 Transfer Switch (8753ES Only) on page 14-46
• A25 Test Set Interface (8753ES Only) on page 14-48
• A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option 1D5) Assembly on page 14-50
• B1 Fan Assembly on page 14-52
IMPORTANT
14-4
Unless noted otherwise, all replacement procedures apply to both the
8753ES and the 8753ET.
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Line Fuse
Line Fuse
Tools Required
• small slot screwdriver
Removal
WARNING
For continued protection against fire hazard, replace line fuse only
with same type and rating (115 V operation: T 5A 125V UL/CSA; 230V
operation: T 4A H 250V IEC). The use of other fuses or materials is
prohibited.
1. Refer to Figure 14-1.
2. Disconnect the power cord.
3. Use a small slot screwdriver to pry open the fuse holder.
4. Replace the failed fuse with one of the correct rating for the line voltage. See
“8753ET/ES: Hardware, Preregulator” on page 13-55 to find the part number.
Replacement
1. Simply replace the fuse holder.
Figure 14-1
Chapter 14
Line Fuse
14-5
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Covers
Covers
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• T-20 TORX screwdriver
• T-25 TORX screwdriver
Refer to Figure 14-2 when performing the following procedures.
Removing the top cover
1. Remove both upper rear feet (item 1) by loosening the attaching screws (item 2).
2. Loosen the top cover screw (item 3).
3. Slide cover back and off.
Removing the side covers
1. Remove the top cover.
2. Remove the lower rear foot (item 4) that corresponds to the side cover you want to
remove by loosening the attaching screw (item 5).
3. Remove the handle assembly (item 6) by loosening the attaching screws (item 7).
4. Slide the cover back and off.
Removing the bottom cover
1. Remove both lower rear feet (item 4) by loosening the attaching screws (item 5).
2. Loosen the bottom cover screw (item 8).
3. Slide the cover back and off.
14-6
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Covers
Figure 14-2
Chapter 14
Covers
14-7
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Front Panel Assembly
Front Panel Assembly
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• small slot screwdriver
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
• 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
Refer to Figure 14-3 when using the following instructions.
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the front bottom feet (item 1).
3. Remove all of the RF cables that are attached to the front panel (item 2).
4. Remove the line button (item 6) by pulling it out.
5. Remove the trim strip (item 3) from the top edge of the front frame by prying under the
strip with a small slot screwdriver.
6. Remove the six screws (item 4) from the top and bottom edges of the frame.
7. Slide the front panel over the test port connectors.
8. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item 5). The front panel is now free from the instrument.
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
NOTE
14-8
When reconnecting semirigid cables, it is recommended that the connections
be torqued to 10 in-lb.
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Front Panel Assembly
Figure 14-3
Chapter 14
Front Panel Assembly
14-9
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Front Panel Keyboard and Interface Assemblies (A1, A2)
Front Panel Keyboard and Interface Assemblies
(A1, A2)
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• small slot screwdriver
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
• 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
Removal
1. Remove the front panel assembly from the analyzer (refer to “Front Panel Assembly” on
page 14-8).
2. Refer to Figure 14-4. Disconnect cables (items 4 and 7) by pulling up on the corners of
the connector base. This will release the cable for easy removal. Damage may occur to
the connector if this step is not followed.
3. Disconnect all other cables from the front panel interface board (items 1, 2, 3, and 6).
4. Remove the four screws (item 5) that secure the A2 interface board.
5. Remove the eight screws from the A1 front panel board to access and remove the rubber
keypad.
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
CAUTION
Damage may result if the following step is not followed.
2. To reconnect item 7, ensure that the ribbon cable is placed squarely into both of its
cable clamps.
14-10
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Front Panel Keyboard and Interface Assemblies (A1, A2)
Figure 14-4
Chapter 14
Front Panel Keyboard and Interface Assemblies
14-11
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Display, Display Lamp and Inverter Assemblies (A18, A27)
Display, Display Lamp and Inverter Assemblies
(A18, A27)
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• small slot screwdriver
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
• #0 Phillips Screwdriver
Removal
1. Remove the front panel assembly (refer to “Front Panel Assembly” on page 14-8).
2. Refer to Figure 14-5. Disconnect the cables (items 2, 3 and 4) by performing the
following steps:
a. Disconnect cable (item 2) from the inverter (A27). Slip item 2 out of both of its cable
clamps.
b. Disconnect item 4 from the inverter (A27).
c. Disconnect item 3 from the keyboard interface board (A2).
3. Remove the two screws (item 8) that attach the inverter (A27) and inverter cover (A28)
to the mounting plate (item 7). Note that this also allows the inverter cover to be
separated from the inverter.
4. Remove the three screws (item 1) along the bottom edge of the mounting plate.
5. Swing the bottom edge of the mounting plate up as shown, then pull it away from the
display. The display can now be removed from the front panel.
NOTE
The bottom half of Figure 14-5 depicts the rear view of the A18 assembly with
the mounting plate removed. Use the location of the display lamp cable
(item 4) to aid in orientation.
6. Remove the two screws (item 5) that attach the lamp to the display. Detach the lamp
from the display by pulling it down, then up, as shown.
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
2. Be sure to route ribbon cable 2 through both cable clamps.
14-12
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Display, Display Lamp and Inverter Assemblies (A18, A27)
CAUTION
Be sure that cables are plugged in square and correct. Failure to do so will
result in serious component damage.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 10 in-lb when replacing the display hold-down plate screws.
Figure 14-5
Chapter 14
Display, Display Lamp and Inverter Assemblies
14-13
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Rear Panel Assembly
Rear Panel Assembly
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top (item 1) and bottom covers (refer to
“Covers” on page 14-6).
2. Refer to Figure 14-6. Remove the four rear standoffs (item 2).
3. If the analyzer has option 1D5, remove the BNC jumper from the high stability
frequency reference (item 3).
4. Remove the four screws (item 5) that attach the interface bracket to the rear panel.
5. Remove the six screws (items 6 and 7) that attach the preregulator to the rear panel.
6. Remove the six screws (item 8) from the rear frame: two from the top edge, and four
from the bottom edge.
7. Remove the screw from the pc board stabilizer (item 9) and remove the stabilizer.
8. Lift the reference board (A12) from its motherboard connector and disconnect the
flexible RF cable from its connector on A12 (item 10).
9. Identify the wiring harness leading to the VGA connector (item 4). Follow this harness
back to its connection on the motherboard. The air flow cover, attached by two screws,
will have to be removed to get to this connection. Disconnect the VGA wire harness at
this point.
10.Pull the rear panel away from the frame. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item 11) from the
motherboard connector, pressing down and out on the connector locks. Disconnect the
wiring harness (item 12) from the motherboard.
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
14-14
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Rear Panel Assembly
Figure 14-6
Chapter 14
Rear Panel Assembly
14-15
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly (A16)
Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly (A16)
Tools Required
• 9/16 hex nut driver
• 3/16 hex nut driver
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top and bottom covers (refer to “Covers” on
page 14-6).
2. Refer to Figure 14-7. If the analyzer has option 1D5, remove the high-stability
frequency reference jumper (item 1).
3. Remove the hardware that attaches the seven (five for the 8753ET) BNC connectors to
the rear panel (item 2).
4. Remove the hardware that attaches the interface connector to the rear panel (item 3).
5. Remove the rear panel from the analyzer (refer to “Rear Panel Assembly” on
page 14-14).
6. If the analyzer has option 1D5, disconnect the cable (item 4) from the rear panel
interface board.
7. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item 5) from the rear panel interface board.
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
14-16
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly (A16)
Figure 14-7
Chapter 14
Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly
14-17
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A3 Source Assembly
A3 Source Assembly
Tools Required
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
• small slot screwdriver
• needle nose pliers
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover (refer to “Covers” on page 14-6).
2. Refer to Figure 14-8. Remove the source bracket (item 1) by removing four screws.
(It might be necessary to disconnect a flexible cable from the B sampler.)
3. Disconnect the flexible cable W26.
4. Disconnect the semirigid cable W1.
5. Lift the two retention clips (item 2) at the front and rear of the source assembly to an
upright position.
6. Move W1 to the side while lifting the source high enough to provide wrench clearance
for W24. To lift the A3 source assembly, use the source bracket handle (item 3).
7. Disconnect the semirigid cable W24.
8. Remove the source assembly from the instrument.
Replacement
1. Check the connector pins on the motherboard before reinstallation.
2. Slide the edges of the sheet metal partition (item 4) into the guides at the sides of the
source compartment. Press down on the module to ensure that it is well seated in the
motherboard connector.
3. Push down the retention clips (item 2). Reconnect the two semirigid cables (W1 and
W24) and one flexible cable (W26) to the source assembly.
NOTE
When reconnecting semirigid cables, it is recommended that the connections
be torqued to 10 in-lb.
4. Reinstall the source bracket (item 1).
5. Reconnect the flexible cable to the B sampler.
14-18
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A3 Source Assembly
Figure 14-8
Chapter 14
A3 Source Assembly
14-19
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator
A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator
Tools Required
• Needle-nose pliers
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover (refer to “Covers” on page 14-6).
2. Refer to Figure 14-9. To remove the B sampler (A6), you must remove the source
bracket (item 1).
3. Disconnect all cables from the top of the sampler (A4/A5/A6) or pulse generator (A7).
4. Remove the screws from the top of each sampler assembly. Extract the assembly from
the slot.
NOTE
To remove the A (A5) or R (A4) sampler, first remove the cable on the B (A6)
sampler.
NOTE
If you are removing the pulse generator (A7), the grounding clip, which rests
on top of the assembly, will become loose once the four screws are removed. Be
sure to replace the grounding clip when reinstalling the pulse generator
assembly.
Replacement
1. Check the connector pins on the motherboard before reinstallation.
2. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
NOTE
• When reconnecting semirigid cables, it is recommended that the
connections be torqued to 10 in-lb.
• Be sure to route W8 and W9 as shown. No excess wire should be hanging
in the A11 and A14 board slots. Routing the wires in this manner will
reduce noise and crosstalk.
14-20
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator
Figure 14-9
Chapter 14
A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator
14-21
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A8, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14 Card Cage Boards
A8, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14 Card Cage Boards
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover (refer to “Covers” on page 14-6).
2. Refer to Figure 14-10. Remove the screw from the pc board stabilizer and remove the
stabilizer.
3. Lift the two extractors located at each end of the board. Lift the board from the card
cage slot, just enough to disconnect any flexible cables that may be connected to it.
4. Remove the board from the card cage slot.
Replacement
1. Check the connector pins on the motherboard before reinstallation.
2. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
NOTE
14-22
Be sure to route W8 and W9 as shown. No excess wire should be hanging in
the A11 and A14 board slots. Routing the wires in this manner will reduce
noise and crosstalk in the instrument.
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A8, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14 Card Cage Boards
Figure 14-10
Chapter 14
Card Cage Boards: A8, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14
14-23
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A9 CPU Board
A9 CPU Board
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the top and bottom covers (refer to “Covers” on page 14-6).
3. Remove the rear panel assembly, following steps 2 through 6 of “Rear Panel Assembly”
on page 14-14.
4. Turn the analyzer upside down.
5. Pull the rear panel away from the frame as shown in Figure 14-11.
6. Disconnect the four ribbon cables (W20, W35, W36, and W37) from the CPU board (A9).
7. Remove the three screws (item 2) that secure the CPU board (A9) to the deck. Slide the
board towards the front of the instrument so that it disengages from the three standoffs
(item 3).
8. Lift the board off of the standoffs.
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
2. Leave the bottom cover off in order to perform the post repair procedures located at the
end of this chapter.
14-24
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A9 CPU Board
Figure 14-11
Chapter 14
A9 CPU Board
14-25
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A9BT1 Battery
A9BT1 Battery
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
• soldering iron with associated soldering tools
Removal
1. Remove the A9 CPU board (refer to “A9 CPU Board” on page 14-24).
2. Refer to Figure 14-12. Unsolder and remove A9BT1 from the A9 CPU board.
WARNING
Battery A9BT1 contains lithium. Do not incinerate or puncture this
battery. Discard used batteries according to manufacturer’s
instructions.
Replacement
1. Make sure the new battery is inserted into the A9 board with the correct polarity.
WARNING
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only
with the same or equivalent type recommended.
2. Solder the battery into place.
3. Replace the A9 CPU board (refer to “A9 CPU Board” on page 14-24).
14-26
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A9BT1 Battery
Figure 14-12
Chapter 14
A9BT1 Battery
14-27
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A15 Preregulator
A15 Preregulator
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Remove the rear panel (refer to “Rear Panel Assembly” on page 14-14).
2. Remove the two remaining screws from the top of the rear frame.
3. Refer to Figure 14-13. Disconnect the wire bundle (A15W1) from A8J2 and A17J3.
4. Remove the preregulator (A15) from the frame.
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
NOTE
• When reinstalling the preregulator (A15), make sure the three grommets
(item 1) on A15W1 are seated in the two slots (item 2) on the back side of
the preregulator and the slot (item 3) in the card cage wall.
• After reinstalling the preregulator (A15), be sure to set the line voltage
selector to the appropriate setting, 115 V or 230 V.
14-28
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A15 Preregulator
Figure 14-13
Chapter 14
A15 Preregulator
14-29
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A17 Motherboard Assembly
A17 Motherboard Assembly
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• T-20 TORX screwdriver
• small slot screwdriver
• 2.5-mm hex-key driver
• 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
To remove the A17 motherboard assembly only, perform the following steps to remove all
assemblies and cables that connect to the motherboard.
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top, bottom, and side covers (refer to
“Covers” on page 14-6).
2. Remove the front panel assembly (refer to “Front Panel Assembly” on page 14-8).
3. Remove the rear panel assembly (refer to “Rear Panel Assembly” on page 14-14).
4. Remove the preregulator (refer to “A15 Preregulator” on page 14-28).
5. Remove the graphics processor (refer to “A19 Graphics Processor” on page 14-34).
6. Remove the test set deck (item 3) by removing the three screws (item 4) from the bottom
and four screws (item 5) from the side frames. For clarity, the figure on the next page
does not show the assemblies attached to the test set deck.
7. Remove the CPU board (refer to “A9 CPU Board” on page 14-24).
8. Refer to Figure 14-14. Remove the memory deck (item 1) by removing three screws
(item 2) from the bottom and four screws (item 6) from the side frames.
9. Remove the source assembly (refer to “A3 Source Assembly” on page 14-18).
10.Remove the samplers and pulse generator (refer to “A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse
Generator” on page 14-20).
11.Remove the card cage boards (refer to “A8, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14 Card Cage Boards”
on page 14-22). Continue with step 12 to remove the motherboard only, or to step 13 to
remove the motherboard/card cage assembly.
12.To disconnect the motherboard (item 7), remove the 34 riv screws (item 8). Important:
Do not misplace any of these screws.
14-30
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A17 Motherboard Assembly
Figure 14-14
Chapter 14
A17 Motherboard Assembly
14-31
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A17 Motherboard Assembly
To remove the A17 motherboard assembly along with the card cage, continue with the
following step:
13.Refer to Figure 14-15. Remove the front frame (item 1) and rear frame (item 6) by
removing the attaching screws (item 7). At this point, only the motherboard/card cage
assembly should remain. This whole assembly is replaceable (see “8753ET/ES: Chassis
Parts, Inside” on page 13-58).
Figure 14-15
A17 Motherboard and Card Cage Assembly
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
14-32
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A17 Motherboard Assembly
This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 14
14-33
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A19 Graphics Processor
A19 Graphics Processor
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the top cover (refer to “Covers” on page 14-6) and front panel (refer to “Front
Panel Assembly” on page 14-8).
3. Refer to Figure 14-16. Remove the six screws (item 1) from the GSP cover (item 2) and
lift off.
4. Swing out the handles (item 3) and pull the GSP board (item 4) out of the analyzer.
Replacement
1. Check the connector pins on the motherboard before reinstallation.
2. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
14-34
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A19 Graphics Processor
Figure 14-16
Chapter 14
A19 Graphics Processor
14-35
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A20 Disk Drive Assembly
A20 Disk Drive Assembly
Tools Required
• T-8 TORX screwdriver
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• T-25 TORX screwdriver
• #2 ball-end hex driver with long shaft
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
• 3.5” diskette
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top, bottom, and left side covers (“Covers” on
page 14-6).
NOTE
The next step instructs you to disconnect a ribbon cable from its connector on
the CPU board. Figure 14-17 depicts the location of the connector (item 1).
2. Turn the analyzer onto its right side and gently pull up on each end of the connector
body to release the disk drive ribbon cable (item 1 of Figure 14-17) from the CPU board.
3. Remove the four screws (item 2) that secure the disk drive bracket to the analyzer
chassis.
NOTE
Save the screws removed in this step for installing the replacement disk
drive.
4. Slide the disk drive—with the attached cable—out of the top of the instrument.
5. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the disk drive by gently pulling up on each end of the
connector body to release the ribbon cable.
6. Remove the three screws (item 3) that secure the bracket to the disk drive.
7. Remove the plug (item 4) from the disk drive.
14-36
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A20 Disk Drive Assembly
Figure 14-17
Chapter 14
A20 Disk Drive Assembly
14-37
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A20 Disk Drive Assembly
A20 Disk Drive Assembly Replacement
1. Attach the plug (item 4) to the replacement disk drive.
2. Attach the disk drive bracket to the replacement disk drive as shown. Leave the three
screws loose in case the disk drive’s position needs to be adjusted.
NOTE
Place the disk drive on a horizontal and flat surface when attaching the
bracket. This minimizes distortion of the disk drive.
3. Connect the disk drive ribbon cable to the replacement disk drive.
NOTE
In steps 3 and 5, make sure that the connector-contacts on both the disk drive
and the CPU touch the ribbon cable contact areas (the ribbon-cable contact
areas must face the contacts in the disk drive and CPU connectors). Also
assure that the connector is properly locked by gently pushing down on the
ends of the connector body.
4. Slide the disk drive assembly into the analyzer. Align the disk drive door with the
opening in the front panel. Attach it to the analyzer frame using the four screws from
step 3 of the “Removal” procedure.
5. Route the ribbon cable through the side access hole. Avoid twisting the cable: duplicate
the original folds made to the cable. Connect the disk drive cable to the CPU board.
Refer to item 1 in Figure 14-17. Secure the ribbon cable to its clamp on the test set deck.
6. Remove the trim strip from the top of the front panel.
7. Remove the top left screw located under the trim strip.
8. Tighten the three screws (item 3) that fasten the disk drive to the bracket. The top
front-most screw is accessed through the exposed screw-hole under the trim strip.
14-38
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A20 Disk Drive Assembly
Test the disk-eject function, and adjust if required.
1. Insert a diskette into the disk drive and then eject the disk.
2. If the diskette does not eject properly, loosen and then retighten the three screws that
hold the disk drive to the disk drive bracket:
a. Loosen the three screws that are readily accessible.
b. Loosen the upper-most front screw through the screw hole left empty in step 7 on
page 14-38.
c. Center the disk drive in the opening.
d. Retighten all three screws.
Reinstall the front panel and covers
1. Reinstall the top left screw under the trim strip.
2. Reinstall the trim strip.
3. Reinstall the covers. If necessary, refer to “Front Panel Assembly” on page 14-8 for help
with this task.
Chapter 14
14-39
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A21, A22 Test Port Couplers (8753ES Only)
A21, A22 Test Port Couplers (8753ES Only)
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• small slot screwdriver
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
• 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
• soldering iron and solder
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the bottom cover (refer to “Covers” on page 14-6).
2. Refer to Figure 14-18. Disconnect the small bias wires from the test set interface board:
• For coupler A21, disconnect the gray wire (A21W1).
• For coupler A22, disconnect the gray wire (A22W1).
3. Disconnect the two semirigid cables from the coupler assembly:
• For coupler A21 disconnect W3 and W31.
• For coupler A22 disconnect W4 and W32.
4. Remove the four screws, washers, and pressure springs that secure the coupler to the
test set deck. Remove the coupler.
5. Remove the pressure springs.
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
NOTE
• If you're installing a new coupler, the gold lead on the feedthru capacitor
(item 1) must be carefully bent at 90 degrees to prevent it from shorting to
the bottom cover.
• When reconnecting semirigid cables, it is recommended that the
connections be torqued to 10 in-lb.
14-40
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A21, A22 Test Port Couplers (8753ES Only)
Figure 14-18
Chapter 14
A21, A22 Test Port Couplers
14-41
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A21 Dual Directional Coupler (8753ET Only)
A21 Dual Directional Coupler (8753ET Only)
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
• Small slot screwdriver
Removal
The dual directional coupler is replaced as a unit together with its mounting bracket and
port connectors.
1. Turn the analyzer over onto its top and remove the bottom cover (refer to “Covers” on
page 14-6).
NOTE
In the following step you will be disconnecting some semi-rigid cables from
the coupler. Note that there are three semi-rigid cables to remove on
analyzers without Option 004, and only two cables to remove on analyzers
with Option 004. Be sure to refer to the appropriate illustration on the next
page.
2. Refer to Figure 14-19. Use the 5/16-inch open-end wrench to disconnect the semi-rigid
cables (item 1) from the dual directional coupler and from the rear of the transmission
port connector.
3. Remove the four screws (item 2) that attach the coupler bracket to the test set deck.
4. Remove the two screws (item 3) that secure the coupler bracket to the lower lip of the
front frame.
5. Slide the coupler/bracket assembly towards the rear of the instrument. This will allow
room for the open-end wrench to remove the semi-rigid cable from the rear of the
transmission port connector (item 4).
6. Lift the coupler bracket over the four studs in the test set deck, then slide the bracket
down and back to remove the coupler assembly from the analyzer.
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
NOTE
14-42
When reconnecting semirigid cables, it is recommended that the connections
be torqued to 10 in-lb.
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A21 Dual Directional Coupler (8753ET Only)
Figure 14-19
Chapter 14
A21 Dual Directional Coupler
14-43
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A23 LED Board (8753ES Only)
A23 LED Board (8753ES Only)
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• small slot screwdriver
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
• 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the bottom cover (refer to “Covers” on page 14-6).
2. Remove the front panel (refer to “Front Panel Assembly” on page 14-8).
3. Remove the A22 test port coupler (refer to “A21, A22 Test Port Couplers (8753ES Only)”
on page 14-40).
4. Refer to Figure 14-20. Disconnect W33 from the LED board (A23).
5. Remove the screw (item 1) from the front of the test set deck.
6. Remove the LED board (A23).
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
14-44
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A23 LED Board (8753ES Only)
Figure 14-20
Chapter 14
A23 LED Board
14-45
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A24 Transfer Switch (8753ES Only)
A24 Transfer Switch (8753ES Only)
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the bottom cover (refer to “Covers” on page 14-6).
2. Refer to Figure 14-21. Disconnect A24W1 from J3 on the test set interface board (A25).
3. Disconnect the three semirigid cables (W1, W31, and W32) from the transfer switch
(A24).
4. Remove the two screws (item 1) that secure the transfer switch to the test set deck.
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
NOTE
14-46
When reconnecting semirigid cables, it is recommended that the connections
be torqued to 10 in-lb.
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A24 Transfer Switch (8753ES Only)
Figure 14-21
Chapter 14
A24 Transfer Switch
14-47
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A25 Test Set Interface (8753ES Only)
A25 Test Set Interface (8753ES Only)
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the bottom cover (refer to “Covers” on page 14-6).
2. Refer to Figure 14-22. Disconnect all cables and wires (A21W1, A22W1, W33, and W34)
from the test set interface board (A25).
3. Remove the five screws (item 1) that secure the test set interface board.
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
14-48
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A25 Test Set Interface (8753ES Only)
Figure 14-22
Chapter 14
A25 Test Set Interface
14-49
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option 1D5) Assembly
A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option 1D5)
Assembly
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• 9/16-inch hex-nut driver
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Remove the rear panel (refer to “Rear Panel Assembly” on page 14-14).
2. Refer to Figure 14-23. Disconnect W30 from the high stability frequency reference
board (A26).
3. Remove the BNC connector nut and washer from the 10 MHz PRECISION
REFERENCE connector (item 1) on the rear panel.
4. Remove the screw (item 4) that attaches the 1D5 assembly to the rear panel.
5. Remove the screw (item 2) that secures the high stability frequency reference board
(A26) to the bracket.
6. Slide the board out of the bracket. Be careful not to lose the plastic spacer washer
(item 3) that is on the BNC connector as the board is being removed.
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
NOTE
Before reinserting the high stability frequency reference board (A26) into the
bracket, be sure the plastic spacer washer (item 3) is on the BNC connector.
14-50
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option 1D5) Assembly
Figure 14-23
Chapter 14
A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option 1D5) Assembly
14-51
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
B1 Fan Assembly
B1 Fan Assembly
Tools Required
• 2.5-mm hex-key driver
• T-10 TORX screwdriver
• T-15 TORX screwdriver
• ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Remove the rear panel (refer to “Rear Panel Assembly” on page 14-14).
2. Refer to Figure 14-24. Remove the four screws (item 1) that secure the fan and fan cover
to the rear panel.
Replacement
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
NOTE
The fan should be installed so that the direction of the air flow is away from
the instrument. There is an arrow on the fan chassis indicating the air flow
direction.
Figure 14-24
14-52
B1 Fan Assembly
Chapter 14
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures
Table 3-1 on page 3-3 lists the additional service procedures which you must perform to
ensure that the analyzer is working correctly, following the replacement of an assembly.
Perform the procedures in the order that they are listed in the table.
Chapter 14
14-53
Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures
14-54
Chapter 14
15 Safety and Regulatory Information
15-1
Safety and Regulatory Information
General Information
General Information
Maintenance
Clean the cabinet, using a dry or damp cloth only.
WARNING
To prevent electrical shock, disconnect the analyzer from mains
before cleaning. Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water
to clean the external case parts. Do not attempt to clean internally.
Assistance
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available
for Agilent Technologies products.
For any assistance, contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office.
15-2
Chapter 15
Safety and Regulatory Information
General Information
Shipment for Service
If you are sending the instrument to Agilent Technologies for service, ship the analyzer to
the nearest Agilent service center for repair, including a description of any failed test and
any error message. Ship the analyzer using the original or comparable antistatic
packaging materials.
Table 15-1 Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Offices
Online assistance: www.agilent.com/find/assist
United States
(tel) 1 800 452 4844
Latin America
(tel) (305) 269 7500
(fax) (305) 269 7599
Canada
(tel) 1 877 894 4414
(fax) (905) 282-6495
Europe
(tel) (+31) 20 547 2323
(fax) (+31) 20 547 2390
Australia
(tel) 1 800 629 485
(fax) (+61) 3 9210 5947
New Zealand
(tel) 0 800 738 378
(fax) (+64) 4 495 8950
Japan
(tel) (+81) 426 56 7832
(fax) (+81) 426 56 7840
Singapore
(tel) 1 800 375 8100
(fax) (65) 836 0252
Malaysia
(tel) 1 800 828 848
(fax) 1 800 801 664
India
(tel) 1 600 11 2929
(fax) 000 800 650 1101
Hong Kong
(tel) 800 930 871
(fax) (852) 2506 9233
Taiwan
(tel) 0800 047 866
(fax) (886) 2 25456723
Philippines
(tel) (632) 8426802
(tel) (PLDT subscriber only)
1 800 16510170
(fax) (632) 8426809
(fax) (PLDT subscriber only)
1 800 16510288
Thailand
(tel) (outside Bangkok)
(088) 226 008
(tel) (within Bangkok)
(662) 661 3999
(fax) (66) 1 661 3714
People’s Republic of China
(tel) (preferred)
800 810 0189
(tel) (alternate)
10800 650 0021
(fax) 10800 650 0121
Chapter 15
15-3
Safety and Regulatory Information
Safety Symbols
Safety Symbols
The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual. Familiarize yourself with
each of the symbols and its meaning before operating this instrument.
CAUTION
Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not
correctly performed or adhered to, would result in damage to or destruction of
the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution note until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
WARNING
Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if
not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss
of life. Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
15-4
Chapter 15
Safety and Regulatory Information
Instrument Markings
Instrument Markings
The instruction documentation symbol. The product is marked with
this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the
instructions in the documentation.
The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community.
(If accompanied by a year, it is when the design was proven.)
The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards
Association.
This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class
A product.
ICES / NMB-001
This is a marking to indicate product compliance with the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Standard (ICES-001).
The C-Tick mark is a registered trademark of the Australian
Spectrum Management Agency.
Lithium Battery Disposal
If the battery on the CPU board (A9) becomes ready for disposal. Dispose of it to your
country’s requirements. If required, you may return the battery to the nearest Agilent
Technologies sales or service office for disposal. For replacement of the battery, refer to
“A9BT1 Battery” on page 14-26.
Chapter 15
15-5
Safety and Regulatory Information
Safety Considerations
Safety Considerations
NOTE
This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC
Publication 1010, Safety Requirements for Electronics Measuring Apparatus,
and has been supplied in a safe condition. This instruction documentation
contains information and warnings which must be followed by the user to
ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in a safe condition.
Safety Earth Ground
WARNING
This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a protective earthing
ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall only
be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth
contact. Any interruption of the protective conductor, inside or
outside the instrument, is likely to make the instrument dangerous.
Intentional interruption is prohibited.
WARNING
Always use the three-prong AC power cord supplied with this
product. Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using
this cord may cause product damage.
Before Applying Power
CAUTION
The front panel LINE switch disconnects the mains circuits from the mains
supply after the EMC filters and before other parts of the instrument.
CAUTION
Before switching on this instrument, make sure that the analyzer line voltage
selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is
installed.
CAUTION
If this product is to be energized via an autotransformer make sure the
common terminal is connected to the neutral (grounded side of the mains
supply).
15-6
Chapter 15
Safety and Regulatory Information
Safety Considerations
Servicing
WARNING
No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified
personnel. To prevent electrical shock, do not remove covers.
WARNING
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only.
To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you
are qualified to do so.
WARNING
The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose
dangerous voltages. Disconnect the instrument from all voltage
sources while it is being opened.
WARNING
Adjustments described in this document may be performed with
power supplied to the product while protective covers are removed.
Energy available at many points may, if contacted, result in personal
injury.
WARNING
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only
with the same or equivalent type recommended. Discard used
batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING
The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain
live for 10 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power
supply.
WARNING
For continued protection against fire hazard, replace line fuse only
with same type and rating (115 V operation: T 5A 125V UL/CSA; 230V
operation: T 4A H 250V IEC). The use of other fuses or materials is
prohibited.
Chapter 15
15-7
Safety and Regulatory Information
Safety Considerations
General
WARNING
To prevent electrical shock, disconnect the analyzer from mains
before cleaning. Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water
to clean the external case parts. Do not attempt to clean internally.
WARNING
If this product is not used as specified, the protection provided by
the equipment could be impaired. This product must be used in a
normal condition (in which all means for protection are intact) only.
CAUTION
This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and Pollution
Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and 664 respectively.
CAUTION
VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS: When installing the product in a cabinet,
the convection into and out of the product must not be restricted. The ambient
temperature (outside the cabinet) must be less than the maximum operating
temperature of the product by 4° C for every 100 watts dissipated in the
cabinet. If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater that 800 watts,
then forced convection must be used.
WARNING
Install the instrument according to the enclosure protection
provided. This instrument does not protect against the ingress of
water. This instrument protects against finger access to hazardous
parts within the enclosure.
Compliance with German FTZ Emissions Requirements
This network analyzer complies with German FTZ 526/527 Radiated Emissions and
Conducted Emission requirements.
Compliance with German Noise Requirements
This is to declare that this instrument is in conformance with the German Regulation on
Noise Declaration for Machines (Laermangabe nach der Maschinenlaermrerordung −3.
GSGV Deutschland).
Acoustic Noise Emission/Geraeuschemission
LpA <70 dB
Lpa <70 dB
Operator Position
am Arbeitsplatz
Normal Operation
normaler Betrieb
per ISO 7779
nach DIN 45635 t. 19
15-8
Chapter 15
Index
Symbols
+5 V digital supply
theory of operation, 12-7
Numerics
10 MHz HI OUT Waveform from
A14J1, 7-21
10 MHz precision reference
assembly replacement, 14-50
100 kHz pulses, 7-14
1st LO signal at sampler/mixer,
8-10
25 MHz HI OUT Waveform from
A14J1, 7-21
2nd IF (4 kHz) signal locations,
8-9
2nd LO locations, 8-11
2ND LO waveforms, 7-17
4 kHz signal check, 8-9
4 MHz REF signal check, 8-6
4 MHz reference signal, 7-16
60 MHz HI OUT Waveform from
A14J1, 7-22
75 ohm impedance option, 1-9
8753E adjustments, 3-1
8753ES block diagram, 4-23
A
A and B input traces check, 4-17
A1/A2 front panel
troubleshooting, 6-12
A10 assembly signals required,
8-7
A10 check by substitution or
signal examination, 8-7
A10 digital IF , 10-28, 12-27
digital control, 12-11
A11 input signals, 7-29
A11 phase lock, 10-29
source, 12-14
A11 phase lock and A3 source
check, 7-8
A11 phase lock check, 7-28
A12 digital control signals check,
7-18
A12 reference, 10-35
source, 12-14
A12 reference check, 7-12
A13 frac-N analog
source, 12-14
A13/A14 Fractional-N Check,
7-20
A14 Divide-by-N Circuit Check,
7-23
A14 Frac-N digital source, 12-14
A14 fractional-N (digital), 10-38
Index
A14 generated digital control
signals, 7-24
A14 VCO exercise, 7-22
A14-to-A13 digital control signals
check, 7-23
A15 preregulator
check, 5-10
theory of operation, 12-5
A15W1 plug detail, 5-11
A16 rear panel
digital control, 12-13
A18 display
digital control, 12-12
power, 12-8
A19 GSP digital control, 12-12
A2 front panel processor digital
control, 12-11
A21 test port coupler, 12-25
A22 test port coupler, 12-25
A23 LED front panel, 12-25
A24 transfer switch, 12-25
A25 test set interface, 12-25
A27 inverter digital control, 12-13
A3 source
and A11 phase lock check , 7-8
external source mode, 12-20
frequency offset, 12-19
harmonic analysis, 12-19
high band theory, 12-17
low band theory, 12-15
operation in other modes, 12-19
source, 12-15
super low band theory, 12-15
theory of operation, 12-3
tuned receiver mode, 12-22
A4 sampler/mixer, 12-27
A4 sampler/mixer check, 7-8
A5 sampler/mixer, 12-27
A6 sampler/mixer, 12-27
A7 pulse generator check, 7-25
A7 pulse generator source, 12-14
A8 post regulator
air flow detector, 12-7
display power, 12-8
fuses and voltages, 5-13
green LEDs, 12-7
probe power, 12-8
shutdown circuit, 12-8
test points, 5-6
theory of operation, 12-7
variable fan circuit, 12-8
A9 CPU
digital control, 12-11
operation check, 6-5
abbreviation definitions, 13-62
ABUS Cor., 10-12
ABUS node 16 for power check,
4-15
ABUS test, 10-10
accessories
error message check, 4-22
inspection, 9-4
troubleshooting, 4-22
troubleshooting chapter, 9-1
accuracy of frequency adjustment,
3-43
adapters, 1-3
ADC Hist., 10-10
ADC Lin., 10-9
ADC main, 10-20
ADC offset correction constants
adjustment, 3-15
ADC Ofs., 10-9
ADC Ofs. Cor., 10-12
ADD, 10-7
addresses for GPIB systems, 4-8
adjustment
A9 switch positions, 3-6
ADC offset correction constants
(test 52), 3-15
analog bus correction constants
(test 46), 3-9
cavity oscillator frequency
correction constants (test
54), 3-26
fractional-N frequency range,
3-40
fractional-N spur avoidance and
FM sideband, 3-49
frequency accuracy, 3-43
high/low band transition, 3-47
IF amplifier correction
constants (test 51), 3-14
initialize EEPROM’s (test 58),
3-33
option numbers correction
constants (test 56), 3-32
RF output power correction
constants (test 47), 3-11
sampler magnitude and phase
correction constants (test
53), 3-16
sequences for mechanical
adjustments, 3-55
serial number correction
constants (test 55), 3-31
source default correction
constants (test 44), 3-7
source pretune correction
constants (test 48), 3-10
source pretune default
correction constants (test
45), 3-8
Index-1
Index
source spur avoidance tracking ,
3-52
tests, 10-4
ADJUSTMENT TESTS, 10-6
adjustments, 3-1
air flow detector, 12-8
ALC ON OFF , 10-17
ALL INT, 10-8
Alter and Normal switch position
adjustment, 3-6
amplifier (IF) adjustment, 3-14
ANALOG BUS, 10-21
analog bus, 10-20
codes, 10-43
correction constants
adjustment, 3-9
reference frequencies check,
7-13
YO coil drive check, 7-11
analog bus node 1, 10-23
analog bus node 10, 10-29
analog bus node 11, 10-29
analog bus node 12, 10-29
analog bus node 13, 14, 10-30
analog bus node 15, 10-31
analog bus node 16, 10-32
analog bus node 17, 10-33
analog bus node 18, 10-34
analog bus node 19, 10-34
analog bus node 2, 10-24
analog bus node 20, 10-35
analog bus node 21, 10-35
analog bus node 22, 10-35
analog bus node 23, 10-36
analog bus node 24, 10-37
analog bus node 25, 10-37
analog bus node 26, 10-37
analog bus node 27, 10-38
analog bus node 28, 10-38
analog bus node 29, 10-38
analog bus node 3, 10-25
analog bus node 30, 10-39
analog bus node 4, 10-26
analog bus node 5, 10-26
analog bus node 6, 10-27
analog bus node 7, 10-28
analog bus node 8, 10-28
analog bus node 9, 10-29
analog bus nodes, 10-22
A3, 10-22
analog in menu, 10-21
analyzer
adjustments, 3-1
block diagram, 4-23
GPIB addresses, 4-8
options available, 1-8
spectrum , 1-3
Index-2
theory of operation, 12-1
and, 3-1
antistatic wrist strap, 1-2
antistatic wrist strap cord, 1-2
appendix for source group
troubleshooting, 7-30
assembly replacement, 14-1
A10 digital IF, 14-22
A11 phase lock, 14-22
A12 reference, 14-22
A13 frac-N analog, 14-22
A14 frac-N digital, 14-22
A15 preregulator, 14-28
A17 motherboard, 14-30
A19 graphics processor, 14-34
A20 disk drive, 14-36
A21 dual directional coupler,
14-42
A21 test port couplers, 14-40
A22 test port couplers, 14-40
A23 LED board, 14-44
A24 transfer switch, 14-46
A25 test set interface, 14-48
A26 high stability frequency
reference, 14-50
A3 source, 14-18
A4 R-sampler, 14-20
A5 A-sampler, 14-20
A6 B-sampler, 14-20
A7 pulse generator, 14-20
A8 post regulator, 14-22
A9 CPU, 14-24
A9BT1 battery, 14-26
B1 fan, 14-52
covers, 14-6
display, 14-12
display lamp, 14-12
front panel, 14-8
front panel interface, 14-10
keypad, 14-10
line fuse, 14-5
rear panel, 14-14
rear panel interface, 14-16
attenuator
fixed, 1-3
theory of operation, 12-4
available options, 1-8
B
B and A inputs check, 8-4
background intensity check for
display , 6-7
backup EEPROM disk, 3-34
bad cables, 9-2
band (high/low) transition
adjustment, 3-47
BATTERY FAILED. STATE
MEMORY CLEARED, 10-44
BATTERY LOW. STORE SAVE
REGS TO DISK, 10-44
block diagram, 4-23
digital control group, 6-3
power supply, 5-4
broadband power problems, 7-31
built-in test set, 12-25
LED front panel, 12-25
test port couplers, 12-25
test set interface, 12-25
transfer switch, 12-25
bus nodes, 10-22
bus, analog, 10-20
C
cable inspection, 6-15
cable test, 9-6
cables, 1-4
CAL FACTOR SENSOR A, 10-6
CAL FACTOR SENSOR B, 10-6
CALIBRATION ABORTED,
10-44
calibration coefficients, 11-1
calibration device inspection, 9-4
calibration kit, 2-3
7 mm, 50 W, 1-3
device verification, 9-5
Type-N, 50 ohm, 1-3
CALIBRATION REQUIRED,
10-44
calibration, certificate, 2-4
care of connectors, 1-7
CAUTION
OVERLOAD ON INPUT A,
POWER REDUCED, 8-4
OVERLOAD ON INPUT B,
POWER REDUCED, 8-4
OVERLOAD ON INPUT R,
POWER REDUCED, 8-4
Cav osc Cor., 10-12
cavity oscillator frequency
adjustment, 3-26
cavity oscillator frequency
correction constants
adjustment, 3-26
CC procedures
ADC offset (test 52), 3-15
analog bus (test 46), 3-9
cavity oscillator frequency (test
54), 3-26
IF amplifier (test 51), 3-14
initialize EEPROM’s (test 58),
3-33
option numbers (test 56), 3-32
Index
Index
retrieve correction constant data
from EEPROM backup disk,
3-35
RF output power (test 47), 3-11
sampler magnitude (test 53),
3-16
source default (test 44), 3-7
source pretune (test 48), 3-10
source pretune default (test 45),
3-8
unprotected hardware option
numbers, 3-54
center conductor damage, 9-4
certificate of calibration, 2-4
check
1st LO signal at sampler/mixer,
8-10
4 MHz REF signal, 8-6
A and B input traces, 4-17
A and B inputs, 8-4
A1/A2 front panel, 6-12
A10 by substitution or signal
examination, 8-7
A11 phase lock, 7-28
A12 digital control signals, 7-18
A13/A14 Fractional-N, 7-20
A13/A14 fractional-N, 7-20
A14 Divide-by-N Circuit Check,
7-23
A14-to-A13 digital control
signals, 7-23
A15 Preregulator, 5-10
A3 source and A11 phase lock,
7-8
A4 sampler/mixer, 7-8
A7 pulse generator, 7-25
A8 fuses and voltages, 5-13
A9 CPU control, 6-5
accessories error messages, 4-22
CPU control, 6-5
digital control, 4-12
disk drive, 4-9
fan voltages, 5-19
FN LO at A12, 7-16
for a faulty assembly, 5-11
GPIB systems, 4-8
line voltage, selector switch,
fuse, 5-7
motherboard, 5-12
operating temperature, 5-12
operation of A9 CPU control, 6-5
phase lock error message, 7-6
phase lock error messages, 4-14
plotter or printer, 4-8
post regulator voltages, 5-6
power supply, 4-11
power up sequence, 4-12
Index
preregulator LEDs, 4-11
rear panel LEDs, 4-11
receiver, 4-17
receiver error messages, 4-18
source, 4-14
the 4 kHz signal, 8-9
trace with sampler correction
off, 8-10
YO coil drive with analog bus,
7-11
check front panel cables, 6-15
cleaning of connectors, 1-7
CLEAR LIST, 10-7
coax cable, 1-4
codes for analog bus, 10-43
coefficients, 11-1
comb tooth at 3 GHz, 7-26
components related to specific
error terms, 9-5
compression test, 2-72, 2-75
configurable test set option , 1-8
connection techniques, 1-7
connector, care of, 1-7
CONTINUE TEST, 10-6
controller GPIB address, 4-8
controller troubleshooting , 4-9
conventions for symbols, 10-42
correction constants
ADC offset (test 52), 3-15
analog bus (test 46), 3-9
cavity oscillator frequency (test
54), 3-26
display intensity (test 45), 6-7
IF amplifier (test 51), 3-14
initialize EEPROMs (test 58),
3-33
option numbers (test 56), 3-32
retrieval from EEPROM backup
disk, 3-35
RF output power (test 47), 3-11
sampler magnitude (test 53),
3-16
serial number (test 55), 3-31
source default (test 44), 3-7
source pretune (test 48), 3-10
source pretune default (test 45),
3-8
unprotected hardware option
numbers, 3-54
CORRECTION CONSTANTS
NOT STORED, 10-44
CORRECTION TURNED OFF,
10-44
counter, 10-20
COUNTER OFF, 10-21
counter readout location, 10-33
counter, frequency, 1-3
CPU
digital control, 12-11
operation check, 6-5
crosstalk test, 2-45, 2-127
CURRENT PARAMETER NOT
IN CAL SET, 10-45
D
damage to center conductors, 9-4
data that is faulty, 4-18
DEADLOCK, 10-45
default correction constants
adjustment for
source, 3-7
source pretune, 3-8
DELETE, 10-7
description of tests, 10-8
DEVICE
not on, not connect, wrong
addrs, 10-45
diagnose softkey, 10-7
diagnostic
error terms, 11-1
LEDs for A15, 5-5
of analyzer, 4-5
routines for phase lock, 7-30
tests, 6-16
diagnostics, internal, 10-3
diagram
8753E, 4-23
A4 sampler/mixer to phase lock
cable, 7-8
digital control group, 6-3
power supply, 5-4
DIF Control, 10-9
DIF Counter, 10-9
digital control
A1 front panel, 12-11
A10 digital IF, 12-11
A16 rear panel, 12-13
A18 display, 12-12
A19 GSP, 12-12
A2 front panel processor, 12-11
A27 inverter, 12-13
A9 CPU, 12-11
check, 4-12
digital signal processor, 12-12
EEPROM, 12-12
group block diagram, 6-3
lines observed using L INTCOP
as trigger, 8-8
main CPU, 12-11
main RAM, 12-11
signals A14-to-A13 check, 7-23
signals check, 7-18
signals generated from A14,
7-24
Index-3
Index
theory of operation, 12-9
troubleshooting chapter, 6-1
digital data lines observed using L
INTCOP as trigger, 8-8
digital IF, 10-28, 12-30
digital control, 12-11
digital voltmeter, 1-3
directivity (EDF and EDR), 11-6
disable shutdown circuit, 5-14
DISK
not on, not connected, wrong
addrs, 10-45
disk drive
check, 4-9
external, GPIB address, 4-8
replacement, 14-38
DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM ,
10-45
DISK MESSAGE LENGTH
ERROR, 10-45
DISK READ/WRITE ERROR,
10-45
disk, floppy , 1-3
disk, verification , 2-5, 2-87
Disp 2 Ex., 10-12
Disp/cpu com., 10-13
display
digital control, 12-12
intensity , 6-7
power, 12-8
tests, 10-4, 10-13
DISPLAY TESTS, 10-5
displayed spurs with a filter, 3-28
DIV FRAC N, 10-22
Divide-by-N Circuit Check, 7-23
DONE, 10-7
DRAM cell, 10-13
DSP ALU, 10-9
DSP Control, 10-9
DSP Intrpt, 10-9
DSP RAM, 10-9
DSP Wr/Rd, 10-9
dynamic accuracy test, 2-59
E
earth ground wire and
static-control table mat, 1-2
edit list menu, 10-7
equipment
cavity oscillator frequency
adjustment, 3-26
display intensity correction
constants adjustment, 6-7
EEPROM backup disk
procedure, 3-34
fractional-N frequency range
adjustment, 3-40
Index-4
fractional-N spur avoidance and
FM sideband adjustment,
3-49
frequency accuracy adjustment,
3-43
high/low band transition
adjustment, 3-47
IF amplifier correction
constants adjustment, 3-14
required service, 1-1
RF output power correction
constants adjustment, 3-11
sampler magnitude adjustment,
3-16
source spur avoidance tracking
adjustment, 3-52
error
BATTERY FAILED. STATE
MEMORY CLEARED,
10-44
BATTERY LOW. STORE SAVE
REGS TO DISK , 10-44
CALIBRATION ABORTED,
10-44
CALIBRATION REQUIRED,
10-44
CORRECTION CONSTANTS
NOT STORED, 10-44
CORRECTION TURNED OFF,
10-44
CURRENT PARAMETER NOT
IN CAL SET, 10-45
DEADLOCK, 10-45
DEVICE
not on, not connected, wrong
addrs, 10-45
DISK
not on, not connected, wrong
addrs, 10-45
DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM,
10-45
DISK MESSAGE LENGTH
ERROR, 10-45
DISK READ/WRITE ERROR,
10-45
INSTALLATION FAILED,
10-45
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY,
PWR MTR CAL OFF, 10-45
NO CALIBRATION
CURRENTLY IN
PROGRESS, 10-46
NO FILE(S) FOUND ON DISK,
10-46
NO IF FOUND
CHECK R INPUT LEVEL,
10-46
NO PHASE LOCK
CHECK R INPUT LEVEL,
10-46
NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL.
CLEAR REGISTERS, 10-46
NOT ALLOWED DURING
POWER METER CAL ,
10-46
NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON
DISK FOR STORE, 10-46
OVERLOAD ON INPUT A,
POWER REDUCED, 10-46,
10-47
OVERLOAD ON INPUT B,
POWER REDUCED, 10-46
OVERLOAD ON INPUT R,
POWER REDUCED, 10-47
PARALLEL PORT NOT
AVAILABLE FOR COPY,
10-47
PARALLEL PORT NOT
AVAILABLE FOR GPIO,
10-47
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED,
10-47
PHASE LOCK LOST, 10-47
POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK,
10-47
POWER METER INVALID ,
10-48
POWER METER NOT
SETTLED, 10-48
POWER SUPPLY HOT!, 10-48
POWER SUPPLY SHUT
DOWN!, 10-48
POWER UNLEVELED , 10-48
PRINTER
error, 10-48
not handshaking, 10-48
not on, not connected, wrong
addrs, 10-48
PROBE POWER SHUT
DOWN!, 10-48
PWR MTR
NOT ON/CONNECTED OR
WRONG ADDRS, 10-49
SAVE FAILED.INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY, 10-49
SELF TEST #n FAILED , 10-49
SOURCE POWER TURNED
OFF, RESET UNDER
POWER MENU, 10-49
SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO
CW TIME SWEEP , 10-49
TROUBLE!CHECK SETUP
AND START OVER, 10-49
Index
Index
WRONG DISK FORMAT,
INITIALIZE DISK, 10-49
error correction procedure, 11-4
error messages, 10-1, 10-44
phase lock, 7-6
receiver failure, 8-4
error term inspection, 9-5
error terms, 11-1
directivity (EDF and EDR), 11-6
isolation (crosstalk EXF and
EXR), 11-9
load match (ELF and ELR),
11-10
reflection tracking (ERF and
ERR), 11-8
source match (ESF and ESR),
11-7
transmission tracking (ETF and
ETR), 11-11
e-terms, 11-1
external source, 1-3
external source mode frequency
range test, 2-17, 2-98
EXTERNAL TESTS, 10-5
external tests, 10-4, 10-10
F
failure
A1/A2 front panel, 6-12
A11 phase lock and A3 source
check, 7-8
GPIB, 6-19
key stuck, 6-13
phase lock error, 7-6
receiver, 8-4
RF power from source, 7-5
fan
air flow detector, 12-8
speeds, 5-19
troubleshooting, 5-19
variable fan circuit, 12-8
voltages, 5-19
faulty analyzer repair, 4-3
faulty cables, 9-2
faulty calibration devices or
connectors, 9-2
faulty data, 4-18
faulty group isolation, 4-10
filter, low pass, 1-3
firmware revision softkey, 10-41
floppy disk, 1-3
FM Coil plot with 3 point sweep,
7-29
FN Count, 10-10
FN LO at A12 check, 7-16
FN LO waveform at A12J1, 7-16
Fr Pan Diag., 10-10
Index
Fr Pan Wr/Rd, 10-9
FRAC N, 10-22
Frac N Cont., 10-9
frac-N analog source, 12-14
frac-N digital source, 12-14
FRACN TUNE mode HI OUT
signal, 7-27
FRACN TUNE ON OFF , 10-17
fractional-N (digital), 10-38
Fractional-N Check, 7-20
fractional-N frequency range
adjustment, 3-40
fractional-N frequency range
adjustment sequence, 3-55
fractional-N spur avoidance and
FM sideband adjustment,
3-49
fractional-N spur avoidance and
FM sideband adjustment
sequence, 3-55
frequency
accuracy adjustment, 3-43
counter, 1-3, 10-20
output in SRC tune mode, 7-9
range and accuracy test, 2-14,
2-96
range of fractional-N
adjustment, 3-40
range, external source mode
test, 2-17, 2-98
response test, 2-36, 2-122
front panel
digital control, 12-11
probe power voltages, 5-17
processor, digital control of,
12-11
troubleshooting, 6-12
front panel key codes, 6-13
functional group
fault isolation , 4-10
theory of operation, 12-5
fuse check, 5-7
G
GPIB
addresses, 4-8
cable, 1-4
failures, 6-19
mnemonic for service, 10-1
service mnemonic definitions,
10-42
system check, 4-8
green LEDs
A15 preregulator (power supply
shutdown), 12-7
A8 post regulator, 12-7
GSP digital control, 12-12
H
H MB line, 7-24
hardkeys, 10-3
harmonic measurement accuracy
test, 2-83
harmonics test, 2-78
HB FLTR SW ON OFF, 10-17
HI OUT signal in FRACN TUNE
mode, 7-27
high band REF signal, 7-15
high quality comb tooth at 3 GHz,
7-26
high stability frequency reference
assembly replacement, 14-50
high/low band transition
adjustment, 3-47
adjustment sequence, 3-55
how to
adjust
ADC offset correction
constants, 3-15
analog bus correction
constants, 3-9
cavity oscillator frequency
correction constants, 3-26
fractional-N frequency range,
3-40
fractional-N spur avoidance
and FM sideband, 3-49
frequency accuracy, 3-43
high/low band transition, 3-47
IF amplifier correction
constants, 3-14
option numbers correction
constants, 3-32
RF output power correction
constants, 3-11
sampler magnitude correction
constants, 3-16
serial number correction
constants, 3-31
source default correction
constants, 3-7
source pretune correction
constants, 3-10
source pretune default
correction constants, 3-8
source spur avoidance
tracking, 3-52
the analyzer, 3-1
the analyzer using sequences,
3-55
backup the EEPROM disk, 3-34
check display intensity, 6-7
clean connectors, 1-7
identify the faulty functional
group, 4-10
Index-5
Index
initialize EEPROMs, 3-33
load sequences from disk, 3-55
position the A9 switch, 3-6
repair the analyzer, 4-2
retrieve correction constant data
from EEPROM backup disk,
3-35
set up high/low band transition
adjustments, 3-56
set up the fractional-N
frequency range
adjustment, 3-55
set up the fractional-N spur
avoidance and FM sideband
adjustment, 3-56
troubleshoot, 4-2
broadband power problems,
7-31
the digital control group, 6-1
the receiver, 8-1
the source, 7-1
I
IF amplifier correction constants
adjustment, 3-14
IF GAIN AUTO, 10-18
IF GAIN OFF, 10-19
IF GAIN ON, 10-18
IF Step Cor., 10-12
improper calibration technique,
9-2
Init EEPROM, 10-12
initial observations, 4-5
INITIALIZATION FAILED ,
10-45
initialize EEPROMs, 3-33
input frequency response test,
2-36, 2-122
input noise floor level test, 2-32,
2-119
input traces check, 4-17
inputs (A and B) check, 8-4
inspect cables, 6-15
inspect error terms, 9-4
inspect the accessories, 9-4
inspection of test port connectors
and calibration devices, 9-4
instrument markings, 15-5
instrument specifications, 2-2
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PWR
MTR CAL OFF, 10-45
Inten DAC., 10-13
internal diagnostic tests, 6-16
internal diagnostics, 10-3
INTERNAL TESTS, 10-5
internal tests, 10-3
inverter digital control, 12-13
Index-6
invoking tests remotely, 10-42
isolation (crosstalk, EXF and
EXR), 11-9
K
key codes, 6-13
keys
identifying stuck, 6-13
in service menu, 10-1
kit
calibration kit 7 mm, 50 W, 1-3
tool, 1-3
verification kit 7 mm, 1-3
kits
calibration and verification, 2-3
L
L ENREF line, 7-18
L HB and L LB Lines, 7-18
L INTCOP as trigger to observe
control lines, 8-8
L INTCOP as trigger to observe
data lines, 8-8
L LB and L HB Lines, 7-18
L LB and L HB lines, 7-19
LED front panel, 12-25
light occluder, 1-3
LIMITS NORM/SPCL, 10-6
line fuse check, 5-7
line voltage check, 5-7
LO (2ND) waveforms, 7-17
LO OUT waveform at A14J2, 7-22
load match (ELF and ELR), 11-10
location
diagnostic LEDs for A15, 5-5
post regulator test points, 5-6
power supply cable, 5-9
lock error, 7-6
LOSS/SNSR LISTS, 10-6
low band REF signal, 7-15
low pass filter, 1-3
M
magnitude
compression test, 2-72
dynamic accuracy test, 2-59
sampler mag. adjustment, 3-16
main ADC, 10-20
Main DRAM, 10-8
MAIN PWR DAC, 10-17
Main VRAM, 10-13
maintenance, 15-2
measurement calibration
coefficients, 11-1
mechanical adjustment
sequences, 3-55
memory
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
PWR MTR CAL OFF, 10-45
menu
analog in, 10-21
edit list, 10-7
peek/poke, 10-40
service keys, 10-3
service modes, 10-16
test options, 10-6
tests, 10-4
menus for service, 10-1
message
BATTERY FAILED. STATE
MEMORY CLEARED,
10-44
BATTERY LOW! STORE SAVE
REGS TO DISK, 10-44
CALIBRATION ABORTED,
10-44
CALIBRATION REQUIRED ,
10-44
CORRECTION CONSTANTS
NOT STORED, 10-44
CORRECTION TURNED OFF,
10-44
CURRENT PARAMETER NOT
IN CAL SET , 10-45
DEADLOCK , 10-45
DEVICE
not on, not connected, wrong
addrs, 10-45
DISK
not on, not connected, wrong
addrs, 10-45
DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM,
10-45
DISK MESSAGE LENGTH
ERROR, 10-45
DISK READ/WRITE ERROR,
10-45
INITIALIZATION FAILED ,
10-45
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY,
PWR MTR CAL OFF, 10-45
NO CALIBRATION IN
PROGRESS, 10-46
NO FILE(S) FOUND ON DISK ,
10-46
NO IF FOUND
CHECK R INPUT LEVEL,
10-46
NO PHASE LOCK
CHECK R INPUT LECEL,
10-46
NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL.
CLEAR REGISTERS, 10-46
Index
Index
NOT ALLOWED DURING
POWER METER CAL,
10-46
NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON
DISK FOR STORE , 10-46
OVERLOAD ON INPUT A,
POWER REDUCED, 10-46,
10-47
OVERLOAD ON INPUT B,
POWER REDUCED, 10-46
OVERLOAD ON INPUT R,
POWER REDUCED, 10-47
PARALLEL PORT NOT
AVAILABLE FOR COPY,
10-47
PARALLEL PORT NOT
AVAILABLE FOR GPIO ,
10-47
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED,
10-47
PHASE LOCK LOST, 10-47
POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK,
10-47
POWER METER INVALID,
10-48
POWER METER NOT
SETTLED, 10-48
POWER SUPPLY HOT!, 10-48
POWER SUPPLY SHUT
DOWN!, 10-48
POWER UNLEVELED, 10-48
PRINTER
error, 10-48
not handshaking, 10-48
not on, not connected, wrong
addrs, 10-48
PROBE POWER SHUT
DOWN!, 10-48
PWR MTR
NOT ON/CONNECTED OR
WRONG ADDRS, 10-49
SAVE FAILED.
INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY, 10-49
SELF TEST #n FAILED, 10-49
SOURCE POWER TURNED
OFF, RESET UNDER
POWER MENU, 10-49
SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO
CW TIME SWEEP, 10-49
TROUBLE!CHECK SETUP
AND START OVER , 10-49
WRONG DISK FORMAT,
INITIALIZE DISK, 10-49
message for phase lock error, 7-6
messages, error, 10-1
meter, power, 1-3
Index
microprocessor
theory of operation, 12-4
microwave connector care, 1-7
minimum R channel level test,
2-28, 2-114
mnemonic definitions, 10-42
mnemonics for service keys, 10-1
monitor ABUS node 16 for power,
4-15
motherboard check, 5-12
N
NO CALIBRATION
CURRENTLY IN
PROGRESS, 10-46
NO FILE(S) FOUND ON DISK,
10-46
NO IF FOUND
CHECK R INPUT LEVEL,
7-30, 10-46
NO PHASE LOCK
CHECK R INPUT LEVEL,
7-30, 10-46
NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL.
CLEAR REGISTERS, 10-46
nodes for analog bus, 10-22
noise floor level test, 2-32, 2-119
Normal and Alter switch position
adjustment, 3-6
NOT ALLOWED DURING
POWER METER CAL, 10-46
number (option) adjustment, 3-32
number (serial) adjustment, 3-31
O
offset (ADC) adjustment, 3-15
open loop compared to phase
locked output in SRC mode,
7-10
operating temperature check,
5-12
operation check of A9 CPU, 6-5
operation verification
post-repair, 3-3, 14-53
operator’s check, 4-6
option numbers correction
constants adjustment, 3-32
options
002 harmonic mode, 1-8
004 step attenuator, 1-8
006 6 GHz operation, 1-8
010 time domain, 1-8
011 receiver configuration, 1-8
014 configurable test set, 1-8
075 75 ohm impedance, 1-9
1CM rack mount flange kit
without handles, 1-9
1CP rack mount flange kit with
handles, 1-9
1D5 high stability frequency
reference, 1-8
1D5, assembly replacement,
14-50
service and support, 1-10
oscilloscope, 1-3
oscilloscope check for reference
frequencies, 7-14
output frequency
in SRC tune mode, 7-9
range and accuracy test, 2-14,
2-96
output power
level accuracy test, 2-19, 2-100
linearity test, 2-22, 2-102, 2-108
output/input harmonics test, 2-78
overall block diagram, 4-23
OVERLOAD ON INPUT A,
POWER REDUCED, 10-46,
10-47
OVERLOAD ON INPUT B,
POWER REDUCED, 10-46
OVERLOAD ON INPUT R,
POWER REDUCED, 10-47
P
P?, 10-48
PARRALLEL PORT NOT
AVAILABLE FOR COPY,
10-47
PARRALLEL PORT NOT
AVAILABLE FOR GPIO ,
10-47
parts list
cables, 13-32, 13-34
cables (8753ES), 13-20, 13-22,
13-26, 13-30
cables (8753ET), 13-18, 13-24,
13-28
chassis, 13-56, 13-58
documentation, 13-59
front panel assembly, 13-36,
13-38
hardware, 13-46, 13-48, 13-49,
13-50, 13-51, 13-52, 13-53 ,
13-54, 13-55
major assemblies (8753ES),
13-12, 13-15
major assemblies (8753ET),
13-10, 13-14
major assemblies and cables
(8753ES), 13-16
miscellaneous, 13-59
rear panel assembly, 13-40,
13-42, 13-44
Index-7
Index
tools, 13-59
upgrade kits, 13-59
patterns, test, 10-14
PEEK, 10-40
PEEK/POKE, 10-40
PEEK/POKE ADDRESS, 10-40
peek/poke menu, 10-40
performance test records
8753ES, 2-141
8753ET, 2-161
performance tests, 2-3
8753ES, 2-13
8753ET, 2-95
external source mode frequency
range, 2-17, 2-98
harmonic measurement
accuracy, 2-83
minimum R channel level, 2-28,
2-114
post-repair, 3-3
reflection test port output
frequency range and
accuracy, 2-96
reflection test port output power
level accuracy, 2-100
system trace noise test, 2-56,
2-136
test port crosstalk , 2-45, 2-127
test port input frequency
response, 2-36
test port input noise floor level,
2-32
test port output frequency range
and accuracy , 2-14
test port output power level
accuracy, 2-19
test port output power linearity
test, 2-22, 2-102, 2-108
test port output/input
harmonics, 2-78
test port receiver magnitude
compression , 2-72
test port receiver magnitude
dynamic accuracy , 2-59
test port receiver phase
compression, 2-75
transmission test port input
frequency response, 2-122
transmission test port input
noise floor level, 2-119
uncorrected port performance,
2-50, 2-131
peripheral equipment
theory of operation, 12-4
peripheral GPIB addresses, 4-8
peripheral troubleshooting, 4-9
phase compression test, 2-75
Index-8
phase lock, 10-29
A11 check, 7-28
and A3 source check, 7-8
source, 12-14
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED,
7-30, 10-47
phase lock error, 7-6
message check, 4-14
messages, 7-30
PHASE LOCK LOST, 7-30, 10-47
phase locked output compared to
open loop in SRC tune mode,
7-10
photometer probe, 1-3
PLL AUTO ON OFF, 10-18
PLL DIAG ON OFF, 10-18
PLL PAUSE, 10-18
plotter and printer check , 4-8
plotter GPIB address, 4-8
PLREF waveforms, 7-15
POKE, 10-40
Port 1 Op Chk., 10-10
Port 2 Op Chk., 10-10
port performance test, 2-50, 2-131
POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK, 10-47
Post Reg., 10-9
post regulator
air flow detector, 12-8
display power, 12-8
green LEDs, 12-7
probe power, 12-8
shutdown circuit, 12-8
test point locations, 5-6
theory of operation, 12-7
variable fan circuit, 12-8
post-repair procedures, 3-3
power from source, 7-5
power level accuracy test, 2-19,
2-100
power linearity test, 2-22, 2-102,
2-108
POWER LOSS, 10-6
power meter (GPIB), 1-3
power meter GPIB address, 4-8
POWER METER INVALID , 10-48
POWER METER NOT
SETTLED, 10-48
power output check, 4-14
power problems (broadband), 7-31
power sensor, 1-3
power supply
block diagram, 5-4
cable location, 5-9
check, 4-11
functional group block diagram,
5-4
theory of operation, 12-6
troubleshooting, 5-1
POWER SUPPLY HOT!, 10-48
POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!,
10-48
power supply shutdown
A15 green LED, 12-7
A15 red LED, 12-7
theory of operation, 12-7
POWER UNLEVELED , 10-48
power up sequence check, 4-12
precision frequency reference
assembly replacement, 14-50
preregulated voltages
theory of operation, 12-7
preregulator
LED check, 4-11
theory of operation, 12-6
voltages, 5-10
PRESET, 10-8
preset sequence, 4-5, 6-13
Pretune Cor., 10-12
Pretune Def., 10-12
preventive maintenance, 11-1
principles of microwave connector
care, 1-7
PRINTER
error, 10-48
not handshaking, 10-48
not on, no connected, wrong
addrs, 10-48
printer, 1-3
printer GPIB address, 4-8
probe power, 12-8
PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN!,
10-48
probe power voltages, 5-17
probe, photometer, 1-3
procedure
A9 switch positions, 3-6
ADC offset correction constants
(test 52), 3-15
analog bus correction constant
(test 46), 3-9
cavity oscillator correction
constants (test 54), 3-26
EEPROM backup disk, 3-34
fractional-N frequency range
adjustment, 3-40
fractional-N frequency spur
avoidance FM sideband
adjustment, 3-49
frequency accuracy adjustment,
3-43
high/low band transition
adjustment, 3-47
IF amplifier correction
constants (test 51), 3-14
Index
Index
initialize EEPROMs (test 58),
3-33
option numbers correction
constant (test 56), 3-32
retrieve correction constant data
from EEPROM backup disk,
3-35
RF output power correction
constants (test 47), 3-11
sampler magnitude and phase
correction constant (test
53), 3-16
sequences for mechanical
adjustments, 3-55
serial number correction
constant (test 55), 3-31
source default correction
constant (test 44), 3-7
source pretune correction
constant (test 48), 3-8
source pretune default
correction constant (test
45), 3-8
source spur avoidance tracking
adjustment, 3-52
spur search with a filter, 3-28
spur search without a filter,
3-29
unprotected hardware option
numbers correction
constants, 3-54
pulse generator (A7) check, 7-25
pulse generator source, 12-14
pulses, 100 kHz, 7-14
PWR LOSS, 10-6
PWR MTR
NOT ON/CONNECTED OR
WRONG ADDRS, 10-49
R
R channel level test, 2-28, 2-114
rear panel
assembly replacement, 14-14
digital control, 12-13
LED check, 4-11
rear panel interface
assembly replacement, 14-16
receiver
check, 4-17
digital IF, 12-30
error messages, 4-18
failure error messages, 8-4
magnitude compression test,
2-72
magnitude dynamic accuracy
test, 2-59
phase compression test, 2-75
Index
sampler/mixer, 12-29
theory of operation, 12-4, 12-27
troubleshooting, 8-1
recertification, 2-5
RECORD ON OFF, 10-6
red LED on A15
power supply shutdown, 12-7
REF (4MHz) signal check, 8-6
REF signal At A11TP9, 7-15
reference (A12) check, 7-12
reference frequencies check using
analog bus, 7-13
reference frequencies check using
oscilloscope, 7-14
reference signal (4 MHz), 7-16
reference source, 12-14
reference, A12, 10-35
reflection test port output
frequency range and accuracy
test, 2-96
reflection test port output power
level accuracy test, 2-100
reflection test port output power
linearity test, 2-102, 2-108
removing the line fuse, 5-7
repair procedure, 4-2
REPEAT ON OFF, 10-6
replaceable parts
cables, 13-32, 13-34
cables (8753ES), 13-20, 13-22,
13-26, 13-30
cables (8753ET), 13-18, 13-24,
13-28
chassis, 13-56, 13-58
documentation, 13-59
front panel assembly, 13-36,
13-38
hardware, 13-46, 13-48, 13-49,
13-50, 13-51, 13-52, 13-53,
13-54, 13-55
major assemblies (8753ES),
13-12, 13-15
major assemblies (8753ET),
13-10, 13-14
major assemblies and cables
(8753ES), 13-16
miscellaneous, 13-59
rear panel assembly , 13-40,
13-42, 13-44
tools, 13-59
upgrade kits, 13-59
required tools, 1-1
RESET MEMORY, 10-40
return analyzer for repair, 4-4
revision (firmware) softkey , 10-41
RF cable set, 1-4
RF output power correction
constants adjustment, 3-11
RF power from source, 7-5
RGB outputs, 10-13
ROM, 10-8
S
SAMPLER COR ON OFF, 10-18
Sampler Cor., 10-12
sampler magnitude correction
constants adjustment, 3-16
sampler/mixer, 12-29
2nd LO signal, 12-29
high band, 12-29
low band, 12-29
mixer circuit, 12-29
super low band, 12-29
SAVE FAILED. INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY, 10-49
search for spurs with a filter, 3-28
search for spurs without a filter,
3-29
SEGMENT, 10-7
selector switch check, 5-7
Self diagnose softkey, 10-7
SELF TEST #n FAILED, 10-49
self-test, 4-5
sensor, power, 1-3
sequence
fractional-N spur avoidance and
FM sideband adjustment,
3-56
sequence check for power up, 4-12
sequence contents, 3-56
fractional-N avoidance and FM
sideband adjustment, 3-58
fractional-N frequency range
adjustment, 3-57
high/low band transition
adjustment, 3-56
VCO adjustment, 3-57
sequences
fractional-N frequency range
adjustment, 3-55
high/low band transition
adjustment, 3-56
Serial Cor., 10-12
serial number correction
constants adjustment, 3-31
service and support options, 1-10
service center procedure, 4-4
service features, 10-16
service key menus, 10-1
service features, 10-16
service key mnemonics, 10-1
service mnemonics definitions,
10-42
Index-9
Index
SERVICE MODES, 10-17
service test equipment, 1-3
service tools list, 1-2
servicing the analyzer, 4-4
setup
cavity oscillator frequency
correction constant routine,
3-27
fractional-N spur avoidance and
FM sideband adjustment,
3-49
frequency accuracy adjustment,
3-44
insertion loss measurement,
3-18
intensity check, 6-8
phase lock error
troubleshooting, 7-6
RF output correction constants,
3-13
sampler correction routine, 3-21
source power check, 4-15
setup check for disk drive, 4-9
setup check for plotter or printer,
4-8
shipment for service, 15-3
short and open device verification,
9-6
shutdown circuit
A8 post regulator, 12-8
shutdown circuitry disable, 5-14
signal examination for phase lock,
7-29
signal separation
built-in test set, 12-25
theory of operation, 12-25
signals required for A10 assembly
operation, 8-7
SLOPE DAC, 10-17
softkeys, 10-3
source
A11 phase lock, 12-14
A12 reference, 12-14
A13 frac-N analog, 12-14
A14 frac-N digital, 12-14
A3 source, 12-15
A7 pulse generator, 12-14
and A11 phase lock check, 7-8
attenuator, theory of operation,
12-4
check, 4-14
default correction constant
adjustment, 3-7
external source mode, 12-20
frequency offset, 12-19
group assemblies, 7-1
Index-10
group troubleshooting appendix,
7-30
harmonic analysis, 12-19
high band theory, 12-17
low band theory, 12-15
match (ESF and ESR), 11-7
operation in other modes, 12-19
power, 7-5
pretune correction constants
adjustment, 3-10
pretune default correction
constants adjustment, 3-8
spur avoidance tracking
adjustment, 3-52
super low band theory, 12-15
theory of operation, 12-3, 12-14
troubleshooting, 7-1
tuned receiver mode, 12-22
Source Cor. (source correction
test), 10-12
Source Def. (source default test),
10-12
SOURCE PLL ON OFF, 10-17
SOURCE POWER TURNED OFF,
RESET UNDER POWER
MENU, 10-49
source, external, 1-3
specifications
instrument, 2-2
system, 2-2
spectrum analyzer, 1-3
speed, fan, 5-19
spikes display (acceptable versus
excessive), 3-53
SPUR AVOID ON OFF, 10-19
spur avoidance and FM sideband
adjustment, 3-49
spur avoidance tracking
adjustment, 3-52
spur search with a filter, 3-28
spur search without a filter, 3-29
SPUR TEST ON OFF, 10-19
spurs displayed with a filter, 3-28
SRAM RAM, 10-8
SRC ADJUST DACS, 10-17
SRC ADJUST MENU, 10-17
SRC TUNE FREQ, 10-17
SRC tune mode frequency output,
7-9
SRC tune mode phase locked
output compared to open loop,
7-10
SRC tune mode waveform
integrity , 7-9
SRC TUNE ON OFF, 10-17
stable HI OUT signal in FRACN
TUNE mode, 7-27
Start Troubleshooting chapter,
4-2
static-control table mat and earth
ground wire, 1-2
status terms for test, 10-4
step attenuator option, 1-8
STORE EEPR ON OFF, 10-19
stuck keys, identifying using LED
patterns, 6-13
support and service options, 1-10
SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO
CW TIME SWEEP, 10-49
Sweep Trig., 10-9
switch position adjustment, 3-6
symbol conventions, 10-42
Sys Ver Init., 10-11
SYS VER TESTS, 10-5
system specifications, 2-2
system trace noise test, 2-56,
2-136
system verification, 2-3, 2-5
8753ES, 2-5
8753ET, 2-87
post-repair, 3-3, 14-53
tests, 10-4, 10-11
T
temperature check, 5-12
terms for test status, 10-4
test 44, 3-7, 10-12
test 45, 3-8, 10-12
test 46, 3-9, 10-12
test 47, 3-11, 10-12
test 48, 3-10, 10-12
test 50, 10-12
test 51, 3-14, 10-12
test 52, 3-15, 10-12
test 53, 3-16, 10-12
test 54, 3-26, 10-12
test 55, 3-31, 10-12
test 56, 3-32, 10-12
test 57, 10-12
test 58, 3-33, 10-12
test 59, 10-13
test 60, 10-13
test 61, 10-13
test 62, 10-13
test 63, 10-13
test 64, 10-13
test 65, 10-13
test 66, 10-14
test 67–69, 10-14
test 70, 10-14
test 71, 10-14
test 72, 10-14
test 73, 10-14
test 74, 10-14
Index
Index
test 75, 10-14
test 76, 10-14
test 77, 10-15
test 78, 10-15
test 79–80, 10-15
TEST ABORTED, 10-49
test descriptions, 10-8
test equipment for service, 1-3
TEST OPTIONS, 10-3
test options menu, 10-6
test patterns, 10-4, 10-14
Pattern 1., 10-14
Pattern 10., 10-14
Pattern 11., 10-14
Pattern 12., 10-15
Pattern 13., 10-15
Pattern 14–15., 10-15
Pattern 2–4., 10-14
Pattern 5., 10-14
Pattern 6., 10-14
Pattern 7., 10-14
Pattern 8., 10-14
Pattern 9., 10-14
test port
connector inspection, 9-4
couplers, 12-25
crosstalk test, 2-45, 2-127
input frequency response test,
2-36, 2-122
input noise floor level test, 2-32,
2-119
output frequency range and
accuracy test, 2-96
output power level accuracy
test, 2-19, 2-100
output power linearity test,
2-22, 2-102, 2-108
output/input harmonics test,
2-78
receiver magnitude compression
test, 2-72
receiver magnitude dynamic
accuracy test, 2-59
receiver phase compression test,
2-75
test records (8753ES), 2-141
test records (8753ET), 2-161
test set, 12-25
interface, 12-25
LED front panel, 12-25
test port couplers, 12-25
theory of operation, 12-3
transfer switch, 12-25
test status terms, 10-4
tests
adjustments, 10-12
diagnostics, 6-16
Index
display , 10-13
external, 10-10
internal, 10-8
menu, 10-4
performance, 2-3
performance (8753ES), 2-13
performance (8753ET), 2-95
system verification, 10-11
theory of operation, 12-1
+5 V digital supply, 12-6
A15 green LED, 12-7
A15 preregulator, 12-6
A15 red LED, 12-7
A3 source, 12-4, 12-15
A8 green LEDs, 12-7
A8 post regulator, 12-7
A8 shutdown circuit, 12-8
air flow detector, 12-8
digital control, 12-9
display power, 12-8
functional groups, 12-5
line power module, 12-6
microprocessor, 12-4
peripheral equipment, 12-4
power supply, 12-6
power supply shutdown, 12-7
preregulator voltages, 12-7
probe power, 12-8
receiver, 12-4, 12-27
signal separation, 12-25
source attenuator, 12-4
test set, 12-4
variable fan circuit, 12-8
tool kit, 1-3
tools for service, 1-2
trace noise test, 2-56, 2-136
trace with sampler correction on
and off, 8-10
tracking for source spur avoidance
adjustment, 3-52
transfer switch , 12-25
transmission test port input
frequency response test,
2-122
transmission tracking (ETF and
ETR), 11-11
TROUBLE!CHECK SETUP AND
START OVER, 10-49
troubleshooting
1st LO signal at sampler/mixer,
8-10
A1/A2 front panel, 6-12
A10 by substitution or signal
examination, 8-7
A11 phase lock, 7-28
A11 phase lock and A3 source
check, 7-8
A12 reference, 7-12
A13/A14 Fractional-N, 7-20
A14 Divide-by-N Circuit Check,
7-23
A15 preregulator, 5-10
A7 pulse generator, 7-25
accessories, 4-22, 9-1
broadband power, 7-31
diagnostics, 4-5
digital control, 6-1
disk drive, 4-9
fan, 5-19
faulty data, 4-21
faulty group identification, 4-10
first step, 4-2
front panel, 6-12
GPIB systems, 4-8
phase lock error, 7-6
plotters or printers, 4-8
power supply, 5-1
receiver, 8-1
receiver error messages, 4-18
self-test, 4-5
source, 7-1
source group appendix, 7-30
start, 4-2
systems with controllers, 4-9
systems with multiple
peripherals, 4-9
when all inputs look bad, 8-5
when one or more input looks
good, 8-9
YO coil drive check with analog
bus, 7-11
U
uncorrected port performance
test, 2-50, 2-131
unprotected hardware option
numbers correction
constants, 3-54
USE SENSOR A/B, 10-6
V
VCO (A14) exercise, 7-22
VCO range check frequencies,
7-20
Ver Dev 1., 10-11
Ver Dev 2., 10-11
Ver Dev 3., 10-11
Ver Dev 4., 10-11
verification disk, 2-5, 2-87
verification kit 7 mm, 1-3
verification kits, 2-3
verification procedures
post-repair, 3-3, 14-53
verification, system, 2-3, 2-5
Index-11
Index
voltage indications
post regulator, 12-7
voltages
A15 preregulator check, 5-10
A8, 5-13
fan, 5-19
front panel probe power, 5-17
YO- and YO+ coil drive voltage
differences with & SOURCE
PLL OFF, 7-12
voltages for post regulator, 5-6
voltmeter, 1-3
VRAM bank, 10-13
VRAM/video, 10-13
W
warranty explanation, 4-4
waveform integrity in SRC tune
mode, 7-9
wrist strap and cord (antistatic),
1-2
WRONG DISK FORMAT,
INITIALIZE DISK , 10-49
Y
YO- and YO+ coil drive voltage
differences with & SOURCE
PLL OFF, 7-12
YO coil drive check with analog
bus, 7-11
Index-12
Index